GenieSoft Overture 4 User's Guide

Copyright Information
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of GenieSoft, Inc. The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. The software may be used or copied only in accordance of the terms of the agreement. It is against the law to copy this software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the agreement. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose without the express written permission of GenieSoft, Inc. Copyright 2010 GenieSoft, Inc. All rights reserved. Program by Don Williams VST Instrument Definitions by Joseph Burrell Manual edited by Bart Wijnen, Jim Williams, and JohnD from the GenieSoft.com forum. Program Copyright 1994-2010 GenieSoft, Inc. All rights reserved. GenieSoft is a registered trademark of GenieSoft, Inc. GenieSoft Overture, GenieSoft Score Writer, and the GenieSoft logo are trademarks of GenieSoft, Inc. Other company and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Table of Contents
Table of Contents

Part I Getting Started 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Learning Overture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Using the Users Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Overture Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Mouse Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Tear Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Choose vs. Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 PC and Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Overture Help (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Overture Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Numerical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Overture Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Score Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Transport Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Tracks Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Graphic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Chords Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Lyrics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Step Input Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Overture Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 VST (Win32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 GenieSoft Technical Support Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

2 Working with Notes and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Constructing a Tutorial Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Preparing The Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Entering Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Editing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Changing Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Changing Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Adding a Pickup Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Grouping Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Entering Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Ornaments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Adding Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3 Creating New Staves and Setting Up Tracks . . . . . . . . 31

Adding Staves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Setting Up Staves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

4 Real Time MIDI Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Setting Up MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Recording MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Metronome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Record Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Transcription Quantize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Linking Staves to MIDI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

5 Step Entry MIDI Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Setting Up Step Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

iv

Chord Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

6 Editing MIDI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

MIDI Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Tap Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Editing Notes (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Editing With The Controllers Pane (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Editing Notes (Mac) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Editing With The Strip Chart (Mac) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Setting Up The Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Setting Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Setting Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Pre-Made Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Part II The Score Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 8 Score Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Status Bar: Page View and Track Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Turning Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Turning to a Specific Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Turning to a Specific Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Turning to the First Page and Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Turning to the Last Page and Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Selecting a Page View Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Scrolling a Score Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Arranging Staves and Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Adjusting Vertical Staff Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Adjusting Horizontal Staff Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Placing Systems Side by Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Creating a Default File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Selecting Notation Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Viewing Selected Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Selection Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Table of Contents

7 Page Layout and Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Selecting a Voice to Enter or Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Editing Notation Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Editing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Editing Stems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Editing Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Editing Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Editing Other Notation Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Adjusting Note Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Dragging Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Nudging Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Using Beat Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Changing Bar Widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Automatic Justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Locked Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Cursors in the Score Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Part III The Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 9 Tool Bar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Anatomy of the Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Cursor Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Palette Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Transcription Quantize Amount Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

10 Cursor Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Arrow Cursor Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Eraser Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Scale Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Scaling Staves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Scaling Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Scaling Clefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Scaling Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Hand Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Zoom Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Scrub Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

11 Notes Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Using the Notes Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

vi

Mouse Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Entering Notes in the Clef Above or Below the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Keyboard and Mouse Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Grace Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Cautionary Accidentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Changing Existing Note Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Effect of Changing Note Values on MIDI Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

12 Groups Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Using the Groups Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Editing Ties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Editing Slurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Editing Glissandos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Editing Tuplets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Complex Tuplets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 The Harp Pedal Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Ottava Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Editing Brackets and Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

13 Ornaments Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Using the Ornaments Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Ornamenting Multiple Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Deleting Ornaments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Using the Trill Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Inserting a Trill Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Inserting a Trill Mark with a Trill Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Adding a Trill Section to an Existing Trill Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Editing Trills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Inserting an Accidental into a Trill Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Setting Trill Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 About the Set Trill Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Using the Mordent Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Setting Mordent/Turn Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 About the Set Mordent/Turn Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Using the Fingering Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

14 Articulations Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Articulations Palette Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

vii

Table of Contents

Using the Articulations Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Articulating Multiple Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Editing Notes with Attached Articulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Editing Articulation Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Deleting Articulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Using the Arpeggio Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Using the Tremolo Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Using the Pause Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

15 Noteheads Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Using the Noteheads Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

16 Tablature Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Using the Tablature Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Creating Tablature - Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Creating a Tablature Staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Creating Tablature Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

17 Guitar Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 String Bend Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Barre at Fret Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

18 Drums Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Using the Drums Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Placing on Multiple Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Deleting Drum Rudiments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Using the Drum Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Inserting a Drum Rudiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Inserting a Drum Articulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

19 Jazz Articulations Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

20 Dynamics Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

viii

21 Text Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Using Bar Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Inserting Bar Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Repositioning, Copying, and Editing Bar Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Using System Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Inserting System Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Repositioning, Copying, and Editing System Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Using Rehearsal Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Inserting Rehearsal Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Repositioning and Editing Rehearsal Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Using Page Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Inserting Page Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Repositioning, Copying, and Editing Page Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Using Lyric Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Inserting Lyric Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Adding Additional Lyric Verses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Font, Size, and Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Transparent Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

22 Expressions Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Using the Expressions Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 The Edit Expression Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

23 Graphics Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

ix

Table of Contents

Using Absolute Dynamics Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Inserting Dynamic Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Repositioning Dynamic Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Copying Dynamic Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Playback of Dynamic Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Using Crescendos and Decrescendos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Crescendo Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Inserting a Hairpin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Editing a Hairpin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Copying a Hairpin To copy the hairpin: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 The Edit Dynamic Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 The Edit Hairpin Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Playback of Hairpins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Using the Graphics Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Select Font Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

24 Clefs Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Clef Insertion Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Using the Clefs Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Using the Moveable C-Clef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

25 Staves Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Inserting Staves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Creating Big Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Deleting Staves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Grouping Staves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Editing Staff Grouping Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Deleting Staff Groupings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

26 Barlines Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Tool Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Using the Barlines Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Using Dotted Barlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Using Single and Double Measure Repeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Using the Close and Open Repeat Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Using the Ending Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Deleting Barlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Hiding Standard Barlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

27 Transcription Quantize Amount Button . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Setting a Transcription Quantize Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Using Transcription Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Transcription Quantization and Auto Transcription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Transcription Quantization and Manual Transcription . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Fixing Transcription Quantization Mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

Part IV Other Overture Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 28 Transport Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

x

29 Tracks List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Tracks Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 About Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Viewing Voice Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Setting the Number of Voices for a Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Setting Stem Direction for a Track or Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Device Selection for a Track or Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Setting a Channel for a Track or Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Bank Selection for a Track or Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Patch Selection for a Track or Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Setting Volume for a Track or Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Setting Transposition for a Track or Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Muting a Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Soloing a Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Rearranging Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Opening the Setup Track Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

30 Graphic Window (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

The Piano Roll View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Selecting and Editing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 To Select Notes with the Selection Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 To Select All Notes of Certain Pitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 To Edit a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 To Change Note(s) Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 To Move Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 To Copy Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 To Add a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 To Erase a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 To Erase Several Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

xi

Table of Contents

Transport Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Moving the Transport Controls from the Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Punch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Historical Origins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 General Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Punch Recording in Overture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Thru Device Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Thru Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Count Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Real Time MIDI Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Setting Metronome and Record Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

To Select and Erase Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 To Scrub the Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Percussion, Drum Notes, and Note Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 The Controller Pane View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Using the Controllers Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 To Display Different Types of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 To Insert a Controller Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 To Draw a Linear Series of Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 To Draw a Series of Controller Value Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 To Remove or Erase Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

31 Graphic Window (Mac) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Track Select Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 The Piano Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Cursor Position Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Horizontal Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Vertical Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Quantize Cursor Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Zoom Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Zoom In Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Zoom Out Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Zoom To Fit Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 MIDI Instrument Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Mute & Solo Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Selection Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Common Selection and Editing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Marquee Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 I-beam Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Pencil Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 About the Insert Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 The Strip Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Opening the Strip Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Strip Chart Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Controller Type Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Strip Chart Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 The Strip Chart Select Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 The Strip Chart Pencil Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Density Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 The Variable Tool Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Edit Shapes Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

32 Chords Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

xii

Chord Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Anatomy of the Chords Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Entering Chord Names with the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Entering Chord Names with the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Step Entering Chord Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Step Entering Chord Names with the Computer Keyboard . . . . . . . . . .353 Guitar Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Entering Guitar Frames with the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Moving Chord Names/Guitar Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Moving Chord Names Globally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Moving Chord Names Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

33 Lyrics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Anatomy of the Lyrics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Lyric Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Lyric Editing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Using the Lyrics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Adding Lyrics to a Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Editing Existing Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Advanced Lyric Entry Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Applying Different Fonts To Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Moving Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

34 Step Input Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Anatomy of the Step Input Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Type Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Size Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Duration Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Velocity Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Step Entering Notes and Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Step Entering Notes and Rests with the Computer Keyboard . . . . . . . .384 Step Entering Notes and Rests with a MIDI Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Step Entering Slashes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Step Entering Rhythmic Slashes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Step Entering Chord Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

xiii

Table of Contents

Part V Menu Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 35 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

New... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Open... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Opening a Score Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Closing a Score Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Closing a Support Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Save As... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Edit Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Allotment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Chord Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Drum Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Expression Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Guitar Frames Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Instruments Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 The Instruments Library Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Output Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Range Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Transpose Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Rearranging Instruments in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 The Instruments Library and the Tracks Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Resolving Device Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Load Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Importing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Importing MusicXML, Encore and MusicTime Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Extract Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 About the Extract Parts Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Automatic Names for Extracted Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Print Preview (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 About the Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 List of Recently Opened Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Exit/Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

xiv

36 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Paste Special... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Paste and Paste Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Find Item... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Find Next Item.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Make Invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Make Visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Set Color... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Disable Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Enable Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Playback Time... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 MIDI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Modify Controller... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

37 Score Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Insert Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Using the Insert Page Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Delete Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Layout Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 About the Layout Page Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Page Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 About the Page Dimensions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Increase Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Decrease Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Hide/Show Staves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 About the Hide/Show Staves Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Using the Hide/Show Staves Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 Insert Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Using the Insert Track Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Delete Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Setup Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

xv

Table of Contents

Track Name Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Instrument Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Staff Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Using the Setup Track Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 GM Equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Updating Old Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Setting Attributes for all Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Respace Staves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Respace Staves Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Recalc Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Redraw Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Allotment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Changing the Allotment Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Articulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 About the Articulation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Engraver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Font Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Placing Mapped Font Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Clearing Replacement Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Saving Font Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Loading Font Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Title Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 The Title Page Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

38 Measures Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Using the Insert Measure Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Using the Delete Measure Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Increase Measures on System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Decrease Measures on System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 Split System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 Set Key Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 About the Set Key Signature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Using the Set Key Signature Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Set Time Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 About the Set Time Signature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Using the Set Time Signature Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Set Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

xvi

39 Notes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 About the Transpose Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Using the Transpose Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 About the Modify Notes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Using the Modify Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Humanize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Using the Humanize Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Quantize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 About the Quantize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Using the Quantize Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 Redo Pitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Add Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Articulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Duplicate Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Based on Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Break in Middle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Hide Tuplet Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Tremolo Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Beaming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 Tie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Slur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589

xvii

Table of Contents

About the Set Tempo Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 Using the Set Tempo Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Editing Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Set Codas, Segnos, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 About the Set Codas, Segnos, etc. Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Set Measure Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 About the Set Measure Numbers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Using the Set Measure Numbers Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563 Rebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 Multi Measure Rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Using the Multi-Measure Rest Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Fill in Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Ottava . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 Tuplet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Glissando ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Glissando - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 The Edit Glissando Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Enharmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Sharps to Flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Flats to Sharps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Articulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Stem Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Step Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Hide Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Show Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Set Stem Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596 Display on Prev Staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 Display on Next Staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Move to Prev Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 Move to Next Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Notate Notes As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Notate Notes as Arpeggio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 Notate Notes As Reduced Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 Notate Notes as Swing Eighths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602 Notate Notes as Trill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Notate Notes as Triplet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Notate Notes as Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Notate Notes as Cue Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Notate Notes as Grace Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Notes/Notate Notes as/Single Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606 Notes/Notate Notes as/Two Tied Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606 Transcribe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 Notes to Raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 Notes to Tablature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 The Tablature Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Editing the Tablature Staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Set Guitar Frame Capo... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Set to Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Set Playback Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

40 Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

xviii

Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 Beat Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Symbols in Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Invisibles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Incorrect Rhythms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Range Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Tracks Transposed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 Tracks Voice Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Filled Measure Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 System Separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Chord Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620 Lyric Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 Slash Note Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622 Dynamic Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622 Time Code Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Transcribe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Wrap Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Keyboard Thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 What is Keyboard Thru and Why is it Useful? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626 The Solution: Keyboard Thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 Hold Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Metronome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Click in Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Click in Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Click in Count Off Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Metronome Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Play Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 As Recorded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 In Swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 As Written . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 Repeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634 Record Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 About the Record Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634 Using the Record Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 MIDI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

xix

Table of Contents

Instruments (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 General Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Engraver Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Layout Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Element Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Line Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Fonts Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Libraries Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Playback Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Dynamics Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Colors Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653 Save Window Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

41 VST Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Audio Preferences... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Record to File... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Folder... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 656 657 657

42 Windows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 Main Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 Standard Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Chords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Step Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Window/Cascade (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 Window/Tile Horizontally (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Window/Tile Vertically (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 Window/Arrange Icons (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 Open Score Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

xx

Part VI MIDI Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 43 Instrument Assignments and Definitions (PC) . . . . . . . 667
Assigning Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 To Assign Instruments to MIDI Ports and Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 To Clear Instrument Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Importing Instrument Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 To Import Instrument Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Creating Instrument Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 To Create a New Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 To Rename an Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 To Delete an Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 To Save an Instrument Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 Creating Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 To Manage Name Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 Copying Name Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673 Assigning the Bank Select Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 To Change the Bank Select Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 Assigning Patch Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 To See the Assignment of Patch Name Lists to Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 To Add a Bank or Change the Patch Names for a Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 To Remove a Bank or Patch Name List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 To Set or Clear the Drum Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Assigning Note Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 To See the Assignment of Note Name Lists to Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 To Change the Note Names for a Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 To Remove a Note Name List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 To Set or Clear the Drum Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 Assigning Controller Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 To See the Controller Name List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 To Change the Controller Name List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

xxi

Table of Contents

xxii

Part I Getting Started

1
Learning Overture

Introduction

GenieSoft provides a manual and a Quick Reference Card with Overture: GenieSoft Overture 4 Users Guidecontains a series of step-by-step tutorials designed to introduce you to some basic Overture features, plus detailed information about every window and menu item in Overture. GenieSoft Overture 4 Quick Reference Cardcontains a quick reference for toolbar functions, support windows, keyboard shortcuts, the tool palettes, and menus.

Overture is a very intuitive program but its power, flexibility and sophistication may seem slightly daunting if you try to learn it without reading the manuals. GenieSoft recommends that you work through the tutorials before using the rest of the Users Guide.

Using the Users Guide

For a thorough working knowledge of Overture, you can read this manual straight through after completing the tutorials. If your notation needs arent fully encompassing, read only those sections in the manual that interest you. The Users Guide is broken into six parts: Part One: Getting Started. This part introduces fundamental concepts and presents tutorials for getting you up and running quickly. Part Two: The Score Window. This part discusses Overtures Score window and how to use it. Part Three: The Tool Bar. This part discusses Overtures Tool Bar and all its various tools and palettes. Part Four: Other Overture Windows. This part discusses each of Overtures remaining windows. Part Five: Menu Reference. This part discusses each Overture menu item.

Introduction

Part Six: MIDI Facilities. This part discusses the use of MIDI instruments with Overture.

Note:
Individual notation needs are as varied as individuals. For this reason, its impossible for this manual to cover every possible notation technique in detail. Overture is a very powerful programgenerally it allows most any symbol to be selected, moved or modified. If you dont see a specific notation detail covered in this manual, simply use the general techniques outlined within it and try it for yourself.

Overture Manual Conventions

This manual uses a number of conventions. Some make it easier to discuss and understand certain onscreen actions. Others make it possible to distinguish between instructions for the Macintosh and instructions for the PC.

Mouse Actions
This manual uses the following terms to describe various mouse actions: Click. When this manual instructs you to click, position the mouse where youre told and press once on the mouse button, then immediately release it. Double-click. When this manual instructs you to double-click, position the mouse where youre told and rapidly press and release the mouse button twice. Press and hold. When the manual instructs you to press and hold, position the mouse where youre told, press the mouse button and hold it down. Release. When a manual instructs you to release, let up on the mouse button (which you were probably holding down because of an earlier press and hold instruction). Drag. When this manual instructs you to drag, position the mouse where youre told, then press the mouse button and hold it down as you move the mouse. Move. When this manual instructs you to move the mouse, simply move it to another location on the screen without pressing its button.

Tear Off
This manual uses the term tear off to describe the action of making a button palette into a floating palette. Press and hold on a toolbar button to display its palette. Drag beyond the edges of the palette to tear it off of its place in the toolbar and make it a floating palette. See the descriptions of the toolbar buttons for further information on the palette.

Part I: Getting Started

Choose vs. Select

The words choose and select are often interchangeable in conversational English. In this manual, however, there is a distinct difference between the two terms. Select. When this manual tells you to select something, it stays selected. This is the case with most Overture tools and with some menu options. Choose. When this manual tells you to choose something, you perform a one-time action. This is the case with most menu commands, you choose a command, and it performs its chosen action only once.

Menu Commands
This manual uses a form of verbal shorthand to describe the choosing of menu items. For instance, this manual might say: Choose Notes>Group>Slur What this means in plain English is choose the Slur command from the Notes menus Group submenu. This is easier to read and decipher than a complete sentence because it displays the menus hierarchical structure plainly and simply.

PC and Macintosh
Since this book covers both the PC and Macintosh versions of Overture, and the versions are slightly different, weve done the following to make it easy for you to find the material you need. Most of it is common to both platforms, so it looks like this. We distinguish different keystrokes by displaying them slightly shaded and enclosed in brackets. Fo example: Control[Command]. PC users will press the control key and MAC users the command key. When a section or chapter is relevant for only one platform, its title says (Mac) or (PC) as well. Where the functionality and discussion are close to identical, we provide a mix of Mac and PC pictures. Where one is a superset of the other, pictures show the more encompassing. Where they differ substantially, we provide pictures of both.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Introduction

Overture Help (PC)

You have several ways to see on-line Help about a particular topic: The Help key. Press F1 to get context-sensitive help: about a command when a command is highlighted about a dialog box and its parts when a dialog box is active about a window when a window is active

The Help button. Click the help button in any dialog box to get help about that dialog box. The Help menu. Choose Help>Contents to see the entire on-line help system. You can navigate it by contents, by topic, and by index.

Overture Terms
Overture uses terms common to both standard musical notation and MIDI sequencing. Overture requires this mix of terminology because of its immense power to both notate and play a musical score. You must know these terms before proceeding with the remaining chapters in this manual.

Symbol
This term is applied loosely to any note, rest, beam, tie, ornament, etc. included in a musical score.

Staff
A staff is a set of horizontal lines on which symbols are placed to represent music. Most musical instruments require only a single staff to notate their lines, like this violin solo.

Part I: Getting Started

Harps and most keyboard instruments (such as piano or harpsichord) use two staves (called a grand staff).

Organs often use three staves (adding the third for the bass pedals).

Track
A track is very closely related to a staff. Staves notate the MIDI data contained in tracks. Overture notates each track on a single staff, so any instruments that require multiple staves also require multiple tracks.

Voice
A voice is a single rhythmic line within a track. Some tracks require more than one voice to notate and playback correctly. Specifically: If you notate more than one instrument per staff, youll need to use multiple voices to distinguish between the multiple instruments. If you notate a polyphonic instrument (such as a piano) that plays different rhythmic lines simultaneously, youll need to use multiple voices to distinguish between the multiple rhythmic lines.

If you score an instrument such that it plays only a single melodic line, youll need to assign only one voice to the staff.

Single Voice

Chapter 1: Introduction

Introduction

If you assign two or more instruments to a single staff (or notate a polyphonic instrument playing different rhythmic lines), youll need to assign different voices to each instrument or rhythmic line.

Voice 1 Voice 2

Overture allows you to assign up to eight voices to a single trackthis supports even the most complicated rhythmic intricacies.

System
A system is a group of staves, each of which is played at the same time as all the other staves in the system. All staves in a system are joined by a single vertical line connecting their left sides.

Tool
Tools allow you to perform very specific Overture functions. Different tools allow you to insert notes and other symbols, to group various notes, to add staves, alter noteheads, create lyrics, and to perform many other useful tasks. You use Overtures tool bar to access individual tools.

Part I: Getting Started

Palette
Palettes contain groups of related tools. For instance, the Dynamics palette contains all the individual dynamics tools (such as the Pianissimo Tool, Mezzo-Forte Tool, Forte Tools, etc.).

Numerical
Numericals are variables that you can edit on the screen. Numericals usually contain numeric data.

Numericals

There are a couple ways to edit the value of a numerical: Use the mouse as a slider To change a numerical in this way, press and hold the mouse button over the numerical, then drag the mouse in a vertical direction. Pushing the mouse up increases values and pulling the mouse down decreases values Type to set values Click the numerical, then type the desired value. The numerical changes to reflect the new value. You will not be allowed to enter invalid values.

Overture Windows
Overture groups related functions together and places them in separate windows. The following sections present a brief overview of each Overture window.

Score Window
The Score window displays a traditional music score complete with notes, symbols, lyrics, staves, systems, and anything else you want in your printed musical score. Use the Score window to enter, view and modify your musical score. We describe the Score window in Part II, The Score Window.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Introduction

Tool Bar
The Tool Bar contains buttons that open all of Overtures Tool palettes. Use the Tool Bar to select tools for entering and modifying music in the Score window. The Tool Bar is discussed in Part III, The Tool Bar.

Transport Window
The Transport window contains buttons to control MIDI recording and playback, and a pop-up menu to select the MIDI Thru Instrument.

Tracks Window
The Tracks window defines the characteristics of all the tracks in your Overture score. Use the Tracks window to name tracks enable tracks assign MIDI playback devices, programs, channels and transpositions specify the number of voices in a track determine default voice stem directions in a track

Graphic Window
The Graphic window graphically displays the MIDI data in a selected track using a piano roll and strip chart display. Use the Graphic window to edit any MIDI data in any track. Overture applies any changes you make in the Graphic window to the Score window and vice versa.

Chords Window
The Chords window contains a list of possible chord suffixes (as specified by the user in the Chord Symbol library) as well as root and bass names. Use the Chords window to insert chord names into your score.

Lyrics Window
The Lyrics window is like a miniature word processor that you use to enter and edit lyrics. Use the Lyrics window to type or modify lyrics and assign them to specific notes in the score.

Step Input Window

Use the Step Input window to enter a score by recording music one step at a time. You can enter notes, chord names, or rhythmic slashes in the Step Input window.

10

Part I: Getting Started

The Step Input window is particularly convenient if your playing technique is limited, or if you want to enter lead sheet chords and guitar rhythms quickly.

Overture Menus
Overture has numerous menus under which it groups related commands and options. The following sections present a brief overview of Overtures different menus.

File
Use the File menu commands to save, create, open, export, and print the various scores you create with Overture.

Edit
Use the Edit menu commands to cut/copy/paste symbols, lyrics, MIDI data, or other elements of an Overture score. Edit commands use a Clipboard concept common to most Macintosh and Windows programs. Overture uses both an internal Clipboard and the Macintosh or Windows Clipboard depending on the type of data.

Score
Use the Score menu commands to perform score-related tasks like staff location and appearance, system groupings, and page setup.

Measures
Use the Measures menu commands to perform measure-related tasks like inserting and deleting measures, wrapping measures, setting key, meter and tempo, and justifying symbols in a measure.

Notes
Use the Notes menu commands to perform many common Overture tasks like modifying notes, transposing, beaming, grouping, and converting between traditional notation and raw MIDI data.

Options
Use the Options menu to set numerous Overture operating, editing, and display options like auto beaming and positioning, metronome values, and recording choices.

VST (Win32)
Use the VST menu commands to open the VST rack and setup the Audio Engine. You must be running Windows 2000 or XP to use VST instruments.

Windows
Use the Windows menu commands to open (or make active) any Overture window.

Chapter 1: Introduction

11

Introduction

Help
Use the Help menu to see help available for Overture.

GenieSoft Technical Support Information

If you need more information: Check the Forum and Support page of our World Wide Web site (www.geniesoft.com) for updated technical information and answers to frequently asked questions. Post messages to the Overture user community using one of the GenieSoft forum. For more information about the forum, visit www.geniesoft.com.

You can also get technical support directly from GenieSoft. In order to get technical support, you must register your product on our website. You can get technical support for this product in the following ways: E-mail your questions to [email protected]. Be sure to include your serial number in your email. Call GenieSoft Technical Support at (843) 856-1088 on weekdays, 11:00AM to 4:00PM, Eastern time. Be sure you have registered at www.geniesoft.com and to have your serial number ready when you call.

Technical support hours, policies, and procedures are subject to change at any time. Check our web site for the latest support information.

12

Part I: Getting Started

2
Tool Bar Score Window

Working with Notes and Symbols

In this chapter, you will begin constructing a score for Amazing Grace using some of the note and symbol tools available in Overture.

Page View Controls

Notes and Symbols

Constructing a Tutorial Score

1. Launch Overture and choose File>New if the New Score dialog does not appear automatically. Overture opens the New Score dialog box. 2. Click on the Single Staff radio button to choose Treble Clef Staff. Do not choose any other option. You will set these manually in the tutorial. 3. Click on the OK button. Overture creates a score with a single staff (track). Use this newly created score for this tutorial.

Preparing The Score

The first step in constructing the score is setting the key and time signature. 1. Choose the Arrow Cursor tool from the Tool Bar.

2.

Click somewhere in the first measure, so that the insertion point is positioned within that measure.

14

Part I: Getting Started

3.

Choose Measures>Set Key Signature. The Set Key Signature dialog box opens.

Click here twice to move the key to D major

4.

Click the up arrow twice to move the key up to D Major, then click the OK button.

Chapter 2: Working with Notes and Symbols

15

Notes and Symbols

Since this piece is in 3/4 time, and Overture defaults to 4/4 time, you need to change the time signature. 1. Choose Measures>Set Time Signature. The Set Time Signature dialog box opens.

2.

Click the 3/4 button at the top of the window. This tells Overture that the score is in 3/4 time.

3.

Click OK. Your score looks like this:

16

Part I: Getting Started

Entering Notes
Now youre ready to add some notes. Before each note is added, you have to select a duration for it. There are three ways to select the note duration: Press and hold the note palettes icon in the Tool Bar, choose a note from the pop-up menu, and release the mouse button. The note palette vanishes.

Tear off the Notes palette by clicking and dragging it intol the score area, then choose a note value from the palette by clicking the appropriate tool.

Chapter 2: Working with Notes and Symbols

17

Notes and Symbols

Enter the note duration from the keyboard. This chart shows the relationship between keys and note durations:
Key 0 1 2 4 8 6 5 3 . R Function Set value to double whole note/rest Set value to whole note/rest Set value to half note/rest Set value to quarter note/rest Set value to eighth note/rest Set value to sixteenth note/rest Set value to thirty-second note/rest Turn triplets on or off Turn the dot on or off Change to a rest of the selected size

Here is the melody that you will write on the score:

1.

Since the first note in the melody is a half note, type the number 2. The cursor becomes a half note. If the Notes palette is on the screen, the half note icon highlights. The note icon in the tool bar also changes to a half note.

Note icon

18

Part I: Getting Started

2.

Make sure that the Options>Auto>Justify and Options>Auto>Rests menu items are checked. This ensures that each added note automatically moves to the proper place within the measure and rests are automatically added as you enter notes.Also make sure that the Advance Cursor When Entering Notes item is check in the Preferences dialog. This automatically positions the cursor to the next note position.

Now its time to add the notes. 1. Position the note cursor in the first measure, on D, then click.
Position note cursor on D

A D appears in the score, and immediately moves to the left end of the measure. (If it doesnt move, make sure that the Options>Auto Justify menu item is checked.) Also, if Options>Auto>Rests is checked, a quarter note rest will be added to fill the measure.

2. 3.

Type 8 to set the duration to eighth notes. Position the cursor on the F space over the quarter note rest position and click. This inserts an F#, since you are in the key of D. Notice how Overture automatically adds the eighth note rest if Options>Auto>Rests is checked.

4.

Position the cursor on the D line, over the eighth note rest position of the F# you just inserted, and click. Notice how Overture automatically draws a beam connecting the F# and D.

Repeat the steps of selecting the duration and placing notes on the score until your window looks like the melody on page 18.

Chapter 2: Working with Notes and Symbols

19

Notes and Symbols

Editing Notes
Overture has many tools for adjusting score elements. In many instances, it is not necessary to specially select them; you can just move the pointer over the element and the pointer will change shape to let you know that you can now edit the element.

Changing Pitch
To change the pitch of a note, move the pointer over it so that it becomes a Drag Cursor, then click.

The note head becomes red, indicating that it is selected for editing.

You can drag the note up and down to change its pitch, or press the up or down arrow keys. 1. Change a G to an A by dragging it up one step.

Changing Duration
The eighth note in the last measure should actually be a half note. Heres how to fix it: 1. Position the pointer over the erroneous note (so that it becomes a Drag Cursor) and click. The note head becomes red, indicating that it is selected:

2.

Now change the duration by typing the number 2 (for half note). The note instantly becomes a half note. You may have to adjust any remaing rests.

20

Part I: Getting Started

Tip:
Although this example shows only the effect of editing single notes, Overture lets you select multiple notes and edit them simultaneously. You can select multiple notes by shift-clicking, them or by dragging a rectangle around them. Any edit operations affects all selected notes.

Adding a Pickup Measure

If you know the song Amazing Grace, you may have noticed that the initial pickup beat is missing from the score. This section shows you how to add new measures and change their lengths. 1. 2. 3. Choose the Arrow Cursor tool from the Tool Bar. Click in the first measure, making it the active measure. Choose Measures>Insert. The Insert Measure dialog box opens:

4.

In this case, the default values (1 measure before current measure) are correct, so simply click OK. A blank measure is inserted before the first measure.

Now that you added the measure, you must tell Overture that it is a pickup measure. 1. Click in the first measure to make it the active measure.

Chapter 2: Working with Notes and Symbols

21

Notes and Symbols

2.

Choose Measures>Set Time Signature.

Click here to indicate that the currently active measure is a pickup measure.

3. 4.

Click the Is Pickup check box. Click OK.

Now, add the pickup note. Using what you learned in previous sections, place a quarter-note A in the measure. The score doesnt look quite right, because the newly-added measure has space for many notes, yet there is only one note in it. To fix this, you need to move the barline to the left, reducing the space used by the measure. Heres how: 1. Make sure that the Arrow Cursor tool is selected.

22

Part I: Getting Started

2.

Choose Options>Show>Handles. Youll notice small boxes appearing to the left of the staff and on top of the barlines. These are called handles.
Handles

3.

To move the barline, position the pointer over the barline handle and drag it to the left. Adjust it so that it looks good to you.
This barline has been dragged to the left

4.

Choose Options>Show>Handles again to uncheck the option and hide the handles in the score.

Notice that the spacing of the other measures on the staff are now too wide.

You can probably fit another measure on the first line, so... 1. 2. Click in the first measure to make it the active measure. Choose Measures>Increase Measures on System. Overture wraps measures to the left, stealing the first measure of the second line and making it the last measure of the first line.

Notice that there are now four measures on the top line

Chapter 2: Working with Notes and Symbols

23

Notes and Symbols

Grouping Notes
Now you are going to add a slur to the eighth notes in the second measure. Heres how: 1. Select the slur tool from the Groups palette.

2.

Drag a rectangle around the notes that you want to group.

When you release the mouse button, a slur appears, joining the selected notes.

You can alter the shape of the slur by dragging either the slur or its handles. If you like, try dragging the different handles now to see their effects on the slur.

Entering Symbols
Overture has palettes of ornaments, articulations, noteheads, tablature, dynamics, text and clefs, collectively known as symbols. This section introduces you to the basics of placing and moving symbols on the score.

24

Part I: Getting Started

Dynamics
In this section, you will add dynamic markings to the score. The first marking is a mezzo-piano symbol at the start of the piece. 1. Choose the mezzo-piano tool from the Dynamics palette. You can pull the palette down temporarily from the Tool Bar, or you can tear off the palette for repeated uses.

2.

Position the pointer under the first note of the score and click. A mezzo-piano symbol appears where you click. If you didnt place it in the proper position, move the pointer over the symbol so that it becomes a drag cursor, and drag the symbol to the right place.

Some dynamics symbols, like the crescendo hairpin, are resizable. To see how this works, add a crescendo and diminuendo to the score. 1. Choose the crescendo hairpin from the Dynamics palette.

Chapter 2: Working with Notes and Symbols

25

Notes and Symbols

2.

Position the pointer at the start of the second measure, press and hold the mouse button, and drag to the right. As you move the mouse, you should see the crescendo symbol appear and grow.

Drag to right to create a crescendo

Now add a diminuendo in the third measure, using what you learned above. Drag from right to left, using the same open hairpin symbol. When you are done, your score should look like this

Drag to left to create a diminuendo

Ornaments
You add ornaments to the score in the same way you add dynamics, except that you can attach ornaments to specific notes. To do so click the note or select a group of notes to ornament. Try adding a fingering mark to the score. 1. Choose the Finger 5 tool from the Ornaments palette.

26

Part I: Getting Started

2.

Position the pointer directly on the F# in measure two and click. The fingering ornament appears.
Position the pointer here...

...and click...

The fingering symbol appears.

You dont have to place ornaments one at a time: you can add the same ornament to many notes at once by dragging over them when the ornament tool is selected. You can drag an attached ornament wherever you please, but it remains attached to the original note for playback purposes.

Adding Voices
Now its time to add a second voice to the score. For an explanation of voices, see Voice on page 7. 1. Set the note duration to dotted half notes using the note palette. Click the half note icon, then the augmentation dot icon to add the dot to the half note.
Half note Augmentation dot

Chapter 2: Working with Notes and Symbols

27

Notes and Symbols

2.

Select Voice 2 from the voice pop-up menu. The voice pop-up menu is at the bottom of the score window.

Notice when you select Voice 2 that the notes belonging to Voice 1 dim:
Dimmed notes indicate non-active voice

3.

Position the cursor at the beginning of the second measure and click F to add an F#. Dont worry about the stemsthey will automatically be adjusted to the appropriate direction as you enter in a second voice.

New note inserted in Voice 2

4.

Add more notes, one per measure: another F#, then a G, then another final F#. Your display looks like this:

New notes entered in Voice 2

28

Part I: Getting Started

5.

Theres just one final bit of clean-up to do to complete this section: the fingering mark in measure two may need to be moved. Using the Arrow Cursor, drag the fingering to the desired location in the score.Your score should look like this when youre finished:

Chapter 2: Working with Notes and Symbols

29

Notes and Symbols

30

Part I: Getting Started

3
Adding Staves
1.

Creating New Staves and Setting Up Tracks

This chapter teaches you how to create new staves, assign instrument names and set up some features of tracks.

At the end of the last chapter, the score consisted of two voices in the treble clef. The next task is to add some left-hand accompaniment. To create the bass clef use the Score>Insert Track menu command.

Staves and Tracks

2.

Click on the popup-menu next to the Single Staff option and choose Bass Clef Staff. Click on the After current track option and then click on OK. The bass clef track appears in the proper position.

Now add a brace so the staves appear as conventional left-hand/right-hand piano notation (known as a grand staff.) 1. Select the Group With Brace tool from the Staves palette.

2.

Drag a box that spans the two staves.

When you release the button, the brace appears.

32

Part I: Getting Started

All that remains is to add a barline through the system. 1. Select the Cross-Staff Barlines tool from the Staves palette.

2.

Drag a box around both staves. A barline appears, connecting the two staves.

Barline

Staves that are played together are known as Systems. Overture has many features that can affect all the staves or measures in a system at once. See Chapter 8 of the Users Guide for full details.

Chapter 3: Creating New Staves and Setting Up Tracks

33

Staves and Tracks

Setting Up Staves
In this section, you will tell Overture that the staves are piano parts. 1. 2. Click anywhere in the top staff to make it the active one. Choose Score>Setup Track. The Setup Track dialog box opens:

Shortcut:
Double-clicking a staffs selector handle or the main clef in the first measure also opens this dialog box.

34

Part I: Getting Started

3.

In the Instrument box is a pop-up menu, Instrument Name. This menu contains a list of common instruments. Use it to choose Piano for the current track.

Notice that the name boxes fill in automatically. 4. Check the Show Main box. This causes the instrument name to be displayed to the left of the staff. 5. Click OK.

Using the Setup Track dialog box, you can change many properties of each track including which lines of the staff are displayed which elements of the staff are displayed scale of entire staff transposition if different from concert key

Chapter 3: Creating New Staves and Setting Up Tracks

35

Staves and Tracks

36

Part I: Getting Started

Chapters 4 through 6 discuss Overtures MIDI functions. If you arent using a MIDI device with Overture, feel free to skip ahead to Chapter 7.

Setting Up MIDI
Before you can start recording via MIDI, you must have a MIDI interface connected to your computer and a MIDI keyboard connected to the interface. [You must also enter the layout of your studio into the Audio MIDI Setup application if you are running under OS X]. A detailed explanation of these procedures is beyond the scope of this tutorial, so if you havent yet defined a Studio Setup document, you should read the manuals that came with your MIDI keyboard(s) and interface(s). You wont be able to proceed with this tutorial until you have done this.

Recording MIDI
There are a few program options to set up before you can start recording. This section discusses these options.

Real Time Record

Real Time MIDI Recording

Metronome
Before you start playing, youll probably want to have some sort of metronome to guide your playing. 1. To configure the metronome sound, choose Options>Metronome>Metronome Sound.

You can set the device, note, velocity and duration for accented and unaccented metronome strikes. If you have a sound module in your MIDI studio with drum kits or percussive sounds, youll probably want to use that. 2. Change the Note number until you hear a sound you like. Each change causes the new note to be played on the instrument, so you can hear how each note sounds as you scroll through the list of values. 3. Click the Test button. This plays one measures worth of metronome sound, so you can hear what the metronome will sound like when youre actually recording. What you hear has nothing to do with the meter or tempo of your score.

38

Part I: Getting Started

Record Options
Choose Options>Record Options. This opens the Record Options dialog box, where you tell Overture what sort of data to record and how to display it once it has been recorded.

Make sure the Auto Transcribe checkbox is selected. Click OK to dismiss this dialog box.

Transcription Quantize
When you enter data from a MIDI keyboard, Overture records it with a high degree of rhythmic sensitivity. Many times you dont want such an accurate transcription of what you play. For example, perhaps youre only interested in entering quarter notes. If you dont play with computer-precision, you could wind up with something like this:

Chapter 4: Real Time MIDI Recording

39

Real Time Record

To solve this problem, you can tell Overture to round up anything smaller than a quarter note. You set this with the Transcription Quantize Amount button. At this time, choose quarter note resolution.

Now Overture transcribes whatever you play in as quarter notes or longer.

Linking Staves to MIDI Devices

In order to have Overture play notes on the proper devices, you need to tell Overture where you want the data sent. 1. 2. Click anywhere in the treble clef, so that it becomes the currently active staff. Choose Windows>Tracks.

Each line in this window represents a staff in the score. If you have a multi-timbral synthesizer (one that plays more than one note at a time), you can play each staff over a different synthesizer sound, if you like. For simplicitys sake, assign both staves to the same sound. 3. Click in the Device column. A pop-up menu appears listing all of the currently available instruments. Pick a device and MIDI channel appropriate for your setup.

40

Part I: Getting Started

4.

Click in the Device column for the second line, and pick the same MIDI device and channel.

Recording
Look at the left hand part for Amazing Grace:

You are going to play this into Overture from a MIDI keyboard. While you are playing the new part, you will hear the metronome and the already-entered right-hand part. 1. Open the Transport window by choosing Windows>Transport.

Rewind Button Play from Beginning Button Stop Play Record Button Button Button Thru Device

Chapter 4: Real Time MIDI Recording

41

Real Time Record

Overture is now configured to play back the right and left hand parts on the synthesizer channel that you selected.

2.

Using the Thru device pop-up menu, select the same MIDI Instrument that you selected in the previous section. This sets all notes played on the controller keyboard to echo on the Thru device.

3.

Click in the first measure of the bass staff. Recording begins at the insertion points location.

4.

Click the record button to begin. There is a one-measure count in during which the metronome plays but no MIDI data is recorded.

5. 6.

Play the part! When youve played it, press the return key to stop recording, or click the stop button.

Notice that as soon as you stop, the score window draws in the newly entered data. Your score should look like the one on page 41. If you made mistakes, you might want to try cleaning them up using the editing techniques introduced earlier in this manual. To hear what you played, click the Play button or press the spacebar. Overture plays back your notes and continues playing the silent parts afterwards, so click the Stop button or press the Return key to stop playing. Remember to use transcription quantize; regardless of how the performance sounds (within reason), it should be notated correctly.

42

Part I: Getting Started

5
Note Size pop-up menu

Step Entry MIDI Recording

Step Entry Record

This chapter introduces you to Overtures step entry features. It assumes you have set up your MIDI devices and interfaces properly.

Setting Up Step Record

To open the Step Input window, choose Windows>Step Input.

Type area

Size area

Duration area

Velocity area

In this exercise, you use the Step Entry window to add more notes to the left hand part. 1. Position the insertion point at the beginning of the first full measure of the bass clef. When you step enter data, it starts at the insertion point. 2. Select the dotted half note symbol from the Note Size pop-up menu. The counter advances this much time after you enter each note.

3.

Select Percent from the Duration pop-up menu. Notice that the default percentage is 90%. This tells Overture that step-entered notes have a playback duration equal to 90% of a dotted half-note. Playback duration does not affect the way the score is notated; it only affects what you hear when you tell Overture to play the data over MIDI devices.

44

Part I: Getting Started

4.

Play the low notes of the left hand part as shown here:

Notice that it doesnt matter how long you pause between notes, how long you hold them down or how hard you play them. Each note is transcribed as exactly one dotted half note into the score. Note that unlike real-time record, which erases everything in the track (overwriting it with what you play) step entry adds its data to the track. That is, if you put the insertion point where there is already some information and step-enter some notes, they are merged with the existing data.

Chapter 5: Step Entry MIDI Recording

45

Step Entry Record

Chord Name Entry

You can step enter chords and have Overture automatically identify them and place their names in the proper place above the staff. 1. Choose the Chord Entry icon with the Input Select button.

Input Select button

Chord Entry icon

The duration and velocity sections of the Step Entry window disappear.

2.

Using the note size pop-up menu, set the duration to dotted half note, if it isnt already. You can do this by clicking the note size icon and typing a 2 followed by a period (dot).

3.

Click the mouse at the start of the first full measure of the treble staff.

46

Part I: Getting Started

4.

Play a D Major chord (D-F#-A) on your MIDI keyboard. Overture identifies the chord and places its name above the staff.

5.

Press the right-arrow key to skip the next measure. Notice that the counter in the Step Entry window advances by the currently selected note duration in this case, one bar.

Using the techniques discussed above, add some more chords.

Note About Inversions:

Chords are identified from the lowest note played on the keyboard, so Overture may not properly identify an inversion if the chord root isnt the lowest note played.

Chapter 5: Step Entry MIDI Recording

47

Step Entry Record

48

Part I: Getting Started

6
MIDI Data Mode

Editing MIDI Data

There are two facets to every Overture score: what you see and what you hear. So far weve been primarily concerned with making a score look good. This chapter is a small detour to the MIDI Data mode and Graphic Window, which can affect not only a scores appearance, but the way it plays back. This chapter touches lightly on a few aspects of the Graphic window; for a complete description of all Graphic window elements, see Chapter 30, Graphic Window (PC) [Chapter 31, Graphic Window (Mac) ] The Graphics window differs on the two platforms so we provide procedures for the PC below, then procedures for the Mac starting on page 57.

The MIDI Data mode is a powerful tool for editing MIDI data directly on your score. You can create mathematically precise shapes or draw MIDI events freehand. In this tutorial, well use the MIDI Data mode to create volume. In this mode the Arrow cursor becomes a Pencil for drawing in the data and the Eraser cursor is used to delete existing data.

Choose Data Type

Choose type of controller

Density of inserted data

Score position

Data value

Temporarily adjust tempos

Zoom buttons

Drag graph position vertically

MIDI Data area

Note data shown as raw data

Editing MIDI Data

1.

Open the MIDI Data mode by choosing the Edit>MIDI Data menu command or by pressing the Tab key. The MIDI Data mode tool strip will appear just below the tool bar and looks like this. Note: When MIDI Data mode is active Tab key toggles between normal score and current data type.

The MIDI Data mode displays a graph above each measure showing the data except when Normal Score is chosen for data type. The data values runs vertically.

2.

Choose the Controller from first the pop-up menu on the tool strip.
Choose Controller from popup menu

...and from the scond popup-menu choose the Volume controller

3.

Draw any data you like into the MIDI Data area. Hold the shift key down while dragging to draw staright lines. Score symbols such as dynamics that also send this type of data are shown with a handle that can be dragged vertically.

When you release the button, the data area shows the new data youve drawn:

Assuming your MIDI device is set up to respond to controller 7, you hear the effects of this data on the track when you play it back.

50

Part I: Getting Started

Tap Tempo
While in the MIDI Data mode youc an record new tempos. To do thi

1.

While in MIDI Data mode choose Choose Tempo from first the pop-up menu on the tool strip.

The MIDI Data mode displays a graph above each measure showing the beats based on the current meter and the tempo changes within each measure. The tempo data values runs vertically.

2.

Press the Record button on the transposrt or press the Enter[return] key to enable recording. Press the Enter[return] key again or play a note on the MIDI keyboard to start recording tempos. Press the key again (or play a note) to record a tempo for each beat. Overture determines the tempos based on the time between key presses (played notes) for each beat within the current time signature. Press the space bar or Stop button on Transport to stop recording tempos. A dialog will ask you if you wish to keep the recorded tempos. Press the Yes button if you want to save the recorded tempos into the score.

Chapter 6: Editing MIDI Data

51

Editing MIDI Data

Editing Notes (PC)

In the Graphic window, the notes you entered appear on a piano-roll display. Each box in the window indicates a notes start point (by where it is located on the X axis), pitch (by where it is located on the Y axis) and duration (by the length of the graphic box). Any notes you select in the Graphic window are also automatically selected in the Score window as well. You can select notes by clicking them one at a time, or shift-clicking multiple notes, or dragging a selection box to select many at once. 1. Make sure the insertion point is in the treble staff at the score.

52

Part I: Getting Started

2.

Choose Windows>Graphic to see the MIDI interpretation of Amazing Grace.

3.

Select the Select tool.

Chapter 6: Editing MIDI Data

53

Editing MIDI Data

4.

Select a range of notes by dragging a rectangle around them. The notes turn red:

5.

Switch back to the Score window to see that the corresponding notes have been selected.

54

Part I: Getting Started

Editing With The Controllers Pane (PC)

The Controllers pane is a powerful tool for editing MIDI data. You can create curves or straight lines or draw MIDI events freehand. In this tutorial, well use the strip chart to create volume data. If you arent concerned with playback control, you can skip the rest of this chapter. 1. Choose Control from the first popup menu at the top of the Graphic window, then choose Volume from the second popup menu.

2.

The Controllers pane displays a graph that runs vertically from 0 to 127. Choose the pencil tool in the Graphic windows toolbar.

Chapter 6: Editing MIDI Data

55

Editing MIDI Data

3.

Draw any data you like into the Controllers pane.

When you release the button, the Controllers Pane fills in the area under the shape youve drawn:

Assuming your MIDI device is set up to respond to volume data, you hear the effects of this data on the track when you play it back.

56

Part I: Getting Started

Editing Notes (Mac)

In the Graphic window, the notes you entered appear on a piano-roll display. Each box in the window indicates a notes start point (by where it is located on the X axis), pitch (by where it is located on the Y axis) and duration (by the length of the graphic box). Any notes you select in the Graphic window are also automatically selected in the Score window as well. You can select notes by clicking them one at a time, or shift-clicking multiple notes, or dragging a rectangle to select many at once. 1. Make sure the insertion point is in the treble staff at the score.

Chapter 6: Editing MIDI Data

57

Editing MIDI Data

2.

Choose Windows>Graphic to see the MIDI interpretation of Amazing Grace.

3.

Select the Marquee tool.

Marquee Tool

4.

Select a range of notes by dragging a rectangle over them. The notes become hollow, like this:

5.

Switch back to the Score window to see that the corresponding notes have been selected.

58

Part I: Getting Started

Editing With The Strip Chart (Mac)

The strip chart is a powerful tool for editing MIDI data. You can create mathematically precise shapes or draw MIDI events freehand. In this tutorial, well use the strip chart to create modulation wheel data. If you arent concerned with playback control, you can skip the rest of this chapter. 1. Open the strip chart by clicking on the Strip Chart button at the bottom of the graphic window and selecting Modulation Wheel from the pop up menu.

The strip chart opens at the bottom of the window and looks like this:

2.

The strip chart is a graph that runs vertically from 0 to 127. Choose the pencil tool.

3.

Choose the Free tool from the pop-up menu at the bottom of the window.

Chapter 6: Editing MIDI Data

59

Editing MIDI Data

4.

Draw any data you like into the strip chart.

When you release the button, the strip chart fills in the area under the shape youve drawn:

Assuming your MIDI device is set up to respond to modulation wheel data, you hear the effects of this data on the track when you play it back.

60

Part I: Getting Started

7
Printing
Setting Margins
1.

Page Layout and

This chapter teaches you how to set margins, spacing, page size and other items associated with printing. It also discusses Overture templates.

Setting Up The Page

Before you can print your score, you need to make sure the page parameters are properly set. This section introduces you to some of the most common issues related to printing.

A gray line appears around the score, outlining where the margins lie.

Margin

Layout and Printing

To see what your page margins look like currently, choose Options>Show>Margin.

2.

To change the margins, choose Score>Page Dimensions.

Page scale slider

You can change the margins by adjusting the numbers in the margin boxes.

Setting Size
You can enter the page width and height in the boxes provided. You can drag the slider to change the scaling factor for the entire score to allow more staves on a page. For example, if you are printing to a regular sheet of 8.5 x 11 paper, and have set the slider to 50%, a 17 x 22 score is created. This is because a 17 x 22 score printed at 50% is 8.5 x 11. Use the portrait or landscape button to allow for horizontal or vertical scores. Use the Page buttons to view different pages in your score.

62

Part I: Getting Started

Adding Titles
Its time to put a title on the score. 1. Choose Score>Title Page. The Title Page Text dialog box appears.

2.

Click the Title tab if necessary and type Amazing Grace on the top title line. You have a choice of many different text styles, but the defaults are fine for now.

3.

Click OK. Overture displays the title on the first page of the score.

If you want to change the font style of the Title, do the following:

1.

Choose Score>Title Page to display the Title Page Text dialog box again.

Chapter 7: Page Layout and Printing

63

Layout and Printing

2.

Click the Font button next to the Title. Overture opens the Font dialog box.

3. 4.

Choose the font, style, and size. Click OK. Overture closes the Font dialog box.

5.

Click OK. Overture closes the Title Page Text dialog box. You can now go back and enter Composers name, Instructions, Copyright, Headers, and Footers, in the same manner.

64

Part I: Getting Started

Printing
Once the page is set up, all you have to do is choose File>Print from the File menu. A standard print dialog box appears. Make sure everything is set properly for your printer and click OK.

Templates
If you have a complicated score configuration that youll be using more than once, you might want to make a template out of it. A template can store staff configurations, page dimensions, instrument names, clef configurations, fonts for titles and more. To create a template: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set up the score elements the way you want them. Save the file in the Templates folder inside the Overture folder. Switch to the Explorer[Finder] and locate the file youve just saved. Select its icon so that it becomes highlighted. Choose File>Get Properties[Info] Set the file to be Read Only.

Pre-Made Templates
Overture comes with a number of pre-made templates, covering a wide variety of scoring formats. These reside in the Overture Templates folder. Open them up and look at the staff and page settings to get a feel for how some of them were designed. One of the best ways to learn is by example, so dont be shy!

Chapter 7: Page Layout and Printing

65

Layout and Printing

66

Part I: Getting Started

Part II The Score Window

8
Page

Score Window

Page View

General
The Score window displays one or more pages of a traditional music score complete with staves, notes, symbols, lyrics, chords, text and anything else you want in your printed musical score. Use the Score window to enter, view and modify your musical score.

Score Window

Status Bar: Page View and Track Controls

The bottom of the Score window contains several controls that determine and illustrate which page is displayed and the zoom level at which its displayed.

Track

Voice pop-up menu

Page numerical Next Page button CPU Meter

View

Bar numerical

Previous Page button

MIDI Activity

The following describes each of Overtures page view controls: View. Use this pop-up menu to select both the size at which you want to display the score and a page view option. For more information, see Auto>Zooming command on page 72 and Auto>Selecting a Page View Option command on page 75 Track control. Use this pop-up menu to change tracks. Overture puts the cursor in the track you select. The track control always shows the track the cursor is in, a convenience if you are not showing names and abbreviations. Voice pop-up menu. Use this pop-up menu to select the voice you want to display and edit in the Score window. For more information, see Auto>Selecting a Voice to Enter or Edit command on page 96. Bar numerical. Use this numerical to quickly move the cursor to a specified bar number. Overture displays the page containing the active measure. For more information, see Auto>Turning to a Specific Bar command on page 71. Page numerical. Use this numerical to quickly move to a specified page. Overture displays the selected page, but the cursor remains in the currently active measure. For more information, see Auto>Turning to a Specific Page command on page 71. Previous Page button. Click this button to display the previous page in the score. Next Page button. Click this button to display the next page in the score. MIDI Activity. Led lights blink when MIDI data is being received and sent. CPU Meter. Shows the amount of time the CPU is spending while processing audio data.

Each of the following sections discuss various actions you can perform with the page view and track controls.

70

Part II: The Score Window

Turning Pages
To move forward or backward through your score a single page at a time, click the Next Page or Previous Page buttons.

Previous Page Button

Next Page Button

If you have an extended computer keyboard, you can also turn pages by typing Control[Option]-PgUp or Control[Option]-PgDn.

Turning to a Specific Page

To turn to a specific page in your score, use the Page numerical. Simply drag the numerical upward to increase the page number, or drag it downward to decrease the page number. Alternately, you can click the Page numerical, type the desired page number, then hit the Return key.
Page Numerical

Turning to a Specific Bar

To place the insertion point in any measure in your score (activating that measure), use the bar numerical. Simply drag the numerical upward to increase the bar number, or drag it downward to decrease the bar number. Alternately, you can click the Bar numerical, type the desired bar number, then hit the Return key.
Bar Numerical

When you turn to a specific bar, Overture automatically positions the cursor in that bar, thus making it the active measure.

When the cursor is in a particular measure, that measure is called the active measure. This manual will often ask you to activate a particular measure. This means to place the cursor in a particular measure either by clicking in it, or by using the bar numerical.

Chapter 8: Score Window

71

Score Window

Terminology Note:

Important:
The Bar numerical always shows the absolute bar number in the score; it does not show custom bar numbers assigned in the Set Numbers dialog box (as discussed in Auto>Set Measure Numbers command on page 559). For example, if you set up your score such that the first measure is labeled as Bar #17, the Bar numerical will still show that first measure as Bar #1. However, if your song begins with a pickup measure, Overture numbers it Bar #0.

Turning to the First Page and Bar

If you use an extended keyboard, you can quickly turn to the first page in a score by pressing Control[Option]-Home on your computer keyboard. When you press option-Home, Overture moves the cursor to the first bar in the active track and displays the first page in the Score window.

Turning to the Last Page and Bar

If you use an extended keyboard, you can quickly turn to the last page in a score by pressing Control[Option]-End on your computer keyboard. Overture moves the cursor to the last bar in the active track and displays the last page in the Score window.

Zooming
You can zoom in on a score to see tiny details or zoom out to display more of the score. Also, you can size a score to fit completely in the Score window. 1. 2. Click the Zoom Level pop-up menu to see a list of zoom levels. Select the desired zoom level from the pop-up menu. Overture resizes the score based on your selection.

2. Select a zoom level from the pop-up menu

72

Part II: The Score Window

The zoom level options are as follows: Zoom In. Select this zoom level to zoom in on the score. When you zoom in, Overture displays all notes and symbols larger than actual size, allowing you to see more detail in a single portion of a score. You can choose this command repeatedly to zoom in closer and closer. Zoom Out. Select this zoom level to zoom out on the score. When you zoom out, Overture displays all notes and symbols smaller than actual size, allowing you to see more of a score. You can choose this command repeatedly to zoom out further and further. Fit in Window. If you select this zoom level, Overture automatically selects a zoom level that displays an entire page within the confines of the Score window. Fit Page Width. If you select this zoom level, Overture automatically selects a zoom level that displays an entire page width within the confines of the Score window. Fit Page Height. If you select this zoom level, Overture automatically selects a zoom level that displays an entire page height within the confines of the Score window. 100%. Select this zoom level to display the score at its normal size. 250%, 200, 150%, 125%, 75%, 50%. Select one of these zoom levels to set the zoom level to the indicated percentage. X%. Choose this zoom level to open the zoom level dialog box. Use the View at numerical to select a zoom level between 10% and 800%. Click the OK button to apply the chosen zoom level.

Selective Zooming
Overture lets you zoom in on a specific area of the score. To do so: 1. Select the Zoom Cursor in the Tool Bar.

Zoom Cursor

Chapter 8: Score Window

73

Score Window

2.

Drag a rectangle around the area you want to zoom in on or just click to zoom in.

Drag an area to zoom in on

Overture zooms the selected area to the largest size that will fit within the Score window.

74

Part II: The Score Window

Selecting a Page View Option

The Zoom Level pop-up menu also contains several viewing options so you can define how Overture displays pages in the Score window.

Page View Options

There are three different ways to view pages in the Score window: Single Page. If you select this option, Overture displays only one page at a time in the Score window.

Chapter 8: Score Window

75

Score Window

Horizontal Pages. If you select this option, Overture places your pages side by side horizontally across the Score window.

Vertical Pages. If you select this option, Overture places your pages top to bottom vertically down the Score window.

76

Part II: The Score Window

Scrolling a Score Window

There are a few cases where you want to scroll a Score window: If the physical page size of your score is larger than your monitor screen and you wish to view the score at full size (100%), youll need to scroll the Score window to see any portions of a page that dont fit within the windows confines. If you view a score at some magnified level (>100%), youll need to scroll the Score window to see the entire page (even if you have a 1- or 2-page monitor).

The most intuitive way to scroll the Score window is to use the standard scroll bars located both to the right and the bottom of the Score window.

Scroll Bars

You can also scroll a Score window by using the Hand tool (press h) within the window. This converts the cursor to a hand for dragging the Score window.

Chapter 8: Score Window

77

Score Window

Arranging Staves and Systems

Overture allows you to adjust staff spacing and width by dragging staves to place them anywhere on a page. The following sections discuss how to arrange staves and systems in a score.

Adjusting Vertical Staff Placement

You can adjust the spacing between any two staves or systems and apply that spacing to: the selected staff only, or all remaining staves on a page, or all remaining staves in a score

The following sections outline Overtures staff spacing techniques.

Adjusting Staff Spacing in a Single System

To change the spacing between a staff and the staff above it: 1. Select Options>Show>Handles. This is an optional step. Once you learn where to click on a staff or barline, you wont need to select this option. Handles are always availabletheyre just normally invisible. Selecting this option shows you where to click a staff or barline to edit it.

78

Part II: The Score Window

2.

Drag a staff handle up or down to change the spacing between it and the staff (or margin) above it.

Staff Handle

All staves below a dragged staff maintain their relative spacing.

Notice that this staff spacing has changed...

...but that the relative spacing of all remaining staves remains unchanged.

Chapter 8: Score Window

79

Score Window

If you drag the top staff in a system, that system moves closer to or further from the system (or margin) above it, but all other staff and system spacings are unaffected.

Dragging this staff down...

...affects staff spacing this way.

80

Part II: The Score Window

If you drag a middle staff in some system, it will move closer to or further from the staff immediately above it. All staff and system spacing below the dragged staff is unaffected.

Dragging this staff down...

...affects staff spacing this way.

Adjusting Staff Spacing in all Systems on a Page

As you learned in the previous section, you can drag a staff to change the spacing between it and the staff (or margin) above it. If you like, you can have Overture apply the new staff spacing to all remaining systems on a page. To do so: 1. Select Options>Show>Handles. This is an optional step. Once you learn where to click on a staff or barline, you wont need to select this option. Handles are always availabletheyre just normally invisible. Selecting this option shows you where to click a staff or barline to edit it. 2. Hold down the Alt[Option] key and drag a staff handle up or down to change the spacing between it and the staff (or margin) above it. By Alt[Option]-dragging, you tell Overture to apply the same spacing to all remaining systems on a page.

Chapter 8: Score Window

81

Score Window

If you Alt[Option]-drag the top staff in a system, that system moves closer to or further from the system (or margin) above it, and Overture applies the spacing to all remaining systems on the page.

Option-dragging Alt-dragging this

...affects staff spacing this way.

82

Part II: The Score Window

If you Alt[Option]-drag any other staff in a system, it moves closer to or further from the staff immediately above it, and Overture applies the spacing to all remaining systems on the page.

Alt[Option]dragging this staff down...

...affects staff spacing this

Adjusting Staff Spacing in all Systems in a Score

As you learned previously, you can drag a staff to change the spacing between it and the staff (or margin) above it. If you like, you can have Overture apply the new staff spacing to all remaining systems in a score. To do so: 1. Select Options>Show>Handles. This is an optional step. Once you learn where to click on a staff or barline, you wont need to select this option. Handles are always availabletheyre just normally invisible. Selecting this option shows you where to click a staff or barline to edit it. 2. Hold down the Control[Command] key and drag a staff handle up or down to change the spacing between it and the staff (or margin) above it. By Control[Command]-dragging, you tell Overture to apply the same spacing to all remaining systems in a score. Control[Command]-dragging affects system and staff spacing just as Alt[Option]-dragging does. The only difference is that Overture applies any new spacing throughout the remaining score, not just the active page.

Chapter 8: Score Window

83

Score Window

Respacing Staves
Overtures Score>Respace Staves command respaces all the staves on the page according to the Respace Staves dialog box and the Engraver preferences set in the Preferences dialog box. See Auto>Respace Staves Dialog Box command on page 512 and Auto>Engraver Preferences command on page 644. For example, assume your score contains the page below, and that you want to re-space the staves according to your Engraver preferences.

84

Part II: The Score Window

To respace the staves: 1. Choose Score>Respace Staves. Overture re-spaces the staves according to the Engraver preferences set in the Preferences dialog box.

Chapter 8: Score Window

85

Score Window

Notice the differences between the re-spaced page above and the original page shown on page 84.

Adjusting Horizontal Staff Placement

You can adjust the width of any system by dragging either of its handles horizontally or by clicking on the staff with the hand tool and dragging horizontally. For example, assume your score contains the page below, and that you want to indent the top system.

86

Part II: The Score Window

To indent the top system: 1. In the top system, drag any staffs left selection handle to the right. Overture shortens the entire system.

Dragging left staff handle to the right indents the staff

You can also drag a staffs right selection handle to change a systems width. Here is what happens when you drag a staffs right selection handle to the left.

Chapter 8: Score Window

87

Score Window

Placing Systems Side by Side

You can apply a combination of vertical staff positioning and staff width adjustment to place systems side-by-side in a score. To do so: 1. Adjust the width of each system you wish to place side by side.

2.

Drag the lower system up until its parallel with the system above it.

You may also split a system into two side by side systems using Auto>Split System command on page 534.

88

Part II: The Score Window

Creating a Default File

If you frequently use particular scoring conventions, you may create a score with the desired characteristics and save it with the name DefaultFile. If you put DefaultFile in the same folder as the Overture application, an untitled copy automatically opens every time you launch Overture by double clicking the Overture application icon. Scoring conventions commonly used in creating the DefaultFile include: Staff names and abbreviations Staff grouping and spacing Measures/System and Systems/Page specifications Clef assignments in staff systems

You may save the DefaultFile, including specific parts. For example, a commonly used basic drum track can be saved in the DefaultFile.

Note:
Choosing File>New does not automatically load DefaultFile. Choosing File>Open to open DefaultFile opens the actual file for editing, not an untitled copy. Double-clicking the file launches Overture files directly.

Selecting Notation Symbols

You can select notes and symbols either individually or in groups. The following sections discuss how Overture displays selected symbols and how to select them.

Viewing Selected Symbols

Overture displays most selected notes and rests in red. It displays editing handles on most other types of notation symbols.

Unselected Note

Selected Note

Chapter 8: Score Window

89

Score Window

Similarly, when you select a rest, Overture displays it in red:

Unselected Rest

Selected Rest

When you select a note with a beam, Overture displays only the notehead in red. You can select beams separately, so as to edit their position and angle. Editing handles appear on all selected beams. For information about editing beams, see Auto>Editing Beams command on page 101.

Unselected Notes

Selected Notes

Selected Beam

When you select most other types of symbols, small, rectangular editing handles appear on or around the symbol. These handles allow you to move or reshape the selected symbol.

Editing Handles

For more information about editing selected symbols, see Auto>Editing Notation Symbols command on page 97.

Selection Techniques
You may select notes and symbols either individually or in groups. To select notes or symbols in the Score window, Overture must be in Score mode and the Arrow Cursor tool must be active. The following sections discuss numerous selection techniques.

Selecting Individual Symbols

To select any note or symbol in the Score window: 1. Click the Arrow Cursor button in Overtures tool bar to select the Arrow Cursor tool.

90

Part II: The Score Window

2.

Move the cursor over the symbol you wish to select. When you position the cursor over a symbol, it changes into a Drag Cursor ( ). The Drag Cursor always appears when you move the Arrow Cursor over an editable portion of a musical symbol. We discuss this and other Score window cursors in Auto>Cursors in the Score Window command on page 109.

3.

Click the desired symbol. Overture highlights it to show that its selected.

Alternately, you could select a symbol by dragging a rectangle around it.

Selecting Discontiguous Symbols

To select discontiguous notes and symbols in the Score window, hold down the Control[Command] key as you click. Specifically: 1. Using the Arrow cursor, move the mouse over the first symbol you wish to select. The cursor turns into a Drag cursor. 2. Click the symbol to select it. Overture highlights it to show that its selected.

Chapter 8: Score Window

91

Score Window

3.

Control[Command]-click each additional note or symbol you wish to select. Overture adds the note or symbol to the selection.

Control[Command]-click these notes to select them

Alternately, you could select discontiguous symbols by dragging rectangles around the individual notes or symbols as you hold down the Control[Command] key.

Selecting Contiguous Symbols

To select contiguous notes and symbols in the Score window, use the Shift key. Specifically: 1. Using the Arrow Cursor, move the mouse over the first symbol you wish to select. The cursor turns into a Drag Cursor. 2. Click the symbol to select it. Overture highlights it to show that its selected.

Click symbol to select it.

Click this note with Arrow Cursor to select it. (The Arrow Cursor becomes a Drag Cursor when you move it over the note.)

92

Part II: The Score Window

3.

Shift-click the space after the last symbol you wish to select. Overture selects all notes and symbols between the first selection and the point where you shift-clicked.

Shift-click here to select all symbols between here and the selected symbol.

Alternatively, you could select contiguous symbols by dragging a rectangle around all the desired symbolsthe selection includes any symbol that the rectangle either touches or encloses.

Selecting All Symbols in a Measure

To select all symbols in a single measure: Using the Arrow Cursor, double click on any blank space in a measure. Overture selects all the symbols in the measure.

Chapter 8: Score Window

93

Score Window

Selecting All Symbols in Discontiguous Measures

To select all symbols in discontiguous measures: 1. Using the Arrow Cursor, double-click any blank area in one of the measures. Overture selects all the symbols in the measure.

2.

Control[Command]-double click a blank area in each additional measure. Overture adds all symbols in each additional measure to the selection.

You can also use this technique to select discontiguous measures on different staves.

Selecting All Symbols on an Entire Staff Line

To select all symbols on an entire staff line. Using the Arrow Cursor, double-click any blank area in the first measure of a staff. Shift-double click the last measure on the staff. Overture selects all the symbols in that staff in that system.

94

Part II: The Score Window

Selecting Symbols On Different Staves

You can use any of the contiguous or discontiguous selection methods to select notes and symbols that are on different staves. In addition, you can select symbols in contiguous measures and staves by dragging a rectangle around all desired symbols.

Drag to select symbols across multiple staves.

Also, you can Control[Command]-click symbols in different staves to select them.

Selecting all Symbols in a Track

You can select all symbols in a track by double-clicking with the Arrow Cursor in the margin next to the track you want selected.

Double-clicking in the margin... ...selects all notes in the entire track

Chapter 8: Score Window

95

Score Window

Selecting a Voice to Enter or Edit

Each Overture staff displays up to eight voices simultaneously (for a definition of voices, see Auto>Voice command on page 7). Select a voice using the Voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window. You can select and edit only those symbols that are assigned to the selected voice. To select a voice: 1. 2. Click Voice in the Score Windows page view controls to open the Voice pop-up menu. From the pop-up menu, select the voice you want to enter or edit. You may also select the All option to edit all voices simultaneously.
2. Select a voice from the pop-up menu 1. Click here to produce the Voice pop-up menu.

When you select a particular voice, all other voices already in a score are grayed out.

Selected Voice (black)

Disabled Voice (grey)

In the example, you can edit only those notes and symbols that are assigned to the selected voice (the black one).

Note:
When you select All, Overture lets you edit all the voices, but automatically puts any new notes in Voice 1.

96

Part II: The Score Window

Editing Notation Symbols

Editing Notes
You can change a notes pitch or position by dragging it. Drag a note up or down to change its pitch; drag a note left or right to change its position.

Raise Pitch

Move Left

Move Right

Lower Pitch

When you position the cursor over a notehead, it changes into a Drag Cursor ( ). The Drag Cursor always appears when you move the Arrow Cursor over an editable portion of a musical symbol. You can choose whether you want dragged notes to change chromatically (according to the twelve-tone scale) or diatonically (according to the key of the measure). To drag notes diatonically: 1. Choose Options>Preferences. Overture opens the Preferences dialog box. 2. 3. In the Preferences dialog box, select General from the Preference Type pop-up menu. Make sure that Drag Notes Chromatically is not checked.

To drag notes chromatically: 1. Choose Options>Preferences. Overture opens the Preferences dialog box.

3.

Click the Drag Notes Chromatically check box to check it.

Chapter 8: Score Window

97

Score Window

2.

In the Preferences dialog box, select General from the Preference Type pop-up menu.

You can nudge notes up or down through either the chromatic or diatonic scales. To do so: 1. 2. Select the note (or notes) whose pitch you want to change. Press the up arrow key to nudge notes up the scale. Press the down arrow key to nudge notes down the scale.

You can change a notes value (such as turning a quarter note into an eighth note) by first selecting it, then typing the key equivalent for a new note value. This is described in detail in Auto>Changing Existing Note Values command on page 134. You can duplicate a note (or most any musical symbol) by Control[Option]-dragging it. There are two ways to remove notes from a score: Select the Eraser tool and click the notes you wish to remove. See Auto>Eraser Button command on page 119. Using the Arrow Cursor, select those notes you wish to remove (as discussed in Auto>Selecting Notation Symbols command on page 89) and type the delete key, or use the Edit>Cut command.

Copying Notes
You can Control[Option]-drag any note to make a copy of it. If you Control[Option]-drag a note vertically, Overture creates a new note of the same duration and at the same time, but at a new pitch (thus creating a chord).

1. Original Note

2. Move the Arrow Cursor over the note (it becomes a Drag Cursor)

3. Control[Option]-drag the note up to a D. Overture creates a chord containing your original note (G) and the new note (D).

If you Control[Option]-drag a note horizontally, Overture copies it to a new location.

98

Part II: The Score Window

If you Alt[Option]-drag any note in a chord horizontally, Overture creates a copy of the entire chord.

1. Original Note

2. Move the Arrow Cursor over one of the notes (it becomes a Drag Cursor)

3. Control[Option]-drag the note to the right. Overture creates a new chord identical to the one containing the note you originally dragged.

You can also copy notes by selecting them and using standard copy and paste commands. For more information, see Chapter , Edit Menu.

Editing Stems
To change a stems length: 1. Move the cursor over the end of a stem. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor.
Drag Cursor

2.

Drag the end of the stem up or down to change its length.

dragging stem up

dragging stem down

To return a stem to its default length. 1. Select the notes whose stems you wish to reset to their default length.

Chapter 8: Score Window

99

Score Window

2.

Choose Notes>Stem>Default Stem Length. Overture resets the selected stems to their default length.

To set a stems direction: 1. Select the notes whose stem directions you wish to set.

2.

Choose either Notes>Stem>Stem Up or Notes>Stem>Stem Down. Overture makes the selected stems point in the chosen direction.

To hide a stem: 1. 2. Select the notes whose stems you wish to hide. Choose Notes>Stem>Hide Stem. Overture hides the selected stem. This is a particularly useful feature for tablature notation. For more information about tablature notation, see Chapter , Tablature Button. To show a hidden stem: 1. 2. Select the notes whose stems you wish to show. Choose Notes>Stem>Show Stem. Overture shows the stem for the selected note.

100

Part II: The Score Window

Editing Beams
You can change a beams height or angle simply by dragging it. To change the height of a beam: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the center of a beam. The cursor turns into the Drag Cursor.

2.

Drag the beam up or down to change its height.

dragging beam center up

dragging beam center down

To change the angle of a beam: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over either end of the beam. The cursor turns into the Drag Cursor.

Chapter 8: Score Window

101

Score Window

2.

Drag the end of the beam up or down to change its angle.

dragging beam end up

dragging beam end down

There are three ways to remove beams from a score: Select the Eraser tool and click the beams you wish to remove. See Auto>Eraser Button command on page 119. Using the Arrow Cursor, select those beams you wish to remove (as discussed in Auto>Selecting Notation Symbols command on page 89) and press the delete key. Using the Arrow Cursor, select those beams you wish to remove and use the Notes>Delete>Beams menu command.

You can use one of the Notes>Beam commands to change how notes are beamed, and you can even beam across barlines and across staves. For more information, see Auto>Beam command on page 583.

Editing Rests
Drag any rest to move it. You can even move rests up and down on a staffthis is particularly useful when you notate more than one voice on a single staff.

Move Up

Move Left

Move Right

Move Down

102

Part II: The Score Window

You can nudge rests up, down, left or right in small increments. To do so: 1. 2. Select the rest (or rests) whose position you want to change. Press the up arrow key to nudge rests upward. Press the down arrow key to nudge rests down. Press the left arrow key to nudge rests left, and press the right arrow key to nudge rests to the right.

There are two ways to remove rests from a score: Select the Eraser tool and click the rests you wish to remove. See Auto>Eraser Button command on page 119. Using the Arrow Cursor, select those rests you wish to remove (as discussed in Auto>Selecting Notation Symbols command on page 89) and type the delete key (or choose Edit>Cut or Edit>Clear).

Editing Other Notation Symbols

There are also techniques for editing slurs, ties, glissandos, trill sections, arpeggios, chord symbols, text, and numerous other musical symbols. We discuss each of these when first introducing the symbols in Part III, The Tool Bar.

Adjusting Note Spacing

There are numerous ways to adjust the spacing of notes in the Score window: Drag notes (or groups of notes) to change their position relative to other notes. Nudge notes (or groups of notes) with the arrow keys to make small changes in their position relative to other notes. Display and modify Beat Charts. Change the bar width to expand or contract the spacing of notes in a measure. Automatically position notes. There are three ways to do this: automatically align them with existing Beat Charts upon entry (using the Options>Auto>Justify option).

automatically adjust measure width and spacing based on the current Allotment Table and on the existing Beat Charts (using the Score>Recalc Layout command). The following sections detail each of the preceding techniques.

Chapter 8: Score Window

103

Score Window

automatically calculate new Beat Charts and align existing notes (using the Measures>Justify command).

Dragging Notes
You can drag a note to change its position relative to other notes.

Note:
You must disable Auto>Justify in the Options Menu or the measure must be locked by Control[Command] clicking on the meausures handle to allow notes to be dragged horizontally. If not, they will automatically be repositioned.

Before dragging

Drag a note to change its spacing relative to other notes

After dragging

Also, you can drag any note in a chord to change the horizontal spacing of the entire chord. You can select and drag notes and chords, as well as dynamics, hairpins, text repeats, and Graphics palette objects as a group.

Nudging Notes
You can nudge notes either left or right in small increments. To do so: 1. 2. Select the note (or notes) you want to nudge. Type the left arrow key to nudge the notes to the left. Type the right arrow key to nudge the notes to the right. Each horizontal nudge moves the symbol approximately a single pixel. Overture prints at a resolution of 1/72 of an inch so, at 100% scaling, you can nudge symbols at a resolution of 1/72 of an inch on the printed page.

Using Beat Charts

Instead of dragging individual notes to change their relative spacings, you might find it easier to modify the beat spacing. Overture illustrates a measures beat spacing in a Beat Chart. Beat Charts appear above a measure and mark each beat in the measure with a small rectangular handle.

104

Part II: The Score Window

Use Beat Charts to view the individual beats (or pulses) in a measure and to modify the spacing of those beats. To do so: 1. Using the Arrow Cursor, click anywhere in the desired measure to make it the active measure.

2.

Select Options>Show>Beat Chart. Overture produces a Beat Chart over the active measure.

3.

The upper row of the Beat Chart contains small square handles that represent each beat in the measure. The measure shown above is in 4/4 time, so it contains four handlesone at the start of each beat. Drag one of the beat handles to a new position.

Beat dragged to the right

Notice that the sixteenth notes in the third beat are now closer together, and that there is now more space between the second and third beats.

To hide a Beat Chart: 1. Using the Arrow Cursor, click anywhere in the desired measure to activate it.

Chapter 8: Score Window

105

Score Window

2.

Select Options>Show>Beat Chart. Overture hides the active measures Beat Chart.

Note:
Overture actually displays pulses. Measures usually contain the same number of beats as pulses, but you can use the Set Meter dialog box to set a number of pulses thats different from the number of beats. See Auto>Set Time Signature command on page 541 for more details.

Changing Bar Widths

You can proportionally compress or expand the spacing between all notes in a measure by changing the width of the bar. To do so: 1. Select Options>Show>Handles. This is an optional step. Once you learn where to click on a staff or barline, you wont need to select this option. Handles are always availabletheyre just normally invisible. Selecting this option shows you where to click a staff or barline to edit it.

2.

Drag the desired bars handle to the left or right. The figure shows the middle bar dragged to the left. This results in tighter spacing in the first measure and wider spacing in the second.

Note:
Bar widths also change when you use the Measures>Increase Measures on System or Measures>Decrease Measures on System commands since these actions place a different number of bars on a single, fixed width line. For more information about wrapping measures, see Auto>Increase Measures on System command on page 530 and Auto>Decrease Measures on System command on page 532.

106

Part II: The Score Window

Automatic Justify
There are three ways to space notes automatically in a score. The following discusses the differences between these three automatic note spacing algorithms: Options>Auto>Justify: When you select this option, Overture automatically spaces any new notes that you enter. Overture spaces notes according to the measures existing Beat Chart without changing the width of the measure.

Beat Chart Beats

Overture spaces notes so that they line up with the current Beat Chart.

Notice that collisions can occur, but the rhythm of the piece is visually accurate.

For more information about Beat Charts, see Auto>Using Beat Charts command on page 104. For a detailed discussion of the Options>Auto Justify option, see Auto>Justify command on page 624. Measures>Justify: When you choose this command, Overture calculates a new Beat Chart based on the note values and the amount of space allocated to them in the current Allotment Table. It then spaces notes accordingly (without changing the width of the measure).

Beat Chart Beats

Overture calculates new Beat Charts based on the note values and the current Allotment Table

For more information about Beat Charts, see Auto>Using Beat Charts command on page 104. For a brief description of Allotment Tables, see About Allotment Tables below. For a detailed discussion of the Measures>Justify command, see Auto>Justify command on page 568.

Chapter 8: Score Window

107

Score Window

Notice that collisions can occur, but theyre minimized since the Beat Chart changes to take into account the note values and the current Allotment Table.

Score>Recalc Layout: When you choose this command, Overture calculates a new width for each measure in the score based on the number of Measures per System you specify in the Source>Layout Page dialog box.
Beat Chart Beats

Overture calculates new measure widths and note spacings based on the current Beat Chart and Allotment Table

Notice that collisions disappear since the measure can widen to accommodate all the necessary notes.

For more information about Beat Charts, see Auto>Using Beat Charts command on page 104. For a brief description of Allotment Tables, see About Allotment Tables below. For a detailed discussion of the Score>Recalc Layout command, see Auto>Recalc Layout command on page 513.

About Allotment Tables

Allotment Tables determine the amount of horizontal space occupied by each note on a staff, relative to other note values. For example, its generally desirable to have an eighth note occupy more space than a sixteenth note (though not twice as much space)thus giving some visual feedback as to the rhythm of a piece. You can create and save any number of Allotment Tables. To load an Allotment Table into Overture, simply choose File>Load Library. For more information about creating and editing Allotment Tables, see Auto>Allotment Table command on page 410.

Locked Measures
When youve manually spaced notes in a measure, it is sometimes useful to exclude that measure from being justified or affected by a Score>Recalc Layout command. Overture allows locked measures that maintain their spacing. To lock a measure: 1. Select Options>Show>Handles. Barline and staff handles appear. 2. Control[Command]-click the barline handle to lock the preceding measure. The barline handle turns solid, indicating that it is locked. Control[Command]-click the barline handle again to unlock the measure.

108

Part II: The Score Window

Cursors in the Score Window

Overture uses a number of different cursors depending on the function youre about to perform. The following is a list of Overture cursors that appear in the Score window:
Arrow Cursor: The Arrow Cursor is Overtures basic operating cursor. It may change form when you move it over various tools, symbols, staves, or text. Select the Arrow Cursor by clicking the Arrow Cursor tool in the Tool Bar or by typing the letter c (unless youre in a text entering mode). For more information, see Auto>Arrow Cursor Button command on page 119. Drag Cursor: The Drag Cursor appears automatically any time you move the Arrow Cursor over any symbols edit handle. It indicates that you can edit or drag the symbol. Eraser Cursor: Use the Eraser Cursor to delete musical symbols by clicking them. Select the Eraser Cursor by clicking the Eraser Cursor tool in the Tool Bar or by typing the letter e (unless youre in a text entering mode). For more information, see Auto>Eraser Button command on page 119. Scale Cursor: Use the Scale Cursor to resize notes, staves, clefs and dynamics by clicking them. Select the Scale Cursor by clicking the Scale Cursor tool in the Score mode Tool Bar. For more information, see Auto>Scale Button command on page 121. I-beam Cursor: The I-beam Cursor appears over any editable text. Crosshair Cursor: The Crosshair Cursor appears over the Score window whenever youve selected a symbol to insert. There are three types of crosshair cursors: This crosshair appears when the cursor is directly over a staff and indicates that the action youre about to perform applies to this staff. This crosshair appears when the cursor is above a staff. It indicates that the action youre about to perform applies to the staff immediately below the cursor. This crosshair appears when the cursor is below a staff. It indicates that the action youre about to perform applies to the staff immediately above the cursor.

There are numerous other cursors associated with Overtures Graphic window. For more information about these cursors, see Chapter , Graphic Window (PC) Chapter , Graphic Window (Mac).

Chapter 8: Score Window

109

Score Window

110

Part II: The Score Window

Part III The Tool Bar

The tool bar contains many of the tools and palettes you need for entering and editing scores in the Score window. Use the Tool Bar to: select cursor tools enter notes, rests, ornaments, articulations, and other musical symbols enter and place text set a transcription quantization level

To open the Tool Bar, choose Windows>Tool Bar.

Clefs button Hand Cursor Notes button Noteheads button button Expressions Eraser Cursor Ornaments Dynamics button button Barlines button button button Scrub button Guitar button

Arrow Cursor button

Zoom Cursor button

Groups button

Tablature button

Scale Cursor button

Jazz button

Text button

Articulations button

Staves button Transcription Graphics Quantize button Amount button

Tool Bar Overview

Tool Bar Overview

Anatomy of the Tool Bar

The Tool Bar contains a wealth of buttons and features. We group these into three areas: Cursor buttons Palette buttons Transcription Quantize Amount button

Read the following sections for an overview of each of the three button groups.

Cursor Buttons
Use these Six buttons to change the operational mode of the cursor. Use the Arrow Cursor to select symbols and on the MAC to capture PICT and EPS graphics. Use the Eraser Cursor to delete symbols. Use the Scale Cursor to scale symbols. Use the Hand cursor to drag the entire score around inside the score window. Use the Zoom cursor to Zoom in or Out. Use the Scrub to listen to a passage as you drag the mouse.

Scrub Cursor button Hand Cursor button Hand Cursor button Scale Cursor button Eraser Cursor button Arrow Cursor button

See Chapter 10, Cursor Buttons, for detailed information about each of these buttons.

Palette Buttons
The next fifteen Tool Bar buttons are called palette buttons.

Use palette buttons: to open pop-up tool menus to produce tear-off tool palettes

114

Part III: The Tool Bar

Pop-Up Tool Menus

To open a pop-up tool menu: 1. Press and hold the mouse on a palette button. Overture produces a pop-up menu of related musical tools.

2.

While still holding the mouse button, move the cursor over the desired tool (highlighting it), then release the mouse button.

The icon shown in each palette button changes to show the most recently selected tool.

Chapter 9: Tool Bar Overview

115

Tool Bar Overview

Floating Tool Palettes

You can create a floating palette by tearing off a menu. To tear off a menu: 1. Press and hold the mouse on the desired palette button.

2.

Continue to hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor outside the boundary of the original menu. When you do so, an outline of the menu appears and moves along with the cursor.

3.

Release the mouse button. The menu appears in the position indicated by the outline.

Once you tear off a menu, it becomes a floating palette. Palettes float in front of any open windows on your computer screen. Because of this, they never get hidden by any open windows and their tools are always accessible. To move a floating palette, drag its title bar grab bar. To select one of the tools in a floating palette, move the cursor over the desired tool and click it.

116

Part III: The Tool Bar

To change the shape of the palette, drag an edge (on MAC drag bottom right corner).

You can tuck the palette into an edge of the screen or dock it on (press it against) an edge of the Overture window so it becomes a horizontal or vertical toolbar. (PC Only)

vertical toolbar

Chapter 9: Tool Bar Overview

117

Tool Bar Overview

To add the palette to the toolbar, drag it to the toolbar area.

horizontal toolbar

To close a floating palette, click its close box or button. If the close box isnt visible, tear a new copy off the toolbar button. This removes the old copy. Then click the close button of the new copy. Each Palette button is discussed in its own chapter beginning with Chapter 11, Notes Button, and ending with Chapter 26, Barlines Button.

Transcription Quantize Amount Button

Use this button to set Overtures transcription quantization level. The button always shows the currently selected transcription quantize value.

Transcription Quantize Amount button

See Chapter 27, Transcription Quantize Amount Button, to learn how to use this button.

118

Part III: The Tool Bar

10
Note:

Cursor Buttons
Cursor Buttons

Arrow Cursor Button

Click the Arrow Cursor button to select the Arrow Cursor tool. Use the Arrow Cursor ( drag musical symbols, staves and text.

) to select or

You can type the letter c (for Cursor) to activate the Arrow Cursor (unless youre in one of Overtures text entering modes). If you type the letter c and the Arrow Cursor is already active, Overture selects the last tool you used before selecting the Arrow Cursor tool. This is a great way to toggle between the Arrow Cursor and a specific tool during editing. If you type Esc the cursor will default to the Arrow Cursor.

Eraser Button
Click the Eraser button to select the Eraser tool. The cursor becomes an eraser ( ) when you move it over the Score window. Use the Eraser tool to delete musical symbols by clicking them.

Shortcut:
You can type the letter e (for Eraser) to activate the Eraser tool (unless youre using one of Overtures text-entering tools).

When you delete a note using the Eraser tool, the note is turned into a rest. If you then delete the rest, the timing for notes later in that measure changes by the amount of time in the deleted rest. You alter note timings when you delete a note in either the Score or Graphic Windows.

For example, deleting the third quarter note in a measure with four quarter notes converts the third quarter note into a rest. Deleteing the rest moves the last quarter note earlier by one quarter note. The Graphic Window reflects the altered timing immediately after the deletion; the changed timing is not evident in the Score Window until you justify or transcribe the measure. The figure below illustrates the changed timing after retranscribing the measure.

When you delete this note... ...the note becomes a rest.

When you delete this rest... ...the quarter note occurring after the deleted note move in time by the amount of time deleted.

After retranscribing the measures looks like this.

Overture changes note timings after you delete a note except when you enter notes with the mouse in the Graphic Window but they have not yet been transcribed you record notes in real time but they have not yet been transcribed you delete the last note in a measure

In the first two cases, the notes appear in the Score Window as bars. Deleting the middle note has no effect on the timing of the third note because the note timings are raw and have not been transcribed. The third case doesnt require editing because there are no notes later in the measure to encroach on the time deleted with the note. See Hold Timing on page 630 for avoiding these situations.

120

Part III: The Tool Bar

Scale Button

Click the Scale button to select the Scale tool. The cursor becomes a percent sign ( ) when you move it over the Score window. Use the Scale tool to resize notes, staves, clefs and dynamics. To use the Scale tool: 1. 2. Click the Scale button.

Overture produces the Set Scale Factor dialog box.

3.

Enter the desired scale factor in the dialog box and click the OK button. Overture scales the selected symbol(s) by the indicated factor.

Chapter 10: Cursor Buttons

121

Cursor Buttons

In the Score window, select the staff, notes, clef or dynamics you wish to scale.

Scaling Staves
It is sometimes desirable to create auxiliary staves that are smaller than other staves. Auxiliary staves are often used in chamber music as cue lines, showing what all the instruments are playing. Auxiliary staves are also used to notate suggested alternatives, corrections or embellishments to a section of the score. Overture allows you to scale staves from 25% to 250% of their normal size. To do so: 1. Using the Scale tool, click a staff handle. Staff handles are located at either end of the staff on the middle line. If youre not sure where the staff handle is, select Options>Show>Handles to display it.

click here with Scale tool

2.

Select a scale factor in the Scale Factor dialog box, then click the OK button. Overture scales the selected staff (and all musical symbols on that staff) by the indicated factor.

This staff was scaled to 60% of normal size

122

Part III: The Tool Bar

Scaling Multiple Staves

You can scale multiple staves by dragging a rectangle around the left edge of the staves you want scaled.

1. Using the Scale tool, drag a rectangle around the left edge of each staff you want scaled. 2. Enter a scale factor in the Scale Factor dialog box (this example scales staves by 75%). 3. Overture scales all selected staves by the desired amount.

Scaling Notes
Sometimes alternate passages arent notated on a separate staff, but on the same staff as the main score. This is common in popular vocal music when repeated sections have slightly different melody lines. To indicate the alternate passage, use small notes. Overture allows you to scale notes from 25% to 250% of their normal size. To do so: 1. Using the Scale tool, click a note or drag a rectangle around a group of notes.

Overture opens the Set Scale Factor dialog box. 2. Select a scale factor in the Scale Factor dialog box and click the OK button. Overture scales the selected note(s) by the indicated factor.

Scaled notes to indicate alternate passage

Chapter 10: Cursor Buttons

123

Cursor Buttons

Its also common to use small notes to indicate rapid note passages or other types of melodic ornamentation.

Scaling Clefs
To scale clefs: 1. Using the Scale tool, click a clef. You cannot scale the first clef in a score; you can only scale clefs in the middle of a score. 2. Select a scale factor in the Scale Factor dialog box and click the OK button. Overture scales the selected clef by the indicated factor.

Scaling Dynamics
Sometimes different voices on a staff have different dynamics levels. You can scale the various dynamic markings to indicate more clearly which dynamics refer to which voice. To do so: 1. 2. Using the Scale tool, click a dynamics marking (or draw a rectangle around a group of dynamics). Select a scale factor in the Scale Factor dialog box and click the OK button. Overture scales the selected dynamic(s) by the indicated factor.

Hand Button

Click the Hand Cursor button to select the Hand Cursor tool. Use the Hand Cursor ( ) to drag the score within the score window. If the hand is over a staff the cursor changes to a drag staff cursor and the staff can be moved horizontally or vertically.

124

Part III: The Tool Bar

Zoom Button

Click the Zoom Cursor button to select the Zoom Cursor tool. Use the Zoom Cursor ( ) to Zoom in or Out in the score. If you single click, the score will be zoomed in. If you press the Control key, the cursor is used to Zoom Out. If you click and drag a selection rectangle, the score will be zoomed to show just the area within the rectangle.

Scrub Button
Cursor Buttons
125

Click the Scrub Cursor button to select the Scrub Cursor tool. Use the Scrub Cursor ( ) to audition a passage in a track. Click and drag on a staff to hear the notes play as the mouse moves over the note.

Chapter 10: Cursor Buttons

126

Part III: The Tool Bar

11
Notes Rests

Notes Button

The Notes button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Notes Button

Tuplet Augmentation Dot Double Augmentation Dot Triple Augmentation Dot Accidentals Grace Note

Shortcut:
If youre not in one of Overtures text-entering modes and you type the letter p, Overture opens the Notes palette and places it directly underneath your cursor. If the Notes palette is already open, typing p moves the open palette directly under your cursor, no matter where it is on the screen.

Notes Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Notes button to open the Notes pop-up menu. To create a floating palette, tear it off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge[Mac:bottom right edge].

Tool Overview
The Notes palette above contains the following tools: Notes: Select one of these tools to insert a note of that value. The palette contains (from left to right): double whole note, whole note, half note, quarter note, 8th note, 16th note, 32nd note, 64th note, 128th note. Rests: Select one of these tools to insert a rest of that value. The palette contains (from left to right): double whole rest, whole rest, half rest, quarter rest, 8th rest, 16th rest, 32nd rest, 64th rest, 128th rest. Accidentals: Select one of these tools to insert an accidental. The palette contains (from left to right): sharp, flat, natural, double sharp, double flat, courtesy sharp, courtesy flat, courtesy natural, courtesy double sharp, courtesy double flat. Control[Command]-click a note with an Accidental tool to apply that accidental to all notes of the same pitch for the remainder of the measure.

Clicking an accidental without the Control[Command] key held down applies to that note only. Control[Command]-click an accidental applies it to all notes of same pitch in the same measure

Augmentation Dots: Select one of the three augmentation dot tools to turn the selected note or rest tool into a dotted note or rest. Tuplet: Use this tool to turn the selected note or rest tool into a tuplet whose value was last defined in the Tuplets dialog box. The default tuplet value is a triplet. We discuss the Tuplets dialog box in Tuplet on page 591. Grace Note: Use this tool to insert a grace note into your score. See Grace Notes on page 133 for more information.

128

Part III: The Tool Bar

Using the Notes Palette

Use the Notes palette to insert notes, rests, or accidentals. You can use the Notes palette with the mouse or with a combination of the mouse and the keyboard.

Mouse Entry Method

To insert notes, rests or accidentals using only the mouse: 1. Select the voice youd like to enter from the Voice pop-up voice menu at the bottom of the Score window. Alternatively, you could type Control[Command]-1 through Control[Command]-8 to select voices 1-8. If you type Control[Command]-0, Overture displays all voices but enters notes only in Voice 1. 2. Select the desired symbol from the Notes palette (or pop-up menu). Here are three examples: note selection; rest selection; and accidental selection. When you select an accidental, the note remains selected if Attach Note Palette Accidentals is checked in the Preferences dialog. This is used to insert a note with an accidental at the same time.

Selecting a Note Tool

Selecting a Rest Tool

Selecting an Accidental Tool

Chapter 11: Notes Button

129

Notes Button

3.

Move the cursor to where you want to place the symbol. The cursor becomes a note (with accidental if also selected) when you move it over the Score window. We discuss all the different cursor types in Cursors in the Score Window on page 109. Position notes both vertically and horizontally. If Auto>Justify is checked in the Options menu, then horizontal placement is automatically justified according to the measures Beat Chart and the note might not be inserted exactly where you click. Spacing within beats is determined by the current Allotment Table. Position rests horizontally within the staff. If you have checked Auto>Justify in the Options menu, then Overture automatically justifies horizontal placement according to the measures Beat Chart and might not insert the rest exactly where you click. The current Allotment Table determines spacing within beats. If the cursor is an accidental without a note, position the accidental by clicking on the note to which you wish to apply the accidental.

Placing Cursor to Insert a C

Placing Cursor to Insert a rest

Placing Cursor to Insert an accidental

4.

Click the mouse to insert the symbol in the score.

Inserted Note

Inserted Rest

Inserted Accidental

Entering Notes in the Clef Above or Below the Track

It is occasionally useful to enter notes in a different clef without changing the tracks clef. For example, in a grand staff, bass notes that temporarily move into the treble clef register are better represented in the treble clef than by either ledger lines or changing the bass to a treble clef while those notes are active. Overture provides a method for entering notes that are displayed on another staff: Enter all the notes on one track and then select the notes to be displayed on another track. Choose the Notes>Display on Prev Staff or Note>Display on Next Staff menu command.

Understanding the distinction between where notes appear and which track owns them is crucial when you edit a track. For example, double-clicking to select all notes in a tracks measure does not select a note that appears in that track but is owned by the track above or below.

130

Part III: The Tool Bar

Keyboard and Mouse Entry Method

You can use keyboard shortcuts to select tools from the Notes palette without using the mouse. The table below shows the relationship between keys and Notes palette values.

Key 0 1 2 4 8 6 5 3 . r s f n g

Function Select breve note Select whole note Select half note Select quarter note Select eighth note Select sixteenth note Select thirty-second note Toggle triplet on or off Toggle augmentation dot on or off Toggle between note or rest Select accidental sharp tool Select accidental flat tool Select accidental natural tool Toggle grace note on or off

To enter notes using a combination of the keyboard and the mouse: 1. Select the voice youd like to enter from the Voice pop-up voice menu at the bottom of the Score window. Alternately, you could type Control[Command]-1 through Control[Command]-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control[Command]-0 to select all voices. 2. Type the number key corresponding to the duration of the note you wish to enter. For example, to select an eighth note, type 8. 3. Position the cursor in the score and click. Overture enters the note in your score.

Chapter 11: Notes Button

131

Notes Button

To enter dotted notes using a combination of the keyboard and the mouse: 1. Type the number key corresponding to the duration of the note you wish dotted, then type the period key. For example, to enter a dotted sixteenth note, type 6, then type.. 2. Position the cursor in the score and click. Overture enters a dotted note in your score. To enter rests using a combination of the keyboard and the mouse: 1. Type the number key corresponding to the duration of the rest you wish to enter. For example, if you wanted to insert an eighth note rest, type an 8. 2. 3. Type an r to specify that you want to enter a rest of this value. Position the cursor in the score and click. Overture enters the rest in your score. You can enter dotted rests by typing the period key as described previously. To convert notes to rests: 1. 2. Select the note you want to convert. Type r. Overture converts the note to a rest of the same duration. To enter accidentals using a combination of the keyboard and the mouse: 1. 2. Type the keyboard equivalent for your desired accidental: s to select an accidental sharp, f to select an accidental flat, n to select an accidental natural. Click the note to which you want to assign the accidental. Overture enters the accidental next to the note. MIDI playback recognizes accidentals and plays them at their proper pitch.

132

Part III: The Tool Bar

Grace Notes
Grace notes require a special entry method because their notation does not automatically dictate an actual MIDI playback duration. To enter grace notes: 1. From the Notes palette, select the note tool that corresponds to the playback duration of the grace note you wish to enter. For example, if you want your grace note to play as though it were a 128th note, select the 128th note tool. Obviously, if you select a note of greater duration (like an eighth note or quarter note), the grace note will not actually sound like a grace note in MIDI playback. 2. 3. Click the Grace Note tool to select it (or type g). Move the cursor to the desired position in the score and click. Overture enters a standard grace note in the score and inserts a MIDI note of the selected value into the track. or: 1. 2. Select the note to be made into a grace note. Type g. Overture changes the note to a grace note both in the score and in the MIDI track.

Cautionary Accidentals
Normally, an accidental affects only the pitch to which its assigned and only for that measure. Because of this, Overture does not insert accidentals before any other affected pitches in the measure. If, however, you wish to apply cautionary accidentals to other affected notes: 1. 2. Select the desired accidental tool from the Notes palette. Alt[Option]-click the note to which you wish to apply the cautionary accidental.

Chapter 11: Notes Button

133

Notes Button

Changing Existing Note Values

You can change the value of any note in a score by selecting it, then selecting a new note value from the Notes palette. For example, to change a quarter note into an eighth note: Move the Arrow Cursor over the desired note in the score. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned over a note. Click the note to select it. If you want to change more than one note, you can shift-click multiple notes to select them.

Selected quarter note

Type the keyboard equivalent for the note value to which you wish to change the selected note(s). In this example, you would type 8 to change the selected note into an eighth note.

Effect of Changing Note Values on MIDI Duration

Overture intelligently decides whether or not to change the MIDI duration of an altered note based on how you entered that note into Overture. Specifically: If you recorded the note in real-time or imported it from a MIDI file or Vision file, Overture does not change the MIDI duration of the altered note, thus preserving the feel of the piece. If you entered the note in any other way, for example from the Notes palette or using the Step Input window, Overture changes the MIDI duration of the note to 90% of its new notated value.

To adjust the MIDI note duration manually, use either the Graphic window (as discussed in Common Selection and Editing Techniques on page 313) or Notes>Modify Notes (as discussed in Modify on page 575).

134

Part III: The Tool Bar

12
tie dotted tie ottava sign (up one octave) ottava sign (down one octave) full pedal sign

Groups Button

The Groups button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Groups Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Groups button to open the Groups pop-up menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge[Mac:bottom right edge].
dotted slur slur insert wavy straight glissando glissando reapply tuple to group group as new tuplet bracket parenthesized brace notes harp pedal half pedal sign sign

Tool Overview
Overture groups notes differently depending on the type of tool you selected. The following describes each of the tools in the Groups palette: Slur. Use this tool to create a slur across a selected group of notes. Using this tool is the same as grouping notes and choosing Notes>Group>Slur. Dotted Slur. Use this tool to create a dotted slur across a selected group of notes.

Groups Button

Tie. Use this tool to tie together any notes of common pitch within a selected group. Using this tool is the same as grouping notes and choosing Notes>Group>Tie. MIDI playback recognizes tied notes and plays them properly. Dotted Tie. Use this tool to tie together any notes of common pitch within a selected group. MIDI playback recognizes tied notes and plays them properly. Insert Straight Glissando. Use this tool to create a straight line glissando between two adjacent notes. Using this tool is the same as selecting two notes and choosing Notes>Group>Glissando -. Insert Wavy Glissando. Use this tool to create a wavy line glissando between two adjacent notes. Using this tool is the same as selecting two notes and choosing Notes>Group>Glissando ~. Group as New Tuplet. Use this tool to group selected notes into a tuplet of any kind. This tool produces a Tuplets dialog box in which you define the value, style, and characteristics of the tuplet. We discuss the Tuplets dialog box in Tuplet on page 591. Using this tool is the same as grouping notes and choosing Notes>Group>Tuplet. Reapply Tuplet to Group. Use this tool to group selected notes into the type of tuplet last defined by the Tuplets dialog box. This tool makes it easy to apply common tuplet values quickly to many groups of notes. Half Pedal Sign. Use this tool to instruct the pianist to press the damper pedal down at the beginning of the sign and release it halfway at the half pedal mark (the raised bump). Move the half pedal mark by placing the cursor over the mark (the drag cursor appears), and dragging it to the desired location. Ottava va Sign. Use this tool to insert an ottava sign over the selected notes. An 8va ottava sign indicates that notes under the sign are to be played one octave higher than written. Ottava vb Sign. Use this tool to insert an ottava sign under the selected notes. An 8vb ottava sign indicates that notes above the sign are to be played one octave lower than written. Full Pedal Sign. Use this tool to tell the pianist to press the damper pedal down at the beginning of the sign and release it at the end. Move the pedal mark by putting the cursor over the sign. The drag cursor appears. Drag the sign to the new location. Harp Pedal Sign. Use this tool to enter and edit Salzedo Harp pedal positions. You can also double-click the harp pedal symbol to open the Harp Pedal Settings dialog box. See The Harp Pedal Settings Dialog Box on page 144.

Parenthesized Notes Sign. Use this tool to enclose selected notes and chords in parentheses. Bracket Sign. Use this tool to group notes where you have written some information about them. Brace Sign. Use this tool to group lyric verses.

136

Part III: The Tool Bar

Using the Groups Palette

Use the Groups palette to group notes into slurs, glissandos, tuplets or ties. To use the Groups palette: 1. Select the type of group you want from the Groups palette.

2.

Drag a rectangle around the notes you want grouped.

3.

Release the mouse button. Overture groups the notes with the selected musical symbol. The group symbol has editing handles so you can move or reshape the symbol immediately after inserting it.

Chapter 12: Groups Button

137

Groups Button

4.

Click elsewhere in the score or select another tool to hide the editing handles.

Editing Ties
You can reshape and reposition any tie in a score. To change the height of a tie symbols arc: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the center of a tie. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.

2.

Drag the center vertically to change the arc of the tie symbol.
drag vertically to change the arc of a tie

To change the position of either endpoint on a tie symbol: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over either end of a tie. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.

2.

Drag the end to change its position in the score.

drag vertically to change distance between the tie symbol and note heads

drag horizontally to lengthen or shorten the tie symbol

138

Part III: The Tool Bar

To flip the arc direction of a tie symbol: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the center of a tie or either of its endpoints. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly. 2. Click the tie with the Drag Cursor. Overture selects the tie and displays its three editing handles.

3.

Choose Notes>Flip>Direction. Overture flips the arc direction of the tie.

4.

Reposition the tie mark as desired.

To nudge a tie up or down: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over a tie. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly. 2. Click the tie with the Drag Cursor. Overture selects the tie and displays its three editing handles. 3. Press an arrow key (left, right, up, or down) to nudge the arc in the indicated direction.

Editing Slurs
You can reshape and reposition any slur in a score. Each slur has four editing handles that allow you to bend a slur into most any shape. This section discusses how to edit slur symbols in a score. Slurs have four editing handles: one at each end of the slur and two control points positioned away from the curve.

Chapter 12: Groups Button

139

Groups Button

To change the shape of a slur: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the arc of a slur. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor.

2.

Drag the cursor to change the shape of the slur. You can reposition either endpoint by dragging it. You can change the slurs curvature by dragging anywhere else along the arc. Overture reshapes the slur as though you had actually dragged its control point.
1. Drag anywhere along the slur to change its curvature. Overture reshapes the curve as if you had dragged the nearest edit handle.

You can even create S-shaped slurs by pushing and pulling on the slur and its endpoints.

To flip the arc direction of a slur symbol: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the arc of a slur. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor.

140

Part III: The Tool Bar

2.

Click the slur with the Drag Cursor. Overture selects the slur and displays its four editing handles.

3.

Choose Notes>Flip>Direction. Overture flips the arc direction of the slur.

Editing Glissandos
You can change the length and slope of any glissando. Editing methods are identical for both the straight glissando and the wavy glissando. To change the length or angle of a glissando: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over either end of the glissando. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.

To change the vertical or horizontal position of a glissando: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the center of the glissando. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly

Chapter 12: Groups Button

141

Groups Button

2.

Drag the end either vertically or horizontally to change the slope and/or length of the glissando.

2.

Drag vertically or horizontally to change the position of the glissando.

dragging glissando vertically

dragging glissando horizontally

Editing Tuplets
Overture allows you to insert many different styles of tuplets, but all can be repositioned and reshaped by dragging their editing handles. Editing handles for straight-line tuplet markers are positioned on the corners and immediately below the number.

drag this handle to change the position of the tuplet number symbol drag this handle to change the height, length or slope of the tuplet beam drag this handle to lengthen/shorten the vertical part of the tuplet beam

Editing handles for curved tuplet symbols are positioned around the curve and are used like slur editing handles.
drag any of these handles to reshape the tuplet curve

drag this handle to change the position of the tuplet number symbol

Complex Tuplets
Overture has two complex tuplet figures: nested tuplets mixed duration tuplets.

142

Part III: The Tool Bar

Nested Tuplets
Use nested tuplets to play the triplet figure below.

To create this nested triplet figure: 1. 2. 3. Enter one eighth note, three sixteenth notes and one eighth note. Use the tuplet tool to convert the three sixteenth notes into a three-in-the-time-oftwo tuplet figure (conventional triplet). Use the tuplet tool again to convert the eighth notes and the sixteenth note triplet figure into a three-in-the-time-of-two tuplet figure. The nested tuplet pattern results. The three sixteenth note triplets occupy the same amount of time as one eighth note of the triplet figure because the sixteenth notes were already a triplet when they were nested into the enclosing eighth note triplet figure.

Mixed Duration Tuplets

You can convert a selection containing different durations into a tuplet. Overture calculates the resulting durations as if each duration were the only duration being converted. For example: 1. 2. Enter one eighth note, two sixteenth notes and one eighth note. Use the tuplet tool to convert the entire four note passage into a three-in-the-timeof-two tuplet figure (conventional triplet). Overture creates the mixed duration tuplet shown below.

The two sixteenth notes occupy the same amount of time as one eighth note of the triplet figure because they were not triplets prior to their inclusion in the eighth note triplet figure.

Chapter 12: Groups Button

143

Groups Button

The Harp Pedal Settings Dialog Box

Double click the harp pedal symbol to open the Harp Pedal Settings dialog box. This dialog box provides an easier environment to manipulate the settings. Changes made to the Harp Pedal Settings dialog box affect only the symbol being edited, not subsequent insertions of harp pedal markings. Individual harp pedal markings can be copied and pasted.

Display Type: Graphic. Display pedal settings as graphic. Letter. Display pitch names for pedals. Letter-Split. Display pitch names for pedals on two lines. Change. Display pitch names for pedal changes. Pedal Settings: Up. The pitch for that string is flatted. Middle. The pitch for that string is natural. Down. The pitch for that string is sharp. The string pitches are, from left to right: D, C, B, E, F, G, A. The vertical line divides the first three pitches, controlled by the left foot, from the last four, controlled by the right foot.

144

Part III: The Tool Bar

Ottava Dialog Box

Double-click on an ottava sign in the Score window to open the Insert Ottava dialog box.

You can move the Insert Ottava dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar. MIDI playback recognizes ottava markings and transposes notes accordingly. The left half of the dialog box has three radio buttons where you can select the type of ottava sign you wish to insert: 8va. Select this type to insert an ottava sign over the selected notes. An 8va ottava sign indicates that notes under the sign are to be played one octave higher than written. 8vb. Select this type to insert an ottava sign under the selected notes. An 8vb ottava sign indicates that notes over the sign are to be played one octave lower than written. 15ma. Select this type to insert an ottava sign over the selected notes. A 15ma ottava sign indicates that notes under the sign are to be played two octaves higher than written.

The right half of the dialog box has a series of check boxes and radio buttons that you use to determine the appearance of the inserted ottava sign: Courtesies (8va). If an ottava sign extends across more than one line, checking this option causes a courtesy mark to be placed in parentheses at the beginning of each additional line. va, vb, ma. Checking this option places the va, vb, or ma indications after the transposition number in the inserted ottava sign. Brackets. Checking this option places a bracket after the ottava sign that extends all the way to the end of the selected region, where it ends in a downstroke to indicate the end of the passage. Use brackets when an ottava sign extends over more than one note. If your ottava sign applies to only a single note, do not check the brackets option. There are two types of brackets: Dashed and Dotted. Select the dashed option if you want your bracket to be a dashed line. Select the dotted option if you want your bracket to be a dotted line.

Chapter 12: Groups Button

145

Groups Button

Editing Brackets and Braces

Use brackets and braces to enclose a group of notes. To enter and edit a horizontal bracket: 1. Drag over the notes you wish to group and release the mouse.
to create

2.

Drag the control points to change the slope and/or length of the bracket.

To enter and edit a vertical brace or bracket: 1. Click on the top note of the group ( or in white space) and release the mouse.

2.

Drag the control points to change the slope and/or length of the bracket.

to create

Note:
When dragging notes, the bracket end points will move relative to the notes position.

146

Part III: The Tool Bar

13
Insert Trill 2 Insert Trill 1 Insert Inverted Long Mordent

Ornaments Button

The Ornaments button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Ornaments Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Ornaments button to open the Ornaments pop-up menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge[Mac:bottom right edge].

Insert Trill Section

Insert Inverted Short Mordent

Insert Turn

Insert Short Mordent

Insert Fingerings

Insert Accidental for Trills

Ornaments Button

Tool Overview
The following describes each of the tools in the Ornaments palette: Insert Trills. There are six trill tools. Use the trill 1 and trill 2 marks to indicate a trill (some scores use different trill marks to indicate different trill directions or trill intervals). Use the Trill Section tool to insert a scalable trill section. Use the three Trill Accidental tools to indicate accidentals in a trill mark. Using the Trill Tools on page 149 discusses all of these tools in detail. Insert Mordents. There are three Mordent tools. Although there are sometimes different schools of thought, generally the short mordent indicates that you play the first three notes of a downward trill; the inverted mordent indicates that you play the first three notes of an upward trill; and the inverted long mordent indicates that you play the first five notes of an upward trill. Select the appropriate tool to create the desired mordent. Insert Turn. Use this tool to create a turn (similar to the concluding four notes in a trill). Insert Fingerings. There are five fingering tools that you can use to indicate which finger should play a particular note.

Using the Ornaments Palette

Use the Ornaments palette to place ornaments over individual notes. To use the Ornaments palette: 1. Select an ornament tool from the Ornaments palette.

2.

In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the ornament. If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the ornament in its default position.

If you press and hold the mouse on a note, you can manually place the ornament by dragging it before you release the mouse button.

148

Part III: The Tool Bar

If you hold down the Alt[Option] key when you click a note, Overture forces the ornament to go above the note. If you hold down the Control[Command] key when you click a note, Overture forces the ornament to go below the note.

Ornamenting Multiple Notes

The ornament tool remains selected after you insert an ornament. This allows you to insert multiple ornaments of a similar type. Additionally, you can apply the same ornament to all the notes in a contiguous group. To do so: 1. 2. Select an ornament tool from the Ornaments palette. Drag a rectangle around all the notes you wish to ornament.

Overture automatically places the ornament on all selected notes.

Deleting Ornaments
There are two ways to delete ornaments: Click an ornament with the Eraser Cursor. Select notes with ornaments attached to them and choose Notes>Delete>Articulations. For more information, see Delete on page 582.

Using the Trill Tools

The following sections discuss how to use Overtures Trill tools.

Chapter 13: Ornaments Button

149

Ornaments Button

Inserting a Trill Mark

To insert a trill over a note: 1. Select one of the two Trill tools from the Ornaments palette.

2. 3.

Move the cursor over the desired note. Click the note. Overture places the selected trill symbol over the note.

You can force a trill mark to go above a note by holding down the Alt[Option] key when you insert it. You can force a trill mark to go below a note by holding down the command key when you insert it.

MIDI Note:
Trill marks affect MIDI playback. Double click on the inserted trill to change its settings box.

Inserting a Trill Mark with a Trill Section

Many scores contain the tr mark along with a trill section. To insert a tr mark with a trill section: 1. 2. 3. Select one of the two Trill tools from the Ornaments palette. Move the cursor over the desired note. Press and hold the mouse. The tr mark appears over the note.

150

Part III: The Tool Bar

4.

While still holding the mouse button, drag the mouse to the right. Overture begins creating a trill section immediately following the tr mark.

5.

Release the mouse button when the trill section is the desired length. Overture inserts the tr mark along with a trill section.

Adding a Trill Section to an Existing Trill Mark

Overture lets you add a trill section to an existing tr mark. To do so: 1. Select the Trill Section tool from the Ornaments palette.

2. 3.

Move the cursor over the note to which you wish to add the trill section. Press and hold the mouse button. The trill section appears at its automatic placement position.

4. 5.

Release the mouse. Overture inserts the trill section.

Trill section dragged to the right to lengthen it

Chapter 13: Ornaments Button

151

Ornaments Button

While still holding the mouse button, drag the mouse to the right or left to lengthen or shorten the trill section.

Editing Trills
You can reposition any trill mark by dragging it. To move a tr mark: 1. 2. Select the Arrow Cursor. Move the mouse over a tr mark in your Score window. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.

3.

Drag the mark to reposition it. If you move a tr mark with a trill section beside it, your edits affect both the tr and the trill section. Specifically, if you move the tr mark vertically, the trill section also moves vertically. If you move the tr mark horizontally, the length of the trill section changes.

If you want to move a trill section up or down without moving the tr mark: 1. 2. Select the Arrow Cursor. Move the mouse over the center of a trill section. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.

3.

Drag up or down to reposition the trill.

Trill section dragged up

152

Part III: The Tool Bar

If you want to change the length of a trill section without moving the tr mark: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over either the right or left end of a trill section. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.

2.

Drag horizontally to change the length of the trill section.

Right end of trill section dragged to the right, lengthening the existing trill section.

Inserting an Accidental into a Trill Mark

Some trills require accidental signs. These should appear between the tr and the trill section.

To insert an accidental in the trill marking: 1. Select the desired Accidental tool from the Ornaments palette.

2. 3.

Move the cursor over the note to which you wish to add the accidental mark. Press and hold the mouse button. Youll see an accidental mark appear over the note.

Chapter 13: Ornaments Button

153

Ornaments Button

4. 5.

While still holding the mouse button, drag the mouse to position the accidental between the tr and the trill section. Release the mouse. Overture inserts the accidental for the trill mark.

Tweaking the Appearance

If you like, you can create a gap between the tr and the trill section, then move the accidental mark into the gap. To do so: 1. Select the Arrow Cursor and move it over the left end of the trill section. The cursor becomes a Drag Cursor.

2.

Drag the left end of the trill section to the right. This produces a bigger gap between the tr and the trill section.

3.

Drag the accidental mark into the gap.

154

Part III: The Tool Bar

Setting Trill Playback

Double click on a trill to open the Set Trill dialog box.

About the Set Trill Dialog Box

Use the Set Trill dialog box to define how the trill is to affect playback.

Interval Section
Use this section to set the interval to Diatonic, Half Step, or Whole Step. If you wish to have the second note played first, set the Auxiliary First check box.

Rate Section
Use this section to choose the rate the trill is played. Dont Trill - Use this to disable playing the trill. 1/8 - 1/64 Use this to set the duration of each note in the trill. Clocks - Use this to set of the actual number of clocks for each note. Acceleration - Use this to create a trill that accelerates.

Send Options
Use the Send Options portion of the Articulation dialog box to send controller data and key switches to the output device, or even change to another voice within the track.

Send Key Switch Send Controller Data Switch to a another voice

Chapter 13: Ornaments Button

155

Ornaments Button

You can send key switch data to VST players to switch instruments or modes. You can send controller data to changes MIDI settings or access effects in VST instruments. You can tell Overture to use the playback charactersitics of another voice within the Tracks Window. This is useful for sample libraries that do not use keyswitches.

Change All Options

Check these boxes to apply these settings to all of the articulations.

Using the Mordent Tools

To insert a mordent into a score: 1. Select the desired Mordent tool from the Ornaments palette.

2.

In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the mordent marking. If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the mordent in its default position.

If you press and hold the mouse on a note, you can drag the mordent to position it manually.

You can force a mordent to go above a note by holding down the Alt[Option] key when you insert it. You can force a mordent to go below a note by holding down the Control[Command] key when you insert it.

156

Part III: The Tool Bar

Setting Mordent/Turn Playback

Double click on a mordent or turn to open the Set Mordent/Turn dialog box.

About the Set Mordent/Turn Dialog Box

Use the Set Mordent/Turn dialog box to define how the mordent or turn is to affect playback.

Playback Section
Use this to set the pattern of notes to be played. If you want the mordent/turn to play, set the Play check box. If you wish to have the second note played first, set the Lower Mordent/Turn check box.

Send Options
Use the Send Options portion of the Articulation dialog box to send controller data and key switches to the output device, or even change to another voice within the track.

Send Key Switch Send Controller Data Switch to a another voice

You can send controller data to changes MIDI settings or access effects in VST instruments. You can tell Overture to use the playback charactersitics of another voice within the Tracks Window. This is useful for sample libraries that do not use keyswitches.

Change All Options

Check these boxes to apply these settings to all of the articulations.

Chapter 13: Ornaments Button

157

Ornaments Button

You can send key switch data to VST players to switch instruments or modes.

Using the Fingering Tools

To insert a finger marking into a score: 1. Select the desired Finger tool from the Ornaments palette.

2.

In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the finger marking. If you click a notehead and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the fingering in its default position.

If you press and hold the mouse on a note, you can drag the finger mark to position it manually. You can force a finger mark to go above a note by holding down the Alt[Option] key when you insert it. You can force a finger mark to go below a note by holding down the Control[Command]l key when you insert it.

158

Part III: The Tool Bar

The Articulations button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Articulations Button

Articulations But

14

Articulations Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Articulations button to open the pop-up Articulations menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge[Mac:bottom right edge].

Marcato Heavy Attack/ Full Duration Sforzando with Staccato Inverted Sforzando Staccatissimo Tenuto Down Bow Inv. Down Bow Tremolo 1 Tremolo 3 Natural Harmonic Plus Inv. Fermata Up Petal Grand Pause Heel Pedal Heel-to-Toe

Marcato w/ Staccato Sforzando Heavier Attack/ Full Duration Inverted Sforzando with Staccato Staccato Up Bow Inv. Up Bow Arpeggio Tremolo 2 Tremolo 4 Artificial Harmonic Fermata Down Petal Pause Toe Pedal Toe-to-Heel

160

Part III: The Tool Bar

Articulations Palette Tools

Tenuto. Use this symbol to indicate a pressure accent. Staccato. Use this symbol to indicate a short, light accent. Staccatissimo. Use this symbol for exaggerated staccato. This marking indicates a stronger effect than simple staccato, though is still a light accent. Marcato. Use this symbol for moderate accents. This is stronger than a Staccatissimo. Marcato with staccato. Use this symbol for short, moderate accents. Sforzando. Use this symbol for heavy accents. This is stronger than a Marcato. Inverted Sforzando. This symbol has the same effect as the Sforzando, but is used below notes. Sforzando with staccato. Use this symbol for very strong, short, percussive accents (hammered). This is stronger than a Sforzando. Inverted Sforzando with staccato. This symbol has the same effect as the Sforzando w/staccato, but is used below notes. Heavy Attack/Full Duration. Use this symbol for very strong, full duration accents. This is stronger than Sforzando w/staccato. Heavier Attack/Full Duration. Use this symbol for excessively strong, full duration accents. This is the strongest accent. Down Bow. Use this symbol in string notation to indicate down bows. Inverted Down Bow. This symbol has the same effect as the Down Bow, but is used below notes. Up Bow. Use this symbol in string notation to indicate up bows. Inverted Up Bow. This symbol has the same effect as the Up Bow, but is used below notes. Natural Harmonic. Use this symbol to indicate that the note is to be played as a natural harmonic. Artificial Harmonic. Use this symbol to indicate that the note is to be played as an artificial harmonic. For example, use this symbol to indicate changing nut position with the first finger while holding harmonic with the fourth finger. Plus. Use this symbol with different instruments to indicate different articulation effects. For example, use this symbol with woodwinds to indicate notes are to be played with a key click; use it with brass to indicate hand stopping; use it with strings to indicate pizzicato notes played with the left hand; or use it in jazz scores to indicate a du. Tremolo 1. If indicating a measured tremolo, place this symbol on a note to indicate an eighth note tremolo. If indicating an unmeasured tremolo, use this symbol to indicate a tremolo in a very fast passage.

Chapter 14: Articulations Button

161

Articulations But

The Articulations palette contains the following tools:

Tremolo 2. If indicating a measured tremolo, place this symbol on a note to indicate a sixteenth note tremolo. If indicating an unmeasured tremolo, use this symbol to indicate a tremolo in a fast passage. Tremolo 3. If indicating a measured tremolo, place this symbol on a note to indicate a thirty-second note tremolo. If indicating an unmeasured tremolo, use this symbol to indicate a tremolo in a moderate tempo passage. Tremolo 4. If indicating a measured tremolo, place this symbol on a note to indicate a sixty-fourth note tremolo. If indicating an unmeasured tremolo, use this symbol to indicate a tremolo in a slow passage. Down Pedal. Use this symbol in piano notation to mark the depression of the damper pedal. MIDI controller for sustain on will be sent. Up Pedal. Use this symbol in piano notation to mark the release of the damper pedal. MIDI controller for sustain off will be sent. Toe Pedal. Use this symbol in organ notation to indicate use of the toe. Heel Pedal. Use this symbol in organ notation to indicate use of the heel. Toe-to-Heel. Use this symbol in organ notation to indicate switching from toe to heel. Heel-to-Toe. Use this symbol in organ notation to indicate switching from heel to toe. Pause (Comma). Use this symbol to indicate a very brief pause (such as the length of a breath).

162

Part III: The Tool Bar

Grand Pause (Caesura). Use this symbol to indicate a pause at the end of a long phrase or section. This marking indicates a longer pause than a comma. Convention dictates that you always place a pause through the top space of a staff. Fermata. Use this symbol to indicate a long held note or a long pause. Inverted Fermata. This symbol has the same effect as a Fermata, but is used below notes. Arpeggio. Use this symbol next to a chord to indicate an arpeggio.

MIDI Note:
Any of the symbols inserted with the articulation tools can affect MIDI playback. To set the playback double click on the symbol. The default playback settings are found in the Score>Articulations on page 516 menu.

Using the Articulations Palette

Use the Articulations palette to place articulations (such as staccato, bowing, and pedal marks) into your score. To use the Articulations palette: 1. Select an articulation tool from the Articulations palette.

2.

In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the articulation. If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the ornament in its default position.

If you press and hold the mouse on a note, you can manually place the ornament by dragging it before you release the mouse button. If you hold down the Alt[Options] key when you click a note, Overture forces the articulation to go above the note. If you hold down the Control[Command] key when you click a note, Overture forces the articulation to go below the note.

Chapter 14: Articulations Button

163

Articulations But

Articulating Multiple Notes

The articulation tool remains selected after you insert an articulation. This allows you to insert multiple articulations of a similar type. Additionally, you can apply the same articulation to all the notes in a contiguous group. To do so: 1. 2. Select an articulation tool from the Articulations palette. Drag a rectangle around all the notes you wish to articulate.

Overture automatically places the articulation on all selected notes.

You can also apply an articulation to any set of selected notes. To do so: 1. 2. Select the notes you want to modify. Tear off the palette. This is very important. The feature only works when the palette has been torn off. 3. Control[Command]-click on the desired tool. All selected notes change immediately to reflect the tool used.

Editing Notes with Attached Articulations

In most instances, if you edit a note or stem direction, Overture automatically repositions any attached articulations based on the notes new position and stem direction. For example, assume you had the music shown below, and you wanted to flip the stem direction of the first two notes.

164

Part III: The Tool Bar

1.

Select the notes.

2.

Choose Notes>Stem>Stem Down. Notice that Overture not only flips the stem direction, but moves the staccato articulations to the correct side of the note head.

Chapter 14: Articulations Button

165

Articulations But

Editing Articulation Playback

Double click any articulation to display its Articulation Playback dialog.

Please read the section on Score>Articulations on page 516 to learn about the settings.

Deleting Articulations
There are two ways to delete articulations: Click an articulation with the Eraser Cursor. Select notes with articulations attached to them and choose Notes>Delete>Articulations. For more information, see Score>Delete on page 582.

166

Part III: The Tool Bar

Using the Arpeggio Tool

To insert an arpeggio: 1. Select the arpeggio tool from the Articulations palette. The cursor becomes a crosshair when you move it over the Score window. 2. Click any note in a chord. Overture places an arpeggio mark to the left of the chord that spans the entire length of the chord.

3.

If you need to move the arpeggio symbol, drag the top of it to a new location. Overture repositions the arpeggio wherever you release the mouse button.

4.

If you need to resize an arpeggio, drag the bottom of it to the desired length. Overture lengthens or shortens the wavy arpeggio line when you release the mouse button.

If you add notes to or delete notes from an arpeggiated chord, Overture automatically resizes the arpeggio to span the entire length of the chord.

Using the Tremolo Tools

The tremolo tools contained in the Articulations palette are for bowed (or single note) tremolos. If you want to create tremolos between notes of different pitch, youll need to use tremolo beams. We discuss these in Score>Tremolo Beams on page 584.

Chapter 14: Articulations Button

167

Articulations But

To create a single note tremolo: 1. Select the desired tremolo tool from the Articulations palette.

Overture offers four different tremolo tools. We discuss these four tools in Score>Articulations Palette Tools on page 161. 2. In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the tremolo. If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the tremolo in its default position.

If you press and hold the mouse on a note, you can manually place the tremolo by dragging it before you release the mouse button. You can add tremolos to a contiguous group of notes by dragging a rectangle around them. MIDI playback is affected by tremolo symbols. Single slashes result in 8th note tremolos. Double slashes result in 16th note tremolos; triple slashes in 32nd note tremolos, and quadruple slashes in 64th note

168

Part III: The Tool Bar

tremolos. You can change the default playback of the tremolo by double clicking on the tremolo and using the Articulations Playback Dialog. For more information see Score>Articulations on page 516.
NOTATION MIDI PLAYBACK

Using the Pause Tools

Put pause marks, unlike other symbols in the articulations palette, not directly above or below a note, but in the space where the pause is to occur. To put either a pause or a grand pause into a score: 1. 2. From the Articulations palette, select either Pause tool. In the Score window, press and hold the mouse on the note you want to pause after. Overture, by default, shows the pause over the note. 3. While still holding down the mouse button, drag the pause to the right to position it in the score. Commas go above the staff to the right of the note. Grand pauses go through the top space of the staff to the right of the note.

4.

Release the mouse button to complete the insertion.

Chapter 14: Articulations Button

169

Articulations But

5.

Double click on the pause to set its playback.

Play 3 clocks after its logical time in the bar

Set pause to 1/2 second

170

Part III: The Tool Bar

15
Standard Head Rhythmic Slash Closed Rhythm Closed Slash Closed Do Closed Re Closed Mi Closed Fa Closed Sol Closed La Closed Ti

Noteheads Button
Noteheads Button

The Noteheads button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Noteheads Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Noteheads button to open the pop-up Noteheads menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right edge].

Invisible Head Percussion Open Rhythm Open Slash Open Do Open Re Open Mi Open Fa Open Sol Open La Open Ti

Tool Overview
The following describes each of the tools in the Noteheads palette: Standard Head. This is a standard note head. Use this tool if you want to convert a shaped head back into a standard head. Invisible Head. Use this tool to make noteheads invisible. The stem and flags remain; only the notehead disappears. Rhythmic Slash Head. Use this head to notate guitar or other strummed instrument parts. Generally, this head is used to indicate strumming with a specific rhythm. This head usually has a stem, but no pitch indication. Percussion Head. Use this head to notate percussion parts. Open & Closed Rhythm Heads. Use these heads to notate rhythm parts. Open rhythm heads represent whole notes and half notes; closed rhythm heads represent quarter notes and smaller. Open & Closed Slash Heads. Use these heads to notate guitar or other strummed instrument parts. Generally, these heads are placed without stems or pitch, in the center of a staff. The open slash head represents whole notes and half notes; the closed slash head represents quarter notes and smaller. Picture Music Heads (Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Ti). Use these shaped notes to indicate pitch. Open symbols represent whole notes and half notes; black symbols represent quarter notes and smaller. This notation system is most commonly used in gospel music.

172

Part III: The Tool Bar

Using the Noteheads Palette

To change the shape of a notehead: 1. Select a notehead tool from the Noteheads palette.

2.

Position the cursor over the note whose head you wish to change. The cursor becomes a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.
Click here to change notehead

3.

Click the desired note. Overture automatically changes the notehead.

Notehead changes to selected shape

Chapter 15: Noteheads Button

173

Noteheads Button

There are actually two fa heads although only one appears in the Noteheads palette. Notation uses different fa heads depending on whether the stem points up or down. Overture automatically uses the correct fa head depending on stem direction.
fa head with upward stem fa head with downward stem

To change the shape of multiple notes: 1. 2. Select the notes you want to modify. Tear off the palette. This is very important. The feature only works when the palette has been torn off. 3. Control[Command]-click on the desired tool. All selected notes change immediately to reflect the tool used.

174

Part III: The Tool Bar

16

Tablature Button

The Tablature button always shows the number of the most recently selected fret.

Tablature Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Tablature button to open the pop-up Tablature menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right edge].

Tablature Button

Tool Overview
Each tool in the Tablature palette corresponds to a guitar fret number, where 0 is an open string, 1 is the first fret, 2 is the second fret, etc.

Using the Tablature Palette

Use the Tablature palette to replace standard noteheads with fret numbers on a tablature staff. Click one of the numbers in the Tablature palette and then click on the note head. Overture replaces the standard notehead with the fret number. To replace the multiple selected notes with fret numbers: 1. 2. Select the notes you want to modify. Tear off the palette. This is very important. The feature only works when the palette has been torn off. 3. Control[Command]-click on the desired tool. All selected notes change immediately to reflect the tool used.

Creating Tablature - Manually

Assume you want to notate the following score in tablature notation.

The next few sections outline a step-by-step procedure for creating tablature notation for the figure above.

176

Part III: The Tool Bar

Creating a Tablature Staff

You must first create a tablature staff. To do so: 1. Click on the staff where you want the Tablature staff to follow and then choose the Score> Insert Track menu command.

Tablature Staff

2.

Click on the Tablature radio button. Click on the After current track radio button if you want the tablature staff to appear below the current staff.

Chapter 16: Tablature Button

177

Tablature Button

3.

Choose OK. Overture inserts a new tablature staff.

Each line in a tablature staff represents a guitar string. The lowest line represents the low E-string, the next line up represents the A-string, and so on. Alternatively, if your score contains an unused staff, you can click within it to select it, choose Score>Setup Track, then use the Setup Track dialog box to select an Instrument Name of Tablature. See Setup Track on page 490. Also, you can create tablature staves for instruments such as four-string and five-string bass guitars by designing custom staves (as discussed in Staff Display Options on page 500).

178

Part III: The Tool Bar

Creating Tablature Notation

Now that your score contains a tablature staff, you can begin filling it with notation. 1. Using the Notes palette, enter all the notes onto the tablature staff using the correct durations. When you click on the guitar string, a note will be entered with with no stem and a 0 for the note head indicating an open string. Continue to hold the mouse button down and drag up to increase the number until you reach the desired fret number. To enter a rest, choose the desired rest duration and click on the staff. The rest will automatically be hidden. Remember to place notes on the line that represents the guitar string on which you want the note played.

2.

If you want to show note stems and beams, select the notes and choose Notes>Stem>Show Stem. Then select the notes and choose Notes>Beam. Overture shows the stems, flags, and beams.

3.

You can also change a fret number by selecting a fret number from the Tablature palette, and then clicking the notes you wish to change. Overture replaces standard noteheads with the fret number you select.

Chapter 16: Tablature Button

179

Tablature Button

See also Notes to Tablature on page 609.

Note:
MIDI playback does not play tablature staves, nor do MIDI transpose commands change their pitch. If you want MIDI playback of a tablature staff, you must create an additional staff that contains traditional notation. If desired, you can then hide the traditionally notated staff in your printed score by using the Score>Hide/Show Staves command as discussed in Hide/Show Staves on page 485.

180

Part III: The Tool Bar

17

Guitar Button

The Guitar button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.Press and hold the mouse on

Guitar Button

the Tablature button to open the pop-up Guitar menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right edge].

Guitar Button

Tool Overview
The Guitar palette contains symbols to accurately notate guitar music. The finger markings and string numbers suggest the finger or string used to play the notes to which they are applied. The vibrato marking pops up to allow selection of symbols to denote other effects related to vibrato. You must tear the palette off to see the pop-up menu

finger markings

string numbers

pre-bend, release over time tremolo

pre-bend pre-bend, release

bend up bend up/release bend up/release over vibrato (or other effects) continue until pop-up menu

barre at fret number

String Bend Markings

You can enter string bend markings into the score without needing to associate them with a note. Each bend marking includes a bend range number signifying the number of half steps the note is bent. Alt[Command]-drag the number to alter it within the allowable bend range of -3 to 3 steps. The default bend is 1/2 step and the resolution is within 1/4 steps.

bend range set at 1/2 step...

...then Alt[Command]dragged to 1 1/4 steps

182

Part III: The Tool Bar

When you enter a bend marking, dragging to the right extends the area in which the marking pertains. Select a bend marking by dragging a rectangle around it with the arrow cursor, or position the cursor over the marking until you see the drag cursor.

Edit the shape of the bend by dragging the edit handles. You can move selected bend markings using the arrow keys. Position the mouse over the left end of the bend until you see the drag cursor and Alt[Command]-drag to move the bend marking. You can move the bend range number independently of the bend marking by positioning the cursor over the number until you see the drag cursor and dragging the number. To summarize the bend markings: Pre-bend. Bend the string prior to sounding the note. Pre-bend, release. Bend the string prior to sounding the note, then release it to its normal pitch during the notes duration. Pre-bend, release over time. Bend the string prior to sounding the note, then release it to its normal pitch during the time contained within the dotted marking. Bend up. Bend the string up after sounding the note. Bend up/release. Bend the string up and then release it during the note. Bend up/release over time. Bend the string up and then release it during the time contained within the dotted marking.

Barre at Fret Number

Chapter 17: Guitar Button

183

Guitar Button

Enter the barre at fret number symbol by selecting it in the Guitar palette and clicking in the Score Window.

Double-clicking the barre at fret number symbol in the Score Window (not in the Guitar palette) opens the Barre Settings dialog box.

Use the Barre Settings dialog box to create bar at fret number symbols similar to the one shown below
Fret Number

Dashed Line

Amount

Bracket Type

The Barre Settings dialog box has numerous elements, as follows:

Type
These radio buttons represent different conventions for showing barre and fret positions. The three barre settings options in the Type section represent different notation conventions. Showing the B, C, or no letter differentiates the options in the Type section; the 1/2 is an example of the Amount (number of strings barred), and II is an example of the fret number referenced. You can edit the actual barre Amount and fret numbers in the Score Window, as described below.

Show
Barre markings that are extended over time appear with a line that can be Solid, Dashed, or Dotted. Selecting the Brackets option ends the line with a downward pointing bracket. Alt[Command]-dragging the bracket end in the Score Window toggles Brackets on and off. If you deselect Brackets, the line still appears with its selected attribute but with no ending bracket.

Amount
The barre symbol can reference the following groups of strings: All. Barre all strings. No marking is shown to denote this option. 1/6. Barre the highest string.

184

Part III: The Tool Bar

1/3. Barre the 2 highest strings; same as 2/6. 1/2. Barre the 3 highest strings; same as 3/6. 2/3. Barre the 4 highest strings; same as 4/6 5/6. Barre all strings except the lowest string.

Changing the Fret or Amount

Alt[Command]-dragging the barre at fret mark horizontally changes the fret. It does not change the Amount setting. Alt[Command]-dragging the barre at fret mark vertically changes the Amount setting. It does not change the fret number. The direction first Alt[Command]-dragged constrains which function you are editing. This eliminates inadvertent changes to either setting. For example, Alt[Command]-dragging first in a vertical direction changes only the Amount setting, even if you also drag horizontally.

Chapter 17: Guitar Button

185

Guitar Button

186

Part III: The Tool Bar

18
Ghost Note Rudiment Right Sticking Left Sticking

Drums Button

The Drums button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Drums Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Drums button to open the Drums pop-up menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge[Mac:bottom right edge].

Circle

Plus

Up Stroke Arrow Down Stroke Arrow

Ornaments Button

Tool Overview
The following describes each of the tools in the Drums palette: Rudiment. Use this tool to attach a rudiment to the note. Ghost Note. Use this tool to indicate that the note is a ghost note. Circle. Use this tool to place a circle on the head side of the note. Plus. Use this tool too place a plus on the head side of the note. Left Sticking. Use this tool to indicate to use the left hand for the stroke. Right Sticking. Use this tool to indicate to use the right hand for the stroke. Up Stroke Arrow. Use this tool to indicate to use an up stroke. Down Stroke Arrow. Use this tool to indicate to use a down stroke.

Using the Drums Palette

Use the Drums palette to attach drum rudiments and articulations to individual notes. To use the Drums palette: 1. Select an drum tool from the Drums palette.

2.

In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the drum rudiment or articulation. If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the drum rudiment or articulation in its default position.

188

Part III: The Tool Bar

Placing on Multiple Notes

The drum tool remains selected after you insert a rudiment or articulation. This allows you to insert multiple rudiments or articulations of a similar type. Additionally, you can apply the same drum rudiment or articulation to all the notes in a contiguous group. To do so: 1. 2. Select an drum tool from the Drums palette. Drag a rectangle around all the notes you wish to place the drum rudiment or articulation on.

Overture automatically places the drum rudiment or articulation on all selected notes.

Deleting Drum Rudiments

There are two ways to delete rudiments: Click an rudiment or articulation with the Eraser Cursor. Select notes with articulations attached to them and choose Notes>Delete>Articulations. For more information, see Delete on page 582.

Chapter 18: Drums Button

189

Ornaments Button

Using the Drum Tools

The following sections discuss how to use Overtures Drum tools.

Inserting a Drum Rudiment

To attach a drum rudiment to a note: 1. Select the drum rudiment tool from the Drums palette.

2. 3.

Move the cursor over the desired note. Click the note. Overture attaches the selected rudiment to the note.

4.

To change the number of strokes for the rudiment, click and hold on the rudiment tool to open the popup menu and choose the number of strokes.

5. 6.

Move the cursor over the desired note. Click the note. Overture attaches the selected rudiment to the note.

MIDI Note:
Drum rudiments affect MIDI playback and are played as grace notes.

190

Part III: The Tool Bar

Inserting a Drum Articulation

To attach a drum articulation to a note: 1. Select the desired drum articulation tool from the Drums palette.

2.

In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the drum articulation marking. If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the drum articulation in its default position.

You can insert the opposite sticking without changing tools by holding down the Alt[Option] key when you insert it.

Chapter 18: Drums Button

191

Ornaments Button

192

Part III: The Tool Bar

19
lift rip, wah wah slide, pick scrape, gliss down flip bend plop

Jazz Articulations Button

The Jazz Articulations Palette always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Jazz Button

slide, pick scrape, gliss up fall off spill, stab, fall off smear doit wow wow, shake, grow, lip trill, wide lip trill

When the palette is floating, a menu pops up for these articulations, allowing you to change the texture of the line

Press and hold the mouse on the Jazz Articulations button to open the pop-up Jazz Articulations menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right edge].

Jazz Button

Tool Overview
The Jazz Articulations palette contains symbols commonly used for jazz notation. You can drag some of them to encompass more than one note; you can reposition all. The pop-up menu contains line textures and shapes to designate different intensities you can associate with their articulations. Most of the signs have more than one name and meaning. Consult a jazz notation text to learn more about the terminology and use of jazz articulations. Here is a brief summary of terms: Lift. Enter note via chromatic or diatonic scale beginning about a third below Slide. Slide up to a note Rip. Same as lift Fall off. Opposite of lift Flip. Sound note, raise pitch and drop into following note Smear. Slide into note from below; reach correct pitch before the next note Bend. Waver rapidly on indefinite pitches Doit. Sound note then gliss upwards from 1 to 5 steps Plop. Slide rapidly down diatonic scale before sounding the note Shake. Vary the tone upwards, much as you do for a trill. Sustain note with vibrato, tremolo, or feedback effect.

194

Part III: The Tool Bar

The Dynamics button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Dynamics Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Dynamics button to open the pop-up Dynamics menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right edge].

pianissississimo pianissimo mezzo-piano forte fortississimo sforzando sforzato sforzando piano hairpin crescendo text

pianississimo piano mezzo-forte fortissimo fortissississimo forzando forte piano sforzando piano double hairpin decrescendo text

Dynamics Button

20

Dynamics Button

Tool Overview
The Dynamics palette contains two types of dynamics tools: Absolute Dynamics tools. use these tools to mark absolute levels of the dynamic scale (such as pp, mf, ff). Hairpin tools. use these tools to mark gradual changes in the levels of the dynamic scale (the hairpin crescendo and hairpin decrescendo).

Using Absolute Dynamics Tools

The following sections discuss how to insert, copy, and edit dynamic markings and how to define the playback of the markings.

Inserting Dynamic Markings

To insert an absolute dynamic marking: 1. Select the desired absolute dynamics tool from the Dynamics palette. The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer when you move it over the Score window.

Select a tool...

... then position the cursor

2.

Position the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the dynamic marking and click. Overture places the selected dynamic marking at that horizontal point and at the Dynamics baseline (see Dynamic Positions).

Inserted dynamic marking

196

Part III: The Tool Bar

To insert a dynamic mark into all displayed staves in a system: 1. 2. Select the desired absolute dynamics tool from the Dynamics palette. Control[Command]-click the score. Overture adds the selected dynamic mark to all displayed staves in the system.

Control[Command]-click here...

...to add a dynamic mark to all staves in the system

To insert a dynamic mark into all displayed staves in a system as long as they have notes in that measure: 1. Select the desired absolute dynamics tool from the Dynamics palette.

Chapter 20: Dynamics Button

197

Dynamics Button

2.

Alt[Option]-click the score. Overture adds the selected dynamic mark to all displayed staves in the system as long as that measure has notes in it.

Alt[Option]-click here...

...to add dynamic mark to all staves in the system if the measure has notes in it

Repositioning Dynamic Markings

To reposition a dynamics mark: 1. 2. Click the Arrow Cursor button to select the Arrow Cursor (or type C on the keyboard). Drag the desired symbol to its new location. Control[Command]-click to select more than one dynamic mark. Shift-drag dymanics to constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction (whichever way you first move the mouse when beginning to drag). You can select dynamics, as well as text, hairpins, repeats, chords, and Graphics palette objects, as a group and then drag them all to a new position. You can drag dynamics anywhere, but they retain their track assignments. To change the track assignments, delete and reinsert them.

198

Part III: The Tool Bar

Copying Dynamic Markings

To copy a dynamics mark: 1. 2. Click the Arrow Cursor button to select the Arrow Cursor (or type c on the keyboard). Control[Option]-drag to copy individual dynamics to another place. Control[Command]-click to select more than one dynamic mark on the same track. Shift-Control[Option]-drag to copy the dynamic and constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged.

Playback of Dynamic Markings

You can use dynamic markings to affect MIDI playback. To do so: 1. Choose Options>Preferences. Overture opens the Preferences dialog box.

2.

Click the Dynamics tab. The Dynamics tab moves to the front.

3. 4.

Set the default values for each dynamic marking. Click OK.

Chapter 20: Dynamics Button

199

Dynamics Button

Using Crescendos and Decrescendos

The following sections discuss how to insert and copy crescendo and decrescendo marks and how to edit their appearance.

Crescendo Text
You can display crescendo and decrescendo signs as words instead of as symbols. Choose the appropriate expression from the Expressions palette or the Dynamics palette

Inserting a Hairpin
To insert a hairpin crescendo or decrescendo: 1. Select the hairpin tool from the Dynamics palette. The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer when you move it over the Score window. 2. 3. Move the cursor to where you want the hairpin to start, then press and hold the mouse. Drag the mouse left to right to the point where you want the hairpin to end, then release the mouse. Overture creates a crescendo.

3.

OR Drag the mouse from right to left. Overture creates a decrescendo.

200

Part III: The Tool Bar

To insert a crescendo followed by a decrescendo: 1. Select the double hairpin tool. The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer when you move it over the Score window. 2. 3. Move the cursor to where you want the symbol to start. Drag from left to right. Overture creates a crescendo followed by a decrescendo.

To insert a decrescendo followed by a crescendo: 1. Select the double hairpin tool. The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer when you move it over the Score window. 2. 3. Move the cursor to where you want the symbol to end. Drag from right to left. Overture creates a decrescendo followed by a crescendo.

Editing a Hairpin
To move or reposition the hairpin: 1. 2. Click the Arrow Cursor button to select the Arrow Cursor (or type c on the keyboard). Move the mouse into the open end of the hairpin. The cursor becomes a Drag Cursor. 3. Click to select the hairpin.

Chapter 20: Dynamics Button

201

Dynamics Button

4.

Drag the handle at the closed end of the hairpin to change the slope of the hairpin.

Drag this point up/down to change the hairpins slope. or... Drag it left/right to change the hairpins length.

5.

Drag either open ended hairpin handle to open or close the opening of the hairpin. Alt[Command]-drag either of the open ended hairpin handles to move just that stem of the hairpin.
Drag a point to open the hairpin

or...

Alt[Command]-drag a handle to move just one hairpin stems

6.

Drag anywhere within the open part of the hairpin to reposition it in the score.
Drag within the open part to move the entire hairpin

You can select hairpins, as well as dynamics and rehearsal notes and drag them as a group. You can drag hairpins anywhere, but they keep their track assignments. To change track assignment, delete and reinsert them.

202

Part III: The Tool Bar

Copying a Hairpin
To copy the hairpin:

1. 2.

Click the Arrow Cursor button to select the Arrow Cursor (or type c on the keyboard). Move the mouse into the open end of the hairpin. The cursor becomes a Drag Cursor.

3. 4.

Click to select the hairpin. Control[Option]-drag anywhere within the open part of the hairpin to copy it to the place you want. Shift-Control[Option]-drag to copy the hairpin and constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged.

The Edit Dynamic Dialog Box

Double-click a dynamic in the Score Window to open the Edit Dynamic dialog box.

In the Edit Dynamic dialog box, press and hold the mouse on the Dynamic field to open a pop-up menu showing all the dynamics settings. Set the Value field to the desired setting. Set the type of playback to Velocity or Controller. For Controller, choose the Controller Type in the popup menu. Set the Use Voice to switch to another voice (channel). Select the Play option to use the selected setting during playback. Select on all voices to have the dynamics playback on all voices. This is useful for Piano Tracks, where the dynamic is between the two staves and applies to both staves. Select the Change all of this type option to change other dynamics of the selected type to the selected settings.

Chapter 20: Dynamics Button

203

Dynamics Button

The Edit Hairpin Dialog Box

Double-click a hairpin in the Score Window to open the Edit Hairpin dialog box.

Set the type of playback to Velocity or Controller. Set the Value fields to start, middle, and ending values to be used during playback. Optionally choose a Dynamic to be displayed at the start or end of the hairpin. Select the Play option to use the settings during playback. Select the Change all of this type option to change other hairpins of the selected type to the selected Values setting. Overture plays hairpins by sending the MIDI controller data or by changing the note velocities over the duration of the hairpin.

204

Part III: The Tool Bar

Playback of Hairpins

MIDI Volume
50 60 70 80 90 100 110

50

70

90 100 110

Note Velocity If the type is Velocity, Overture changes the velocity of the notes covered by the range of the hairpin. If the type is Controller, Overture plays the hairpin by sending these values for the specified controller over the range of the hairpin. Overture interpolates values between the specified values to give a smooth transition.

Note:
If you choose Score>MIDI Data Mode and the type is Controller, the hairpin values are shown as straight lines with control points. To change a value, drag the values control point vertically.

Chapter 20: Dynamics Button

205

Dynamics Button

Double-click a hairpin in the Score Window to open the Edit Hairpin dialog box. Enter the values to be played and select the type of playback. Overture plays hairpins by sending MIDI volume or by changing note velocities over the duration of the hairpin. In the example below using the values of 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, and 110, if Controller>Volume is selected, the following MIDI volume values will be sent at the shown measure positions. If Velocity is selected, each note will be played with the velocity shown.

206

Part III: The Tool Bar

21
Insert Bar Text Insert Rehearsal Mark Insert Lyric Text

Text Button

The Text button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Text Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Text button to open the pop-up Text menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right edge].

Insert System Text Insert Page Text

The Text Style toolbar becomes available whenever youve selected one of the Text tools. Use this standard toolbar to assign a font to the selected text and to define its size and style.

Font Style Buttons

Font Alignment Transparent & Buttons Opaque Button

Font and Size Popup Menus

Verse Popup Menu

See Title Page on page 522 of your Overture Users Guide for a more automated way to put various kinds of text on your score.

Text Button

Tool Overview
The following describes each of the tools in the Text palette: Insert Bar Text. This tool inserts text anchored to a specific measure on a specific staff. Insert System Text. This tool inserts text anchored to the top of a system and to a specific measure. If you re-arrange a system, the text always stays at the top of the system. Insert Rehearsal Mark. This tool inserts rehearsal marks in your score. Rehearsal marks are enclosed in boxes and are anchored to a specific measure and a relative staff location. Insert Page Text. This tool inserts text anchored to a specific page. This is useful for titles, headers and footers. Insert Lyric Text. This tool inserts lyrics anchored to notes. Lyrics move with the notes they are attached when the measure is being justified or you drag a note horizontally.

Using Bar Text

Use bar text for written instructions that apply only to a particular measure and staff. Overture attaches bar text to both a specific measure and a specific staff as illustrated below: Bar Text and Measure Example If you create bar text above the second measure and then insert a new measure before it, the text now appears above the third measure since it stays attached to its original measure.

Original Line

Same Line after inserting a new second measure

Bar Text and Staff Example If you create bar text on the third staff and then insert two staves above it, the text now appears on the fifth staff since it stays attached to its original measure.

208

Part III: The Tool Bar

Inserting Bar Text

To insert bar text: 1. Select the Bar Text tool from the Text Palette.

2.

In the Score window, drag a rectangle where you want to position the bar text. Overture creates an empty text box in your Score window.

3.

Type the desired information into the text box.

4.

To assign a font, drag across the text with the I-beam cursor. Select the desired font characteristics from the Font, Size, and Style menus Font toolbar.

5.

To complete the insertion, select a different tool or click outside the text box.

Repositioning, Copying, and Editing Bar Text

To reposition bar text: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the bar text. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text. 2. Drag the bar text to a new location. This repositions the text and attaches it to the new measure.

Chapter 21: Text Button

209

Text Button

To copy bar text: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the bar text. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text. 2. Control[Option]-drag to move a copy of the bar text to a new place. Shift-Control[Option]-drag to copy the bar text and constrain movement of the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged. To edit bar text: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the bar text. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text. 2. Double-click the bar text. Overture displays the text box and I-beam cursor. 3. Change the text, font or box size as desired.

Using System Text

Use system text for written instructions that apply to all staves in a system. Overture attaches system text to a specific measure and to the top staff as illustrated below: System Text and Measure Example If system text is above the ninth measure and you insert eight measures at the beginning of the score, the system text now appears above the 17th measure since it stays attached to its original measure. System Text and Staff Example If you enter system text above the first staff, then add a staff above that, the system text moves to the topmost staff since system text always appears on the upper staff. No matter where you insert system text, it always appears on the top staff.

Note:
If you extract parts from a score that contains system text, each and every extracted part displays the text, since system text applies to all instruments in a system. For more information about extracting parts, see Extract Parts on page 453.

210

Part III: The Tool Bar

Inserting System Text

To insert system text: 1. Select the System Text tool from the Text Palette.

2.

In the Score window, drag a rectangle where you want to position the system text. Overture creates an empty text box in your Score window.

3.

Type the desired information into the text box at the cursor.

4.

To assign a font, drag across the text with the I-beam cursor. Select the desired font characteristics from the Font, Size, and Style menus Font toolbar.

5.

To complete the insertion, select a different tool or click outside the text box.

Repositioning, Copying, and Editing System Text

To reposition system text: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the system text. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text. 2. Drag the text to a new location. This repositions the text and attaches it to the new measure. You can select and drag text, as well as dynamics, hairpins, repeats, chords, and Graphics palette objects, as a group. To copy system text: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the system text. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text.

Chapter 21: Text Button

211

Text Button

To resize the text box, drag its lower right corner. To reposition it, drag its upper left corner.

2.

Control[Option]-drag to move a copy of the text to a new place. Shift-Control[Option]-drag to copy text and constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged.

To edit system text: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the system text. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text. 2. Double-click the text. Overture displays the text box and I-beam cursor. 3. Change the text, font or box size as desired.

Using Rehearsal Marks

Use rehearsal marks to mark a score in various places (such as at certain tempo, key or meter changes, or at the entrance of prominent solo instruments). Overture attaches rehearsal marks to a specific measure and a relative staff as illustrated below: Rehearsal Mark and Measure Example If a rehearsal mark is above the ninth measure and you insert eight measures at the beginning of the score, the rehearsal mark now appears above the seventeenth measure (since it stays attached to its original measure). Rehearsal Mark and Staff Example If you enter a rehearsal mark above the first staff, then add three more staves above it, the rehearsal mark appears on the topmost staff (since it maintains its relative staff position).

Inserting Rehearsal Marks

To insert rehearsal marks: 1. Select the Rehearsal Mark tool from the Text Palette.

2.

In the Score window, drag a rectangle where you want to position the rehearsal mark. Overture creates an empty text box in your Score window.

212

Part III: The Tool Bar

3.

Type your rehearsal mark into the text box. Generally, rehearsal marks consist of a single number or letter. To resize the text box, drag its lower right handle. To reposition it, drag its upper left handle.

4.

To assign a font, drag across the text with the I-beam cursor. Select the desired font characteristics from the Font, Size, and Style menus Font toolbar.

5.

To complete the insertion, select a different tool or click outside the text box. Overture creates a rehearsal mark, which consists of a rectangular box surrounding the text you entered.

Repositioning and Editing Rehearsal Marks

To reposition a rehearsal mark: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the rehearsal mark. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text. 2. Drag the rehearsal mark to a new location. This repositions the text and attaches it to the new measure.

You can drag a rehearsal mark anywhere, but it keeps its track assignment. To change its track assignment, delete it and reinsert it. To edit a rehearsal mark: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the rehearsal mark. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text. 2. Double-click the rehearsal mark. Overture displays the text box and I-beam cursor. 3. Change the text, font or box size as desired.

Chapter 21: Text Button

213

Text Button

Using Page Text

Use the Title Page dialog box to insert titles, instructions, composer credits, copyright notices, headers, and footers. See Title Page on page 522 for a detailed description of how to use the Title Page dialog box. Use Page text to insert any addtional text to be displayed on the page. You can position Page Text anywhere on the page.

Inserting Page Text

To insert page text: 1. Select the Page Text tool from the Text Palette.

2. 3. 4.

In the Score Window, drag a rectangle where you want to position the Page Text. Select the type of Page Text you want, as well as specific pagination options. To assign a font, drag across the text with the I-beam cursor. Select the desired font characteristics from the Font, Size, and Style menus.

5.

To complete the insertion, select a different tool or click outside the text box.

Repositioning, Copying, and Editing Page Text

To reposition page text: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the page text. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor unless one of the text tools is selected, in which case, the cursor becomes an I-beam. 2. Drag the text to a new location.

You can select and drag text, as well as dynamics, hairpins, repeats, chords, and Graphics palette objects as a group.

214

Part III: The Tool Bar

To copy page text: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the page text. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor unless one of the text tools is selected, in which case, the cursor becomes an I-beam. 2. Option-drag to move a copy of the text to a new place. Shift-option-drag to copy page text and constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged. To edit page text: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the page text. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text. 2. Double-click the text. Overture displays the text box and I-beam cursor. 3. Change the text, font or box size as desired.

To edit page text characteristics by reopening the Page Text dialog box: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the page text. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text. 2. Option-double-click the text. Overture opens the Page Text dialog Box. 3. Configure the Page Text dialog box as desired and click the OK button.

Chapter 21: Text Button

215

Text Button

Using Lyric Text

Use lyric text for attaching words or syllables to notes. Overture attaches lyric text to a specific note and a specific voice as illustrated below: When you select the Lyric Tool, the Text Style ToolBar will open. This is where you choose the font and verse for inserted lyrics. Lyrics are best added after the other symbols have been added and spacing and alignment for each system has been performed. This is not essential but can eliminate extra editing when the measure spacing changes due to changes in the measure.

Inserting Lyric Text

To insert lyric text: 1. Select the Lyric Text tool from the Text Palette.

2.

Click below the note to receive the first lyric. A blinking cursor will appear under the note you clicked. If the blinking cursor is to close to the note head, drag the lyric position indicator at the left edge of the staff. While dragging the indicator a horizontal dotted line will appear for reference After adjusting the lyric position indicator you will need to click again near the starting note for your lyrics. Overture places a blinking cursor below the note.

Blinking Cursor Lyric Position Indicator 3. Type the desired lyric text.

Type spaces to separate words and hyphens to separate syllables. 4. To assign a font, drag across the lyric with the I-beam cursor. Select the desired font characteristics from the Font, Size, and Style menus on the Text Style Toolbar. 5. To complete the insertion, select a different tool or click outside the staff where there are no notes.

216

Part III: The Tool Bar

Adding Additional Lyric Verses

To add another verse: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click outside the staff where there are no other notes. Change the Verse on the Text Style Bar to Verse 2. Click below the note to receive the next verse. A blinking cursor will appear under the note below the first verse. Type the desired lyric text as before. To complete the insertion, select a different tool or click outside the staff where there are no notes.

The Font, Size, and Style menus become available whenever youve selected one of the Text tools. Use the Text tool bar to assign a font to the selected text, and to define its size and style.

Transparent Text
Text entered with any text tool can be either transparent or opaque. You can select which style you prefer by choosing either Style>Transparent or Style>Opaque. The differences between the two text styles are outlined as follows: Transparent Text: Select this style if you want staves and musical symbols to be visible behind the text.

Opaque Text: Select this style if you want the text to completely cover the staves and musical symbols behind it.

Chapter 21: Text Button

217

Text Button

Font, Size, and Style

218

Part III: The Tool Bar

22

Expressions Button

The Expressions button always contains the icon for the Expression tool.

Expressions Button

Expressions Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Expressions button to open the pop-up Expressions menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right edge].

Using the Expressions Palette

The Expressions button contains a palette of commonly used musical terms. You can enter expressions anywhere in the Score Window and do not need to apply them to notes as you do other palette tools. Expressions are, however, owned by the track in which you enter them. Moving an expression to another track changes its ownership. When you finish moving or entering an expression, the track indicator (see Status Bar: Page View and Track Controls on page 70) shows the track that owns the expression. You can create additional Expressions libraries or edit the existing library. Store additional Expressions Libraries in the Libraries folder, located in the folder that contains Overture. Specify the library to load when launching Overture in Libraries Preferences. Load another library during an Overture session by choosing File>Load Library. You can play expressions by assigning them a controller and value, tempo, or patch.

Click the up scroll arrow to scroll up through the list of expressions

Click the down scroll arrow to down through the list of expressions

220

Part III: The Tool Bar

The Edit Expression Dialog Box

Double-click an expression in the Score Window to open the Edit Expression dialog box shown below. You can edit expressions here for changes that are not general enough to make in the library.

Appearance
The options in the top half of the dialog box determine how the expression appears. Set the Font, Size, and Style attributes in the same manner as in other Overture dialog boxes. Select text style attributes by using the Style pop-up menus. You can change the text for that expression in the Edit Expression dialog box without affecting future uses of that expression from the palette. You can use this technique to create an expression that doesnt exist in the library by changing the text to the new expression. You can permanently alter the text for that expression in the Expression Library by choosing File>Edit Library>Expressions and changing the text in the library. You can also insert to add expressions or delete expressions from the library. Select Extract On All Tracks to include that expression with any extracted track. Select Print Text to print the expression when that track is selected for printing.

Chapter 22: Expressions Button

221

Expressions Button

Some expressions span several notes. A line shows the time in which the expression is active. Use the Line Type option to configure how the line appears. The End Cap option determines how the line terminates. The various options are illustrated in the figure below.
Solid line, no end cap Dashed line, end cap up Dotted line, end cap down Dashed line, end cap up and down

Click an expression to select it and shows its handles. Drag the handle at the end of the line to change its length. Double-clicking the expression in the palette that has been torn off, opens a similar dialog box without the Print Text, Line Type, and End Cap options. Those options are specific to either the track in which you enter the expression or the type of line present in the expression; you dont know either attribute until you actually enter the expression in the Score Window.

Playback
You can play expressions in Overture by assigning them an appropriate tempo, patch, program change, controller and value, key switch, or use the expression to switch playback voice. For example, if an expression denotes a staccato sound for a guitar, changing the patch to a muted guitar sound might sound better than creating short note durations. Note: You cant realistically play all expressions you specify. If you double-click an expression in the Expressions palette, the Patch section contains program change numbers instead of patch names because Overture doesnt know which track will eventually contain the expression and to which device the track will be assigned. The following describes each of the Playback Options: None. Choose this option if you do not want this expression to affect playback. Tempo. Choose this option if you want the expression to change the tempo across a range of measures. Once the expression is entered you can drag its extension line to the exact position in a measure, where the tempo range ends. Patch. Choose this option if you want the expression to send MIDI data that changes the sound in a track. Playback Voice. Choose this option if you want the expression to force a track to use the playback setting for a different voice. Ex. If voice 1 (in Tracks List window) is a normal violin sound on channel 1 and voice 2 is a pizzicato sound on channel 2, an expression entered on voice 1 could force all notes in voice 1 to start play using voice 2 settings. In other words, send all voice 1 notes out on channel 2 instead of channel 1. Another expression later on, could force all notes to be played using the original settings for voice 1.

222

Part III: The Tool Bar

Key Switch. Choose this option if you want the expression to send a key switch. Key switches are used by sample libraries to switch styles within a sample. The popup menu only shows the valid key switches for this track and voice. If you wish to see all possible key switches, check the appropriate setting in the Preferences dialog.

Chapter 22: Expressions Button

223

Expressions Button

224

Part III: The Tool Bar

23
rectangle oval curve symbol tool line thickness

Graphics Button

The Graphics button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Graphics Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Dynamics button to open the pop-up Dynamics menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right edge].

rounded rectangle line wedge solid, dashed, or dotted opaque or transparent

line beginning and ending attributes

Graphics Button

Using the Graphics Palette

The Graphics palette provides standard drawing tools. You can put the shapes anywhere in the Score Window. Although this does not connect them to notes, it connects them to a track. The track containing the cursor when you finish drawing or moving a graphic owns that graphic. The track indicator also shows the track that owns the graphic. See Status Bar: Page View and Track Controls on page 70. Overture extracts graphics only with the track that owns them. The solid, dashed, dotted, and thickness attributes affect lines (straight and curved), and borders for the rectangles and oval. Shift-dragging to create a rectangle (rounded or regular) or oval constrains the shape to a square or circle, respectively. You can do the following to selected objects: Alt[Command]-drag to move the object(s) Select and drag graphics objects as a group, together with dynamics, hairpins, text, repeats, and chords Resize by dragging the handles Reassign line, border, thickness, or opaque/transparent attributes Right[Control] click and Choose Set Symbol Color, Playback, etc. to modify the symbol.

226

Part III: The Tool Bar

Select Font Symbol Dialog Box

The symbol tool opens the complete character set for a selected font, allowing you to see all nonalphanumeric characters and symbols easily. Clicking in the Score Window with the symbol tool selected opens the Select Character dialog box. You can alter the Style, Font and Size attributes before you enter the character.

Clicking a symbol onto a note or rest attaches the symbol to that note or rest. Clicking a symbol onto blank space attaches the symbol to the measure where you put the symbol.

Chapter 23: Graphics Button

227

Graphics Button

Double-clicking a character previously entered in the Score Window opens the Edit Playback dialog box.

228

Part III: The Tool Bar

24
Insert Bass Clef Insert Treble Clef

Clefs Button

The Clefs button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Clefs Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Clefs Button to open the pop-up Clefs menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right edge].

Insert Moveable C-Clef Insert Modern Piccolo Clef

Insert Modern Baritone Clef

Insert Modern Tenor Clef Insert Percussion Clef 1 Insert Percussion Clef 2

Insert 8va Bassa Clef

Clefs Button

Tool Overview
The following describes each of the tools in the Clefs palette. Insert Treble Clef. Select this tool to insert a treble clef at the insertion point. Insert Bass Clef. Select this tool to insert a bass clef at the insertion point. Insert Moveable C-Clef. Select this tool to insert a C-clef at the insertion point. It defaults to an alto clef (center line), though you can drag it up or down to create a tenor clef, mezzo-soprano clef, or soprano clef. Insert Percussion Clefs 1 & 2. Select either tool to insert a percussion clef at the insertion point. Percussion clefs are used for notating instruments of indefinite pitch (such as drums). Insert Modern Tenor Clef. Select this tool to insert a modern tenor clef at the insertion point. Notes following a modern tenor clef sound one octave lower than written. This is particularly useful for the tenor voice. Insert 8va Bassa Clef. Select this tool to insert an 8va bassa clef at the insertion point. Notes following an 8va bassa clef sound one octave lower than written. This is particularly useful for such transposing instruments as contrabassoon and double bass. Insert Modern Baritone Clef. Select this tool to insert a modern baritone clef at the insertion point. Notes following a modern baritone clef sound one octave higher than written. This is particularly useful for high bass parts that normally would not move to another clef (such as bass voice, baritone voice, and tuba). Insert Modern Piccolo Clef. Select this tool to insert a modern piccolo clef at the insertion point. Notes following a modern piccolo clef sound one octave higher than written. This is particularly useful for such high transposing instruments as piccolo and xylophone.

Clef Insertion Rules

When inserting clefs into a score you need to be aware of the following facts and conventions: You cannot replace one type of clef with another by simply selecting a new clef and clicking the old clef. Rather, you must click the old clef with the Eraser cursor, then enter a new clef in its place. Exception: You can change the very first clef in the very first measure by clicking it with any clef tool. When a clef change is to occur at the beginning of a measure, you must insert the clef at the end of the preceding measure, before the barline. Exception: You can insert a clef change at the beginning of the very first measure because there is no measure prior to it.

230

Part III: The Tool Bar

Clefs shown to the left of each staff are not clef changesthey are merely courtesy clefs that illustrate the clef last used in the previous measure. You cannot click these clefs to change them. Rather, you must insert a clef change at the end of the preceding measure (as mentioned above). Exception: You can change the very first clef in the very first measure by clicking it with any clef tool. You can insert new clefs in the middle of measures as well as at the ends. When you insert a new clef, Overture uses it to define the pitch of all notes on that staff until it comes across another inserted clef. When you insert a new clef, Overture always shifts the vertical positions of the notes that follow, so that they maintain their correct pitches.

Using the Clefs Palette

Use the Clefs palette to insert clefs onto staves. To use the Clefs palette: 1. Select the type of clef you want from the Clefs palette.

2.

In the Score window, click where you desire the new clef. Overture inserts the clef and automatically shifts the vertical position of any notes that follow it.

Click here... ...to insert the selected clef here.

Chapter 24: Clefs Button

231

Clefs Button

Using the Moveable C-Clef

Overture lets you insert a moveable C-clef that you can drag up or down on the staff. To use the moveable C-clef: 1. In the Clefs palette, click the moveable C-clef tool to select it.

2.

In the Score window, press and hold the mouse at the desired point. The C-clef will appear.

3. 4.

While still holding the mouse button, drag the mouse up or down to change the position of middle C. Release the mouse when the moveable C-clef is in the desired position. Overture automatically shifts the vertical position of any notes that follow the inserted clef.
Original score

Score after inserting an alto C-clef

Soprano clef (rarely used in modern music)

Mezzo-soprano clef (rarely used in modern music)

Alto clef (commonly used for viola and alto voice)

Tenor clef

232

Part III: The Tool Bar

The Staves button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Staves Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Staves button to open the pop-up Staves menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right corner].

Insert Tenor Staff Insert Bass Staff Insert Alto Staff Insert Percussive Staff Insert Tablature Staff Cross-Staff Barlines Insert Piano Staff Insert Piano & Melody Staff Group as System Group With Brace

Insert Treble Staff

Group With Bracket

Tool Overview
The following describes each of the tools in the Staves palette: Insert Bass Staff. Select this tool to add a single bass staff to your score. Insert Treble Staff. Select this tool to add a single treble staff to your score. Insert Tenor Staff. Select this tool to add a single tenor staff to your score.

Staves Button

25

Staves Button

Insert Alto Staff. Select this tool to add a single alto staff to your score. Insert Tablature Staff. Select this tool to add a single, six-string tablature staff to your score. Insert Percussive Staff. Select this tool to add a single percussive staff to your score. Insert Piano & Melody Staff. Select this tool to add three staves to your score. The top staff is a treble staff for a melody line. The bottom two staves (one treble and one bass) are braced for piano accompaniment. Insert Piano Staff. Select this tool to add a piano staff (two braced stavesa treble and a bass) to your score. Group With Bracket. Select the bracket ([) to connect independent staves into a loose grouping (for example, bracketing the four staves of a string quartet). Group As System. Select the system line (|) to connect all the staves in a system. Cross-Staff Barline. Select this tool to connect barlines between staves. Group With Brace. Select the brace ({) to connect the different staves representing a single musical instrument (like the two staves of a piano score).

Inserting Staves
Use the Staves palette to create and insert new staves. To do so: 1. From the Staves palette, select the tool for the type of staff you wish to insert.

2.

In the Score window, either click the top part or an existing staff to add the selected staff(s) above it or click the lower part of an existing staff to add the selected staff(s) below it.
click in this range to insert the selected clef(s) above this staff click in this range to insert the selected clef(s) below this staff click in this range to insert the selected clef(s) above this staff

Cursor in this range points up to show where staff will be inserted Cursor in this range points down to show where staff will be inserted

234

Part III: The Tool Bar

For example, to create a piano staff below an existing staff, select the Piano Staff tool and click just below the existing staff.

1. Click here with Piano Staff tool.

2. Overture adds a piano staff directly below the existing staff for all remaining systems

Important: When you add a staff to a system, Overture adds the staff to all systems, but automatically hides it in all systems above the current system. This lets you create staves in the middle of the score without having to hide them manually (as discussed in Hide/Show Staves on page 485).

Chapter 25: Staves Button

235

Staves Button

1. Click here with the Treble Staff tool to insert a new treble staff

2. Overture creates the new staff and shows it beginning with the current system and continuing to the end of the score.

3. Notice that Overture automatically hides the new staff in the first two systems.

236

Part III: The Tool Bar

Creating Big Systems

For example: 1. Assume you start with the score.

2.

Add a staff above the top staff in the top system. Overture changes the number of systems on a page by wrapping systems to a new page.

Chapter 25: Staves Button

237

Staves Button

If you add so many staves to a system that Overture can no longer fit the requested number of systems on the current page, then Overture automatically changes the number of systems on each page to fit the new number of staves.

Deleting Staves
To remove a staff from a score: 1. Select Options>Show>Handles. This is an optional step. Once you learn where to click on a staff or barline, you wont need to select this option. Handles are always availabletheyre just normally invisible. Selecting this option shows you where to click a staff or barline to edit it. 2. Using the Eraser Cursor, click the editing handle of the staff you want deleted.

1. Click a staffs edit handle with the Eraser Cursor

2. Overture deletes the staff

Grouping Staves
Use the Staves palette to create new staff groupings. To do so: 1. From the Staves palette, select the tool for the staff grouping you wish to create.

238

Part III: The Tool Bar

2.

In the Score window, drag a rectangle around those staves you want grouped.

1. Drag a rectangle around those staves you want grouped.

2. Overture applies the grouping across the selected staves.

Editing Staff Grouping Symbols

You can move a single brace, bracket, or system grouping symbol by dragging it with the Arrow Cursor.

Drag here...

... and Overture repositions only that group symbol

Chapter 25: Staves Button

239

Staves Button

You can move all related braces, brackets, and system grouping symbols for the entire score by Control[Command]-dragging them with the Arrow Cursor.

Drag here...

... and Overture repositions every related group symbol in the score

240

Part III: The Tool Bar

Deleting Staff Groupings

To remove any staff grouping, click it with the Eraser Cursor.

Click here with the Eraser Cursor...

... and Overture deletes that staff grouping (a cross-staff barline in this example)

Chapter 25: Staves Button

241

Staves Button

242

Part III: The Tool Bar

26

Barlines Button
Barlines Button

The Barlines button always contains the icon of the most recently selected tool.

Barlines Button

Press and hold the mouse on the Barlines button to open the pop-up Barlines menu. To create a floating palette, tear off the menu. To change a palettes orientation, drag an edge [Mac:bottom right corner].

Insert Open Repeat Insert Close Repeat Insert Double Barline

Insert Standard Barline Insert Dotted Barline

Insert Fine Insert Final Ending

Insert Single Measure Repeat

Insert First Endings

Insert Double Measure Repeat

Tool Overview
The following describes each of the tools in the Barlines palette. Insert Standard Barline. Select this tool and click a barline in your score to insert a standard barline. Use the standard barline to separate the music into measures. Insert Double Barline. Select this tool and click a barline in your score to insert a double barline. Use a double barline to partition separate sections of music. Insert Close Repeat. Select this tool and click a barline in your score to insert a close repeat. Use a close repeat to indicate the end of a repeating section of music. The close repeat affects MIDI playback only if you check Options>Play Style>Repeats (as discussed in Repeats on page 634). If you check the Repeats option and Overture encounters a close repeat, it searches backward through the score for an open repeat that doesnt have a matching close repeat. It then repeats that section once. If it doesnt find an un-mirrored open repeat, it repeats from the top of the score. For more information, see Using the Close and Open Repeat Tools on page 247. Insert Open Repeat. Select this tool and click a barline in your score to insert an open repeat. Use an open repeat to indicate the beginning of a repeating section of music. The open repeat affects MIDI playback as discussed in the previous paragraph (but only if you check Options>Play Style>Repeats). Insert Dotted Barline. Select this tool and click in your score to insert a dotted barline. Dotted barlines are commonly used to subdivide measures of complex rhythm. Insert Fine. Select this tool and click a barline in your score to insert a Fine. Use a Fine to indicate the end of a composition or of a movement within it. Insert Single Measure Repeat. Select this tool and click in your score to insert a single measure repeat symbol. This symbol means that youre to repeat the preceding measure in its entirety. This symbol affects MIDI playback. Insert Double Measure Repeat. Select this tool and click in your score to insert a double measure repeat symbol. This symbol means that youre to repeat the preceding two measures in their entirety. This symbol affects MIDI playback. Insert First Endings. Select this tool and drag across your score to insert a first ending. Overture automatically names the first ending and inserts a close repeat at the end of it. Use first endings for any ending in your score except for the final ending. MIDI playback recognizes first endings in your score only if you check Options>Play Style>Repeats. For more information, see Using the Ending Tools on page 249. Insert Final Ending. Select this tool and drag across your score to insert a final ending. MIDI playback recognizes final endings in your score only if you check Options>Play Style>Repeats. For more information, see Using the Ending Tools on page 249.

244

Part III: The Tool Bar

Using the Barlines Palette

To change one barline type into another: 1. Select the desired barline tool from the Barlines palette. The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window. 2. Click the cursor close to the barline you wish to change. Overture changes the existing barline into the type selected in the Barlines palette. Overture always changes the barline closest to where you click.
Click within this area... ...to change this barline.

...to change this barline. Click within this area...

Expert Tip:
You cannot change an existing barline into a dotted barline. Dotted barlines are used within existing measures to subdivide complex rhythms. See Using Dotted Barlines below for more information.

Chapter 26: Barlines Button

245

Barlines Button

Using Dotted Barlines

Some modern music uses dotted barlines to subdivide irregular meters into useful patterns. These patterns tell the performer which notes or beats to accent. Here is an example of a 7/8 measure subdivided into a 2+2+3 pattern using dotted barlines.

To insert dotted barlines into an Overture score: 1. Select the Dotted Barline tool from the Barlines palette. The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window. 2. Click the cursor where you want to insert a dotted barline. Overture inserts a dotted barline. 3. To reposition the barline, simply click its handle (at the top of the barline) and drag it where you want it. If you have trouble finding the barline handle, select Options>Show>Handles. This shows all barline handles.

Using Single and Double Measure Repeats

Overture supports both single and double measure repeats: Use this symbol to indicate the performer is to repeat the entire previous measure. Use this symbol to indicate the performer is to repeat the entire previous two measures. This symbol sometimes indicates the repetition of mixed value beats within a measure.

To insert a single or double measure repeat sign: 1. Select either the Single or Double Measure Repeat tool from the Barlines palette. The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window. 2. Click the cursor where you want to insert the repeat. Overture inserts the selected repeat. 3. To reposition a repeat, select the Arrow Cursor and drag the symbol to the desired position.

246

Part III: The Tool Bar

Using the Close and Open Repeat Tools

Overtures MIDI playback recognizes open and closed repeat signs and plays them correctly. Specifically, when Overture encounters a close repeat it searches backward through the score for an open repeat that doesnt have a matching close repeat. It then repeats that section once. If Overture doesnt find any unmirrored open repeats, playback jumps all the way back to the beginning of the score. The following examples illustrate how to use repeats and how Overture plays them back.

Single Repeats
To insert and playback a single repeat: 1. Select the Close Repeat tool from the Barlines palette. The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window. 2. Click anywhere in the measure to the left of the barline you wish to change. Overture changes the existing barline into a Close Repeat.
Click anywhere in this measure...

...to insert a Close Repeat here.

3.

Make sure Options>Play Style>Repeats is checked. If you dont check this option, MIDI playback ignores all repeats in an Overture score.

4.

Press space to playback the score through a MIDI sound module. Overture recognizes the repeat sign after measure 2 and causes MIDI playback to jump back to measure 1. Specifically, Overture plays the measures in the following order: 1->2->1->2->3->4-> etc...

Nested Repeats

Expert Tip:

To insert and playback nested repeats:

Double click on a repeat to add winged repeats. See section below on winged repeats. 1. Select the Close Repeat tool from the Barlines palette. The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

Chapter 26: Barlines Button

247

Barlines Button

2.

Click anywhere in the measure to the left of the barline you wish to change. Overture changes the existing barline into a Close Repeat.
Click anywhere in this measure...

...to insert a Close Repeat here.

3.

Select the Open Repeat tool from the Barlines palette. The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

4.

Click anywhere in the measure to the right of the barline you wish to change. Overture changes the existing barline into an Open Repeat.
Click anywhere in this measure...

...to insert an Open Repeat here.

5.

Make sure Options>Play Style>Repeats is checked. If you dont check this option, MIDI playback ignores all repeats in an Overture score.

6.

Press space to playback the score through a MIDI sound module. Overture recognizes the repeat sign after measure 3 and causes MIDI playback to jump back to measure 2. Specifically, Overture plays the measures in the following order: 1->2->3->2->3->4->...

Winged Repeats
To insert winged repeats: 1. Insert your repeats as shown above.

248

Part III: The Tool Bar

2.

Double click on the repeat that you wish to make a winged repeat. Overture opens the Repeat Setting Dialog.
Double click on the repeat

3.

Check the Winged repeat box and choose OK. Overture adds a wing to the repeat.
Winged Repeat

Using the Ending Tools

Overtures MIDI playback recognizes endings and plays them correctly. Overture supports two types of endings: First Endings: Use this for the first ending in a song and for any endings other than the songs final ending. Final Ending: Use this to notate the final ending in a song.

Chapter 26: Barlines Button

249

Barlines Button

To create an ending, select one of the ending tools and drag across the Score window beginning at the first measure in the ending and stopping at the end of the last measure in the ending. You can drag endings across systems if necessary.
Drag from here...

...to here... ... and notice that Overture automatically wraps endings across staves

You can place any text you want in an ending. To do so, double-click the upper right corner of an ending to open the Set Ending dialog box.

Double-click here...

...to open the Set Ending dialog box

Use the Set Ending dialog box to put text into an ending. Generally, endings contain only numbers to identify them, but Overture lets you type any text you want into an ending. You may find it fastest to use the numbered checkboxes to name endings. For example, if you want the same ending for 1, 3, and 5, simply check the 1, 3, and 5 checkboxesOverture automatically puts the numbers into the Set Ending dialog boxs Text field. You can also define the endings font. Click the font button to open the Font dialog box, which is discussed in Font Button on page 563.

250

Part III: The Tool Bar

Read the next three sections to learn how to create first endings, middle endings and final endings using the ending tools and the Set Ending dialog box.

First Endings
To create a first ending: 1. Select the First Ending tool from the Barlines palette.

2.

Move the cursor over the Score window. The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer.

3.

Press and hold the mouse at the left edge of the first measure in the ending and drag to the end of the last measure in the ending. Overture inserts a first ending, names it 1 and inserts a Close Repeat sign in the final measure of the ending.
Drag from here... ...to here

Chapter 26: Barlines Button

251

Barlines Button

4.

Make sure Options>Play Style>Repeats is checked. If you dont check this option, MIDI playback ignores all repeats in an Overture score.

5.

Press space to playback the score through a MIDI sound module. Overture recognizes the repeat sign after measure 2, causing MIDI playback to jump back to measure 1. After re-playing measure 1, playback jumps to measure 3. Specifically, Overture plays the measures in the following order: 1->2->1->3->4->5->...

Middle Endings
Middle endings are identical to first endings, except theyre notated with an ending number other than 1. To create a middle ending: 1. Select the First Ending tool from the Barlines palette.

2.

Move the cursor over the Score window. The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer.

3.

Press and hold the mouse at the left edge of the first measure in the ending and drag to the end of the last measure in the ending. Overture inserts an ending, gives it the default name of 1 and inserts a Close Repeat sign in the final measure of the ending.
Drag from here... ...to here

252

Part III: The Tool Bar

4.

Using the Arrow Cursor tool, double-click the upper-right corner of the ending. Overture opens the Set Ending dialog box.

Double-click here...

...to open the Set Ending dialog box

5.

Since this is the second ending in the score, check the 2 checkbox and uncheck the 1 checkbox. The Text area shows the exact text that will appear in the ending.

6.

Click the OK button. Overture changes the ending number to 2.

7.

Make sure Options>Play Style>Repeats is checked. If you dont check this option, MIDI playback ignores all repeats in an Overture score.

8.

Press space to playback the score through a MIDI sound module. Overture recognizes the repeat signs after measure 1 and measure 2. Specifically, Overture plays the measures in the following order: 1->2->1->3->1->4->5...

Chapter 26: Barlines Button

253

Barlines Button

Final Endings
To insert a final ending: 1. Select the Final Ending tool from the Barlines palette.

2.

Move the cursor over the Score window. The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer.

3.

Press and hold the mouse at the left edge of the first measure in the ending and drag to the end of the last measure in the ending. Overture inserts a final ending and gives it the default name of 2.

Drag from here...

...to here

Since this is actually the third ending, youll need to change its number from 2 to 3. To do so: 4. Double-click the upper-right corner of the ending. Overture opens the Set Ending dialog box. 5. Check the 3 checkbox and uncheck the 2 checkbox.

254

Part III: The Tool Bar

6.

Click the OK button. Overture changes the ending number to 3.

7.

Make sure Options>Play Style>Repeats is checked. If you dont check this option, MIDI playback ignores all repeats in an Overture score.

8.

Press space to playback the score through a MIDI sound module. Overture recognizes the repeat signs after measure 1 and measure 2. Specifically, Overture plays the measures in the following order: 1->2->1->3->1->4->5->6

Deleting Barlines
You can delete dotted barlines by clicking their edit handles with the Eraser Cursor. Similarly, you can convert any type of barline (except dotted) into a standard barline by clicking its edit handle with the Eraser Cursor. The Barline edit handle is located at the top of the barline, where the barline crosses the top line in the staff.
Barline Edit Handle. Click with Eraser cursor to change this repeat barline back into a standard barline

Edit handles are always available, but normally hidden unless you select Options>Show>Handles. The edit handle does not have to be visible in order for you to click it. For more information about editing and moving barlines, see Changing Bar Widths on page 106.

Chapter 26: Barlines Button

255

Barlines Button

Hiding Standard Barlines

You can hide standard barlines by clicking their edit handles with the Eraser Cursor.

Barline Edit Handles (click with Eraser cursor to hide standard barlines)

If you choose Options>Show>Invisibles, Overture displays the hidden barlines in grey (though they still are invisible when printing). To make a hidden barline visible again: 1. Select the Standard Barline tool from the Barlines palette. The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window. 2. Click the cursor close to the barline you wish to change. Overture changes the hidden barline into a standard visible barline.

256

Part III: The Tool Bar

Chapter 26: Barlines Button

257

Barlines Button

258

Part III: The Tool Bar

27
Note:

Transcription Quantize Amount Button

Use this button to set Overtures transcription quantization level. The button always shows the currently selected transcription quantize value.

Transcription Quantize Amount button

This button does not quantize the actual MIDI datarather it quantizes the transcribed notation of the MIDI data. MIDI data is unaffected by this button.

Setting a Transcription Quantize Amount

Whenever Overture converts raw MIDI data into standard music notation, it does so using the value displayed in the Transcription Quantize Amount button. Therefore, whenever you transcribe raw MIDI data into notation, you generally select a transcription quantize value that corresponds to the smallest note value you plan to transcribe. For example, if the smallest note youll transcribe is an eighth note, set a transcription quantize amount equal to an eighth notethis keeps Overture from misinterpreting any sloppy playing. Of course, there are exceptions to this rule and theyre discussed in Transcription Quantization and Manual Transcription on page 260. Overture interprets triplets of any value equal to or greater than the selected quantize amount. For example, if you select a sixteenth note quantize value, Overture recognizes and transcribes not only sixteenth note triplets but also eighth and quarter note triplets.

Transcription Quan

To select a transcription quantization value: 1. Press and hold the Transcription Quantize Amount button. Overture opens a pop-up menu of quantize values.

2.

While still holding the mouse button, drag the cursor over the desired quantize level (highlighting it), then release the mouse button. Overture sets the transcribe quantization to the selected level and displays your selection as the buttons icon.

Important:
Overtures smallest transcription quantize amount is the straight (non-tuplet) value of the selected quantize note. Therefore, it is necessary to select a smaller quantize amount when transcribing tuplets. For example, if you select a transcription quantize amount of a sixteenth note, the smallest triplet note value Overture transcribes correctly is an eighth note triplet.

Using Transcription Quantization

Whenever you convert raw MIDI data into standard music notation, Overture quantizes the transcription to the value set by the Transcription Quantize Amount button. The following sections show some examples using different transcription processes.

Transcription Quantization and Auto Transcription

If your scores are rather simple, you may find it adequate to use Overtures auto transcription feature. This feature (which you can enable either in the Record Options dialog box, or by checking Options>Auto Transcribe) automatically transcribes all recorded MIDI data into standard notation using the value shown in the Transcription Quantize button. The advantage of auto transcription is that it saves you the additional step of manually converting MIDI data into standard music notation. The disadvantage is that it doesnt let you selectively transcribe raw MIDI data using different transcription quantize values. The Auto Transcribe option is discussed in Record Options on page 634.

Transcription Quantization and Manual Transcription

If your score is rather complex, you may want to transcribe MIDI data manually. The advantage of manual transcription is that it lets you selectively choose a transcription quantize amount and voice for any note or group of notes. For example, if your score contains a few measures of eighth notes, then a few

260

Part III: The Tool Bar

measures of sixteenth note triplets, you would find it easiest to transcribe the eighth notes using the eighth note transcription quantize amount, then transcribe the sixteenth note triplet section using a sixteenth note triplet transcription quantize amount. Follow through this example to see how to record and manually transcribe raw MIDI data: 1. Choose Options>Record Options. Overture opens the Record Options dialog box. 2. Make sure the Auto Transcribe option is unchecked, then click the OK button. Alternatively, you could simply uncheck the Options>Auto Transcribe option. 3. 4. 5. Type the enter key on number pad key to begin recording. Play some music on your MIDI controller. Type the space or enter key on number pad key to stop recording. Overture displays the recorded music as raw MIDI data. 6. Select the raw MIDI data you want to transcribe.

7.

Select a note value from the Transcription Quantize Amount pop-up menu.

8.

Choose Notes>Transcribe. Overture transcribes the highlighted MIDI data into standard music notation using the selected transcription quantize amount. See Transcribe on page 606 for more information about the Transcribe command.

Chapter 27: Transcription Quantize Amount Button

261

Transcription Quan

You select raw MIDI data exactly as you select standard music notation symbols.

Fixing Transcription Quantization Mistakes

If you find a transcription quantization error in your score, you can fix it using the Notes>Transcribe command. For example, assume your score contains the transcription quantization error below.

Assume you wanted this... ...but because the Transcription Quantize Amount was set to eighth notes, you got this...

To correct this transcription quantization error: 1. Select the incorrectly transcribed notes.

2.

Press and hold the mouse on the Transcription Quantize Amount button. Overture opens a pop-up menu of transcription quantization amounts.

3.

Select the sixteenth note from the pop-up menu.

262

Part III: The Tool Bar

4.

Choose Notes>Transcribe. Overture converts the notes into raw MIDI data (as though you chose the Notes to Raw command), then transcribes them back into standard music notation using a sixteenth note transcription quantize amount.

Notes re-transcribed using sixteenth note transcription quantization

Chapter 27: Transcription Quantize Amount Button

263

Transcription Quan

264

Part III: The Tool Bar

Part IV Other Overture Windows

28
Rewind button Punch In button Punch Out button Punch In Point Bar-Beat-Unit

Transport Window

The Transport window contains buttons to control MIDI recording and playback, and a pop-up menu to select the MIDI Thru Instrument. To open the Transport window, choose Windows>Transport.

Play from Measure Play from Beginning button Stop button button Record button Thru Patch Thru Device

Punch Out Point Bar-Beat-Unit

Countoff Bars Punch Record button

Transport Controls
The five buttons to the left of the Transport window are Overtures Transport Controls.

Use these buttons when you want to play a score using MIDI sound modules, or when you want to record MIDI data in real-time.

Transport Window

The table below shows the function of each Transport Control button as well as its key equivalent. Typing a key equivalent has the same effect as clicking the respective button.

Button

Key Equivalent

Function Rewind cursor to beginning of score.

ctrl[cmd]+space

MIDI playback from the beginning of the score.

return or space while playing

Stops either MIDI recording or MIDI playback.

MIDI playback from the insertion point (the blinking cursor) space

enter

Real-time MIDI recording from the beginning of the active measure.

Moving the Transport Controls from the Tool Bar

To remove the transport controls from the tool bar, click in the drag area and move them out of the tool bar. They expand into the transport window.

Transport Drag Area

Expanded Transport Controls

To put the transport controls in the tool bar, drag the palette by its title area to the tool bar. The window shrinks to its four controls and appears in the tool bar. You can put it below the buttons or to the right of them.

268

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Punch Recording
Historical Origins
The technique of Punch recording originated from tape recording studios. Recording engineers discovered that they could improve sections or fix mistakes in a recorded track without re-recording the entire track. They could correct only the area in which the mistake occurred. Punch recording saved time and conserved the creativity of the musicians by retaining most of an acceptable (or even inspiring) performance. It didnt require the musician to start from the beginning each time he or she made a small mistake.

General Procedure
Punch recording begins by rewinding the tape to the beginning of the section that needs modification. When the tape starts playing, the musician begins playing as if he or she were recording, in order to get into the flow of the music. Recording does not actually begin, however, until the engineer punches in to activate recording. The musician continues playing, blissfully unaware of the mechanics of the process until the tape arrives at the end of the section being replaced. The engineer then punches out to stop recording.

Punch Recording in Overture

Punch recording is a standard feature in professional MIDI sequencers, and is now available in Overture. You enable punch recording by first defining a punch region bounded by Punch In and Punch Out points and then pressing the Punch Record button in the Transport Window. With the cursor located prior to the Punch In point, press the Record button in the normal manner. Overture begins playback the number of Countoff Bars (see page 273) prior to the Punch In point but begins recording at the Punch In point. Overture stops recording at the Punch Out point. Punch recording lets you improve sections or fix mistakes without either over-writing music outside the Punch Region or interrupting your performance to punch in and out at the correct times. In the following sections we discuss three useful methods for setting punch points. Using the cursor to locate Punch points Setting Punch points manually Locating Punch points by playing the score

Whichever method you use, Overture enables Punch recording only when you highlight the Punch Record button.

Important:
In previous versions of Overture, the [ and ] keys reversed and advanced through the chords in the Chord Input Window. With the addition of Punch recording to Overture the [ and ] keys now set the Punch In and Punch Out points, respectively, to the current cursor location.

Chapter 28: Transport Window

269

Transport Window

To Locate the Punch Points Using the Cursor

The first method uses the location of the cursor in either the Score or Graphic Windows to derive and set the punch points. 1. 2. In either the Score or Graphic Window, identify the Punch In point by putting the cursor at the desired place. Press the Punch In button. Alternatively, press the [ key. The Bar, Beat and Units numericals reflect the location of the cursor. 3. 4. In either the Score or Graphic Window, locate the Punch Out point by placing the cursor at the desired location. Press the Punch Out button on the Transport Window. Alternatively, press the ] key. The Bar, Beat and Units numericals reflect the location of the cursor. 5. Press the Punch Record button to enable Punch recording. The button highlights when you enable Punch Record.
Punch In button

Punch Out button

Punch Record button (enabled)

To Set the Punch Points Manually

The second method operates directly on the Bar, Beat, and Units numericals in the Transport Window, assuming the user knows the precise settings for the Punch points. 1. Set the Punch In point by clicking in the top row of the Bar, Beat and Units numericals. Type a number or use the mouse to set each numerical field. 2. Set the Punch Out location by operating on the lower row of the Bar, Beat, and Units numericals.

270

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

3.

Enable Punch recording by pressing the Punch Record button. The button highlights when you enable Punch Record.

To Locate the Punch Points during Playback

You can easily locate and set punch points using the playback controls in the Transport Window. 1. 2. 3. Place the cursor before the desired Punch In point. Press the Play button on the Transport Window to begin playback. Press the Stop button in the Transport Window when playback reaches the Punch In point. Pressing the Play button again also stops playback. 4. Press the Punch In button. The Bar, Beat, and Units numericals reflect the location of the cursor. 5. 6. Press the Play button to resume playback. When the Punch Out point is reached, press the Stop button. The cursor is at the Punch Out point. 7. 8. Press the Punch Out button to set the Punch Out point. Enable Punch recording by pressing the Punch Record button.

Thru Device Button

Use this button to set Overtures Thru Device. The button always shows the name of the currently selected Device.

Thru Device button Thru Patch button

If Options>Keyboard Thru is checked (as discussed in Keyboard Thru on page 626), MIDI data received by Overture gets sent to the device displayed in the Thru Device button. Overture watches for

Chapter 28: Transport Window

271

Transport Window

You can also combine the methods described above to set the Punch points. For example, if playback stops at a location that is close to, but not at, the desired Punch In point, either adjust the Punch In numerical fields directly, or click the cursor at the precise Punch In point.

MIDI input from any device that you select as an Input Device (as discussed in MIDI Devices on page 637) and passes the MIDI data out to the device that you select as a Thru Device. This feature allows your master MIDI keyboard to play any device in your studio. To select a Thru Device: 1. Press and hold the mouse on the Thru Device button. Overture opens a pop-up menu of all the devices in your current studio setup. 2. Release the mouse over the device you wish to use as a Thru Device. Overture selects the device as the Thru Device and displays its name in the Thru Device button.

If you check the MIDI Through Follows Tracks option in the Preferences dialog box (as discussed in MIDI Through Follows Tracks on page 651), and you select a different track or voice in the Score window, Overture automatically changes the Thru Device to the device assigned in the Tracks window. See Chapter 29, Tracks List Window.

Thru Patch
You need to understand Keyboard Thru to use Thru Patch correctly. See Keyboard Thru on page 626. The Thru Patch pop-up menu selects a patch on the Thru Device. This feature lets the MIDI controller play different patches and devices thru the computer without permanently changing the tracks patch setting. For example, if youve already assigned an instrument that has the correct device and patch settings to the current track and you want to search for a sound to use for a new track, you can experiment using the Thru pop-up menus without over-writing the patch or device settings for the current track.

Expert Tip:
You must select Options>Keyboard Thru to transmit the changes made in the Thru pop-up menus to the MIDI device. You must turn Local Control Off on the MIDI controller (if it generates sound) to use Keyboard Thru correctly. You can put changes made using the Thru Patch and Thru Device pop-up menus permanently into the track by holding down the Control[Command]-key when choosing a new patch and/or device.

272

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Count Off
Count Off allows the musician to begin recording at the correct tempo by previewing the metronome before recording begins. Overture supports a maximum of 8 count off bars. After you click the Record button, the metronome ticks the specified number of count off bars at the current tempo before beginning recording. To set the number of count off bars, set the Count Off field to a number between 0 (no count off) and 8. See page 630 for a complete discussion of the metronome.

Real Time MIDI Recording

Using a MIDI controller, you can record MIDI data directly into Overture. The following sections discuss the process.

Basic Setup
Before you record your first track, you need to make sure that your hardware is connected and that all the software is configured properly. To do so: 1. Make sure you have a MIDI controller and sound source connected to a MIDI interface, and that the interface is connected to your computer properly. [On the Mac: Make sure your Audio MIDI Setup document is properly configured.] Choose Options>MIDI Devices. Overture opens the MIDI Devices dialog box. 3. 4. Select your MIDI controller as an input port in the MIDI Devices dialog box.

2.

Chapter 28: Transport Window

273

Transport Window

Click OK.

Setting Metronome and Record Options

Next, you must make decisions concerning metronome use, voice assignments, and other recording options. To do so: 1. From the Options>Metronome submenu, select if and when you want the metronome to click.

If you select Click in Record, Overtures metronome clicks for the number of countoff bars and throughout the entire recording. If you select Click in Countoff Only, Overtures metronome clicks only during the count off measure. If you dont select either option, Overture does not play a one-bar countoff before recording and the metronome will not click at all while Overture records.

274

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

2.

If you decide to use the metronome, choose Options>Metronome>Metronome Sound. Overture opens the Metronome dialog box.

3.

Use the Metronome dialog box to assign a click sound to the metronome. To learn more about the metronome and its related options, see Metronome on page 630.

4.

Decide whether you want the recorded music to be auto beamed, auto positioned, or auto transcribed by checking the appropriate options in the Options menu.

5.

If you decide you want Overture to automatically transcribe the music, select a transcription quantize value with the Tool Bars Transcription Quantize Amount button. For details, see Chapter 27, Transcription Quantize Amount Button.

6.

Decide whether or not to check the Options>Keyboard Thru option. This feature allows you to play a master MIDI controller and hear the output from any sound module in your studio. Generally, you should select this option if your MIDI controller and sound module are separate instruments (or you use a multitimbral keyboard synth with its Local Control turned off). You should uncheck this option if youre using a single keyboard synthesizer and its Local Control is turned on. For more information, see Keyboard Thru on page 626.

Chapter 28: Transport Window

275

Transport Window

We discuss each of these options in detail in Chapter 40, Options Menu.

7.

Using the pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window, select a Voice to record.

8.

Choose Options>Record Options. Overture opens the Record Options dialog box.

9.

Select the desired record options, then click the OK button. We discuss the Record Options dialog box in Record Options on page 634.

276

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Recording
Youre ready to start recording tracks. To do so: 1. Using the Transport Windows Thru Instrument button, select the MIDI device on which you wish to record.

2.

In the Score window, click the measure and staff at which you want recording to begin.

3.

In the Transport window, click the Record button, or press the number pad Enter key.

If you checked either the Click in Record or Click in Countoff Only options in the Options>Metronome submenu, Overture counts off the number of selected measures, then begins to record. If you didnt check any count off options, Overture begins to record immediately. 4. Play your MIDI controller.

Chapter 28: Transport Window

277

Transport Window

5.

When youre finished recording, click the Stop button in the Transport window, or type the space bar or number pad Enter key. Overture records the MIDI data and transcribes it in the Score window. If you selected Options>Auto Transcribe, Overture automatically transcribes the music using the transcription quantize amount set with the Tool Bars Transcription Quantize Amount button.

278

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

29
Track name Click triangle to show/hide all voices Click to mute

Tracks List Window

The Tracks window defines the characteristics of all the tracks in your Overture score. To open the Tracks window, choose Windows>Tracks.

Specify the set of patch names for the track Click to solo Set a transposition level (in semi-tones) with this numerical Select number of voices per track with this numerical

Set a volume level with this numerical Drag here to re-order Tracks

Specify the MIDI channel

Select a patch Select a bank

Set a stereo distribution with this numerical Specify output device for playing the track

Tracks Window

Double-click here to open the Track Setup dialog box

Click to set a stem direction for each voice

Tracks Window Overview

The Tracks window is organized as a grid. Each row represents a different track (or voice), and each column edits a different parameter for that track (or voice). Use the tracks window to: enable tracks arrange tracks assign MIDI playback devices, programs, volume, pan, channels and transposition values to tracks specify the number of voices in a track determine voice stem directions in a track

See The Instruments Library and the Tracks Window on page 446 for a way to automate some of these tasks.

About Voices
Each Overture track may contain as many as eight separate voices. A voice is defined as a single rhythmic line within a track. Some tracks require more than one voice to notate and playback correctly. Specifically: If you notate more than one instrument per staff, youll need to use multiple voices to distinguish between the multiple instruments. If you notate a polyphonic instrument (such as a piano) that plays different rhythmic lines simultaneously, youll need to use multiple voices to distinguish between the multiple rhythmic lines.

See Voice on page 7 for more information about voices and how to use them.

Viewing Voice Assignments

You can view all the voice assignments in a track by clicking the small right-pointing triangle to the right of the track number. This causes Overture to display all the voice assignments for that track. It also rotates the small triangle to point downward. You can click the downward-pointing triangle to hide the voice assignments for a track.

280

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Click the little triangle to view all the voice assignments for that track.

This numerical determines the number of voice assignments that appear for a track.

Click here to hide all the voice assignments for that track.

Setting the Number of Voices for a Track

Use the Voices column numerical to set the number of voices used by each track.

Use this numerical to set the number of voices used by each track

If a track uses only one voice, set the numerical to 1. If a track uses three voices, set the numerical to 3. You can assign up to eight voices per track. When you look at a tracks voice assignments, youll see only as many voices as are defined in the Voices column.

If you assign an Instrument name in the Setup Track dialog box, Overture automatically assigns a default number of voices to that track corresponding to the type of instrument selected. You can override this default by using the Voices numerical. We discuss the Setup Track dialog box in Setup Track on page 490.

Chapter 29: Tracks List Window

281

Tracks Window

Note:

Setting Stem Direction for a Track or Voice

Use the Stem column to set a stem direction for each track or voice.

Use this numerical to set the stem direction used by each track

There are three possible stem directions: Auto Stem: Overture determines stem direction based on staff position. Stems point down for any notes below the middle line and point up for any notes on or above the middle line. Up Stem: Overture makes all stems point up regardless of staff position. Down Stem: Overture makes all stems point down regardless of staff position.

To switch between them, simply click the icon in the Stem column until it shows the desired stem direction.
Auto Stem Overture determines stem direction based on staff position (click) (click)

Down Stem Overture makes all stems point down regardless of staff position

(click)

Up Stem Overture makes all stems point up regardless of staff position

Important:
Setting a direction in the stem column does not change the stem directions of any existing notes in a track. Rather, it sets the direction for any newly entered notes. If you want to change stem direction of existing notes, use the Notes>Stem>Stem Up or Notes>Stem>Stem Down commands as discussed in Stem on page 595.

In general, youll use the Auto Stem direction for either single-voice tracks or for multi-voice tracks that notate multitimbral instruments, that is, instruments that make more than one sound at a time. For tracks notating two or more instruments, youll probably want to define a stem direction for each voice so as to distinguish which instrument plays which voice.

282

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Device Selection for a Track or Voice

You can assign a different MIDI device to play each separate track. To do so, press and hold the mouse in the Device column and select a new device from the pop-up menu. This pop-up menu lists every device defined by your current MIDI Setup.

Press and hold the mouse here... ...to open a Device selection pop-up menu

If you check the MIDI Through Follows Tracks option in the Preferences dialog box (as discussed in MIDI Through Follows Tracks on page 651), and you select a different track or voice in the Score window, Overture automatically changes the Thru Instrument to the device assigned in this column.

Setting a Channel for a Track or Voice

MIDI transmits information on 16 channels, 1 through 16. On playback, the channel number directs the MIDI information to a particular piece of equipment. Specify a number by pressing and holding on the space, then selecting a number from the pop-up menu.

Bank Selection for a Track or Voice

Choose a bank containing the patches you need for this track. Specify a bank by pressing and holding on the space, then selecting a number from the pop-up menu.

Chapter 29: Tracks List Window

283

Tracks Window

Patch Selection for a Track or Voice

Pick a patch from the pop-up menu.

Press and hold the mouse here... ...to open a patch selection pop-up menu

When Overture plays a track, it sends the patch message to your MIDI device. If you dont want Overture to change your MIDI devices internal program, set the patch to None. You can also use Overtures Graphic window to insert MIDI patch information into a score. For more information about how to insert this and other types of MIDI data, see Using the Controllers Pane on page 296 [The Strip Chart on page 326 on the MAC].

284

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Setting Volume for a Track or Voice

You can assign a default MIDI volume level to each track (or voice) by entering it in the Vol column.

Use this numerical to set a default MIDI volume level for a track or voice

When Overture plays a track, it sends the MIDI volume message to your MIDI device. If you dont want Overture to set your MIDI devices volume, set the numerical to -. You can also use Overtures Graphic window to insert MIDI volume changes into a score. For more information about how to insert this and other types of MIDI data, see Using the Controllers Pane on page 296 [The Strip Chart on page 326 on the MAC]. Setting Pan for a Track or Voice Press and hold on the space to open a pop-up menu of possible choices. Select a number between -64 and +63 to specify a default left-right balance for the track or voice. 0 balances both sides equally.

Setting Transposition for a Track or Voice

You can assign a default MIDI transposition value (in semitones) to each track (or voice) by entering it in the Pitch column.

Use this numerical to set a default MIDI transposition amount for a track or voice

This is the same as the Transpose:Playback Numerical in the Setup Track dialog box. It does not affect the staff; it affects playback only. When Overture plays a track, it transposes the MIDI data before sending it to your MIDI device. If you dont want Overture to transpose a tracks MIDI data, set the numerical to 0.

Chapter 29: Tracks List Window

285

Tracks Window

Muting a Track
You can mute the playback of any one or more tracks by clicking in the corresponding Mute column.

Click here to either mute or unmute a track

All muted tracks are indicated by the letter M. To unmute a track, simply click the M in the Mute column. You can also mute individual voices.

Note:
Overture ignores muted tracks when exporting to a MIDI file. Therefore, if you want to export an Overture file but dont want all the tracks included in the exported file, mute those tracks in this window. For more information, see Export on page 453.

Soloing a Track
You can solo the playback of any one or more tracks by clicking in the corresponding Solo column.

Click here to either solo or un-solo a track

All soloed tracks are indicated by the letter S. To un-solo a track, click the S in the Solo column. You can also solo individual voices.

Rearranging Tracks
You can change the order of tracks by dragging them to new locations. When you change track order in the Tracks window, the staves also change order in the Score window.

286

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

To change track order: 1. Press and hold the mouse over the far left of the track you wish to move. Make sure the cursor is in the far left column, underneath the up/down arrow indicator ( ).

2.

Drag the track to the desired location. A outline of the track shows where youre moving it.

Outline indicates Track being moved

3.

Release the mouse button when the track is in the desired location. Overture moves the track in the Tracks window and the corresponding staff in the Score window.

Repositioned Track

Chapter 29: Tracks List Window

287

Tracks Window

Opening the Setup Track Dialog Box

You can open the Setup Track dialog box for any track by double-clicking in the far left column, underneath the up/down arrow indicator ( ).

Double-click here... ...to open the Setup Track dialog box for the Track

This is the same as clicking a staff selection handle in the Score window and choosing Score>Setup Track. To learn about the Setup Track dialog box, see Setup Track on page 490.

288

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Overture lets you edit the events in your songs in dozens of different ways. The Graphic Window lets you add and edit notes, controllers, and automation data interactively, using a graphic display. Overtures many editing commands can improve the quality of recorded performances, filter out certain types of events, and modify the tempos and dynamics of your songs. The Graphic window displays all notes and other events from a single track in a grid format that looks much like a player piano roll. Notes display as horizontal bars, and drum notes as diamonds. Pitch runs from bottom to top, with the left vertical margin indicating the pitches as piano keys or note names. Time runs left to right with vertical measure and beat boundaries. The Graphic window facilitates adding, editing, and deleting notes. The Graphic window has two main panes: the Piano Roll view pane and the Controllers pane. When you first open a Graphic Window, the Piano Roll pane is at the top and the Controllers pane is at the bottom. Drag the gray splitter bar up or down to display more or less of each pane.

Graphic Window

30

Graphic Window (PC)

The Piano Roll View

The Piano Roll is so named because it resembles the old rolls of paper used by player pianos. The Piano Roll consists of a gridthe vertical lines represent bar lines and the horizontal lines indicate pitch. Notes are represented on the Piano Roll as black, rectangular blocks. The length of the block represents the duration of the note.

Controllers menu

Snap Grid button

Snap Grid menu

Tracks menu

Note pane

Splitter bar

Controllers pane

To open the Graphic window, choose Window>Graphics Window. Zoom tools let you change the vertical and horizontal scale of the view. Hold the Shift key and click the zoom tool to jump to the largest or smallest scale. The Snap Grid button snaps note start times and durations to the snap grid resolution. You can set the resolution to any note length in the Snap Grid pop-up menu.

Selecting and Editing Notes

To select notes in the Graphics window: Or Use the Select tool to select notes

290

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Click or drag the piano keys to select all notes of the given pitch(es)

You can add notes to your score by clicking in the Note pane with the draw tool . Overture remembers the velocity, duration, and channel of the note that you most recently moved, edited, or deleted, and uses these same characteristics for new notes automatically. You can edit notes freely, using the mouse to change the start time, pitch, or duration. You can move and copy notes anywhere in the track. You can scrub the current track. The Scrub tool lets you drag a vertical bar over the view so that you can hear the notes in the track. You can scrub forward or backward at any speed. Scrubbing can be handy when you want to locate a bad note or listen to the effects of changes you have made without playing back at normal speed.

To Select Notes with the Selection Tool

1. 2. Click to select the Arrow cursor.

Select notes as shown in the table:

To do this Select a single note Select several notes at once Add to the selection Toggle the selection Do this Click on the note Drag a rectangle around the notes you want to select Hold the Shift key while selecting notes Hold the Control key while selecting notes

Selected notes are highlighted in the Note Pane view, and the time selection is set to the range of note start times.

To Select All Notes of Certain Pitches

Click the piano keys or note names on the left side of the Note pane as shown in the table:
To do this Select all notes of a single pitch Select all notes of several pitches Do this Click on the piano key or note name Drag across the keys or note names

Chapter 30: Graphic Window (PC)

291

Graphic Window

Shift-click to add notes to the selection and Control-click to toggle between adding to or removing from the selection.

Add to the selection Toggle the selection

Hold the Shift key while clicking on a piano key or note name Hold the Control key while clicking on a piano key or note name

To Edit a Note
1. 2. Click to choose the Draw tool.

Edit notes as described in the table:

To do this Change the start time Do this Drag the left edge of the note in either direction. The note duration stays the same, but the start time is shifted. Drag the middle of the note up or down. Drag the right edge of the note in either direction.

Change the pitch Change the duration

If the snap grid is enabled, the start time of each note is restricted to points on the snap grid, and the length of each note is restricted to multiples of the snap grid. For example, if the snap grid is set to quarter-note resolution, you can move notes only to quarternote boundaries, and you can increase or decrease the duration only by quarter notes.

292

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

To Change Note(s) Velocity

1. 2. 3. 4. Display the Controllers pane. Select Velocity in the popup menu. Click or type d to choose the Draw tool.

Draw a line or curve representing the velocity of the note(s) value you want.

To Move Notes
1. 2. 3. Click or type s to choose the Select tool.

Select one or more notes. Drag the selected notes to a new location.

Overture moves the selected notes.

To Copy Notes
1. 2. 3. 4. Click or type s to choose the Select tool.

Select one or more notes. Press and hold the Control key. Drag the selected notes to a new location.

Overture copies the selected notes.

To Add a Note
1. 2. 3. 4. Click or type d to choose the Draw tool.

Press and hold the left mouse button in the Notes pane. Overture adds a new note with the duration and velocity of the last note you edited. Drag the note to the desired location. Release the mouse button.

Chapter 30: Graphic Window (PC)

293

Graphic Window

To Erase a Note
1. 2. Click or type e to choose the Erase tool.

Click on any note to delete it.

To Erase Several Notes

1. 2. 3. Click or press e to choose the Erase tool.

Drag the cursor across notes to delete them. Release the mouse button when you are done.

To Select and Erase Notes

1. 2. 3. Click or press s to choose the Select tool.

Select one or more notes. Press the Delete key to delete the notes.

To Scrub the Song

1. 2. 3. Click or press b to choose the Scrub tool.

Press and hold the left mouse button in the Notes pane. Overture displays a vertical line and plays any notes that are underneath the line. Drag the line to the left or right, at any desired speed.

Percussion, Drum Notes, and Note Names

If you are editing a track that is routed to a percussion instrument, the Graphics window automatically configures itself in drum mode. In drum mode, the names of the various percussion instruments replace the piano keys. This means it is easy to change percussion notes from one instrument to another or to select and edit the notes played by a single percussion instrument. To display drum note names: 1. Set the track to a percussion definition.

294

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

2.

Assign an instrument with defined note names.

The Controllers pane, the lower half of the Graphics window, lets you edit MIDI, controller, velocity, and pitch wheel data. MIDI hardware and software use controllers, special types of events, to control the details of how MIDI music is played. They use automation data to adjust volume, pan, and other parameters of MIDI and audio tracks on the fly while playback is in progress. Overture lets you enter or edit controller and automation data using the Controllers pane in the Graphic window.

Controllers
Controllers are the pedals, knobs, and wheels on your electronic instrument that you use to change the sound while you're playing. For example, a sustain pedal and a modulation wheel are two controllers commonly found on keyboards. Controllers let you control the detail and character of your music. Say youre playing a guitar sound on your synthesizer, but it sounds lifeless and dull. Thats partly because a guitar player doesnt just play notes one after another he often bends or slides on the strings to put emotion into his playing. You can use controllers in the same way, creating bends, volume swells, and other effects that make sounds more realistic and more fun to listen to. Your computer can work the controllers on your electronic instrument by sending MIDI Controller messages. The MIDI specification allows for 128 different types of controllers, many of which have standard usages. For example, controller 7 is normally used for volume events, and controller 10 is normally used for pan. Every controller can take on a value ranging from 0 to 127. The Graphic window toolbar contains two drop-down lists, Data type and Controller, that let you choose the controller or data you want to see and edit. The contents of these lists depend on the port and channel settings and on the instrument assigned to that port and channel. Different instruments use controllers in different ways. Overture lets you use instrument definitions to define the names that go with each controller number. For more information on instrument definitions, see Chapter 43, Instrument Assignments and Definitions (PC).

Note:
Overture has automatic searchback for all continuous controller data to ensure that the correct controller values are in effect regardless of where you start playback. Suppose you start playback halfway through a song. Overture searches back from that point to find any earlier controller values that should still apply.

Chapter 30: Graphic Window (PC)

295

Graphic Window

The Controller Pane View

Velocity, Pitch Wheel, and Aftertouch

Overture lets you display and edit several other types of data the same way you do controller data. These data depend on your port and channel settings and on the instruments assigned to them. They may include, for example: Velocity. MIDI note velocities Wheel. MIDI pitch wheel or pitch-bend messages ChanAft. MIDI channel aftertouch (ChanAft) values Control. MIDI Controller values Tempo. Song tempos

Note velocity is an attribute of each note and not a completely separate event. You cannot add or remove velocity events in the Controllers pane, but you can use the draw and straight line tools to adjust the velocity values for existing notes. You can also edit velocities with the Notes>Modify Notes command. To use this command, see Modify on page 575.

Using the Controllers Pane

The Controllers pane is the most powerful and flexible way to edit data. The Controllers pane is the lower half of the Graphic window. To display the Controller pane, drag the splitter bar at the bottom of the Graphic window up.

Snap Grid menu Tools for editing controllers Choose the type of data to edit Pick the controller to change Snap Grid button Choose the track

Splitter bar

Controllers pane

296

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Selection methods in the Controllers pane are similar to those in other views. Here is a summary: Click a controller value to select it Shift-click to add other controller values to the selection Ctrl-click to toggle the selection state of a controller Drag a rectangle around several controller values to select them

Chapter 30: Graphic Window (PC)

297

Graphic Window

The Controllers pane looks like a graph; the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents the event values. Each event appears as a single vertical line, and the height of this line shows the value of the event. The Controllers pane shows events for a single track. You can only see one type of controller at a time. You can zoom in and out on the Controllers pane using the zoom and unzoom buttons in the scrollbar. To zoom all the way in or out in a single step, hold the Shift key while you click on the tool.

The Controllers pane has the same tools you use to edit notes; use them to add or modify controller events:
Tool... Name... Select Line What its for... Select controller events, so you can delete them Draw a straight line indicating a steady increase or decrease in controller value Draw a custom curve indicating changes in controller value Erase controller changes already in place

Draw Erase

When you use the Draw tool, the speed with which you drag the mouse determines the density of controller events. To insert a larger number of controller events with relatively small changes in value, move the mouse slowly. To insert a smaller number of controller events with relatively large changes in value, drag the mouse quickly. Creating a change that sounds smooth does not always require making the value change by one on each unit. Bigger jumps may sound very gradual if the tempo is fast. Also, many devices round off the controller values. For example, many instruments respond to volume controller values of 100 and 101 with exactly the same loudness. Using too high a density of controller events can backfire by making the computer work so hard during playback that it is unable to keep up. This will usually cause hiccups or poor timing during playback.

298

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

To Display Different Types of Data

1. 2. 3. Select the track whose controller data you want to see by clicking the track number in the Track view. Choose Window>Graphic Window to display the Graphic window. Choose the data you want to see. For controllers also choose the controller number.

Overture displays the data in the controllers pane.

To Insert a Controller Value

1. 2. 3. Choose the data type and controller (if applicable) from the toolbar menus. Select the tool or the tool.

Click in the Controllers pane view at any desired time point and value.

Overture adds a controller at the indicated point.

To Draw a Linear Series of Controllers

1. 2. 3. Choose the data type and controller (if applicable) from the toolbar menus. Select the tool.

Drag a line in the Controllers pane from the starting time and value to the ending time and value.

Overture adds a series of controllers and erases any existing controller values in the same time interval.

To Draw a Series of Controller Value Changes

1. 2. 3. Choose the data type and controller (if applicable) from the toolbar menus. Select the tool.

Drag the cursor across the Controllers pane, adjusting the value as you move left to right.

Overture adds a series of controllers and erases any existing controller values in the same time interval.

Chapter 30: Graphic Window (PC)

299

Graphic Window

Tip:
When using the tool, you can press and hold the Shift key to draw a straight line.

To Remove or Erase Controllers

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose the data type and controller (if applicable) from the toolbar menus. Select the tool.

Drag the mouse over the desired region to highlight the region you want to erase. Release the mouse button when you have highlighted the desired region.

Overture deletes all controllers of the selected type. You cannot delete velocity events in the Controllers pane. You must delete the notes that have those velocities.

300

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

31
Selection Tools Zoom To Fit Button Ruler (displays bar & beat) Pencil Tool Piano Roll

Graphic Window (Mac)

Graphic Window (Mac)

Although Overture is not a stand-alone sequencing program, it does offer many powerful MIDI data editing tools. Among these is the Graphic window, which graphically displays a tracks MIDI data using a piano roll and strip chart display. Use the Graphic window to edit any MIDI data in any track. Overture automatically applies any changes you make in the Graphic window to the Score window and vice versa. To open the Graphic window, choose Windows>Graphic.

MIDI Instrument Quantize Cursor Buttons Track Select

Cursor Position Display

Mute and Solo Buttons

Notes (displayed in raw MIDI form)

Zoom Buttons

Track Select Button

Use this button to select which track Overture displays in the Graphic window. The button always shows the name of the currently displayed track (as does the windows title bar).

Track Select pop-up Menu

To change the track whose MIDI data is displayed in the Graphic window, select a different track from the Track Select pop-up menu. Specifically: 1. Press and hold the mouse button on the Track Select pop-up menu. Overture displays a list of all tracks in the active score.

2.

While still holding the mouse button, move the cursor over the track you wish to view. Overture highlights the track.

3.

Release the mouse button. The graphic window now shows the MIDI data contained in the selected track.

302

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

The Piano Roll

The Piano Roll is so named because it resembles the old rolls of paper used by player pianos.

The Piano Roll consists of a gridthe vertical lines represent bar lines and the horizontal lines indicate pitch. Notes are represented on the Piano Roll as black, rectangular blocks. The length of the block represents the duration of the note. For example, the Piano Roll below contains two notes: The first is a C3 (indicated by its vertical position), and it occurs on the second beat of the first bar (indicated by its horizontal position) and lasts for two beats (indicated by its length). The second is a G3, and it occurs on the third beat of the second bar and lasts for one beat.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

303

Graphic Window (Mac)

The two measures shown above translate into the standard music notation below.

Cursor Position Display

The Cursor Position display shows both the horizontal and vertical position of the cursor in the Piano Roll.

This shows the horizontal position of the cursor in Bars Beats Clocks

This shows the vertical position of the cursor by note name

Cursor

Horizontal Cursor Position

The horizontal position of the cursor is displayed in Bars Beats Clocks.

Clock number Beat number Bar number

Overture indicates the horizontal cursor position with three numbers: The bar number displays the measure number containing the cursor. The beat number displays how many beats the cursor is into the measure.

304

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

The clock number displays how many clocks the insertion point is into the beat. Overture records and plays notes with a resolution of 480 clocks per quarter note, so an eighth note equals 240 clocks; a sixteenth note 120 clocks, and so on.

The cursor position above indicates that the cursor is at 2 4 240. This means the cursor is in the second measure and midway through the fourth beat.

Vertical Cursor Position

The vertical position of the cursor is displayed as a note name. The MIDI standard supports 128 notes ranging from C-2 to G8 with Middle C = C3.

Cursor

Cursor

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

305

Graphic Window (Mac)

Quantize Cursor Buttons

Use the Quantize Cursor buttons to limit cursor movements to exact beat values. This is particularly useful for selecting a range of notes based on exact beat values or for moving notes in exact beat increments.
Cursor Quantize On/Off Cursor Quantize Value

306

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

There are two Quantize Cursor buttons: Cursor Quantize On/Off: Click this button to turn cursor quantization on and off. Cursor Quantization is ON when the button is highlighted.

Cursor Quantization ON

Cursor Quantization OFF

1. Press and hold to open a quantization value pop-up menu.

2. Select a quantization value from the pop-up menu.

The following discussion tells why you may wish to turn off cursor quantization: When cursor quantization is off, the cursor moves at its maximum resolution of 1/480th of a quarter note. Turning cursor quantization off allows you to move notes with maximum accuracy, slightly adjusting their timing and, therefore, their feel. Turning off cursor quantization also lets you select precise, non-quantized editing regions (such as 11225 to 13390). When cursor quantization is on, the cursor moves across the Piano Roll in discrete increments equal to the Cursor Quantize value. For example, if the cursor is quantized to quarter notes, selections will only begin or end upon times like 110, 120, 430, or any others with a clock value equal to zero. Similarly, if the cursor is quantized to eighth notes, selections will only begin or end upon times like 12240, 140, 51240, or any others with a clock value equal to either zero or 240. If youre not sure what these numbers mean, please read Horizontal Cursor Position on page 304.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

307

Graphic Window (Mac)

Cursor Quantize Value: Press and hold this button to select the cursor quantization value. This button always displays the active cursor quantization value.

Zoom Buttons
Use the Zoom buttons to either zoom in for a detailed look at a narrow region of data or to zoom out for an overview of many measures worth of data. The zoom buttons affect only the horizontal displaythe vertical display is unaffected.

Zoom In button Zoom Out button

Note:
Overture only zooms horizontally; showing more measures as you zoom out or fewer measures as you zoom in. You cannot change the Graphic windows vertical scalingif you need to see notes that are outside the pitch range of the window, either use the scroll bar or resize the window.

There are two Zoom buttons. These are discussed in the following two sections.

Zoom In Button
Click this button to zoom in on the MIDI data displayed in the Piano Roll. You can click the button numerous times to zoom closer and closer to specific areas of the Piano Roll.

Using this button is like using a zoom lens on a camerayou have a narrower field of view, but you see more details within that field of view. Look at the figure below. The top illustration shows the original Piano Rollnotice that it displays five full measures. The bottom illustration shows the Piano Roll after

308

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

zooming in. Notice that you can now see only one measure, but that you can see much more detail about the notes within that measure.

Beats

Measures

This Piano Roll is zoomed out to show five measures.

Zoom Out Button

Click this button to zoom out from the MIDI data displayed in the Piano Roll. You can click the button numerous times to display more and more measures in the Piano Roll.

Using this button is like using a wide angle lens on a camerayou have a wider field of view, but the objects within that field are less detailed. In the figure above the bottom illustration shows the original Piano Rollnotice that it displays only a single measure. The top illustration shows the Piano Roll after zooming out. Notice that you can see more measures, but that you see less detail about the individual notes within the measures.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

309

Graphic Window (Mac)

This Piano Roll is zoomed in to only a single measure

Zoom To Fit Button

Click this button to fit the current selection width into the Graphic window. Option-click this button to fit the entire track into the Graphic window.

Zoom To Fit button

Note:
Overture only zooms horizontally (the time axis). You cannot change the Graphic Windows vertical scalingif you need to see a greater pitch range of notes, resize the window using its grow box.

For example, assume you have the track below and you want to display only the data in measures 6 and 7.

To do so: 1. Click the I-beam button to select it.

310

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

2.

Drag across measures 6 and 7. Overture highlights all the data in measures 6 and 7.
Drag across ruler with I-beam cursor to select a region of measures

3.

Click the Zoom to Fit button. Overture automatically zooms in to show the two selected measures.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

311

Graphic Window (Mac)

MIDI Instrument Button

Use this button to select the MIDI device that Overture uses to play the currently displayed track. The button always shows the name of the currently selected device.

MIDI Device button

By default, this button displays the MIDI device assigned to the corresponding track in the Tracks window (as discussed in Device Selection for a Track or Voice on page 283). Selecting a new device from the Graphic windows MIDI Instrument pop-up menu automatically updates the Tracks window. To use the MIDI Instrument pop-up menu: 1. Press and hold the mouse on the MIDI Instrument button. Overture opens a pop-up menu of all the devices in your current Studio Setup document. 2. Release the mouse over the device you wish to use as a MIDI Instrument. Overture selects the device as the MIDI playback Instrument for the indicated track, displays its name in the MIDI Instrument button, and updates the assignment in the Tracks window.

Mute & Solo Buttons

Use these buttons to either mute or solo the track currently displayed in the Graphic window.

Mute & Solo buttons

These buttons have the same effect as checking the corresponding column in the Tracks window (as discussed in Muting a Track on page 286 and Soloing a Track on page 286). When you mute a track, its ignored during MIDI playback. When you solo a track, only it and any other soloed tracks play during MIDI playback.

312

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Selection Tools
There are two different selection tools: Marquee tooluse this tool to drag a rectangle around those notes you wish to select. I-beam tooluse this tool to select all notes in either a time range or a pitch range.

The following section discusses common note selection techniques (regardless of which selection button you click). The sections following that discuss each of the two selection tools in detail.

Common Selection and Editing Techniques

Selecting and editing individual notes is the same regardless of which selection mode you choose. When you move the cursor over the left portion of a note in the Piano Roll, the cursor turns into a Move cursor ( ). Drag the note to the left or right to change its beginning point.

Move Cursor

Option-drag the note to copy it.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

313

Graphic Window (Mac)

When you move the cursor over the middle portion of a note in the Piano Roll, the cursor turns into a Transpose cursor ( ). Drag the note up or down to change its pitch. Notes dragged in the Graphic window always change chromatically.

Transpose Cursor

When you select more than one note (see below) and option-drag a note in the selection vertically, Overture transposes the entire selection. When you move the cursor over the right portion of a note in the Piano Roll, the cursor turns into a Duration cursor (+<>). Drag the end of the note left or right to change its duration.

Duration Cursor

To select a note, click it (it doesnt matter which cursor appears when you move it over the note). To select more than one note, hold down the shift-key as you click each additional note. Selected notes appear hollow rather than solid. Any notes you select in the Graphic window are automatically selected in the Score window. Similarly, any notes you select in the Score window are automatically selected in the Graphic window.

314

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Selecting Notes Within a Pitch Range

To select all notes within a specified pitch range: 1. Move the cursor into the Piano Rolls left margin. The cursor becomes a sideways I-beam ( selection tool is enabled. 2. ) regardless of which

Press and hold the mouse at one end of the desired pitch range and drag to the other end.

3.

Release the mouse button. Overture selects all notes that fall within the selected pitch range.

Selected notes within the specified pitch range

Selecting all Notes of a Single Pitch

To select all notes of a single pitch: 1. Move the cursor into the Piano Rolls left margin. The cursor becomes a sideways I-beam ( enabled. ) regardless of which selection tool is

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

315

Graphic Window (Mac)

Drag the cursor in the margin to select a range of notes

2.

Click the desired pitch. Overture automatically selects all notes of that pitch.

Click a note in the left margin to select all notes of that pitch in the track

Marquee Tool
Click the Marquee tool to select it.

Marquee tool

When you select the Marquee tool, Overtures cursor turns into a cross-hair when you move it over the Piano Roll.

316

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Use the Marquee tool to select notes in a rectangular area. To do so: 1. With the Marquee tool selected, press and hold the mouse at one corner of the desired rectangular selection.

2.

While still holding the mouse button, drag diagonally to the opposite corner.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

317

Graphic Window (Mac)

3.

Release the mouse button. Overture selects all notes that begin within the rectangle.

This note is not selected since it doesnt begin within the rectangle

Overture selects all notes that begin within the rectangle

Zooming with the Marquee Tool

If you hold down the option key while dragging with the Marquee tool, Overture automatically zooms the Graphic window in on the selection.

I-beam Tool
Click the I-beam tool to select it.

I-beam button

When you select the I-beam tool, Overtures cursor turns into an I-beam when you move it over the Piano Roll. Use the I-beam tool to select: all notes within a region of time all MIDI data within a region of time

Note:
Do not confuse this I-beam tool with the Select tool in the Strip Chart. We discuss the Strip Charts Select tool in The Strip Chart Select Tool on page 331. The following sections discuss each I-beam selection technique.

318

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Selecting Notes in a Time Region

To select all notes within a region of time: 1. With the I-beam tool selected, press and hold the mouse at the desired start time anywhere within the Piano Roll.

I-beam Cursor (vertical placement is unimportant)

2.

While still holding the mouse button, drag to the desired end time.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

319

Graphic Window (Mac)

3.

Release the mouse button. Overture selects all notes that begin within the time range.

Overture selects all the notes that begin within the selected time range

Selecting All MIDI Data in a Time Region

To select all MIDI data (including notes, pitch bend, continuous controls, and the like) within a region of time, drag the I-beam cursor across the top of the Piano Roll.

Dragging in this area selects ALL types of MIDI data (not just notes)

Note:
You can use the Strip Chart to view and edit all the various types of non-note MIDI data. The Strip Chart is located just below the Piano Roll in the Graphic window. To learn to use the Strip Chart, see The Strip Chart on page 326.

320

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Pencil Tool
Click the Pencil tool to select it. Use the Pencil tool to insert notes into the Piano Roll.

Pencil button

Where you click in the Piano Roll determines the start time and pitch of any notes entered with the Pencil tool. The Insert window (see below) determines the duration and velocity of inserted notes.

Note:
Do not confuse this Pencil tool with the Pencil tool in the Strip Chart. We discuss the Strip Charts Pencil tool in The Strip Chart Pencil Tool on page 332.

To insert notes with the Pencil tool: 1. Double-click the Pencil tool. Overture opens the Insert window.

2.

Set the note size, duration and velocity of the note you wish to enter. We discuss this Insert window in detail in About the Insert Window below.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

321

Graphic Window (Mac)

3.

Move the cursor into the Piano Roll. The cursor turns into a note.

4.

Move the cursor to the desired pitch and start time of the note you wish to insert. You may find it helpful to use the Cursor Position Display (as discussed in Cursor Position Display on page 304) or to use a quantized cursor (as discussed in Quantize Cursor Buttons on page 306).

Note:
You can select individual notes when the Pencil tool is active. Move the cursor over a note and one of the Move, Transpose, or Duration cursors appears, depending on where you position the cursor. For more information about selecting notes this way, see Common Selection and Editing Techniques on page 313.

About the Insert Window

The Insert window has three elements: Size parameters Duration parameters Velocity numerical

We discuss these in the following sections.

Size Parameters
Use this portion of the window to set the size of the note you wish to insert. Select a note size from the pop-up menu or set the size (in clocks) using the Clocks numerical.

If you wish to insert a tuplet, check the Tuplet option and use the numericals to set the X in the time of Y value of the tuplet.

322

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

For example, to insert eighth note triplets, first select an eighth note from the Size pop-up menu, check the Tuplet check box, then specify 3 in the time of 2.

Duration Parameters
Use this portion of the window to set the actual length of the note you will enter. A notes duration is different from its size. The duration is the actual length of the note, and the size is the amount of time the counter will advance. The space between notes is called the gap.

Size

Size arrow demonstrates size (as opposed to duration) of note below.

Gap Duration

You can specify a Duration either as a Percent of note size or as a Constant Gap by selecting it from the Duration pop-up menu.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

323

Graphic Window (Mac)

If you select Percent from the Duration pop-up menu, the Insert window shows a numerical with which you set a percentage of note size. For example, if you have a note size of a sixteenth note (120 clocks), and you set the duration to 90%, Overture will insert a note with a length of 108 clocks (90% of 120).

Duration parameters in Percent Mode

If you select Constant Gap from the Duration pop-up menu, this window shows a Gap size pop-up menu and a Gap size numerical (in clocks).

Duration parameters in Constant Gap Mode

324

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

In Constant Gap mode, use the Duration parameters (either the Gap Size pop-up menu or Clocks numerical) to set an equal space between all notes entered by the Pencil tool (regardless of note size).

Constant Gaps

Velocity Numerical
Use this numerical to set the key velocity of the inserted note. MIDI velocity values can be between 1 (softest) and 127 (loudest).

Velocity numerical

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

325

Graphic Window (Mac)

The Strip Chart

The Strip Chart is a powerful portion of the Graphic window. You use it to view and edit graphically MIDI data that you cant otherwise see. Use the Strip Chart to display and edit graphically such track properties as: key velocity note duration pitch bend modulation wheel, volume or other continuous controller event program changes sustain pedal aftertouch tempo, and more

Opening the Strip Chart

When you first open a Graphic window, the Strip Chart is hidden. There are two ways to open a Strip Chart: Click the Strip Chart toggle at the bottom of the windowthe Strip Chart opens showing the data type last displayed in the Strip Chart.

Or...

326

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Choose an event type from the Strip Chart pop-up menua Strip Chart opens showing the selected data type.
Press and hold to open pop-up menu of all types of Strip Chart events

The Strip Chart displays each MIDI event as a rectangle. The height of the rectangle determines the value of the MIDI event; the left edge of the rectangle determines the start time of the event; and the width of the rectangle determines the duration of the MIDI event.

MIDI Data Events Strip Chart Select Tool Pencil Tool Variable Tool pop-up menu Edit Shapes pop-up Strip Chart menu Toggle Strip Chart pop-up menu Density Setting Controller Type pop-up menu

Your Strip Chart may look different from the one above since not all Strip Chart elements are applicable to all data types. The following sections discuss how to use the Strip Chart and its various elements.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

327

Graphic Window (Mac)

Strip Chart Pop-up Menu

The Strip Chart can display many different types of events. Use the Strip Chart pop-up menu to select the event type displayed in the Strip Chart.

Note:
The text displayed in the Strip Chart pop-up menu indicates the type of data currently displayed in the Strip Chart. The pop-up reads Strip Chart only if no Strip Chart is present.

328

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

To select an event type: 1. 2. Move the cursor over the Strip Chart pop-up menu at the top of the Graphic window. Press and hold the mouse to open a pop-up menu.

3.

From the pop-up menu, choose the type of MIDI data you want to display. The Strip Chart changes (or opens) to display data of the selected type. The Strip Chart is blank if no data exists.

The Strip Chart displays information for only one track. Inserting events in the Strip Chart places the events in the displayed track. If you choose No Strip Chart from the pop-up menu, Overture hides the Strip Chart in the Graphic window, giving more room to the Piano Roll display.

Controller Type Pop-up Menu

If you select a controller event from the Strip Chart pop-up menu, Overture displays a second pop-up menu that you use to select the type of controller you want to display.
Controller Type Pop-up Menu

Strip Chart Pop-up Menu

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

329

Graphic Window (Mac)

The Strip Chart pop-up menu lets you select some of the more popular controller events directly. You can, however, use the Controller Type pop-up menu to view any MIDI controller.

Strip Chart Toggle

Click the Strip Chart Toggle to either show or hide the Strip Chart. If the Strip Chart is open, clicking the toggle will hide it. If the Strip Chart is hidden, clicking the toggle opens it to display the most recently selected data.

330

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

The Strip Chart Select Tool

Use this tool to select a range of data only within the Strip Chart.

Do not confuse the Strip Chart Select tool with the Graphic windows I-beam tool. We discuss the Graphic windows I-beam button in I-beam Tool on page 318. To use the Strip Chart Select tool: 1. Click the Strip Chart Select tool. Overture disables the Edit Shapes pop-up (discussed in Edit Shapes Pop-up Menu on page 339), since it has no effect on the use of this tool. 2. Move the cursor into the Strip Chart. The Cursor becomes an I-beam.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

331

Graphic Window (Mac)

Note:

3.

Drag the cursor horizontally to select all Strip Chart events in a time range. Notice that only Strip Chart events are selected. The Select tool does not select MIDI notes in the Piano Roll.

You can also select a range of Strip Chart values by dragging the I-beam cursor vertically in the Strip Charts left margin.

The Strip Chart Pencil Tool

Use the Strip Chart Pencil tool to draw new data values in the strip chart. The Pencil tool works in conjunction with the Edit Shapes pop-up menu (discussed in Edit Shapes Pop-up Menu on page 339).

332

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Note:
Do not confuse the Strip Charts Pencil tool with the Graphic windows Pencil tool. We discuss the Graphic windows Pencil tool in Pencil Tool on page 321. To use the Strip Chart Pencil tool: 1. 2. Click the Strip Chart Pencil tool. Select a shape from the Edit Shapes pop-up menu.

3.

Move the cursor into the Strip Chart. The cursor becomes a pencil.

4.

Drag the pencil to draw a line of the selected shape. In this example, the pencil draws a straight line because the Straight shape is selected. You can select other shapes.

5.

Release the mouse. Overture sets the Strip Chart data to the values drawn by the mouse.

When you use the Pencil tool to edit any continuous event (except Tempo, which is generated every eighth note), you must also set a density value (as discussed in the following section).

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

333

Graphic Window (Mac)

We discuss this pop-up menu in detail in Edit Shapes Pop-up Menu on page 339. This example assumes youve selected the Straight shape ( ).

Holding down the command key when you enter controller values using the Strip Chart Pencil Tool causes a pop-up menu to appear. Selecting among all valid values gives you greater precision in entering that controllers data. This feature is not active for Channel or Polyphonic Aftertouch.

Using the pencil tool with Patches selected in the Strip Chart works the same as using the Patch pop-up menu in the Tracks Window.

Density Setting
When the Strip Chart displays continuous data (such as pitch bend or volume) and you select either the Pencil tool or the Thin tool, the Density setting appears below the Strip Chart.

Density setting

Drawing in a Strip Chart with a low Density setting inserts very few continuous events. Drawing in a Strip Chart with a high Density setting inserts numerous continuous events. Generally, its best to keep the Density setting as low as possible without hearing individual steps in your continuous data. MIDI is capable of communicating about one thousand events per second. If you drew a pitch bend line from 0 to +1000 over the course of 1 second, MIDI would be so busy transmitting pitch bend events that

334

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

it wouldnt have time to do anything else. The Density setting gives you the option to choose what percentage of MIDI capacity you want occupied by the continuous events you insert. For example, if you are drawing pitch bend for a patch whose pitch bend range is one whole step, you will probably find that a density of 1% gives satisfactory results. If youre pitch bending across 2-3 octaves, you may want to increase density to 20%. Use your ears to set the lowest possible density value without hearing individual steps.

The Variable Tool Pop-up Menu

Graphic Window (Mac) 335
Press and hold the Variable Tool pop-up menu to display all the possible variable tools. Use a Variable tool to apply a modification algorithm to the Strip Chart data. The Variable tools work in conjunction with the Edit Shapes pop-up menu (discussed in Edit Shapes Pop-up Menu on page 339).

The following sections discuss each of the Variable tools.

Scale
Use the Scale tool to scale Strip Chart data to between 25% and 400% of its present value. The Strip Charts left margin shows the scaling factor. Overture multiplies the value of each MIDI event by the scaling factor shown.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

Look at the example shown in the following figure. If a series of notes each has a Key Velocity of 90 and you use the Scale tool to draw a straight line at 50%, then each of the notes gets scaled to a value of 45 (50% of 90).

1. Draw straight line at 50% with Scale Tool

2. Overture scales all intersected data by 50%

Note:
Overture respects the limits of each type of Controller to avoid creating invalid MIDI data.

Add Amount
Use the Add Amount tool to add to or subtract from the present Strip Chart data value.

336

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Look at the example below. If a series of notes each has a Key Velocity of 90 and you use the Add Amount tool to draw a straight line at -20, then each of the notes gets set to a value of 70 (20 subtracted from 90).

1. Draw straight line at -20 with the Add Amount Tool

2. Overture subtracts 20 from all intersected data

Maximum Limit/Minimum Limit

Use either the Maximum Limit or the Minimum Limit tool to restrict the range of values in the Strip Chart. If you use the Maximum Limit tool to draw a straight line at a Key Velocity of 80, then Overture sets each note over the limit to 80, but does not change the value of any notes less than 80.

1. Draw straight line at 80 with the Max Limit Tool

2. Overture sets any values originally over 80 to exactly 80. It doesnt disturb any values less than 80.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

337

Graphic Window (Mac)

Legato
Use the Legato tool to change note durations so that they extend a certain percentage of the way to the next note. If you set the Legato tool to 100%, each note will extend exactly to the start of the following note. Chords are treated as a single note. Legato is grayed out when the Strip Chart displays anything other than note duration.

Thin
Use the Thin tool to decrease the amount of controller data in a track. This saves memory and frees up the MIDI data stream for other types of MIDI events. For example, if you have a track with dense MIDI volume data, you can thin it as follows: 1. 2. 3. Make sure the Strip Chart shows the data you want to thin. Select the Thin tool from the Variable pop-up menu. Set the Density setting to a small amount. This example uses a density setting of 0.3%.

4.

Drag across the controller data you wish to thin. Overture automatically thins the controller data down to the indicated Density setting.

You can also thicken data by setting the Density setting to a value greater than the current density of the events.

338

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Edit Shapes Pop-up Menu

Press and hold the Edit Shapes pop-up menu to display all the possible edit shapes.
Click here...

...to open the Edit Shapes pop-up menu.

Use the Edit Shapes pop-up menu to tell Overture how to draw data in the Strip Chart. The following sections discuss each of the Edit Shapes tools.

Straight
When you select the Straight shape, you can drag a line in any direction and make linear changes to Strip Chart events.

Free
When you select the Free shape, you can drag a freehand line through the Strip Chart. This is especially useful when using the Pencil, Minimum Amount, and Maximum Amount tools.

Parabola
When you select the Parabola shape, you can draw a parabola that gets steeper at the end. You can also use the parabola to draw a curve in the opposite direction, giving you a curve thats steeper at the beginning.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

339

Graphic Window (Mac)

The direction and amount that you drag define the shape and size of the parabola.

Using the parabola is especially useful in defining natural sounding fades: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select Volume from the Strip Chart pop-up. Select the Pencil tool. Choose the Parabola shape from the Edit Shapes pop-up. Drag a parabola from the top of the Strip Chart to the bottom, starting at the time you wish to begin fading, and stopping at the time your track ends.

Flat
Use the Flat shape to draw straight, horizontal lines. All selected data will either become the same value, or be added to or scaled by the same amount. This is especially useful with the Percent tool to scale everything by the same amount.

Random
Use the Random shape to randomize data within a rectangle that you draw in the Strip Chart. To use the Random shape: 1. Select the Random shape from the Edit Shapes pop-up.

340

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

2.

In the Strip Chart, drag a rectangular box around the events you wish to randomize. Overture randomly chooses values within the limits of that box and applies the changes to the selected events.

When the Variable pop-up is set to Add Amount, Overture adds a random amount between the values you outline. When it is set to Scale, Overture chooses random values to scale the selection up and down.

Chapter 31: Graphic Window (Mac)

341

Graphic Window (Mac)

342

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

32
Root button Bass button Toggle to Guitar Frames Symbol list

Chords Window

Use the Chords window to put chord names and guitar frames in the Score window. To open the Chords window, choose Windows>Chords.

Place Bass Note Below Chord

Chord Name Display

Note:
The Chords window cannot be open at the same time as the Lyrics window. If the Lyrics window is open when you choose Windows>Chords, the Lyrics window closes automatically.

Chords Window

Chord Terminology
Its important to understand the different terminology associated with naming chords. Specifically: Chord. This is the actual notation of multiple notes as shown on the staff in a score. Chord Name. This is the alphanumeric name of the chord as written above a staff to indicate which chord to play. Chord Root. This is the fundamental note of the chord, or its root position. Chord Bass. This is an additional pitch added to a chord name that indicates a note other than the root is the lowest pitch in the actual chord. Chord Suffix. This is the portion of the chord name that describes the actual pattern of notes that make up the chord, without regard for the root or alternate bass. Examples of suffixes are mi7 or sus4. Chord Symbol. In standard music notation, this term is synonymous with chord name but in Overture it describes a generic suffix/root/bass pattern as defined in the Chord Symbol library (discussed in Chord Symbols on page 413). For example, CMa7/G is a different chord name than EMa7/B, but theyre based upon the same chord symbol since both use the identical pattern of notes.
The entire pattern of notes specified here is a chord symbol (using a generic root and alternate bass)

Root (C) Chord Name (uses the actual root and alternate bass) Chord Suffix (mi7)

Bass (G)

344

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Anatomy of the Chords Window

The Chords window contains five separate areas. These are: Root button. Click the root button to set the root of a chord name.

Click to select root name

Symbol list. Overture gets this list of symbols from the current Chord Symbol library (as discussed in Chord Symbols on page 413). Click one of the symbols to select it. If a symbol isnt visible, use the scroll bars to scroll the list.
Click a symbol to select it Scroll to see more symbols

Guitar Frames and Bass on Bottom. Click the Guitar Frames button to toggle between guitar frames and chord names. Click the Bass on Bottom to plass bass notes below the chord name.

Chapter 32: Chords Window

345

Chords Window

Bass button. Click the bass button to set the bass of a chord name. Bass notes (and their corresponding sharp or flat) are displayed when they differ from the root name.

Chord Name display. This area shows a preview of the chord name exactly as it appears when you insert it into the Score window.

Chord Name display

You can use the Chords window to enter chords names in a score using one of the following techniques: Entering chord names with the mouse. Create chord names by clicking a symbol, root and alternate bass in the Chords window, then click the Score window to insert the chord name. Entering chord names with the computer keyboard. Create chord names by using the computer keyboard to select a symbol, root and alternate bass, then click the Score window to insert the chord name. Step-entering chord names with the computer keyboard. Create chord names using either mouse or keyboard selection of symbol, root and alternate bass, then step-enter the chord name into the Score window.

Overture provides a fourth method for entering chord names, step-entering them with a MIDI keyboard. This method does not use the Chords window. We discuss it in Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard on page 398). Each of the three chord name entry methods that use the Chords window are discussed in the following sections.

Entering Chord Names with the Mouse

Follow through this example to learn how to enter chord names using only the mouse. Assume you want to enter the following chord names: 1st measure: Dmi7 2nd measure: G7 3rd measure: Ami7/F

To enter these chord names using only the mouse: 1. 2. Make sure the Step Entry window is closed. Choose Windows>Chords. Overture opens the Chords window.

346

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

3.

Click the Root popup menu and choose D. Since your first chord is a Dmi7, clicking D sets the root of the chord.
Click here... ...to set the root

4.

Click mi7 in the Chords windows scrolling symbol list. Since your first chord is a Dmi7, selecting mi7 sets the correct chord symbol. Overture gets the root of the chord (in this case, a D) from the Root popup menu. NOTE: Because Overture gets the chord symbols for this window from the Chord Symbol library, your chord symbol list may look different from the one shown in this example if youre using a different Chord Symbol library. Chord Symbol libraries are discussed in Chord Symbols on page 413.
Click here... ...to select the symbol

5.

Move the cursor into the Score window at exactly the spot you wish to insert the chord name. The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer, pointing at the staff where you want to attach the chord name.

Chapter 32: Chords Window

347

Chords Window

6.

Click the mouse. Overture inserts the chord name into the score.

7.

Continue entering chord names using only the mouse. To enter the G7 chord name, set the dialog box as shown below, then click the score in the desired location.

348

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

8.

To enter the Ami7/F chord name, set the dialog box as shown below, then click the score in the desired location.

Click here to add a bass note to the chord

Note:
If, while the Chords window is open, you select a tool from the Tool Bar, then that tool becomes active and chord insertion is disabled. To continue inserting chords, click in the Chords Windows symbol list.

Entering Chord Names with the Keyboard

You can assemble chord names in the Chords window using only the computer keyboard. The table below shows all the key equivalents necessary to create chord names in the Chords window.

Chapter 32: Chords Window

349

Chords Window

Key a b c d e f g s w #

Action Sets root to A Sets root to B Sets root to C Sets root to D Sets root to E Sets root to F Sets root to G Sets root to one half step higher Sets root to one half step lower Sets the last selected root or bass to one half step higher Selects previous chord symbol

Key Shift-a Shift-b Shift-c Shift-d Shift-e Shift-f Shift-g Shift-s Shift-w

Action Turns added A bass on/off Turns added B bass on/off Turns added C bass on/off Turns added D bass on/off Turns added E bass on/off Turns added F bass on/off Turns added G bass on/off Sets root to one half step higher Sets bass to one half step lower

[ or left arrow

] or right arrow

Selects next chord symbol

Assume, as in the previous section, that you want to enter the following chord names: 1st measure: Dmi7 2nd measure: G7 3rd measure: Ami7/F

To enter these chord names using the computer keyboard: 1. 2. Make sure the Step Entry window is closed. Choose Windows>Chords. Overture opens the Chords window. 3. 4. Type d to select a root of D. Type either [ or ] or repeatedly until Overture highlights the mi7 chord symbol.

350

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

5.

Move the cursor into the Score window at exactly the spot where you want to insert the chord name. The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer, pointing at the staff to which Overture will attach the chord name.

6.

Click the mouse. Overture inserts the chord name into the score.

7.

Select a G7 chord name by typing a g, then typing [ one time to step backwards to the previous chord symbol in the list. Because Overture gets the chord symbols for this window from the Chord Symbol library, your chord symbol list may look different than the one shown in this example if youre using a different Chord Symbol library. We discuss Chord Symbol libraries in Chord Symbols on page 413.

Chapter 32: Chords Window

351

Chords Window

8.

Click the score in the desired location.

9.

Select an Ami7/F chord name by typing an a to set the root, then typing shift-f to add an F bass, then typing ] one time to step to forward to the next chord symbol in the list. Because Overture gets the symbols for this window from the Chord Symbol library, your chord symbol list may look different from the one shown in this example.

1. 0

Click the score in the desired location.

352

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Note:
If, while the Chords window is open, you select a tool from the Tool Bar, then that tool becomes active and chord insertion is disabled. To continue inserting chords, click in the Chords Windows symbol list.

Step Entering Chord Names

You can step-enter chord names from either the computer keyboard or from a MIDI Keyboard. The following section shows how to step enter chord names using the computer keyboard. To learn how to step enter chord names with a MIDI keyboard, see Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard on page 398.

Step Entering Chord Names with the Computer Keyboard

Follow through this example to learn how to step enter chord names without using a MIDI keyboard. Assume, as in the previous sections, that you want to enter the following chord names:

2nd measure: G7 3rd measure: Ami7/F

To enter these chord names using the computer keyboard: 1. Choose Windows>Step Input. Overture opens the Step Input window.

Chapter 32: Chords Window

353

Chords Window

1st measure: Dmi7

2.

Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the chord name icon from the pop-up menu. We discuss this and all other elements of the Step Input window in Chapter 34, Step Input Window.
Input Select button

Chord Name icon

3. 4.

In the Score window, click in the measure where you want to begin step-entering chord names. Select a step size of a whole note from the Note Size pop-up menu. Alternatively, you can type a 1 on the computer keyboard to set the step size to a whole note. See the table on page 380 to see how number keys correspond to step durations.

5.

Choose Windows>Chords. Overture opens the Chords window.

6. 7.

Using either the mouse or the computer keyboard, select a Dmi7 chord name. Type return. Overture enters the Dmi7 chord name and advances the cursor one measure (since the step size is a whole note and this example is in 4/4 time).

354

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

8.

Select a G7 chord name and type return. Overture enters the G7 chord name and advances the cursor one more measure.

9.

Select an Ami7/F chord name and type return. Overture enters the Ami7/F chord name and advances the cursor one more measure.

To enter Guitar Frames click on the Guitar Frames check box. in the Chords Window.

Chapter 32: Chords Window

355

Chords Window

Guitar Frames

The symbols view now displays guitar frames from the current Guitar Frames library plus several additional buttons. Suffix button. Click the suffix button to choose the desired frame suffix. This is the same list of suffix names found in the Guitar Frames library. Tuning button. Click the tuning button to choose the Guitar tuning. This is the same list of tunings found in the Guitar Frames library. Text Only check box. Click the text only box if you want to display only the guitar frame name.

Entering Guitar Frames with the Mouse

Follow through this example to learn how to enter guitar frames using the mouse. Assume you want to enter the following guitar frames: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1st measure: Dmi7 2nd measure: G7 3rd measure: Ami7/F Switch to Guitar Frames view if needed.. Type d to select a root of D or click on the root button and choose D. Type m then 7 to choose minor 7 or by clicking on the suffix button and choosing minor 7. Type either [ or ] or the left and right arrow keys repeatedly until Overture highlights the desired frame in the symbol list. Move the cursor into the Score window at exactly the spot where you want to insert the guitar frame. The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer, pointing at the staff to which Overture will attach the guitar frame.

356

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

6.

Click the mouse. Overture inserts the guitar frame into the score.

7. 8.

Select a G7 guitar frame by typing g then 7 or choose them by clicking on the root button and the suffix button. Click the mouse. Overture inserts the guitar frame into the score.

Chapter 32: Chords Window

357

Chords Window

9. 1. 0

Select a Am7/F guitar frame by typing a, m, 7, then shift-f or by using the root, suffix, and bass buttons. Click the mouse. Overture inserts the guitar frame into the score.

The table below shows additional key equivalents for selecting guitar frames view in the Chords window. Key
m 6 7 9 + Tab

Action
Selects minor suffix Selects 6 suffix Selects 7 suffix Selects 9 suffix Selects next item in last button Selects previous item in last button Displays popup of all suffixes

358

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Moving Chord Names/Guitar Frames

You can move chord names and guitar frames either individually or globally by staff (or multiple staves). The use of Chord Names will also apply to Guitar frames for the following section.

Moving Chord Names Globally

When you select Options>Show>Chord Positions, the Score window displays a small triangle to the left of the chords on each systemthis is called the Chord Position Indicator.

Chord Position Indicators show vertical position of chord names on a staff.

1. Drag a position indicator down...

2. Notice that chord names move only for the system whose indicator you dragged.

Alt[Option]-drag a position indicator up or down to change the vertical position of all chord names for all remaining systems on that page.

Chapter 32: Chords Window

359

Chords Window

Drag any position indicator up or down to change the vertical position of all chord names for that system.

1. Alt[Option]-drag a position indicator down...

2. Notice that chord names move for all remaining systems on the page.

Control[Command]-drag a position indicator up or down to change the vertical position of all chord names for every remaining system in the score. Shift-click the indicator to reset all chord names to the baseline position. The shift-click also works in combination with the Alt[Option] and Control[Command] keystrokes.

Moving Chord Names Individually

Once youve placed chord names in a score, you can modify their automatic placement by dragging any chord name to a new location.
Original Chord Name placement

Drag a chord name to move i (the cursor becomes a Drag cursor).

New Chord Name placement after dragging it down.

To constrain movement to vertical or horizontal while dragging a chord name, shift-drag it. Overture constrains the movement to the direction you moved the mouse when you began shift-dragging. That is, if you begin to drag horizontally, the chord name moves only in the horizontal direction. If you begin to drag vertically, the chord name moves only in the vertical direction.

360

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

33
Lyric Locator Lyric Editing Area

Lyrics Window

Use the Lyrics window to add or change lyrics and assign them to specific notes. To open the Lyrics window, choose Window>Lyrics.

Note:
The Lyrics window cannot be open at the same time as the Chords window. Opening the Chords window will close the Lyrics window automatically.

Lyrics Window (PC)

Anatomy of the Lyrics Window

The Lyrics window is split into four areas: Buttons. The right side of the window has buttons for inserting and deleting lyrics in the Lyrics window, and putting them in the score. The botton of the window has buttons for inserting nonbreaking spaces and non-breaking dashes.

Font characteristics. Use the top area of the window to specify the look of the lyrics.

Lyric Locator. Use this middle area to load and assign where lyrics are placed in the score.

Lyric editing area. The bottom area of the window functions as a standard text editing area. It has its own scroll bar so you can move through long lyrics.

362

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

A lyric phrase is any body of text displayed in the Lyric editing area. You can assign the individual words and syllables to notes in a score. You assign each lyric to a specific voice beginning on a specific measure and, if necessary, on a particular verse.

Note:
Lyric phrases are determined by using any barline other than a normal barline. When you open the Lyrics window Overture includes all lyrics from the current measure to a the first non-normal barline or the end of the score. If you change the locator fields and press the Load button, all lyrics from the measure indicated in the Locator section to the first measure with a non-normal barline are loaded into the editing area. You can override this rule by checking the EOS check box. This tells Overture to ignore barlines and load the lyrics from the current measure through the end of the score.

The following sections discuss each of the main areas of the Lyrics window.

Buttons
Use the buttons to add and delete lyrics and to apply lyric changes to a score. There are four buttons. They are: Apply. Click this button to apply any lyric changes to the score. When you click this button, Overture reflows the lyric, beginning in the specified measure on the designated verse and voice. Delete. Click this button to delete the selected lyric. All lyrics from the specified measure to the first non-normal barline on the designated verse and voice are deleted. Insert Non-Breaking Space. Click this button to assign multiple words to a single note. Insert Non-Breaking Dash. Click this button to assign multiple syllables to a single note.

Use the Lyric Locator to assign where lyrics are placed in the score. There are numerous elements in the Lyric List. They are: Include Verse Number. Use this box to include the verse number to the left of the first word in the lyric line. Track box. Use this box to assign each lyric to a specific track. Measure box. Use this box to assign a starting measure for each lyric. Overture automatically flows lyrics beginning on the first note in the starting measure. Voice box. Use this box to assign each lyric to a specific voice. Overture supports 8 voices. Verse box. Use this box to assign each lyric to a specific verse. Overture supports 8 verses. Load button. Use this button to load the lyrics starting at track and measure on the designated verse and voice.

Chapter 33: Lyrics Window

363

Lyrics Window (PC)

Lyric Locator

EOS check box. Use this button to tell Overture to ignore barlines and load the lyrics from the current measure through the end of the score.

Lyric Editing Area

The lyric editing area functions as a standard text editing area. Type in this area to enter lyrics. Drag across lyrics to select them. Double-click words to select them. Generally, most common word-processor editing rules apply to the lyric editing area. This area has its own scroll bar so you can scroll through long lyrics.

Using the Lyrics Window

Perhaps the easiest way to learn about lyric entry is to follow some examples. The following sections take you step by step through the process of creating and editing lyrics in Overture.

Adding Lyrics to a Score

To add a lyric to a score: 1. Choose Window>Lyrics. Overture opens the Lyrics window.

2.

In the Locator area, type the number of the track, measure, voice, and verse to which you want to assign the Lyric.

364

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

3.

Type the lyric in the Lyric editing area. For now, type only single syllable words. If your lyric extends beyond the width of the window (or if you prefer to view your lyrics as poetic verse), you can press the return key at the end of each line. Overture treats returns exactly like spaces.

4.

Click the Apply button. Overture assigns each word to an individual note automatically.

Overture assigns each word to an individual note.

Chapter 33: Lyrics Window

365

Lyrics Window (PC)

Editing Existing Lyrics

To edit an existing lyric phrase: 1. 2. Click on the measure that contains the lyric to be edited. Choose Window>Lyrics. The location fields will be filled appropriately and the edit area will be filled with the lyric line text. You can change these fields and press the Load button to edit another phrase. 3. Type the changes in the Lyric editing area. For now, type only single syllable words. If your lyric extends beyond the width of the window (or if you prefer to view your lyrics as poetic verse), you can press the return key at the end of each line. Overture treats returns exactly like spaces.

4.

Click the Apply button. Overture assigns each word to an individual note automatically.

Overture assigns each word to an individual note

366

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Advanced Lyric Entry Techniques

In the previous sections, you created lyrics that contained only single syllable words, with each word assigned to its own note. In the following sections, you learn to create more advanced lyrics.

Entering Multi-syllable Words

You can type words with multiple syllables and have each syllable automatically assigned to a note. To do so, simply separate each syllable with either a dash or a space. In the score, dashes are centered between syllables. When a word crosses a barline, the dash is centered under the barline.

Type a dash between syllables to spread a word over more than one note.

Chapter 33: Lyrics Window

367

Lyrics Window (PC)

Entering Multi-note Syllables (Melisma)

To extend a syllable across more than one note, type an underline character. Each underline extends the syllable for one note.

There are four underlines to extend the word my across four additional notes. This is called a melisma.

Entering Multiple Words or Syllables on a Single Note

To assign multiple words to a single note, click in the lyric line to position the blinking cursor and press the Insert Non-Breaking Space button. To assign multiple syllables to a single note, press Insert NonBreaking Dash button.

Entered a non-breaking space to center both words under a single note.

368

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Starting a Lyric in the Middle of a Measure

Overture automatically flows lyrics beginning with the first note in the designated measure. If you want lyrics to begin on a note other than the first note in the measure, begin the lyric with a space for each note you wish to skip.

To start flowing lyrics from the middle of a measure, type a leading space for each note you wish to skip. In this example, type four spaces.

Entering Additional Verses

Popular vocal music often contains multiple verses, with each verses text shown immediately below the previous verse. To add a verse to an existing score: 1. 2. 3. In the Lyrics window, set the location fields to the beginning of the lyric phrase. Since this is the second verse, enter 2 in the Verse field. In the Lyric editing area, type the desired text.

Chapter 33: Lyrics Window

369

Lyrics Window (PC)

4.

Click the Apply button. The second verse is created below the first verse.

Second verse flows below the first verse automatically

Applying Different Fonts To Lyrics

You can apply any font, size, or style to any syllable or word in a lyric. To change the font, size, or style of any text in a Lyrics window: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Drag across any syllable or word, word or group of words in the Lyrics window. Select the font you want from the Font drop-down list. Select the font size you want from the Size drop-down list. Select the font style you want from the Style drop-down list. Click the Apply button. Overture applies the font changes to your score.

Moving Lyrics
You can move lyrics either individually or by line (verse).

370

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Moving Entire Lyric Lines

When you select the Options>Show>Lyric Positions option, Overture places a small triangle to the left of each verse in the Score windowthese are the lyric position indicators. If there is one verse assigned to a staff, theres one lyric position indicator. If there are three verses, there are three position indicators.

Lyric position indicators show each verse assigned to a staff.

Drag any position indicator up or down to change the vertical position of all remaining verses for that staff in that system.

1. Drag the Verse 2 indicator down...

2. Notice that Verse 2 and Verse 3 move down by the amount you drag (for one staff only).

Chapter 33: Lyrics Window

371

Lyrics Window (PC)

Alt[Option]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to the same verse in every remaining system on that page.

1. Alt-drag the Verse 2 indicator down...

2. Notice that Verse 2 and Verse 3 move down by the amount you drag for all remaining systems on the page.

Control[Command]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to the same verse in every remaining system in the score. Shift-click the indicator to reset all lyrics to the baseline position. The shift-click also works with the Alt[Option] and Control[Command] keystrokes.

Moving Lyrics Individually

Once youve assigned lyrics to notes in a score, you can modify their automatic placement by dragging any word (or syllable) in a score to a new location.

372

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

You can constrain word movement to either the horizontal or vertical direction by holding down the shift key before dragging a word.

Original Lyric Line

Drag a word to move it (the cursor becomes a Drag Cursor). Modified lyric after manually dragging the word "this".

Chapter 33: Lyrics Window

373

Lyrics Window (PC)

374

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Use the Step Input window to enter a score by recording MIDI data one step at a time. You can enter notes, chords, or rhythmic slashes in the Step Input window. To open the Step Input window, choose Windows>Step Input.

Type area

Size area

Duration area

Velocity area

Anatomy of the Step Input Window

The Step Input window contains four different areas, though not all areas are available at all times. These areas are: Type area. Use this top portion of the window to define the type of symbol you want to input and any related options. This area also contains a counter, showing exact metrical location and pitch. Size area. Use this portion of the window to set the amount of time the counter advances each time you play a note. Size appears as both an actual note value and as a number of clocks (480 clocks = one quarter note).

Step Input Window

34

Step Input Window

Duration area. Use this portion of the window to set the actual duration of the MIDI note you enter. This area is not available if youre entering chord names. Velocity area. Use this portion of the window to set the actual velocity of the MIDI note you will enter. This area is not available if youre entering chord names.

The following sections discuss each area in detail.

Type Area
Use this area to define the type of symbol you want to input, to set options related to that symbol, and to view pitch and meter placement of any step-entered data.

Input Select button Options pop-up menu Pitch Indicator

Counter

The Type area contains four elements: Input Select button Options pop-up menu Counter Pitch indicator

We discuss each element in one of the following sections.

Input Select button

Press and hold the mouse on this button to open the Input Select pop-up menu.

Input Select button

Input Select pop-up menu

376

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Select the type of symbol you want to step-enter from the Input Select pop-up menu. Overture lets you step-enter five types of music symbols: notes, rests, slashes, rhythmic slashes, and chord names.

Note Entry mode Rest Entry mode Slash Entry mode Rhythmic Slash Entry mode Chord Name Entry mode

Options pop-up menu

Move the cursor over the Options button, then press and hold the mouse to open the Options pop-up menu.

Use the pop-up Options menu to select various step-entry notation options: Force Stems Up. When you select this option, Overture makes the stems of any step-entered notes point upward, regardless of staff position. Select this option to enable it (put a check beside it); select it again to disable it. Force Stems Down. When you select this option, Overture makes the stems of any step-entered notes point downward, regardless of staff position. Select this option to enable it (put a check beside it); select it again to disable it. Force Accidentals to Sharps. When you select this option, Overture notates any accidentals as sharps, regardless of the key. Select this option to enable it (put a check beside it); select it again to disable it.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

377

Step Input Window

Force Accidentals to Flats. When you select this option, Overture notates any accidentals as flats, regardless of the key. Select this option to enable it (put a check beside it); select it again to disable it. Tie Previous Two Notes. This is actually a command, not an option. When you choose this command, Overture automatically ties together the two notes immediately to the left of the input point. This command allows you to step-enter tied notes easily. Duplicate Previous. This command is enabled only when you are step-entering slashes. Use it to copy the previous measures slash pattern into the active measure. Duplicate Previous to End. This command is enabled only when you are step-entering slashes. Use it to copy the previous measures slash pattern into all remaining measures in the score.

Counter
The Counter displays (in bars, beats and clocks) the location of the step youre about to enter.

Unit number Beat number Bar number

The bar number displays the measure number containing the insertion point. The beat number displays how many beats the insertion point is into the measure. The clock number displays how many clocks the insertion point is into the beat. Overture records and plays notes with a resolution of 480 clocks per quarter note, so an eighth note would equal 240 clocks; a sixteenth note would equal 120 clocks, and so on. The counter display shown above indicates that the cursor is at 8 2 240. This means the insertion point is in the eighth measure and midway through the second beat.

810

820 8 1 240 8 2 240 (insertion point)

378

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Pitch Indicator

Pitch Indicator

Size Area
This area sets the amount of time the counter advances each time you play a note. Overture displays the step size as both a note value and as an exact number of clocks (480 clocks = one quarter note). There are several ways to set the size: Method 1: Select a size from the Note Size pop-up menu.

Press and hold the Note Size button... ...then select a note size from the pop-up menu

Method 2: Use the clocks numerical to enter a new step size.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

379

Step Input Window

The Pitch Indicator displays, as a MIDI note number, the pitch of the note youre about to enter. MIDI supports 128 notes ranging from C2 to G8 with Middle C = C4.

If you enter a value in the clocks field that is not an equal subdivision of the beat, the Note Size button shows a < or > symbol along with the current note size.

Method 3: Use the computer keyboard to set step size. As shown in the table below, you can type keys on your computer keyboard to set the step size.

Key 1 2 4 8 6 5 3 .

Function Set value to whole note/rest Set value to half note/rest Set value to quarter note/rest Set value to eighth note/rest Set value to sixteenth note/rest Set value to thirty-second note/rest Turn triplets on or off Turn the dot on or off

Tuplet Checkbox
You can also define the size as a tuplet by clicking the Tuplet checkbox. This lets you create complex timing divisions, like five notes in the space of one quarter note.

Use the mouse or keyboard to set tuplet fields. Overture automatically calculates the clocks and updates the note size pop-up.

380

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Duration Area
The duration is the length of the note you step enter.

Note:
The Duration area is not available when you step-enter chord names. The duration is different from the size; the duration is the length of the note, and the size is the amount of time the counter advances each step. The space between notes is called the gap.

Size Gap

Duration

Duration + Gap = Size. These are MIDI notes as shown in the Graphic window. See Chapter 31, Graphic Window (Mac) for more information. You can select one of three possible duration modes, which you select from the Duration Mode pop-up menu.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

381

Step Input Window

These duration modes are: Constant. Select this duration mode to create notes of identical duration, regardless of the step size.

Constant Durations

Set the constant duration amount by selecting a value from the Note Size pop-up menu or changing the value in the clocks field. Changing either of these values updates the other one.

Clocks field Note Size pop-up menu

Constant Gap. Select this duration mode to create a uniform amount of space between all stepentered notes, regardless of the step size.

Constant Gaps

Set the constant gap amount by selecting a value from the Gap Size pop-up menu, or change the value in the Units field. Changing either of these values updates the other one.

Units field Gap Size pop-up menu

382

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Percent. Select this duration mode to have Overture calculate a note duration as a percentage of the step size.

is 90% of

90%

Notice that each notes duration is 90% of the step size. Set the percentage by entering it in the Percentage Amount field, which appears below the Duration Mode pop-up menu when you select Percent mode.

Step Size numerical used by Overture to calculate a duration Percentage Amount field calculated duration

Velocity Area
Velocity is the parameter that defines how hard you struck a note.

Note:
The Velocity area is not available when you step-enter chord names.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

383

Step Input Window

You can select one of two possible velocity modes from the Velocity Mode pop-up menu.

These velocity modes are: Constant. Select this velocity mode to insert notes of a set velocity, regardless of the actual velocity you play.

Constant Velocity field

Set the desired constant velocity value by entering it into the Constant Velocity field. As Played. Select this velocity mode to insert notes at exactly the velocity you play them.

Step Entering Notes and Rests

You can step-enter notes and rests from either the computer keyboard or a MIDI keyboard.

Step Entering Notes and Rests with the Computer Keyboard

You can step-enter notes and rests using only the computer keyboard. To do so: 1. Choose Windows>Step Input. Overture opens the Step Input window.

384

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

2.

Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the note icon from the pop-up menu.

Input Select button

3.

Select the voice youd like to enter from the Voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window. Alternatively, type Control[Command]-1 through Control[Command]-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control[Command]-0 to select all voices.

4. 5.

In the Score window, click where youd like to begin entering music. If desired, select a stem direction and accidental naming scheme from the pop-up Options menu. You need to do this only if you want to override Overtures default stem direction and accidental naming algorithms.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

385

Step Input Window

6.

On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the step size of the note you wish to enter. See the table on page 380 to see how computer number keys correspond to note (or rest) durations. Alternatively, you can select a size from the Note Size pop-up menu, but youll probably find it quicker to use the keyboard equivalents. When you type a number, the Note Size button changes to show the value of the note youre about to enter.

Type 8, and the Note Value Selector changes to show an eighth note

Type 4 and then a dot, and the Note Value Selector changes to show a dotted quarter note

7.

On the computer keyboard, type the letter of the scale tone you wish to enter (c, d, e, f, g, a, b). Type lower case o to raise an octave and shift-o to lower it an octave. Notice that when you type a letter, the Pitch Indicator changes to show the pitch of the note youre about to enter.

Type f and the Pitch Indicator changes to show an F note

Type a and the Pitch Indicator changes to show an A note

8.

Enter the desired Duration parameters. We discuss duration parameters in Duration Area on page 381.

9.

Enter the desired Velocity parameters. We discuss velocity parameters in Velocity Area on page 383.

386

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

1. 0

Press the Enter[return] key.

Step-Entering Rests
You can step-enter rests as well as notes from the computer keyboard. To do so: 1. On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the step size of the rest you wish to enter. See the table on page 380 to see how computer number keys correspond to note (or rest) durations. 2. If desired, select the voice youd like to enter from the Voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window. Alternatively, you could type Control[Command]-1 through Control[Command]-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control[Command]-0 to select all voices. 3. On the keyboard, press space to insert a rest of the selected duration.

Pressing space inserts rests without actually toggling the Step Input window to Rest Entry mode. This allows you to step-enter the occasional rest quickly while performing the more common task of stepentering notes. If you actually wish to enter Rest Entry mode, select the rest icon from the Input Select pop-up menu.

When in Rest Entry mode, select rest values from the Note Size pop-up menu. To insert a rest into the score, press either return or space on your computer keyboard. You can toggle back and forth between Rest Entry mode and Note Entry mode by typing either r or = on your computer keyboard.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

387

Step Input Window

Overture enters the note as specified and moves the cursor to the next step.

Shifting Step-Entry Octaves

When you enter notes with the computer keyboard, the seven scale tone keys (c, d, e, f, g, a, b) all enter notes in the octave beginning with middle C. If you want to enter notes in a higher or lower octave range, you need to shift the step-entry octave. To do so: 1. Type a lower case o to raise the step-entry range one octave. Type an upper case O to lower the step-entry range one octave. This change affects the current step and all steps after it. Notice that when you change the octave range, the Pitch Indicator changes to show the octave of the note youre about to enter.
If the original octave was 3 and you type a small o, the Pitch Indicator changes to show that the octave is raised to 4. If the original octave was 3 and you type a capital O, the Pitch Indicator changes to show that the octave is lowered to 2.

For example, assume you enter the following notes:

Next, if you want to enter an eighth note at high C, you have to shift octaves. Type 8, then c, then o, then press return:

Any note you enter next is placed in the octave beginning with high C. So, if you type 8, g, then press return, youll enter an eighth note at high G.

388

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

If, after entering high C, you really want to enter the G above middle C, type 8, g, O, then press return. The capital O lowers the pitch of the entered note back to the octave beginning with middle C.

Step Entering Accidentals

Step entry always enters notes using the actual pitch displayed. For example, if your song is in F major and you type a b, Overture actually enters a b natural. If you need to enter an accidental, use the up and down arrow keys to raise and lower pitch in half-step increments before entering the pitch. 1. After typing the letter of the scale tone you wish to enter, press up arrow to raise its pitch a half step, or press down arrow to lower its pitch a half step. You can step up and down through all note values using the up arrow and down arrow keys.

Step Entering Chords

To step-enter chords using the computer keyboard: 1. 2. Type the first note in the chord. Press the Enter on the number pad. Pressing Enter on the number pad enters the note into Overture but does not advance the cursor to the next step. 3. Type the next note in the chord, then press Enter on the number pad. Overture enters the second note at the same cursor location as the first. 4. 5. Continue entering notes in your chord. After entering the last note in your chord, press Enter[return] to advance the cursor to the next step.

Step Entering Tied Notes

To step-enter tied notes using the computer keyboard: 1. 2. Enter the first note using previously discussed techniques. Enter the second note using previously discussed techniques.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

389

Step Input Window

3.

Type ;. Alternatively, you can select Tie Previous Two Notes from the Tool Bars pop-up Options menu. Overture ties together the two notes immediately to the left of the insertion point.

Auto-Tied Notes
Overture automatically splits any step-entered note across a barline. For example, assume youve step-entered the music below, and you now want to enter a quarter note.

There is only room in the measure for an eighth note, so when you step-enter a quarter note, Overture automatically creates two eighth notes tied across the barline below.

Stepping Through a Score

To step backward through a score and erase the most recently entered note or rest: Press delete to back up one step and erase it. The cursor moves one step to the left and Overture erases the note or rest associated with that step. Each time you press delete Overture backspaces and erases the previous step.

To start step recording in the middle of a measure (to enter a different voice, for example), or to skip a few steps without entering any actual music: 1. Press right arrow to step forward through the score. Overture steps forward by the amount indicated by the Note Value selector in the tool bar. It does not enter any notes or rests. 2. Press left arrow to step backward through the score. Overture steps backward by the amount indicated by the Note Value selector in the tool bar. It does not erase any notes or rests.

390

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Synopsis of Step-Entry Key Modifiers

The following table shows a synopsis of all the key modifiers discussed in the previous sections.
Key right arrow left arrow delete up arrow down arrow o O Enter[return] Enter on number pad Function Step forward through a score without entering notes Step backward through a score without deleting notes Step backward through a score, deleting each step Raise current pitch 1/2 step Lower current pitch 1/2 step Raise current and future pitch range one octave Lower current and future pitch range one octave Enter a note or rest, then step forward Enter a note or rest, but dont step forward (use for step-entering chords) Tie together the two previous notes Toggle between Note Entry mode and Rest Entry mode Insert a rest while in Note Entry mode

; R or =

space

Step Entering Notes and Rests with a MIDI Keyboard

To step enter a score using a MIDI controller: 1. Choose Windows>Step Input. Overture opens the Step Input window.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

391

Step Input Window

2.

Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the note icon from the pop-up menu.

Input Select button

3.

Select the voice youd like to enter from the Voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window. Alternatively, type Control[Command]-1 through Control[Command]-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control[Command]-0 to select all voices.

4. 5.

In the Score window, click in the measure where you want to begin entering music. If desired, select a stem direction and accidental naming scheme from the pop-up Options menu. You need to do this only if you want to override Overtures default stem direction and accidental naming algorithms.

6.

On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the step size of the note you wish to enter. See the table on page 380 to see how computer number keys correspond to note (or rest) durations. Alternatively, you could select a size from the Note Size pop-up menuhowever, youll probably find it quicker to use the keyboard equivalents. When you type a number, the Note Size pop-up menu changes to show the value of the note youre about to enter.

7.

Enter the desired Duration parameters. We discuss duration parameters in Duration Area on page 381.

8.

Enter the desired Velocity parameters. We discuss velocity parameters in Velocity Area on page 383.

392

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

9.

On your MIDI keyboard, play the note (or chord) you wish to enter.

Using a MIDI keyboard, you can step record single notes or entire chords.

You can enter a rest by pressing a space or you can type r or = to toggle to Rest Entry mode, then play any note on your MIDI keyboard. As with step entry of notes from the keyboard, you can delete the previous step by pressing delete and you can move forward or backward through a score by pressing right arrow or left arrow. For more information, see Stepping Through a Score on page 390. Also, you can enter tied notes as discussed in Step Entering Tied Notes on page 389.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

393

Step Input Window

Overture enters the note and moves the cursor to the next step.

Entering Rests
You can use a MIDI keyboard to enter rests. To do so: 1. 2. Type a number to set the duration of the rest you wish to enter. Type either an r (for rest) or =. This is the same as selecting the rest icon from the Input Select pop-up menu. Notice that when you type r or =, the Input Select button changes to show that youre about to enter a rest.
Input Select button show a rest icon when you step-enter rests

3.

On your MIDI keyboard, play any note to insert the rest. Overture enters the rest and moves the cursor to the next step.

Alternatively, you can simply press space on your keyboard to enter a rest without toggling to Rest Entry mode.

394

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Step Entering Slashes

Lead sheets for guitarists generally contain chord names and a series of slashes to indicate that the performer is to strum the chords. This section discusses how to use Overtures Step Input window to enter strum slashes into a score quickly. See Step Entering Chord Names on page 398 to learn how to stepenter chord names). 1. Choose Windows>Step Input. Overture opens the Step Input window. 2. Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the slash icon from the pop-up menu.

Input Select button

3.

Select the voice youd like to enter from the Voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window. Alternatively, type Control[Command]-1 through Control[Command]-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control[Command]-0 to select all voices.

4. 5.

In the Score window, click the measure where you want to begin entering slashes. On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the Step Size of the slash you wish to enter. See the table on page 380 to see how number keys correspond to step sizes. Generally, you use one slash per quarter note. Alternatively, you can select a note value from the Note Size pop-up menu. Youll probably find it quicker to use the keyboard equivalents. Notice that when you type a number, the Note Size button changes to show the value of the slash youre about to enter.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

395

Step Input Window

6.

On your MIDI keyboard, play any note to enter a slash. Overture enters the slash and moves the cursor to the next step. Slashes do not have stems because they do not actually indicate any rhythm. They also do not indicate pitch. The played pitches may be different from what the score shows.

The position at which the slash note is displayed is independent from the played pitch (or pitches if a chord has been entered). Slash symbols may be transposed, affecting the played pitch, without changing the displayed position. You can enter a rest by pressing a space, or you can type r or = to toggle to Rest Entry mode, then play any note on your MIDI keyboard. As with step entry of notes, you can delete the previous step by pressing delete and you can move forward or backward through a score by pressing right arrow or left arrow. For more information, see Stepping Through a Score on page 390.

Note:
You can step enter slashes using only the computer keyboard. The technique is identical to that used for entering notes and rests from the keyboard. For more information, see Step Entering Notes and Rests with the Computer Keyboard on page 384.

396

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Step Entering Rhythmic Slashes

Sometimes, its desirable to indicate the actual strumming pattern on a lead sheet. You do this by entering rhythmic slashes. Rhythmic slashes (unlike regular slashes) have stems, flags and beams to indicate rhythm. Like regular slashes, rhythmic slashes do not indicate pitchthe played pitches may be different from what the score shows. This section discusses how to use Overtures Step Entry mode to enter rhythmic slashes in a score quickly. See Step Entering Chord Names on page 398 to learn how to step-enter chord names. 1. Choose Windows>Step Input. Overture opens the Step Input window. 2. Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the rhythmic slash icon from the pop-up menu.

Input Select button

3.

Select the voice youd like to enter from the Voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window. Alternatively, type Control[Command]-1 through Control[Command]-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control[Command]-0 to select all voices.

4. 5.

In the Score window, click in the measure where you want to begin entering rhythmic slashes. On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the step size of the slash you wish to enter. See the table on page 380 to see how number keys correspond to step sizes. Alternatively, select a note value from the Note Size pop-up menu, but youll probably find it quicker to use the keyboard equivalents. Notice that when you type a number, the Note Size button changes to show the value of the slash youre about to enter.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

397

Step Input Window

6.

On your MIDI keyboard, play any note to enter a rhythmic slash. Overture enters the rhythmic slash and moves the cursor to the next step.

You can enter a rest by typing a space, or you can type r or = to toggle to Rest Entry mode, then play any note on your MIDI keyboard. As with step entry of notes, you can delete the previous step by pressing delete and you can move forward or backward through a score by pressing right arrow or left arrow. For more information, see Stepping Through a Score on page 390.

Note:
You can step enter rhythmic slashes using only the computer keyboard. The technique is identical to that used for entering notes and rests from the keyboard. For more information, see Step Entering Notes and Rests with the Computer Keyboard on page 384.

Step Entering Chord Names

You can step-enter chord names from either the computer keyboard or from a MIDI Keyboard. The following section shows how to step enter chord names using a MIDI keyboard. To learn how to step enter chord names with the computer keyboard, see Step Entering Chord Names with the Computer Keyboard on page 353.

Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard

1. Choose Windows>Step Input. Overture opens the Step Input window.

398

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

2.

Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the chord name icon from the pop-up menu.

Input Select button

3. 4.

In the Score window, click in the measure where you want to begin step-entering chord names. On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the step size you wish to enter. See the table on page 380 to see how number keys correspond to step durations. Alternatively, select a note value from the Note Size pop-up menu, but youll probably find it quicker to use the keyboard equivalents. When you type a number, the Note Size button changes to show the value of the chord youre about to enter.

5.

On your MIDI keyboard, play the chord you wish to notate. Overture searches the current Chord Symbol library for a matching chord. If it finds a matching chord, it enters the chord name above the staff and moves the cursor to the next step. Overture alerts you if it doesnt find a matching chord in your chord library and gives you the option of opening the current chord library to add the chord. For more information about how Overture recognizes chords, see About Chord Recognition below. For more information about Chord Symbol libraries, see Chord Symbols on page 413.

As with step-entry of notes, you can delete the previous step by pressing delete and you can move forward or backward through a score by pressing right arrow or left arrow. For more information, see Stepping Through a Score on page 390.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

399

Step Input Window

About Chord Recognition

Follow through these steps to learn how Overture names chords: 1. If you want to enter a chord name without an alternate bass note, play the chord such that its root is the lowest note. For example, if you play F-A-C, Overture assumes F is the root, then searches the Chord Symbol library and matches the note pattern with a major chord. Overture then enters a chord name of F. 2. If you want to enter a chord name with an alternate bass note, play the chord so that the bass note is the lowest note and the root is the second lowest note. For example, if you play E-F-A-C, Overture assumes E is the root, then searches the Chord Symbol library for that four-note pattern. When it doesnt find a match, it assumes that E is an alternate bass and that F is the root. It then searches the Chord Symbol library for the remaining three-note pattern. It matches the major chord. Overture then enters a chord name of F/E.

1. Play this chord.

2. Overture assumes E is desired root (since its the lowest note). 3. Overture searches the Chord Symbol library for this chord pattern. (This is the pattern of the chord naturalized to C.)

4. When Overture doesnt find a match, it assumes that E must be an alternate bass. It then drops it from the chord and assumes the next highest note (F) is the root.

5. Overture searches the Chord Symbol library for this chord pattern. (This is the pattern of the chord naturalized to C.)

6. Overture finds a match (a major chord) and names your chord F/E.

400

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

3.

If you want to enter a chord name with an alternate bass note thats the same as a note in the chord, use the note twice in your chord. For example, if you wanted to notate Fmaj7 with an E bass, simply play E-F-A-C-E. Overture recognizes the F-A-C-E as an Fmaj7 and adds the first E as an alternate bass.

The figure below illustrates how Overture interprets chords played on a MIDI controller.

Chord recognition always references the current Chord Symbol library. For more information about Chord Symbol libraries, see Chord Symbols on page 413.

Chapter 34: Step Input Window

401

Step Input Window

402

Part IV: Other Overture Windows

Part V Menu Reference

35

File Menu

Use the File menu commands to save, create, open, import, export, and print Overture files, MIDI files and support libraries. The following sections discuss each command in detail.

File Menu

New...
Choose this command to open a new, untitled Overture score. When you choose the new command, a New Score dialog box appears. Use the dialog to enter your new score attributes.

There are three areas in the New Score dialog box. These are described below: Score Type. Use this area to choose the type of instruments/tracks for your score. You may choose a single instrument from the Instruments Library, or Piano, or Piano and Voice, or Guitar and Tablature, or a template from the Templates folder. Title Page. Use this area to enter title page text. You may add more text, footers, and headers later by choosing Score>Title Page. See Title Page on page 522 for more information First Measure. Use this area to enter the scores initial settings such as Time Signature, Key Signature, etc..

To use the Jazz Font (if installed on your computer) for the default music font, check box labeled Jazz Font at the bottom of the dialog. To prevent this dialog from appearing at startup, disable the check box labeled Open this dialog at startup at the bottom of the dialog.

Note:
If you save a score named DefaultFile in the Overture folder, Overture will open this file at startup and skip the New Score Dialog. Also, you can have as many open Overture scores as memory allows. To switch between open Overture scores, select the appropriate score from the Windows menu.

406

Part V: Menu Reference

Open...
Use this command to open a saved Overture score. When you choose the Open command, a standard Open dialog box appears. Use the Open dialog box to navigate through your various volumes and folders to locate the desired file. Click the file to select it, then click the Open button. The Open dialog box disappears and the selected Overture score opens. You can have as many open Overture scores as memory allows. To switch between open Overture scores, select the appropriate score from the Windows menu.

Opening a Score Template

Overture ships with numerous score templates saved as Read Only files. A score template contains staff and page setups for particular types of music and are stored in the Templates folder within the Overture folder. Alternatively, you can open a score template by double-clicking its icon in the finder.

Close
Use this command to close the active Score window. Choosing the Close command is the same as clicking the active windows Close box.

Closing a Score Window

If a Score window is active when you choose the Close command, that Overture file closes. If there are any open support windows, they remain open. If you have made any unsaved changes to an Overture score, Overture asks you if you want to save the changes before closing the score. The contents of any open support windows depend on whether or not there are any other open Overture scores:

Chapter 35: File Menu

407

File Menu

If, when you close a Score window, you have no other open Score windows, the open support windows will go blank. This is because all data is removed from a support window when you close a Score window. The support windows stay open for use with other Overture scores. If, when you close a Score window, you have other open Score windows, the open support windows fill with data from the frontmost Score window.

Closing a Support Window

To close a support window click on the windows Close box.

Save
Use this command to save the active Overture score in the same folder you last saved it in. This command always saves Overture scores in the Overture file format. If you want to save a score using a different format, use the Export command. If you choose the Save command for a score that has never before been saved, Overture prompts you to name and file the score using the standard Save As dialog box. We discuss the Save As dialog box below.

Save As...
Choose this command to either save an existing score under a new name, or save a new score. When you choose the Save As command, Overture produces a standard Save As dialog box.

408

Part V: Menu Reference

Type the desired name into the text field and use the pop-up menu and scroll list to select a storage location. Click the Save button to save the file.

Note:
Overture scores are cross-platform compatible between the PC and Macintosh. To open a score on the other platform, just save the score on a disk and open it with Overture on the other platform.

Revert
File Menu
409
Choose this command to cancel any changes you have made to the active Overture score since the last time you saved it and open the most recently saved version.

Edit Library
Choose File>Edit Library to produce a submenu of library types.

From the submenu, choose the type of library you wish to edit. Overture contains five types of libraries: Allotment Table. Overture uses the Allotment Table to determine the default horizontal spacing of notes on a staff. Choosing this submenu opens the current Allotment Table for editing. Chord Symbols. Overture uses the Chord Symbol library to name chords using the Chords window, or to recognize chords played on a MIDI keyboard. Choosing this submenu opens the current Chord Symbol library for editing. Drum Map. Overture uses the Drum Map to assign names, noteheads and staff positions to MIDI notes. Choosing this submenu opens the current Drum Map for editing. Expressions. Overture uses the Expressions library to organize sets of expressions, their appearance in the Score window, and their sound during playback. Choosing this submenu command opens the current Expressions library for editing.

Chapter 35: File Menu

Guitar Frames. Overture uses the Guitar Frames library to create and organize sets of guitar frames. Choosing this submenu command opens the current Guitar Frames library for editing. Instruments. Overture uses the Instrument Library to define instruments, including the following track attributes: name, abbreviation, clef, device, patch, output transposition, pitch, range, transposed clef, transposed steps, and number of voices. Choosing this submenu command opens the current Instruments library for editing.

The following sections discuss editing each library type in detail.

Allotment Table
Choose this command to modify Allotment Tables and create new ones. When you choose File>Edit Library>Allotment Table, Overture opens the Allotment Table dialog box.

You can move the Allotment Table dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar. The dialog box displays the name of the active Allotment Table just underneath the title bar.

About the Allotment Table Dialog Box

The Allotment Table dialog box contains a simple editing grid with basic note values displayed in columns and various durations displayed in rows. Each cell in the table contains a numerical that represents the number of spaces assigned to each type of note. A space is equal to the distance between two staff lines. If you decrease the number of spaces assigned to a particular type of note, that note appears closer to other notes. If you increase the number of spaces assigned to a particular note, that note appears farther from other notes. The Allotment Table dialog box also contains three buttons. These are: Save As button. Click this button to save the edited Allotment Table to disk. When you click this button, Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box. Use the dialog box to name the new Allotment Table and to tell Overture where to save it. Cancel button. Click this button to close the Allotment Table dialog box and restore the Allotment Table to its original state. Clicking this button does not save or apply any of your changes to the current Allotment Table. OK button. Click this button to activate your changes. When you click this button, Overture uses the modified Allotment Table. Clicking the OK button does not save the new Allotment Table to disk

410

Part V: Menu Reference

it only affects the Allotment Table thats loaded into RAM. If, when you quit the program, your Allotment Table has unsaved changes, Overture performs one of two actions: If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is checked in the Preferences dialog, Overture automatically saves the changes to disk upon quitting the program. If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is not checked in the Preferences dialog, Overture asks if you want to save the changes to disk before quitting the program.

Overture uses the current Allotment Table in a number of ways: It automatically positions any notes entered either by MIDI input or by importing MIDI files according to the Beat Chart derived from the current Allotment Table. If you check Options>Auto Position, it places any notes entered by mouse according to the Beat Chart derived from the current Allotment Table. If you choose Measures>Justify, it aligns any notes in the active measure according to the Beat Chart derived from the current Allotment Table.

Using the Allotment Table Dialog Box

Assume, for this example, that you want to create an Allotment Table that minimizes the spacing differences between eighth notes, sixteenth notes and thirty second notes. To do so, change the Allotment Table so that eighth notes are given less space and thirty second notes are given more. To create this Allotment Table: 1. Choose File>Edit Library>Allotment Table. Overture opens the Allotment Table dialog box. This dialog box shows all the assignments for the current Allotment Table. If you want to edit a different Allotment Table, choose File>Load Library and select a different Allotment Table. See Load Library on page 448 for more information.

2.

Use the numericals in the eighth note column to decrease the number of spaces allotted to all versions of eighth notes. In this example, decrease the normal eighth note spacing to 1.7; the dotted eighth note spacing to 2.8; and the triplet eighth note spacing to 1.6.

Chapter 35: File Menu

411

File Menu

3.

Use the numericals in the thirty-second note column to increase the number of spaces allotted to all versions of thirty-second notes. In this example, increase the normal thirty-second note spacing to 1.4; the dotted thirty-second note spacing to 1.6; and the triplet thirty-second note spacing to 1.3.

Notice the differences between the two tables above. 4. Click the Save As button. Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box. 5. Name and save your new Allotment Table in the Libraries folder.

Youve now created a new Allotment Table that minimizes the spacing differences between eighth, sixteenth, and thirty-second notes. When you justify a measure, Overture spaces notes using the Beat Chart derived from the new Allotment Table. The figure below shows the difference between note spacings for the two Allotment Tables discussed in the previous example.

Note spacing using default Allotment Table.

Note spacing using modified Allotment Table.

Spacing between eighth notes is slightly tighter here.

Spacing between sixteenth notes is slightly wider here.

There is now less of a space difference between eighth notes and sixteenth notes in the bottom music sample than in the top.

412

Part V: Menu Reference

Chord Symbols
Choose this command to modify the current Chord library or to create new Chord libraries. When you choose this command, Overture opens the Chord Library dialog box for the current library.

Suffix Element Area

Chord Suffix Editing Area

Symbol Viewing Area

File Buttons

You can move the Chord Library dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar. The dialog box displays the name of the active Chord library just underneath the title bar.

Active Chord Symbol Library

The Chord Library dialog box consists of four separate areas. We describe these areas beginning with Suffix Element Area on page 415.

About Chord Libraries

You can create and store as many Chord libraries as you wish, but Overture can only refer to one Chord library at a time. That one library is called the current Chord library, and you define it in the Preferences

Chapter 35: File Menu

413

File Menu

dialog box. You can load a different Chord library by choosing File>Load Library (see Load Library on page 448 for more information).

Why Chord Libraries Exist

Overture uses the current Chord library to name chord suffixes in the Score window. There are two ways that Overture uses this library: Chords window: All suffixes stored in this library appear in the Chords window. For more information about the Chords Window, see Chapter 31, Chords Window. MIDI Chord Entry: Overture uses this library when you enter chords in step-entry mode using a MIDI keyboard. Overture searches the library for a matching note pattern and, if it finds one, enters a chord of the appropriate root in the Score window. For more information about step-entering chords with MIDI input, see Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard on page 398.

What Chord Libraries Contain

Chord libraries contain only chord suffixes and the note patterns assigned to themthey do not store information about the actual roots. Therefore, the bottom of the Chord Library dialog box displays any chord you add to the library as having a root of C (regardless of the root you used to enter and edit the chord). For example, the library might store the pattern first + minor third + fifth with the suffix min. For simplicity, the Chord Library dialog box displays this suffix as C min and shows that it contains the notes C, Eb, and G. When you enter a chord name into the Score window, Overture gets the suffix information from the current Chord library. It gets the root either from the Root buttons in the Chords window or by analyzing the pattern played on a MIDI keyboard (as discussed in About Chord Recognition on page 400). For example, if you want to enter an F mi chord name into the score window, either: Use the Chords window to select a C mi symbol. Then click the F root button. Then click the Score window to insert the chord name (as described in Chords Window on page 343). Or Step-enter an F mi chord from a MIDI keyboard. Overture recognizes the minor chord pattern from the Chord library and applies the correct root name, F, by analyzing the MIDI input (as described in Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard on page 398).

The Chord library also contains information about the fonts, sizes, and styles used by chord names in an Overture score. When you change the Chord library that an Overture score references, the appearance of any existing chords in the score changes to that defined by the new library.

About the Chord Library Dialog Box

The Chord Library dialog box consists of four separate areas: Suffix element area Chord suffix editing Symbol viewing area File buttons

414

Part V: Menu Reference

Suffix Element Area

This area of the Chord Library dialog box contains all the elements you can use to name a chord suffix.

Place chord suffix elements in the Chord Suffix editing area (described below) either by double-clicking elements or by dragging them into the Chord Suffix display.

Alt[Option]-click to open pop-up menu of spelling alternatives

[To create a symbol not in the Suffix element area, scroll to the end of the list and double-click on the ?. Overture opens the standard Choose Symbol dialog box. Choose the font and symbol you want.] To learn how the Suffix element area works in conjunction with other elements in the Chord Library dialog box, see Editing Chord Symbol Libraries on page 420.

Chapter 35: File Menu

415

File Menu

Some elements (such as majors, minors, diminished, and augmented chords) have numerous acceptable spellings. To open a pop-up menu of alternate spellings for a suffix element, Alt[Option]-click the element. The alternate spelling you select applies every time you use that element in the future.

Chord Suffix Editing Area

Use the Chord Library dialog box to assemble and edit chord suffixes. It contains the following elements:

Chord Suffix display Font button Root display Insert button Show Axis checkbox Replace button Trash

The Chord Suffix Editing Area consists of the following elements: Chord Suffix display. Use this to edit a chord suffix. You can click any suffix element to select it and you can drag any suffix element to reposition it. You can nudge a symbol using the arrow keys and, if you Alt[Option]-nudge, all elements after the nudged element move the same amount. Show Axis checkbox. Check this to show the vertical and horizontal axis lines in the Chord Suffix display. Uncheck this box to hide the axis lines. Font button. Click this to set the font used for the currently selected suffix element(s). Clicking this button opens the font dialog box discussed in Font Button on page 563. This is different from both the Root Font and the Accidental Font buttons in the Symbol viewing areaOverture allows roots, suffixes, and accidentals all to have completely different fonts. Clicking the Replace button saves this font together with the chord suffix If you Control[Option]-click the Font button, Overture changes the font for all suffixes in the library, not just the selected suffix. Insert button. Click this to insert the suffix shown in the Chord Suffix display into the Symbol viewing area (discussed in Symbol Viewing Area below) and into the Chord library itself. Overture inserts the suffix immediately to the left of the highlighted suffix in the library. Replace button. Click this to replace the highlighted suffix in the Symbol Viewing Area (discussed in Symbol Viewing Area below) with the suffix shown in the Chord Suffix display. Root display. This shows the root of the chord that you select or play. If you play a chord on a MIDI keyboard, the Root display shows the root of the chord you played. If you select a chord suffix from the Symbol Viewing Area (as discussed in the following section), the Root display shows C, since all symbols stored in the Chord Symbol library are displayed with a root of C. Trash. You can remove suffix elements from the Chord Suffix Editing Area by dragging them to the trash. Similarly, you can remove chord symbols from the Symbol viewing area by dragging them into the trash. We describe the Symbol viewing area in Symbol Viewing Area below.

416

Part V: Menu Reference

To learn how the Chord Suffix editing area works in conjunction with other elements in the Chord Library dialog box, see Editing Chord Symbol Libraries on page 420.

Symbol Viewing Area

This area shows all the suffixes in the current Chord library along with a keyboard representation of the actual notes in each chord symbol (generally based on a root of C).

Miniature Keyboard Display Accidental Font button

Root Font button

Upper Root pop-up menu Scrolling Symbol Library

This area consists of numerous elements. Specifically: Miniature Keyboard display. Use this to enter or view the notes in a chord symbol. All displayed chord symbols are based on the root selected in the Root pop-up menu. There are two ways to enter the notes in contained in a chord symbol: Manually. On the miniature keyboard, click each key that makes up the chord. If you enter a chord using a root other than C, Overture automatically transposes it to the root of C when you add it to the Chord library. From a MIDI Controller. Play a chord on a MIDI controller. Overture automatically enters the notes on the miniature keyboard display and selects the Root based on the lowest note played. You can change this root if you want the chord named some other way, for example with an added bass note as discussed in Example 2: Creating a Chord Symbol with an Alternate Bass on page 422.

The C with the box around it indicates middle C on the miniature keyboard. Overture uses the notes shown in the miniature keyboard display to recognize chords that you play on a MIDI keyboard. For more information, see Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard on page 398.

Chapter 35: File Menu

417

File Menu

Symbol Library. Use this scrolling display to select a chord symbol. When you select a symbol, the miniature keyboard displays the notes in the chord. Clicking the Replace button in the Chord Suffix editing area replaces the selected chord symbol with whatever is in the Chord Suffix display (and normalizes it to the root of C). Clicking the Insert button in the Chord Suffix editing area inserts whatever is in the Chord Suffix display between the selected chord symbol and the symbol immediately to its left. The Chord Library can contain an unlimited number of chord symbols. You can delete chord symbols by dragging them to the trash icon in this dialog box.

To delete a chord symbol from here... ... drag it here.

Root Font button. Click this button to set the font for the chord symbols root. Clicking this button opens the Font dialog box discussed in Font Button on page 563. This is different from both the Font button in the Chord Suffix Editing Area and the Accidental Font buttonOverture allows roots, suffixes, and accidentals all to have completely different fonts. Accidental Font button. Click this button to set the font for any accidental that appears in a chord symbol. Clicking this button opens the Font dialog box discussed in Font Button on page 563. This is different from both the Font button in the Chord Suffix editing area and the Root Font button Overture allows roots, suffixes, and accidentals all to have completely different fonts.

14 pt. Times Bold as set by Root Font button

9 pt. Helvetica Plain as set by Root Font button

16 pt. Aloisen Plain as set by Accidental Font button

418

Part V: Menu Reference

Upper Root pop-up menu. Use this pop-up menu to change the note that Overture defines as the root of a chord that you play into the library. Normally you wont need to change the root, but if you want to add a chord symbol with an alternate bass to the library, youll need to use this pop-up menu as discussed in Example 2: Creating a Chord Symbol with an Alternate Bass on page 422.

To learn how the Symbol viewing area works in conjunction with other elements in the Chord library dialog box, see Editing Chord Symbol Libraries on page 420 below.

File Buttons
This area contains the following buttons:

Clear All button. Click this button to clear all chord symbols from the existing library. Use this when you want to create a Chord Symbol library from scratch. Generally, youll find it easier to modify an existing library than to create a new one. Save button. Click this button to save changes to the file immediately. This lets you: Know the state of your libraries as you edit them without having to remember at the end of the Overture session which changes youd like to keep. Save the changes to the file but press Cancel to restore your working copy to the state it was in before the current editing. Press the OK button without pressing Save to use the current state of the library for the duration of the Overture session without saving the changes to the file. This button does not save changes to the chord suffix or its font. Use the Replace button to save these elements.

Save As button. Click this button to save the edited Chord library to disk. When you click this button, Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box. Use the dialog box to name the new library and to tell Overture where to save it. This button does not save changes to the chord suffix or its font. Use the Replace button to save these elements. Cancel button. Click this button to close the Chord library dialog box and restore the Chord Library to its original state. Clicking this button does not save or apply any of your changes to the current Chord library. OK button. Click this button to activate your changes. When you click this button, Overture uses the modified Chord library. Clicking the OK button does not save the new Chord library to diskit only affects the Chord library thats loaded into RAM. If, when you quit the program, your Chord library has unsaved changes, Overture performs one of two actions:

Chapter 35: File Menu

419

File Menu

If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is checked in the Preferences dialog box, Overture automatically saves the changes to disk upon quitting the program. If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is not checked in the Preferences dialog box, Overture asks if you want to save the changes to disk before quitting the program.

This button does not save changes to the chord suffix or its font. Use the Replace button to save these elements.

Editing Chord Symbol Libraries

Follow through the next couple of examples to learn how to edit a Chord library. Refer to the earlier discussions of the Chord Library dialog box individual elements for more information.

Example 1: Simple Chord Insertion

Assume, for this example, that you want to add a major triad with an added ninth to your Chord Library. To do so: 1. Choose File>Edit Library>Chord Symbol. Overture opens the current Chord library. 2. Click a blank symbol box in the scrolling symbol library. You may have to scroll to the end of the list. This example shows a Chord Symbol library that has been emptied using the Clear All button (as discussed in File Buttons on page 419).

420

Part V: Menu Reference

3.

Since a major triad with an added ninth is written as X(add 9), you need to create this suffix in the Chord Suffix Editing area. First, double click the ( element in the Suffix Elements area. This inserts the left parenthesis in the Chord Suffix display.

Double-click an element here...

...to insert it over here.

4.

In the Suffix Elements area, double-click the add element to insert it in the Chord Suffix display, then double-click the 9 to insert it. Alternatively, drag the symbol over to the Chord Suffix display.

5.

Finally, double-click the ) to insert it in the Chord Suffix display.

6.

On your MIDI controller, play a C(add 9) chord. Overture automatically enters the notes into the miniature keyboard display.

If you dont have a MIDI controller connected to your computer click each key in the C(add 9) chord using the miniature keyboard display.

Chapter 35: File Menu

421

File Menu

7.

Click the Replace button in the Chord Suffix editing area to save the change to the chord suffix. Overture replaces the empty chord symbol with a C(add 9) chord symbol.

Example 2: Creating a Chord Symbol with an Alternate Bass

Assume, for this example, that you want to create a minor triad chord symbol with an alternate bass note a half step below the root. To do so: 1. Choose File>Edit Library>Chord Symbol. Overture opens the current Chord library. 2. Click a blank suffix box in the scrolling symbol library. You may have to scroll to the end of the list.

422

Part V: Menu Reference

3.

To create the suffix, first double-click the min element in the Suffix Elements area. This inserts the min suffix in the Chord Suffix display.

Double-click an element here...

...to insert it here.

4.

On your MIDI controller, play a D minor chord with a C# in the bass.

Root shown as C# since thats the lowest note in chord

Notes shown here

If you dont have a MIDI controller connected to your computer click each key in the chord using the miniature keyboard display.

Chapter 35: File Menu

423

File Menu

Overture automatically enters the notes into the miniature keyboard display and shows the upper root as C#.

5.

Since C# is actually the alternate bass and D is the upper root, press the mouse on the Upper Root pop-up menu and select an upper root of D.

Overture changes the upper root from C# to D and changes the chord symbol to Dmi/C#.
D now appears as the upper root

C# now appears as an alternate bass note

424

Part V: Menu Reference

6.

Click the Replace button in the Chord Suffix Editing Area to save the change to the chord suffix. Overture replaces the empty chord symbol with the newly created symbol, transposing it so that the lowest note in the chord is a C.

Chapter 35: File Menu

425

File Menu

Drum Map
Choose this command to modify Drum Maps and create new ones. When you choose File>Edit Library>Drum Map, Overture opens the Drum Map dialog box.

You can move the Drum Map dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar. The dialog box displays the name of the active Drum Map library just underneath the title bar.

Active Drum Map Library

You can create and store as many Drum Map libraries as you wish, but Overture can only refer to one Drum Map at a time. That one map is called the current Drum Map and is defined in the Preferences dialog box. You can load a different Drum Map by choosing File>Load Library (see Load Library on page 448 for more information).

About the Drum Map Dialog Box

The Drum Map dialog box contains a simple scrolling chart. The chart has 128 rows (one for each MIDI note) and it has columns for editing each notes head, staff position and name. Obviously, you most commonly use Drum Maps to assign drum names to MIDI notes, but you can also create Drum Maps to use with sound effects, foley work, and the like. Tracks use Drum Maps to create percussion notation. To learn to use Drum Maps in a track, see Percussive Tracks on page 497.

426

Part V: Menu Reference

There are four columns in the Drum Map dialog box. These are: Pitch. This column shows each of the 128 MIDI pitches to which you assign a name, head and staff position. Click those pitches you want included in a default percussive track and Overture places a small triangle next to them. Since a percussive track can record, play and notate up to sixteen different drums, you can select up to sixteen pitches to include in the default percussive track. For more information about percussive tracks, see Percussive Tracks on page 497.

Checked pitches appear by default in a percussive tracks Track Setup dialog box.

Head. Press and hold the note icon to open a pop-up menu. From the menu, select the notehead you want to use for the MIDI note.

Chapter 35: File Menu

427

File Menu

Position. Press and hold the small staff icon to open a larger, editable staff. Drag the cursor up and down to change the staff position on which Overture displays the MIDI note.

1. Move the mouse over a notes Position indicator.

2. Press and hold the mouse to open a larger, editable staff.

3. Drag the cursor up and down to change the staff position on which Overture displays the note.

4. Release the mouse when youre satisfied with the notes staff position.

Name. Use this column to type the name of the sound thats assigned to each MIDI note.

The Drum Map dialog box also contains four buttons. These are: Save button. Click this button to save changes to the file immediately. This lets you know the state of your libraries as you edit them without having to remember at the end of the Overture session which changes youd like to keep save the changes to the file but press Cancel to restore your working copy to the state it was in before the current editing press the OK button without pressing Save to use the current state of the library for the duration of the Overture session without saving the changes to the file

Save As button. Click this button to save the edited Drum Map to disk. When you click this button, Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box. Use the dialog box to name the new Drum Map and to tell Overture where to save it. Cancel button. Click this button to close the Drum Map dialog box and restore the Drum Map to its original state. Clicking this button does not save or apply any of your changes to the current Drum Map.

428

Part V: Menu Reference

OK button. Click this button to activate your changes. When you click this button, Overture uses the modified Drum Map. Clicking the OK button does not save the new Drum Map to diskit only affects the Drum Map thats loaded into RAM. If, when you quit the program, your Drum Map has unsaved changes, Overture does one of two things: If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is checked in the Preferences dialog, Overture automatically saves the changes to disk upon quitting the program. If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is not checked in the Preferences dialog, Overture asks if you want to save the changes to disk before quitting the program.

Assume, for this example, that your drum machine plays a kick drum on C1, a snare on D1, and low, mid and high toms on G1, A1, and C2 respectively. Also, assume you want Overture to display all drum notes with an X head and that you want the kick drum assigned to the lowest space, the snare in the next space up, the low tom in the space above that, the mid tom in the top space, and the high tom in the space above the top line. To create this Drum Map: 1. Choose File>Edit Library>Drum Map. Overture opens the Drum Map dialog box. This dialog box shows all the assignments for the current Drum Map. If you want to edit a different Drum Map, choose File>Load Library and select a different Drum Map (see Load Library on page 448 for more information). 2. Use the scroll bar to find MIDI note C1.

Chapter 35: File Menu

429

File Menu

Using the Drum Map Dialog Box

3.

Press and hold the note in the Head column next to C1 and select the X head from the pop-up menu. This assigns the X head to C1.

4.

In the Position column, drag the C1 notes staff position to the lowest space.

430

Part V: Menu Reference

5.

In the Name column, type Kick Drum. Overture assigns the name Kick Drum to MIDI note C1.

6.

Assign MIDI note D1 to the snare as shown below.

Chapter 35: File Menu

431

File Menu

7.

Assign the three toms as shown in the Drum Map dialog box below.

8.

Click the Save As button. Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box.

9.

Name and save your new Drum Map.

Youve now created a simple Drum Map containing a kick, snare and three toms. To see how to use a Drum Map in a score, see Percussive Tracks on page 497.

432

Part V: Menu Reference

Expression Library
Choose File>Edit Library>Expressions to change the expressions that appear on the Expressions palette (see Chapter 21, Expressions Button, on page 237) and create new ones. Overture opens the Expression library dialog box.

The Expression library lets you specify and store information about expressions. The definition of each expression includes name, font, size, style, and playback information.

Using the Expression Library Dialog Box

This section discusses how to edit, save, and name the currently loaded Expression library. The Expression library dialog box lists all the expressions in the currently loaded Expression library. Columns in the dialog box allow you to manipulate the expressions in the Expression palette and change their information:

Chapter 35: File Menu

433

File Menu

. Click to select an expression. Press and drag to move an expression up or down the list of expressions. Expressions appear on the palette in the order you specify by moving them in this column.

Ex. (Extract). Click to put a bullet in the column or to remove it. Putting a bullet in the column tells Overture to extract this expression in all parts when you extract parts. See Extract Parts on page 516. Name. Click and type to change the name of an expression. The new name appears on the palette, where you can choose it and put it on the score. Font. Press and drag to choose a font from the pop-up menu. The expression appears in the score in the font you specify. Size. Click and type to change the font size. The expression appears in the score in the size you specify. Style. Click and choose the style characteristics you want. Choose multiple times to specify multiple characteristics. Your choices are Normal, Bold, Italic, and Underline. The expression appears in the score with the style characteristics you specify. Playback. Click to display the Expression Playback dialog box for an expression. This dialog box lets you specify options for MIDI playback of the expression in your score. See Expression Playback dialog box below. Buttons in the Expression Library dialog box let you manipulate the Expressions palette further.

Insert. Select a row and press the Insert button to add an empty row above the selected row. You can fill in the row with a new expression. This adds the new expression to the palette after you click OK.

434

Part V: Menu Reference

Delete. Select a row and press the Delete button to delete the selected row. This removes the selected expression from the Expressions palette after you click OK. Save. Click this button to save the changes you have made as part of the current Expressions library. Save As. Click this button to save the current Expressions library with a new name (creating a new Expressions library) or to another place. The Save As dialog box appears. Specify the new name and location and click Save.

Expression Playback Dialog Box

The Expression Playback dialog box lets you tell Overture how you want MIDI playback of the specified expression to sound. In the Expression Library dialog box (see Using the Expression Library Dialog Box above) click the Playback column for the expression you want to specify. The Expression Playback dialog box opens.

Choose one of these options: None. Click to tell Overture not to provide MIDI playback for this expression. Tempo. Click the radio button to specify a tempo. Click and type a number to specify the tempo you want. Patch. Click the radio button to specify a patch for MIDI playback. Press and hold to display the Patch pop-up menu. Drag and release to choose a patch. The patch name or number appears on the menu button. Controller. Click the radio button to specify a controller for MIDI playback. Press and hold to display the Controller pop-up menu. Drag and release to choose a controller. The controller name or number appears on the menu button. Type a value for the controller in the Value box. Use Voice: Choose the voice (channel) to to send MIDI data out for this expression. Also Send: Check this box and choose a value if you want to send a key switch.

Click OK to apply your choices for playback to the selected expression.

Chapter 35: File Menu

435

File Menu

Guitar Frames Library

Choose this command to modify the current Guitar Frames library or to create new Guitar Frames libraries. When you choose this command, Overture opens the Guitar Frames Library dialog box for the current library

Chord Type Area

Frame Viewing Area Frame Editing Area

Buttons Area

About Guitar Frames Libraries

You can create and store as many guitar frames libraries as you wish, but Overture can only refer to one Guitar Frames library at a time. That one library is called the current Guitar Frames library, and you define it in the Preferences dialog box. You can load a different Guitar Frames library by choosing File>Load Library (see Load Library on page 448 for more information).

What Guitar Frames Libraries Contain

Guitar Frames libraries contain the root, bass, suffix, and tuning for each frame, and the fingering pattern assigned to them. When you enter a guitar frame into the Score window, Overture gets the frame information from the current Guitar Frames library. You choose the root, bass, suffix, and tuning in the Chords window. For example, if you want to enter an Fmi guitar frame into the score window: Open the Chord window and switch to Guitar Frames (if needed) using the check box. Choose F from the root menu and minor from the Suffix menu. Click on the desired fingering and then click the Score window to insert the guitar frame (as described in Chapter 31, Chords Window).

436

Part V: Menu Reference

The Guitar Frames library also contains information about the fonts, sizes, and styles used by guitar frames in an Overture score. When you change the Guitar Frames library that an Overture score references, the appearance of any existing guitar frames in the score may change to that defined by the new library.

About the Guitar Frames Library Dialog Box

The Guitar Frames Library dialog box consists of five separate areas: Chord Type area Default Suffix Spellings area Frame Editing area Frame Viewing area

Chord Type Area

Use this area to choose the type of guitar frame you wish to edit.

To place guitar frame in the Frame Editing Area (described below), set the Root, Suffix, Bass, and Tuning menus to the desired chord. This displays the different fingerings for this chord. Now click on a fingering to place it into the Frame Viewing Area.

Default Suffix Spelling Area

Use this area to set default spellings for suffix names. To change a spelling click on the menu button and choose a different spelling.

Frame Editing Area

Use this area to edit the guitar frame.

Chapter 35: File Menu

437

File Menu

Buttons area

The enter a dot on a string, click on the string and fret. Click above the frets to place a symbol for open or muted string. Multiple clicks toggle between open, muted, and no symbol. Shift click two dots to enter a barre between them. To change starting fret, use the Fret popup menu. Type the suffix name in the given area. You may type anything you wish for a name. Overture displays non-alpha numeric characters as a superscript. For Example: A C9 chord will have the 9 displayed in a slightly smaller font and raised.

438

Part V: Menu Reference

When you are finished editing the fingering, choose the Replace button to replace an existing chord or the Insert button to insert a new fingering. You can reposition the frames by dragging them to a new position.

Frame Viewing Area

Use this area to choose the guitar frame to edit.

Note:
You can copy the current frame by typing Control[Command]-c and then paste it into the Frame Editing Area by typing Control[Command]-p.

Buttons Area
Use this area to set change the spellings for suffix names. To change a spelling click on the menu button and choose a different spelling. Font button. Click this button to choose the default font for the suffix names. Insert button. Click this button to insert the frame in the edit area into the viewing area and into the current Guitar Frames library. Replace button. Click this button to replace the hilited frame in the viewing area with the frame in the editing area. Save button. Click this button to saves changes to the file immediately. Save As button. Click this button to save the edited library to disk under a different name. Overture opens the standard Save As dialog to allow you to specify a different name. OK button. Click this button to activate your changes. This does not save them to disk - it only affects the current Guitar Frames library. Cancel button. Click this button to restore the library to its original state.

Instruments Library
Choose File>Edit Library>Instruments Library to change instruments and create new ones. Overture opens the Instruments library dialog box.

Chapter 35: File Menu

439

File Menu

Click on the fingering you wish to edit. The current frame being editited will be shown in red. You may also reposition the frames by clicking and dragging them to a new position. To delete a frame, drag it to the Trash Can.

The Instruments library lets you specify and store important information about instruments. Each instruments definition includes: name, abbreviation, clef, device, patch, output transposition, pitch range, transposed clef, transposed steps, and number of voices. Assigning an instrument to a track automatically enters the instruments information into the track. There is, however, no dynamic link between a track that has been assigned an instrument and the Instrument library that contains that instrument. Editing an instrument in the Instruments library has no effect on tracks that have already been assigned that instrument. Once the track has been assigned an instrument, the instruments attributes belong to that track. The tracks attributes are still editable in the Setup Track dialog box, the Tracks Window, or the Score Window. Assigning instruments to tracks is a much faster, more efficient way to use Overture than individually entering each attribute. We recommend using the Instruments library as much as possible to configure instruments; override the assignments in the track only when necessary.

Orchestral and GM Instruments

GenieSoft provides two libraries: Orchestral Instruments and GM Instruments. Both libraries reside in the Libraries folder located in the same folder as the Overture application. Orchestral Instruments contains a list of the most commonly used orchestral instruments and loads as the default Instruments library when you first launch Overture. Although the name, abbreviation, clef, pitch range, number of voices, and transposed steps attributes of each instrument are accurately defined, you need to select the devices and patches to use for your MIDI setup. GM Instruments contains a complete list of General MIDI instruments. Since these instruments are designed to work with General MIDI devices, the patches are accurately specified. You need to select the device theyll play through in your MIDI setup, however.

440

Part V: Menu Reference

You can specify the Instruments library to load when starting Overture by selecting the desired library from the Instruments pop-up menu in Libraries Preferences. The Instruments pop-up menu contains all Instruments libraries in the Libraries folder. This menu defaults to Orchestral Instruments until you select another library.

Editing the Instruments Library

This section discusses how to edit, save, and name the currently loaded Instruments library. Its a good idea to make copies of the GM and Orchestral Instruments libraries. Making backups prevents any mistakes from overwriting these important starting libraries. You can derive your own libraries from those GenieSoft provides or create your own from blank entries. Although GM Instruments is intended for General MIDI devices, you can select patches different from those predefined, or devices that dont conform to General MIDI. You can add non-orchestral instruments to Orchestral Instruments. Since most composers use a smaller set of instruments than are contained in the libraries we provide, it is not necessary to define all instruments in the library. You can either delete instruments you dont need or just define the instruments youd like to use and ignore the others. Once they have defined the relevant instruments, most composers do not need to make frequent changes to the Instruments library. To begin editing the currently loaded Instruments library, choose File>Edit Library>Instruments. This opens either: the Instruments library that was loaded when Overture started; Or the Instruments library that was last loaded by choosing File>Load Library. Choosing File>Load Library is the only way to edit and use a library different from the currently loaded library.

The OK and Cancel Buttons

After you edit the library and press the OK button, Overture uses any changes made to that library until you: edit the library again (and press OK) load a different library quit and re-start the program

Pressing the OK button after editing the library saves those changes while you use that library (think of it as a working copy) without saving them permanently in the library file. This allows you to experiment with different settings without committing them to the file. If you select the Auto Save Libraries option in Libraries Preferences, however, Overture saves the changes in the current library file every time you click the OK button. This is a shortcut method for those users who prefer to keep the working copy and the library file in sync with each other without the extra

Chapter 35: File Menu

441

File Menu

step of clicking the Save button. If you press Cancel instead of OK, Overture saves changes to neither the working library nor the library file.

Save
Pressing the Save button saves any changes you make in the current library to the current librarys file name. Pressing the Save button permanently changes the library file but doesnt save the changes to the working library until you press the OK button.

Note:
You can edit the library, press Save to store the changes in the library file, and then press Cancel to avoid working with the changes.

Save As
Pressing Save As opens the standard Save As dialog box. Locate the Libraries folder (in the folder that contains Overture) and assign the library a new name. The name appears in the upper left of the library window. If youd like to use the current changes to this library, press OK. If you are merely making a copy of the library under a different name and would like to return to the previous librarys state before editing, press Cancel. Its important to understand that using Save As does not load that library file as the current Instruments library. The next time you choose File>Edit Library>Instruments, youll be editing the currently loaded library, not the file you named when you used the Save As button. The only way to change the Instruments library while Overture is running is by choosing File>Load Library to load a different library.

442

Part V: Menu Reference

Insert and Delete

You enable the Insert and Delete buttons only when you select an instrument by clicking in the column with the arrows at the far left of the library.

Click in this column to select an instrument

Selected instrument

Pressing Insert copies the selected instruments attributes to a new, un-named entry above the selected instrument. Its helpful to select an instrument whose attributes are similar to the instrument youd like to create. Then you can edit those fields in the new instrument that differ from those in the original instrument. Pressing Delete removes the selected instrument from the library.

Clear
Pressing the Clear button creates a new library with unspecified fields. This is the easiest way to create a new library from scratch.

The Instruments Library Attributes

This section discusses each instrument attribute in the Instruments library.

Instrument Section Name and Abbreviation

You can name and abbreviate each instrument. Selecting Show Name in the Setup Track dialog box displays the instruments name in the left margin of the first system in the Score Window. Selecting Show

Chapter 35: File Menu

443

File Menu

Abbreviation in the Setup Track dialog box displays the instruments abbreviation in the left margin for systems subsequent to the first system in the Score Window.

GM #
When you open an Overture file in a MIDI setup different from the one used to create the file, the devices assigned to tracks may differ. This commonly occurs when you exchange Overture files with a friend or co-composer. Overture uses the number specified in the GM # field of the Instruments library in which the file was created to search the Instruments library in the new environment for an instrument that uses the same GM #. If it finds a match, Overture uses the device and patch from that instrument if the current MIDI Setup knows that device. The GM# links MIDI devices in different setups; it is not the actual patch used for the track. If Overture doesnt find a match, it uses the device you select in the General Preferences option Remap Unknown Devices To. You still need to specify the patch for that track for the new device to play the correct sound. If you dont select Remap Unknown Devices To, Overture warns you that it will not remap the device(s) and that any tracks using them will not play. Use the Tracks Window to specify devices and patches for these tracks.

Clef
Tracks you assign to this instrument use the clef you select.

Drum Section
When first launched, Overture automatically loads a default General MIDI Drum Map. See Drum Map on page 426 for more information on Drum Map libraries. GenieSoft would like to thank Dr. Norman Weinberg for giving us a standard. His article Guidelines for Drumset Notation in Percussive Notes, June 1994 was very useful. We have made our best effort to match the notehead and staff positions of the various drum notes to his suggestions. Because of the vast numbers of drums, we occasionally had to make slightly different choices. Drum Maps specify names and clef positions for drum notes. You can store multiple Drums Maps in the Libraries folder but only one Drum Map is active at a time. Select a different Drum Map by choosing File>Load Library and select the new Drum Map from the standard File dialog box that appears. There are sixteen pitches in each Drum map, each of which is assigned a position on the percussive clef.

Map
Click the Map column to open the current Drum Map. Clicking OK saves the changes made to that Drum Map, not to the currently active Drum Maps file. A dot to the left of the Map field (in the Dot field) shows that the pitches for tracks using that instrument are designated by the notes and clef positions you specify in that instruments Drum Map. You can edit a different Drum Map for each instrument but each instrument begins with the current Drum Map. Click the dot in the Dot field to remove the dot and use conventional note pitches instead of the Drum Map. Click the Dot field when there is no dot to activate the current Drum Map for that instrument.

444

Part V: Menu Reference

Output Section
Device/Patch
Set the device and patch for the instrument with the Device and Patch pop-up menus. Alt[Option]clicking to select a device sets all instruments in the library below that device to the selected device. Option-clicking to select a patch opens the OMS Names Browser. Think carefully about how you allocate the devices in your MIDI setup to instruments. Consider how many MIDI channels, notes, and multi-timbral parts each device can play before assigning the same device to instruments that play simultaneously. Sometimes you may have to use a device that doesnt have the best sounding patch in order to play all the tracks with the correct instrumentation. See Resolving Device Conflicts on page 502 for a detailed discussion about assigning devices in the Instruments library.

Set the output transposition in the Trans numerical field. This field affects playback only, not the appearance of notes in the Graphic or Score Windows.

Range Section
Low and High
The Low and High fields specify the lowest and highest notes, respectively, in the instruments pitch range.

Voices
The Voices field specifies the number of voices the instrument is capable of generating. For example, an alto sax generates only a single voice but a guitar can generate up to four voices.

Transpose Section
Clef
The Clef field shows the clef displayed in the track if you select Options>Show>Tracks Transposed.

Steps
The Steps field shows the instruments transposition. You can edit this field, but each transposing instrument in Overtures libraries already has the correct transposition. This is different from the Output Trans field that transposes the output for playback only.

Rearranging Instruments in the Library

You can move the instruments around the library by dragging in the far left field with the up and down arrows at the top of the column. Since the instruments in GM and Orchestral Instruments libraries are ordered alphabetically, you may want to group instruments in other ways. For example, see Resolving Device Conflicts on page 502 to learn how grouping instruments by device lets you assign devices to groups of instruments in one step.

Chapter 35: File Menu

445

File Menu

Trans

The Instruments Library and the Tracks Window

Although you can explicitly set the Track, Voices, Device, Patch, and Trans fields, it is easier to set them automatically by selecting an instrument that encapsulates these attributes. Control[Command]-clicking the Device field opens a pop-up menu with the instruments in the current Instruments library. The normal pop-up menu displays the devices known to the current MIDI setup. When you select an instrument, Overture assigns all the instruments attributes to the track. This includes the attributes displayed in the Setup Track dialog box but not in the Tracks window, namely clef, pitch, range, steps transposed, and GM#.

Note:
The instruments name appears in the Track field. The Trans field of the Tracks window displays the Output Trans attribute from the instrument, not the Steps attribute from the Transpose section.

446

Part V: Menu Reference

Resolving Device Conflicts

To use the Device field to select instruments you must completely define the instruments in the Instruments library. This is not hard. If you are using the Orchestral or GM Instruments libraries, you must systematically configure only the Device and Patch fields in order to view and play tracks correctly. Give careful thought to which devices have the best patches to play specific sounds. Its also important to think about which instruments you most commonly use in a particular type of composition. For example, if a piece uses horns, piano, drums, bass, and guitar all mapped to a single device, you may run out of MIDI channels, multi-timbral parts, or notes on that device. Overture and the Instrument Definitions Manager cannot help you in resolving these issues. As you select patches and devices for the many instruments in the library, it is difficult to anticipate how and when those instruments will be used. For example, consider the following situation:
If you assign Proteus/2-1 and Oboe as the device and patch to an oboe instrument you assign Proteus/2-1 and Harp as the device and patch to a harp instrument what happens if you assign the harp and oboe to tracks that play simultaneously?

and

then

Both tracks request different patches on the same device. Overture resolves the conflict by assigning the next available MIDI channel to the second of the two tracks. For example, if the Proteus/2 from the previous example were enabled to receive on channels 1-8, Overture would assign Proteus/2-2 for track 2. This automatic device mapping brings up another interesting possibility: since Overture solves device conflicts, why go to the trouble of specifying the precise MIDI channel for each device for every instrument? The answer is that you dont have to specify the precise MIDI channel. You can simply select the devices first enabled channel for an instrument. As long as you dont assign a single device for too many instruments that play simultaneously, you really dont have to worry about which MIDI channels Overture uses, as long as the correct patch plays on the selected device. This automatic device mapping has an interesting implication for grouping instruments in the library. If you group instruments in your library based on the device they play through, rather than alphabetically, you can Alt[Option]-click the Devices pop-up menu when selecting the device for the first instrument in the group to assign that device to all instruments below that instrument. By starting at the top of the library and moving down, you can assign the first channel of the device for that group to the first instrument in the group. Then move on to the first instrument of the next group and perform the same operation. Each succeeding assignment overrides the preceding assignment for the instruments below the instrument you Alt[Option]-click. Overture then assigns specific MIDI channels for the devices as the instruments are used in tracks.

Chapter 35: File Menu

447

File Menu

This technique can significantly speed up and simplify the task of assigning devices. When youre done assigning devices, you can then re-group the instruments in the library alphabetically or in any other way that makes sense.

Note:
Selecting an instrument from the Setup Track dialog box does not enter the device and patch into the Track List. See Instrument Pop-up Menu on page 556 to learn why this is the case.

Load Library
Choose this command to load any of Overtures six library types from disk into Overtures local memory. We discuss Overtures library types in Edit Library on page 466. When you choose File>Load Library, Overture opens a standard Open dialog box. Use the dialog box to find the library you wish to open. When you load a library into Overture, it replaces the library previously in use. You can edit any loaded library by choosing its type from the File>Edit Library submenu. When Overture launches, it automatically loads the Chord library, Drum Map, Allotment Table, Expressions library, Instruments, and Guitar library selected in the Preferences dialog box. For more information, see Preferences on page 704.

Import
Choose this command to import either a standard MIDI file, MusicXML file, Encore. or MusicTime file, and convert it into standard music notation.

Importing Files
To import a files into Overture: 1. Choose File>Import. A standard Open dialog box appears. 2. 3. Navigate to where you store your files. For MIDI files an Import dialog box appears. Enable those tracks you wish to import and select the desired voicing, split, quantization and transcription options for each track.

448

Part V: Menu Reference

4.

Click the OK button. Overture creates a new Score window. Its staves show either standard music notation or raw MIDI data (MIDI files only) depending on the transcription option you selected in the Import MIDI File dialog box.

About the Import MIDI File Dialog Box

This section discusses the Import MIDI File dialog box.

File Name Score Options Transcription Quantization Transcribe Mode

Track Name Voices Split Point

Track Selector

There are numerous elements in the Import MIDI File dialog box. These are described below: File Name. This area of the dialog box displays the name of the MIDI file youre importing into Overture. Transcribing Status. Once you click the OK button, this reporting box displays the import status on a measure-by-measure, track-by-track basis.

Chapter 35: File Menu

449

File Menu

Track Selector. Use this column to select those tracks you want to import. Overture imports all tracks marked with a small triangle. Click a selector dot to turn it into a triangle (enabling it for importing). Click a selector triangle to turn it into a dot (disabling it for importing).

Track disabled for import Track enabled for import

Track Name. This column shows the name of each track in the selected MIDI file. Voices. Use this column to tell Overture whether you want the corresponding track imported as a single voice or a multiple-voice track. For a definition of voices, see Voice on page 8. Simply click the word Single or Multiple to switch between the two choices. Clef. Use this column to assign the type of clef you want for the imported track. Change the clef type by clicking the Clef field. Each click changes the type between treble, bass, alto, tenor, and perc. Percussive Tracks. Tracks imported with the perc. (percussive) clef type display with respect to the current drum map. Overture plays the imported pitches, but displays them on the percussive clef in the positions you have specified in the drum map.

Split Point. Use this numerical if you want Overture to split a track into two separate tracks. Press and hold the mouse in this column and drag it up to set a split point. Overture imports split tracks as two tracksit places any notes equal to or higher than the split point in one track and notes below the split point in another. If you select None, Overture imports the track as is. Split points are particularly useful for importing piano parts that were recorded on one track, but that you want notated on two staves. Transcription Quantization. Use this column to set the quantization level for each imported track. Press and hold the note, then choose a new note from the pop-up menu.

Overtures smallest transcription quantize amount is the triplet value of the selected note. For example, if you select a transcription quantize amount of an eighth note, the smallest note value Overture transcribes correctly is an eighth note triplet. Transcribe Mode. Use this column to tell Overture whether you want the corresponding track transcribed directly (Auto), or if you want the track transcribed as raw MIDI data (Manual). Click the word Auto or Manual to switch between the two choices.

450

Part V: Menu Reference

Map Channels to Staves. If a single track has multiple channels, use this box to tell Overture to display each channel on a separate staff. Score Order. Use this options to reorder the tracks to match the standard order of classical instruments. Optimize Staves. Use this option to suppress the display of staves containing no track data. Use Jazz Font. Use this option to have Overture use the Jazz Font for musical symbols. This requires that the Jazz Font be installed.

Overture justifies all measures and recalculates the score for each imported track. It uses information about the highest and lowest note in each staff to adjust the space between staves accurately.

Abbreviations for Imported Tracks

For example:

If and

you import a track named Flute to a track in Overture, there already exists an Overture track named Flute with abbreviation Fl., Overture automatically uses Fl. as the abbreviation for the imported track. If Overture doesnt recognize the name of the Default Suffix track, it uses the imported tracks full name instead of an Spellings Area abbreviation.

then

Remap Unknown Devices

Importing a standard MIDI file created with different MIDI devices from those in the current MIDI Setup requires that you map the previous devices to the current devices. You can do this manually using the Patch and Device fields in the Tracks Window. The Remap Unknown Devices To field in the General Preferences dialog box assists the remapping process by assigning unknown devices to successive, valid channels on the selected device. Choose Options>Preferences. The General Preferences dialog box opens. When you select the Remap Unknown Devices To checkbox and select a device from its pop-up menu, Overture uses available channels for that device (as determined from your MIDI setup) to remap unknown devices during import.

Markers
Sequencers or notation tools often use markers to designate important events. These may include cues in film or video scores or the verse, chorus, and bridge sections in a song. Overture imports markers from standard MIDI files and puts them above the top staff as system text.

Chapter 35: File Menu

451

File Menu

If the track name in an imported Standard MIDI File is the same as an Overture instrument name, and you have specified an abbreviation for this instrument name, Overture automatically uses the appropriate abbreviation.

Apply Import Options to All Tracks

Alt[Option]-clicking a tracks import options fields (Clef, Voices, Split, Quantize, and Transcribe) applies that setting to the current track and all subsequent tracks.

Importing MusicXML, Encore and MusicTime Files

To import an MusicXML, Encore or MusicTime file into Overture: 1. Choose File>Import. A standard Open dialog box appears. 2. 3. Navigate to where you store MusicXML, Encore or MusicTime files. Click the OK button. Overture creates a new Score window with the converted score.

Note:
Not all of the notation will be imported. Overture imports the basic page layout, most MIDI information, and essential notation elements. You may need to adjust the page layout and some element positions. GenieSoft will continue to improve Overtures import capabilities, so check the website for updates. .

452

Part V: Menu Reference

Export
Choose this command to export data in the active Overture score to a multitrack (format 1) MIDI file. When you choose File>Export, Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box. Use the dialog box to tell Overture what to name the resulting MIDI file and where you want it saved. If your score contains tracks that you dont want included in the exported MIDI file, disable them by muting them in the Tracks window. For more information, see Muting a Track on page 286.

Extract Parts
File Menu
453
Choose this command when you want to create separate instrument parts from a complete score. When you choose the Extract Parts command, Overture produces the Extract Parts dialog box.

Track Selector

Left edge barline check box Multi-bar rests check box

Split Field

Track Name Parts

Chapter 35: File Menu

About the Extract Parts Dialog Box

There are four different areas in the Extract Parts dialog box. Track Selector. Use this column to select those tracks you want extracted. Overture extracts all tracks that are marked with a small filled triangle. Click a selector triangle to turn it into a filled triangle (enabling it for part extraction). Shift-click to make multiple selections.

Track disabled for extraction Track enabled for extraction

Parts. The dotted lines between tracks indicate part divisions. The number of tracks between dotted lines indicates the number of staves (tracks) that Overture extracts into a single part. For example, if there are two tracks between dotted lines (as with the two Piano tracks), then the extracted part will contain two staves (one for each track).

Split Field. Use this column to control the number of voices extracted into each part. The possible values for the Split field are: . all voices go into one part 1. 2. 3. 4. splits each voice into a separate part splits two voices into a part splits three voices into a part splits four voices into a part

Part extraction for multiple splits (options 2-4 above) proceeds in order of the voices in the track. For example, a four voice track with the Split value set at 2, extracts voices one and two into one part and voices three and four into another. Track Name. Use this column to rename tracks, or to drag them around to change their order or part assignment. For example, assume the vocalist in your band is also the bass player and you want to extract her parts into a single score. As shown in the figure below, you select the two tracks to extract, then drag

454

Part V: Menu Reference

the name of the bass track on top of and the vocal track. This puts the two tracks together in a single part.

1. Click the name of the track you want to move.

2. Drag an outline of the track to the desired destination.

3. Release the mouse. The bass track now shares a part with the vocal track.

If you Alt[Option]-click a track name, Overture automatically groups it with the track immediately below it. Left Edge Barline Check Box. Check this box to have Overture display the barline at the left edge of each system. Single instrument parts usually do not display the barline at the left edge of the system. Multi-Bar Rests Check Box. Check this box to have Overture create multi-bar rests. Extracted parts use multi-bar rests to indicate many consecutive blank measures as a single bar. Use the Minimum field to set the minimum number of consecutive empty bars required before Overture notates them as a single multi-bar rest. Use the Maximum field to set the maximum number of consecutive empty bars that Overture notates as a single multi-bar rest. Overture recognizes rehearsal marks and double barlines, and never creates a multi-bar rest that spans such symbols. Reduction. Use this to scale the size of the individual extracted parts. Using the Extract Parts Command

Chapter 35: File Menu

455

File Menu

To extract individual parts from an Overture score: 1. Choose File>Extract Parts. The Extract Parts dialog box appears. (See the previous section.) 2. 3. 4. Click the selector dots of those tracks you wish to export. Drag track names into the desired part groupings. Check the appropriate check boxes and click the OK button. Overture saves each extracted part as its own Overture file.

Automatic Names for Extracted Parts

Overture uses the file and track names to name extracted parts automatically. Overture uses each file name while that piece is open. This is just a default name, and you can assign your own name and locate a folder in the standard File dialog box that appears. For example:

If and and then

a file is named Counterpoint, the selected track is named piano and contains 4 voices, the track is extracted with the Split field value set to 2, Overture creates two parts with two voices each with the following names: Counterpoint-piano 1&2 and Counterpoint-piano 3&4.

Note:
Extracted parts derive their page layout from the Engraver Preferences dialog box, not from the Layout Page dialog box settings.

456

Part V: Menu Reference

Page Setup
Choose this command to define various printing options such as paper size, orientation, scaling and text effects. When you choose the Page Setup command, Overture produces the Page Setup dialog box for your printer. The look and format of the dialog box depends on your printer and platform. See your printer manual for specific information about its page setup options.

Save
There are several areas in the Print Setup dialog box. These are described below: Name Area. Use this popup menu to choose your printer. Paper Area. Choose the paper size that is is your printer. Orientation Area. Choose Portrait or Landscape.

Chapter 35: File Menu

457

File Menu

Print
Choose this command to print all or part of the active Overture score. When you choose the Print command, Overture produces the Print dialog box. The actual appearance of the dialog box depends on your printer and platform. See your printer manual for specific information about its print options.

There are several areas in the Print dialog box. These are described below: Name Area. Use this popup menu to choose your printer. Range Area. Choose the number of score pages to print. Copies Area. Choose the number of copies to print. Format Area. Choose how you want to print your score.
Normal - Prints one music page on one sheet of paper. Use the Odd pages Check Box to print only odd pages. Use the Even pages Check Box to print only even pages. Booklet - Prints two pages of music side-by-side. Each music page is scaled to fit two pages on one sheet of paper and the page order is changed to produce a booklet when the printed sheets are folded in half. Use the Start on Inside Check Box if you want the top of the booklet to be blank. 2-Up - Prints two pages of music side-by-side. Each music page is scaled to fit two pages on one sheet of paper. Manual Duplex Printing - Check this if you want to print on both sides on the paper and your printer does not offer this option. After the top of each sheet is printed, youll be prompted to flip the sheet of paper over to print on the other side.

458

Part V: Menu Reference

Print Preview (PC)

Use this command to see what your score will look like when you print it. When you choose this command, Overture displays the print preview of your score.

About the Print Preview

The Print preview has buttons to help you inspect your score: Print. Sends your score to the printer when you are satisfied with it. Next Page. Displays the next page of your score. Prev Page. Displays the previous page of your score.

Zoom In. Magnifies your score Zoom Out. Shrinks your score Close. Closes the print preview and returns you to the score window.

List of Recently Opened Files

This list of up to four files near the bottom of the File menu displays files you have opened recently. This is a convenience for files you open often. Choose the file you want from the list.

Exit/Quit
Choose this command to exit the Overture application. If any scores contain unsaved changes, Overture prompts you to save those changes before quitting.

Chapter 35: File Menu

459

File Menu

Two Pages. Displays your score two pages at a time.

460

Part V: Menu Reference

36

Edit Menu

Use the Edit menu commands to cut, copy, and paste symbols, lyrics, MIDI data, or other elements of an Overture score.

Edit Menu

Undo
Choose this command to undo your most recent action. You can undo most Overture commands. The Undo command usually describes the reversible action, as in Undo Insertion or Undo Deletion. The Undo command allows you to examine the results of an action without committing to it.

Redo
Choose the Redo command to make the score appear as it did before you chose Undo. Use the Undo and Redo commands to toggle between the before and after versions of your most recent action. You can sequentially undo and redo your last sixteen actions since you started the current Overture session.

Cut
Choose this command to delete the current selection and copy it to the Clipboard. The cut selection remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy some other selection to the Clipboard.

Copy
Choose this command to copy the current selection to the Clipboard. Unlike the Cut command, choosing Copy keeps the current selection in the Overture score. The copied selection remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy some other selection to the Clipboard.

Paste
Choose this command to copy the contents of the Clipboard to the insertion point in the current score. Since the Paste command puts a copy of the Clipboards contents into a score, you may use the Paste command repeatedly to insert multiple copies. When you choose Edit>Paste in the Score window, Overture pastes all note and note-related events from the Clipboard into the score, replacing the events currently in that time range. It does not paste some symbols like meters, beat charts, or tempo changes. This is so you can copy and paste notes between different sections of a score without disturbing the rhythmic flow of the composition. If you do want to paste any of the above-mentioned attributes, use the Paste Special command (discussed in Paste Special on page 467). [Mac:If the Clipboard contains a PICT file and you paste it into a score, Overture attaches the PICT to the active measure and puts a white background behind it (obscuring any other symbols in that region of the score).]

462

Part V: Menu Reference

If the Clipboard contains text, you can paste that text into the Lyrics window or into any text area in Overture.

Clear
Choose this command to delete the current selection from the Overture score. The contents of the Clipboard are not altered since the Clear command does not place a copy of the selection on the Clipboard.

Merge
This command merges the symbols on the clipboard with the symbols already in the score. It does not replace the symbols like the Paste command. [Mac:If you merge a PICT file into score, Overture attaches the PICT to the active measure and puts a transparent background behind it (so you can still see any other symbols in that region of the score).]

Paste Special...
Choose this command to perform a more complete and user-definable paste operation than is possible using simply the Paste command. Overtures Paste command does not copy all symbols from the Clipboard into the score. Overtures Paste Special command pastes all gives you the option of pasting meters, beat charts, tempo changes, lyrics, chord names, or measure text.

Paste and Paste Special

The following example shows the difference between the Paste and Paste Special commands:

Chapter 36: Edit Menu

463

Edit Menu

Assume you have the score below, and that you want to copy notes from the first measure and paste them into the third.

To maintain the tempo pattern youd already established in the second measure: 1. 2. 3. Copy the selected notes and symbols from the first measure. Using the Arrow Cursor, click in measure 3. Choose Edit>Paste. Overture pastes all notes and symbols from the first measure into the third (as shown in the following figure). Notice that measure 3 maintains the tempo set in measure 2.

To have measure 3 change tempo so that it matches the tempo in the first measure: 1. 2. 3. Copy the selected notes and symbols from the first measure. Using the Arrow Cursor, click in measure 3. Choose Edit>Paste Special. Overture opens the Paste Special dialog box. 4. Check the Notes and Tempo Changes options, then click the OK button. Overture pastes all notes and symbols from the first measure into the third. In addition, it also pastes the tempo from the original measure into measure #3.

464

Part V: Menu Reference

Select
Choose this command to select musical symbols in the active score. All: Choose this command to select all musical symbols in the active score. Current Track: Choose this command to select all musical symbols in the active track. By Filter: Choose this command to select or deselect specific music symbols in the score. If you have a range selected, the filter will use the selected range to find items, otherwise the entire score will be used. Use the Note Filter to choose notes by MIDI and graphical parameters. Use the Data filter to choose notes and other symbols by MIDI parameters. For example, in the dialog below every quarter note on the second and fourth beat with a velocity of 80 or greater will be selected.

MIDI parameters describing the notes.

Starting position and pattern in bar.

Articulations describing notes

None: Choose this command to deselect all items in the score.

Find Item...
Choose this command to find musical symbols and MIDI data in the active score.

Find Next Item..

Choose this command to find the next occurrence of musical symbols or MIDI data selected in the Find Dialog in the active score.

Chapter 36: Edit Menu

465

Edit Menu

Make Invisible
Choose this command to hide all currently selected symbols. This command is useful for a number of functions, including: Voices: You can hide rests that you might not want to appear as part of a multi-voice staff. Trills: If you want the trill to playback as intended, you enter all the MIDI notes. You do not, however, want to notate all the notes in the trillonly one of the notes. Use the Make Invisible command to hide all the other trill notes in your score. Overture can also perform this function automatically by choosing Notes>Notate Notes as>Trill. For more information, see Notate Notes as Trill on page 602. Turns: If you want a turn to playback as intended, you enter all the MIDI notes. You do not, however, want to notate all the notes in the turnonly one of the notes. Use the Make Invisible command to hide all the other turn notes in your score. You can also cause Overture to perform this function automatically by choosing Notes>Notate Notes as>Turn. For more information, see Notate Notes as Turn on page 604.

You can view all the invisible symbols in your score by checking the Options>Show>Invisibles option (discussed in Invisibles on page 615). Also, any invisible symbols can be made visible by selecting the desired symbols and choosing Edit>Make Visible. Editing operations affect invisible notation symbols exactly as they do visible symbols. For example, when you drag to select multiple symbols (or use double-click or shift-click selection methods), Overtures selects all invisible symbols as well as all visible ones. Copy, cut, paste, and edit invisible symbols exactly as if they were visible.

Make Visible
Choose this command to make visible all currently selected invisible symbols. For more information, see the previous section.

Set Color...
Choose this command to set the color for all currently selected symbols.

Disable Playback
Choose this command to disable playback on all currently selected symbols. To enable playback, select the symbol and choose the Enable Playback command.

466

Part V: Menu Reference

Enable Playback
Choose this command to enable playback on all currently selected symbols. To disable playback, select the symbol and choose the Disable Playback command.

Playback Time...
Choose this command to offset the time a symbol plays within a measure. This command is also used to create rolled chords.

MIDI Data
Choose this command to enable the MIDI Data mode. This allows you to edit MIDI Data directly on the active score. For more information see the tutorial on Editing MIDI Data. in Chapter 6.

Modify Controller...
Edit Menu
467
Choose this command to reassign one controller to another or to change any controllers value.

Chapter 36: Edit Menu

468

Part V: Menu Reference

37

Score Menu

Use the Score menu commands for such score-related tasks as specifying staff location and appearance; grouping systems; and setting up pages. The following sections discuss each command in detail.

Score Menu

Insert Page
Choose this command to add one or more pages to the current Overture score. When you choose Score>Insert Page, Overture opens the Insert Page dialog box.

You can move the Insert Page dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

Using the Insert Page Dialog Box

Choose whether you want to add pages before or after the current page, and enter the number of pages you want added to the score. Click the OK button to add the pages. Click Cancel if you decide not to add any pages to your Overture score. Inserted pages use the Page Layout assigned to the current page. For more information about page layout, see Layout Page on page 471.

Delete Page
Choose this command to delete one or more pages from the current Overture score. When you choose the Delete Page command, Overture displays the Delete Page dialog box.

You can move the Delete Page dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar. Enter the number of pages you want to delete, then click the OK button. Overture deletes pages beginning with the current page.

470

Part V: Menu Reference

Layout Page
Choose this command to specify the default number of measures in a system and the default number of systems on a page. When you choose the Score>Layout Page command, Overture displays the Layout Page dialog box.

You can move the Layout Page dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Layout Page Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Layout Page dialog box. Systems per Page. Use this numerical to enter the number of systems you want displayed on the current page. If you add staves to systems such that the requested number of systems no longer fits within the current page, Overture automatically increases the length of the page by adding tiles, if Auto>Wrap Measures is not check. Overture automatically tiles printed pages (as discussed in Metric Measurements on page 473). If you dont want to have your pages tiled, decrease the value of the Systems per Page numerical to prevent staves from extending beyond the bottom of the page.

For more information, see Creating Big Systems on page 237. Measures per System. Use this numerical to enter the default number of measures you want in each system on the current page. All Remaining Pages. If you check this option, Overture applies the Systems per Page and Measures per System choices to every remaining page in your score. It also generates new measures to fit existing pages. If you leave this option unchecked, Overture applies your choices only to the current page and does not change the number of measures in the score.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

471

Score Menu

If Auto>Wrap Measures if checked, the systems that would extend be below the bottom of the page are wrapped to the next page.

Page Dimensions
Choose this command to specify page and margin sizes for the current Overture score. When you choose Score>Page Dimensions, Overture opens the Page Dimensions dialog box.

You can move the Page Dimensions dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

472

Part V: Menu Reference

About the Page Dimensions Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Page Dimensions dialog box. These are described in the following sections.

Type new page dimensions here. Drag score size slider to allow more or less music on a page.

Type new margins here.

Metric Measurements

Page Size Controls

Use the page size controls to set the width and height of a page (up to a maximum of 34 x 44).

Printer Paper Size

Use this button to set the dimensions to the size of the paper in your printer. The dimensions are determined by the Page Size setting found in the Page Setup dialog.

Score Size Slider

Use the Score Size slider to increase or decrease the amount of music that fits on your paper. If you check the Recalculate Layout check box and then change the score size, the score layout will be reflowed to fill the new score size.

Margin Controls
Use the margin numericals to set all four margins on a page.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

473

Score Menu

You can specify either inches or centimeters for measurement units. Click the Inches or Centimeters radio button to set the type of units to display.

Caution:
Set margin sizes appropriate for your printer. If you set margins narrower than your printers minimum printable margin, some portions of music will be clipped.

The Use Tiles Option

Choose the Use Tiles option when you want Overture to print pages larger than the physical dimensions of the paper in your printer. Do this by printing individual tiles that you can tape together to create a larger page. This is like the way billboards and other large banners are produced. The easiest way to understand the Use Tiles option is by example. Assume that your printer is loaded with 8.5 x 11 paper (the physical page) and that you want to create actual score pages that are 16 x 20 (the virtual page). To do so: 1. Choose Score>Page Dimensions. Overture opens the Page Dimensions dialog box. 2. Using the Page Size numericals, enter a page width of 16 and a page height of 20.

474

Part V: Menu Reference

3.

Check the Use Tiles option and click the OK button. Overtures Score window contains the entire 16 x 20 virtual page (youll have to zoom out to see all of it). The score has dotted lines to illustrate exactly what prints on each physical page.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

475

Score Menu

4.

Choose File>Print. Overture opens the Print dialog box (your print dialog box may look different from this one).

In this dialog box, you tell the printer how many virtual pages to print, not how many physical pages. Therefore, to print the first page of a 16 x 20 tiled score, tell the dialog box to print from page 1 to page 1. Because of the tiling option, the printer knows that it must produce four physical pages to make one virtual page. 5. Click the Print button. Overture prints four 8.5 x 11 physical pages that you can tape together to create a single virtual page.

476

Part V: Menu Reference

When Overture prints tiled pages, it prints them left to right, then top to bottom. So, in the previous example, Overture first prints the upper left corner, then the upper right corner, then the lower left corner and finally the lower right corner.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

477

Score Menu

Using the Score Size Slider

Assume, for example, that you want more staves on a page and that the slider is set to 100%. Move the slider to 50%. When you release the mouse, the score will be scaled to 50% and the new size will be displayed in the Score Area. Assuming you have set the Page size to 8.5x11 and a scaling of 50%, Overture creates a 17 x 22 score. This is because a 17 x 22 score scaled at 50% is 8.5 x 11. A printed page looks like this:

When you use the score size slider the printed output will fill a piece of paper no matter what the scaling. Since using this slider changes the size of the printing area on a page, you generally want to choose Score>Layout Page and change the number of measures in a system and number of systems on a page.

Increase Systems
Choose this command to move a system from the top of the following page to the bottom of the current page, thereby increasing the number of systems on the current page. Overture does not change the default number of systems for any remaining pages, so systems continue to wrap throughout the score (that is, the

478

Part V: Menu Reference

top system on each page moves to the bottom of the preceding page). If the final page in the score contains more than one system, Overture simply decreases the number of systems on that final page. If the final page in the score contains only one system, Overture moves it to the bottom of the previous page and deletes the blank page from your score. For example, assume your score has three pages with four systems on each of the first two pages and two systems on the third page.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

479

Score Menu

Assume that you want to modify your score so that all ten systems fit on two pages. To do so: 1. 2. Click in any measure on the first page to make Page 1 the active page. Choose Score>Increase Systems.

Overture adds a system to the bottom of the first page by taking it from the top of the second page. The top system on the third page wraps to the bottom of the second page. This is because Overture maintains the default number of staves per page (as set in the Page Layout dialog box) for all pages except the last page. 3. Click in any measure on the second page to make Page 2 the active page.

480

Part V: Menu Reference

4.

Choose Score>Increase Systems.

Overture adds a system to the bottom of the second page by taking it from the top of the third page. Since the third page no longer contains any systems, Overture drops it from the score.

Decrease Systems
Choose this command to move a system from the bottom of the current page to the top of the following page, thereby decreasing the number of systems on the current page. Overture does not change the default number of systems for any remaining pages, so systems continue to wrap throughout the score (that is, the bottom system on each page moves to the top of the following page).

Chapter 37: Score Menu

481

Score Menu

If the final page in the score contains fewer systems than the default Systems per Page value (as set in the Layout Page dialog box), Overture increases the number of systems on that final page. If the final page in the score contains the same number of systems as specified in the Layout Page dialog box, Overture adds a new page containing a single system.

For example, assume your score has two pages with six systems on each page.

482

Part V: Menu Reference

Assume that you want to modify your score so that it contains three pages, with five systems on the first page; five systems on the second; and two systems on the third. To do so: 1. 2. Click in any measure on the first page to make the first page the active page. Choose Score>Decrease Systems.

Overture takes a system from the bottom of the first page and moves it to the top of the second page. It then shifts all the remaining systems down the page and takes the bottom system from the second page and moves it to the top of a third page. This is because Overture maintains the default number of staves for the second page. 3. Click in any measure on the second page to make Page 2 the active page.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

483

Score Menu

4.

Choose Score>Decrease Systems.

Overture takes yet another system from the bottom of the second page and moves it to the top of the third page and then shifts the other systems down the page.

484

Part V: Menu Reference

Hide/Show Staves
Choose this command to select which staves are visible in the current system. The current system is the system that contains the insertion point. When you choose Score>Hide/Show Staves, Overture opens the Hide/Show Staves dialog box.

You can move the Hide/Show Staves dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Hide/Show Staves Dialog Box

The Hide/Show Staves dialog box selects which tracks to display in the current system. Visible tracks are marked with a bullet; hidden tracks are not bulleted. Click the Show column next to the desired track to toggle between visible and hidden.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

485

Score Menu

Using the Hide/Show Staves Command

Its common to hide staves when a particular instrument doesnt play for an extended time. For example, you may have a vocal/piano score, but the singer doesnt perform for the first eight measures. Rather than show eight measures of rests, you can hide the singers staff for the first eight measures. To do so: 1. Set up your score so that it contains four measures in each of the first two systems. You can do this using the Measures>Increase Measures on System or Measures>Decrease Measures on System commands or by changing the Measures per System numerical in the Page Layout dialog box.

Since the top staff in each of these two systems contains no music, you may wish to hide the empty staves.

2. 3.

Click anywhere in the top system to make it the active system. Choose Score>Hide/Show Staves. Overture opens the Hide/Show Staves dialog box.

4.

Click the Show column next to the Vocal track to uncheck it.

486

Part V: Menu Reference

5.

At the bottom of the dialog box, type the number 2 in the Apply to x systems field. This means you hide this staff in both the active system and the system below it.

6.

Click the OK button. Overture hides the vocal staff from the first two systems.

Overture hides the vocal staves. You can manually adjust staff spacings to compensate for the extra space or increase the number of systems on the page.

You can tell Overture to perform part of this procedure automatically. Click the Auto Hide checkbox. Overture automatically hides systems starting at the cursor and continuing for as many systems as you specify in the Apply to x systems box. It does this even though you have the staves marked Show, for any tracks with no data in them.

Note:
Choosing Measures>Justify has no effect on hidden staves.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

487

Score Menu

Insert Track
Choose this command to insert a new track into the score. When you choose the Insert command, Overture opens the Insert Track dialog box.

Using the Insert Track Dialog Box

To insert one or more tracks measures into your score: 1. Click on the track where you want to insert the new track.

Click to make this the active track

2.

Choose Score>Insert Track. Overture opens the Insert Track dialog box.

488

Part V: Menu Reference

3.

Choose the type of track (instrument) you wish to insert. In this example we choose to insert a single track. If you choose Piano, Overture will insert a Grand Staff and if you choose Tablature, Oveture will insert a Tablature Track.

4.

Click either the Before current track or After current track radio buttons. If you select Before current track, Overture places the new track immediately before the active track (the track that contains the insertion point). If you select After current track, Overture places the new track number immediately after the active track.

5.

Click the OK button.

Delete Track
Choose this command to delete the current track beginning with the active track (the track that contains the insertion point).

Chapter 37: Score Menu

489

Score Menu

Setup Track
Choose this command to set various options for the staff that contains the active measure. When you choose Score>Setup Track, Overture produces the Setup Track dialog box.

Track Name Options

Instrument Options

Staff Display Options

Action Buttons

You can also open the Setup Track dialog box by double-clicking either the clef at the beginning of any staff system or the staff selector handle. You dont actually see the handle unless you select Options>Show>Handles. You can double-click in the location of the handle whether its visible or not.

Double-click to open the Setup Track dialog box.

You can move the Setup Track dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar. The Setup Track dialog box has four main editing areas. We discuss these in the following sections.

490

Part V: Menu Reference

Track Name Options

Use this portion of the dialog box to name tracks, assign a font to the track names, and select whether or not to display track names in the score.

There are numerous elements in the Track Name Options portion of the Setup Track dialog box. These are: Main field. Type the full name of the track in this field. If you check the Show Main option, this name appears next to the first staff. Using a comma (,) forces a carriage return in the track name this is particularly useful for long track names.

Chorus Analog Synth

If you select something from the Instrument Name pop-up menu (as discussed in Instrument Options on page 492), Overture automatically fills this field with the name of the selected Instrument. Typing a new name replaces the old one. Abbreviated field. Type the abbreviated name of the track in this field. If you check Show Abbreviation, this text appears next to all staves after the first. If you select something from the Instrument Name pop-up menu (as discussed in Instrument Options below), Overture automatically fills this field with the abbreviated name of the selected Instrument. Typing a new abbreviation replaces the old one. Show Main option. If you check this option, Overture shows the name of the selected track in the score. All displayed track names center around the widest name in a system. If you hold down the Alt[Option] key when you check Show Main, Overture automatically shows the names of all tracks in the score (not just the selected track). Similarly, if you hold down the Alt[Option] key when you uncheck Show Main, Overture automatically hides the names of all tracks.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

491

Score Menu

Show Abbreviation. If you check this option, Overture shows the abbreviation of the selected track in the score. Font button. Click this button to open the Font Select dialog box. Use the dialog box to select the font with which to display track names in the score. For more information, see Font Button on page 563.

Instrument Options
Use this portion of the dialog box to assign a particular type of notation to a track.

492

Part V: Menu Reference

Instrument Pop-up Menu

The appearance of the Instrument options section changes depending on the instrument you select from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. To select an Instrument Name: 1. Press and hold the mouse on the Instrument Name pop-up menu. Overture opens a menu of the instruments in the current Instruments library.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

493

Score Menu

2.

Move the cursor over the desired instrument and release the mouse button. Overture sets the track to the selected Instrument. When you select an instrument, Overture puts its pitch range, transposition, and clef into the appropriate Setup Track dialog box fields. You can still edit all the fields in the dialog box after selecting an instrument but this is usually not necessary. See Drum Map on page 426 for a full discussion of the Instruments Library. Normally, we recommend using the Tracks Window (see page 446) to assign instruments to tracks. The Instrument pop-up menu allows the entry of all instrument attributes into the track except the device and patch. This behavior lets imported tracks that already have the correct device and patch acquire the other instrument attributes without overwriting the device and patch.

The Instruments listed are of three types: Normal. These are instruments that Overture notates using standard music notation, for example, Cello, Guitar, Soprano, and Trumpet in Bb. For more information, see Normal Tracks below. Percussive. These are instruments that Overture notates using percussion notation, for example, non-pitched instruments like Bass Drum, Drums, and Percussion. For more information, see Percussive Tracks on page 497. Tablature. These are instruments that Overture notates using tablature notation. Select this type of instrument by selecting Tablature from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. For more information, see Tablature Tracks on page 499.

494

Part V: Menu Reference

Normal Tracks
If you select an Instrument of normal type, Overtures Instrument options look like these.

Instrument Name pop-up menu

GM Equivalent pop-up menu Range numericals Playback numerical Transpose numerical

Starting Clef pop-up menu

Transposed Clef pop-up menu

There are numerous elements in the Instrument Options section of the Track Setup Dialog Box. These are: Instrument Name pop-up menu. Use this pop-up menu to select an Instrument Name for the track from the Instruments library. When you select an Instrument Name from this pop-up menu, Overture automatically fills in the Range, Transpose, and Playback numericals, selects a Starting Clef and Transposed Clef, and supplies Main and Abbreviated track names to the Track Name options in the dialog box.

Range numericals. Use these numericals to set the range of the Instrument notated by the track. The left numerical sets the lowest note in the range. The right numerical sets the highest note in the range. You can search your score for notes that are out of an instruments specified range by choosing Options>Show>Range Errors (as discussed in Range Errors on page 617). Transpose numerical. If youre notating a transposed instrument (such as many trumpets, clarinets, english horns, and so on) and you want Overture to transpose an extracted part into the correct key, use this numerical to set the transposition amount. This numerical does affect MIDI playback pitchits used strictly to transpose a track when you extract it. To display the transposition in the current score, choose Options>Show>Tracks Transposed. For example, if the extracted track is to be played by a Bb trumpet, set the numerical to 2. Since a Bb trumpet sounds a major second lower than written, a value of +2 indicates that the extracted trumpet part needs to be transposed two half-steps higher than in the conductors score.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

495

Score Menu

GM Equivalent pop-up menu. The appropriate patch appears here when you select an instrument name. If you need to, change the patch here.

Overture sets this numerical automatically when you select an Instrument Name from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. For more information about extracting parts, see Extract Parts on page 453. For an example of how to set up and use a transposing track, see Transposing Instrument Track Example on page 503. Playback numerical. Use this numerical to set the playback offset for instruments that sound differently from how they are written. This does not affect the extracted part. For example, if youre notating a Guitar, set the Playback numerical to -12. Guitar parts are written an octave above where they actual sound.. Overture sets this numerical automatically when you select an Instrument Name from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. For more information about extracting parts, see Extract Parts on page 453. For an example of how to set up and use a transposing track, see Transposing Instrument Track Example on page 503. Starting Clef pop-up menu. Use this pop-up menu to select which clef Overture uses to notate the track in the current score. Overture sets this numerical automatically when you select an Instrument Name from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. Transposed Clef pop-up menu. Use this pop-up menu to select which clef Overture is to use to notate the track in a transposed extracted score. This pop-up menu has no effect on the current score, only on the score containing the extracted part. Overture sets this numerical automatically when you select an Instrument Name from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. For an example of how to set up and use a transposing track, see Transposing Instrument Track Example on page 503.

496

Part V: Menu Reference

Percussive Tracks
If you select one of the percussive Instrument types, Overtures Instrument options look like these.

You must understand Drum Maps in order to understand percussive tracks. Percussive tracks refer to the current Drum Map for pitch names, default noteheads and default staff positions. To learn about Drum Maps, see Allotment Table on page 410. The percussive track options are arranged in a grid. There are sixteen rows in the grid. Each row corresponds to a single percussion instrument (called a part). If you need to notate more than sixteen drum parts, youll need to use more than one percussive track. There are five columns in the grid.

You can also select a different pitch by dragging across it, then playing a note on your MIDI controller. Head pop-up menu. This column displays the notehead with which Overture notates the corresponding drum. When you select a different drum in the Pitch/Name column, Overture automatically changes the head to match the one assigned to that pitch in your current Drum Map. You can use this column to override your Drum Maps default head by pressing and holding the notehead icon and selecting a new head from the pop-up menu. When you override a Drum Maps

Chapter 37: Score Menu

497

Score Menu

Pitch/Name pop-up menu. Press and hold the Pitch/Name cell to open a pop-up menu. From the menu, select the Pitch (or pitch name) to be played by the corresponding part. The pop-up menu displays all the MIDI notes as defined by your current Drum Map. If you want the menu to display only those pitches to which youve assigned names, hold down the Alt[Option] key when you click the Pitch/Name cell. When you select a new Pitch/Name, Overture automatically changes the corresponding Head and Position to match those assigned to that pitch in your current Drum Map.

notehead assignment, you do not change the Drum Map, only the percussive track. This allows you to create numerous percussive tracks that reference the same Drum Map, but that use different noteheads. Position popup menu. This column displays the staff position on which Overture notates the corresponding drum. See About the Drum Map Dialog Box on page 426 to learn about position numbers. When you select a different drum in the Pitch/Name column, Overture automatically changes the position to match the one assigned to that pitch in your current Drum Map. You can use this column to override your Drum Maps default position by entering a different position. When you override a Drum Maps position assignment, you do not change the Drum Map; only the percussive track. This allows you to create numerous percussive tracks that reference the same Drum Map, but that use different positions. Voice popup menu. This column displays the default voice on which Overture notates the corresponding drum. For example, you may want to put the bass drum on a different voice from the snare. Once youve assigned parts in a percussive track, Overture uses your assignments to record, notate, and play drum parts. When you record into a percussive track, Overture automatically maps each parts MIDI note to the selected staff position and assigns the selected notehead. When you play a percussive track, Overture automatically maps the displayed notes to their correct MIDI pitch so that it plays the correct drum sounds. For an example of how to set up and use a percussive track, see Percussive Track Example on page 505.

498

Part V: Menu Reference

Tablature Tracks
If you select Tablature from the Instrument Name pop-up menu, Overture automatically creates a sixline staff with a TAB clef. Additional Tablature track options are the same as those of a normal track. See Normal Tracks on page 495.

Instrument Name pop-up menu

GM Equivalent pop-up menu Range numericals

Playback numerical Transpose numerical Starting Clef pop-up menu Transposed Clef pop-up menu

Use tablature notation to indicate guitar music by string and fret number, rather than with a traditional musical staff. For information about setting up and using a Tablature track, see Chapter 16, Tablature Button.

Note:

Chapter 37: Score Menu

499

Score Menu

MIDI playback does not play tablature tracks, nor do MIDI transpose commands change their pitch. If you want MIDI playback of a tablature track, you must create an additional staff that contains traditional notation. If desired, you can then hide the traditionally notated staff in your printed score by using the Score>Hide/Show Staves command as discussed in Hide/Show Staves on page 485.

Staff Display Options

Use this portion of the Setup Track dialog box to define the appearance of the staff used to notate the track.

Staff Design Area

The Staff Display options are: Scale numerical. Use this numerical to set the scale of the selected staff. Unlike the Scale tool, which scales a single staff in a single system, the Scale numerical scales every occurrence of this staff in every system. If you hold down the Alt[Option] key while setting this numerical, Overture sets the scaling of every staff in every system to the new value. Show Clef option. Select this option if you want Overture to display a clef on the staff. You normally leave this option checked unless youre notating some types of non-pitched instruments or a strum pattern on a lead sheet. Show Barlines option. Select this option if you want Overture to display barlines. You normally leave this option checked unless youre notating music with no set meter or a strum pattern on a lead sheet. Show Ledger Lines option. Select this option if you want Overture to display any needed ledger lines above or below the selected staff. Show Key Signature option. Select this option if you want Overture to display the key signature of the selected staff. You normally leave this option checked unless youre notating a non-pitched instrument, tablature notation, or a strum pattern on a lead sheet. Show Time Signature option. Select this option if you want Overture to display the time signature of the selected staff. You normally leave this option checked unless youre notating music with no set meter, or unless youre notating a tablature staff or a strum pattern on a lead sheet. Filled Rests option. Use this option in conjunction with the Options>Show>Filled Measure Rests command. Select this option if you want Overture to fill empty measures in the current track with whole measure rests. Deselect this option if you want Overture to leave empty measures in the current track.

500

Part V: Menu Reference

Flat Beams option. Select this option to display subsequent beams as flat rather than slanted. You may want to do this if slanted beams look jagged on your monitor. You can change the angle of a beam by dragging its ends. Selecting Flat Beams affects the beams entered subsequently and does not replace slanted beams previously entered in the track. In order to turn previously entered slanted beams in a track into flat beams:

1. 2.

Select the Flat Beams option in the Setup Track dialog box for the track whose beams youd like to flatten. Select the notes that youd like to convert to flat beams. Choose Edit>Select All to select all displayed notes in all tracks or double click to the left of a staff to select all notes in that track or double-click in a measure to select all notes in that measure or drag around the individual notes.

3.

Choose Notes>Beam>Based on Meter. The beaming rules specified in the Set Meter dialog box create groups with flat beams for all selected notes. These same rules create beams if you select Options>Auto Beam. Be careful, because this will override any manual beaming youve performed on selected notes.

Note:
Percussion tracks default to flat beams. For example, selecting drums from the Instrument pop-up menu in the Setup Track dialog box automatically uses the percussion clef and selects the Flat Beams option.

Staff Clefs option. Select this option to display clefs after the first clef in the track. You usually hide clefs when creating charts for a single instrument that doesnt require restatement of the clef. Be careful when hiding clefs because its easy to get confused when multiple staves are displayed. If you insert a clef after the beginning of the piece, Overture displays the first new clef but none thereafter.

Key Signatures option. Select this option if you want Overture to display the current key signature at the beginning of each staff. Staff Design area. Use this area to design a custom line arrangement for any staff. Traditional staves use five lines, but some instruments (particularly percussion) use staves with a different number of lines. Click the small squares to the right of the Staff Design area to show or hide any of up to sixteen staff lines. You can even create staves with no lines (these are particularly useful for

Chapter 37: Score Menu

501

Score Menu

indicating strum patterns in a lead sheet as shown in the following figure). The small arrow to the left of the Staff Design area indicates where the middle line is in a standard five line staff. The following example shows three staves. The top staff hides the meter, key signature, barlines, clef, and all linesits used for notating a strum pattern. The second staff contains standard music notation and shows the meter, key signature, barlines, clef, and 5 lines. The bottom staff is a tablature staff, so it has 6lines. As you can see, Overture covers a wide range of notation needs.

Action Buttons
Use this portion of the dialog box to step through staves in a system; cancel your changes; or apply your changes to the selected staff.

The action buttons are: Previous button. Click this button to apply the changes to the selected track, then step up to display the attributes of the track immediately above it. Next button. Click this button to apply the changes to the selected track, then step down to display the attributes of the track immediately below it. Cancel button. Click this button to close the Setup Track dialog box without applying any of the changes to the selected track. OK button. Click this button to apply the changes to the selected track and close the Setup Track dialog box.

Using the Setup Track Dialog Box

The following examples illustrate some common ways to use the Setup Track Dialog box.

502

Part V: Menu Reference

Transposing Instrument Track Example

Assume that youre writing an orchestral score. Most orchestras contain many transposing instruments (such as english horns, trumpets, clarinets, etc.) that play a different pitch from the written one. You want your master score to show the actual pitch of the instruments (since MIDI playback will be correct), and the individual instrumentalists parts to be written as played. For the sake of example, assume youre writing a score for piano and Bb trumpet.

Youve written both instruments to show their actual pitch, but you want some provision for Overture to transpose the Bb trumpet part automatically when you extract it. To do so: 1. Double-click the clef or selector handle of the staff you wish to use as the Bb trumpet track. Overture opens the Setup Track dialog box for that staff. Alternatively, click anywhere in the desired staff and choose Score>Setup Track.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

503

Score Menu

2.

Select Trumpet in Bb from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. Overture displays normal track options and automatically assigns default values based on your Instrument Name selection.

3.

Make sure the Transpose numerical is set to 2. This indicates that, if you extract this track, Overture will transpose it up two half-steps (since its a Bb trumpet).

4. 5.

Verify that the range and clef are correct. Click the OK button.

Overture changes neither the existing score nor its MIDI playback pitch. In fact, you wont see any change at all until you extract the trumpet part. To do so: 1. Choose File>Extract Parts. Overture opens the Extract Parts dialog box. 2. Click the Bb Trumpet tracks selector triangle.

504

Part V: Menu Reference

3.

Click the OK button. Overture saves the extracted part in a file named <Title> Parts (where <Title> is the name of the Overture file from which the parts are extracted) and places it in the same folder as the application.

4.

Open the extracted part.

The part is transposed such that, when the instrumentalist performs this written score, he or she actually plays the pitches shown in the figure on page 503.

Percussive Track Example

Assume, for example, that your drum module assigns C2 to a Bass drum and D2 to an Acoustic snare, and that you want to create a bass/snare track that notates the bass drum with a triangle head in the lowest space and the snare drum with an X head in the space above it.

Note:
General MIDI percussion tracks default to channel 10 for playback. If you change an existing track to a percussion track and plan on using General MIDI drums, you may need to set the tracks channel to 10 using the Tracks Window. To do this: 1. Double-click the clef or selector handle of the staff you wish to use as a percussive track. Overture opens the Setup Track dialog box for that staff. Alternatively, click anywhere in the desired staff and choose Score>Setup Track.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

505

Score Menu

2.

Select a percussive Instrument (such as Drums or Percussion) from the Instrument Names pop-up menu. Overture displays the percussive track options. Overture automatically assigns each drum part to the default pitches selected in your current Drum Map.

506

Part V: Menu Reference

Since Overtures default drum map assigns different names to the two parts, you need to change them now. 3. In the top row (Part 1), select a bass drum sound on pitch C2 from the Pitch/Name pop-up menu if it is not currently selected and in the second row (Part 2), select a snare drum on pitch D2 if it is not currently selected. NOTE: Your Drum Map may contain different drum names from the ones in this example. Overture automatically fills in the Head and Position fields with the selections from the current Drum Map.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

507

Score Menu

Notice that the noteheads and default positions are wrong for the bass drum and snare drum. You need to change these in the Setup Track dialog box. To do so: 4. In the top row, press and hold the mouse on the note head and select the triangle head from the Head pop-up menu and in the second row, press and hold the mouse on the X head and select the triangle head . This sets the kick and snare drums notehead to a triangle and X.

Triangle and X notehead selected

5.

In the first row, drag the Position indicator to the bottom space.

6.

In the second row, drag the Position indicator to the second space from the bottom. This sets the staff position of the snare to the second space from the bottom.

New Position assignment

7.

Click the OK button. Overture makes the selected staff a percussive track and changes its clef to a neutral clef.

508

Part V: Menu Reference

Now, if you record (or import) a percussive track containing MIDI notes C1 and D1, Overture automatically notates those pitches using the noteheads and positions selected in the percussive track options. Therefore, if you record this:

Overture notates this:

Modifying a Percussive Track

Assume youve created the following percussion track via MIDI entry and would like to add two more notes from the Notes palette.

To do so: 1. Select the Eighth Note tool from the Notes palette.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

509

Score Menu

2.

Move the cursor over the Score window and click the Hi Hat line to insert a new note. Click again to insert the second note. Overture assigns the new notes standard heads and standard MIDI note numbers (meaning they wont play using the expected MIDI sound).

New notes inserted via the Notes palette. The heads and pitches are standardthey do not conform to the Percussive Track map.

3.

In the Graphic window, drag the notes you just entered to the desired pitch.

New notes after dragging them to the correct MIDI playback pitches.

Overture automatically assigns the correct notehead to the new notes, and they play the correct sound on your drum module.

510

Part V: Menu Reference

GM Equivalent
When you select an instrument from the Instruments pop-up menu in the Setup Track dialog box, the GM # (if there is one) for that instrument appears in the GM Equivalent pop-up menu. You can override the GM # by selecting a new GM Equivalent patch but this is not recommended; its much easier to use the Instruments library (page 426) to define as many aspects of your instruments as possible.

Note:
GM stands for General MIDI. The GM # and GM Equivalent describe the same attribute. To save space, the Instruments library refers to GM #, while the Setup Track dialog box refers to GM Equivalent. Specifying a GM Equivalent patch for a track allows it to play correctly in a MIDI setup that doesnt include that tracks device. This commonly occurs when Overture files are exchanged between composers in different environments. For example, a track created on a Proteus/1 would automatically play correctly on a Kurzweil K2000 using a different Instruments library if the libraries from both environments correctly used GM Equivalent fields. The tracks GM Equivalent patch lets Overture search the Instruments library in the new environment for an instrument that uses the same GM #. If it finds a match, Overture uses the device and patch from that instrument if that device is known in the current setup. Its important to realize that the GM# links MIDI devices in different setups. It is not the actual patch used for the track. If Overture doesnt find a match, it uses the device you select in the pop-up menu of the General Preferences option Remap Unknown Devices To if you select that option. The patch for that track still needs to be specified so the new device can play the correct sound. If you dont select Remap Unknown Devices To, tracks using them will not play. Use the Tracks Window to specify devices and patches for these tracks.

Updating Old Files

Setting Attributes for all Tracks

Holding down the Alt[Option] key while setting any of the following attributes in the Name and Staff sections of the Setup Track dialog box assigns that attribute to all tracks: Show Name and Show Abbreviation options in the Name section all checkbox options in the Staff section dragging the % Scale numerical field in the Staff section. Since the character set changes when you hold down the Alt[Option] key, you cant type a new number in the field.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

511

Score Menu

The easiest way to update old Overture files is to define the Instruments library that best suits your needs and assign instruments to your tracks. See The Instruments Library and the Tracks Window on page 446 to learn how to do this. This makes the process of updating your files much easier. It also enables you to take advantage of the Instruments library for your future compositions.

Respace Staves
Choose Score>Respace Staves to respace all staves according to your choices in the Respace Staves dialog box and the preferences in the Preferences dialog box. For an example of how to use this command, see Respacing Staves on page 84. For more information about Engraver preferences, see Engraver Preferences on page 644.

Respace Staves Dialog Box

The Respace Staves dialog box works in conjunction with the Engraver Preferences to provide more flexibility in page layout.

The spaces between staves, spaces between systems, and spaces between groups fields are identical to the first three Engraver Preferences fields. These fields acquire their initial values from the Engraver Preferences when Overture is launched and when a new document is opened. Otherwise, they selectively override the Engraver Preferences. Avoid collisions. Selecting this option insures that notes on neighboring staves do not collide with each other. Overture does this by overriding the staff, system and group spacing when necessary. Fill to bottom of page. Selecting this option uses the available space on a partially full page to space the staves evenly. Overture does this by overriding the staff, system and group spacing. All remaining pages. Selecting this option applies the specifications set in the Respace Staves dialog box to the current page and all remaining pages. Deselecting this option applies the specifications to the current page.

512

Part V: Menu Reference

Recalc Layout
When you choose Score>Recalc Layout, Overture calculates a new width for each measure in the score based on the number of measures per system you specify in the Score>Layout Page dialog box. Recalculating a layout causes some measure widths to expand and others to contract. This has the effect of changing the number of measures in many of the systems and even changing the number of systems and pages in a score. This greatly improves legibility since it eliminates the collision of note heads, but it can play havoc with a carefully tweaked score. For this reason, you should recalculate a score before you fine tune it. To recalculate measure layout and note spacing in a score: 1. Look at the sample score shown below.
Beat Chart Beats

2.

Choose Score>Recalc Layout. Overture calculates new measure widths for all measures in the score based on the number of measures per system you specify in the Score>Layout Page dialog box.
Beat Chart Beats

Compare the measures shown in the two figures above. Notice the modified widths and subsequent increase in note spacing. Notice also that the proportional spacing of beats is the same for both figures. To protect a measure from the Save>Recalc Layout command, see Locked Measures on page 108. Overture can automatically space notes using either Options>Auto>Justify, Measures>Justify, or Score>Recalc Layout. All three of these commands affect note spacing differently. To learn the differences between them, see Automatic Justify on page 107.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

513

Score Menu

Redraw Page
This command would not be needed in a perfect world, but then this is software. Consequently, you may sometimes perform an edit in the Score window and be left with traces of some undesirable gobbledygook in the on-screen display of the score. This gobbledygook (not its technical name) results from Overtures failing to update a score element correctly. When you choose the Score>Redraw Page command, Overture quickly redraws the entire page, cleaning up any undesirable remnants of an edit operation.

Allotment
This command displays the Allotment table exactly as File>Edit Library>Allotment Table does. Choose this command either to edit the Allotment table for the current score or to create a new one. See Allotment Table on page 410.

Changing the Allotment Table Dialog Box

Assume, for this example, that you want to change an Allotment Table to minimize the spacing differences between eighth notes, sixteenth notes and thirty second notes. To do so, you need to change the Allotment Table so that eighth notes get less space and thirty second notes get more. To change the Allotment Table: 1. Choose File>Edit Library>Allotment Table. Overture opens the Allotment Table dialog box. This dialog box shows all the assignments for the current Allotment Table. If you want to edit a different Allotment Table, choose File>Load Library and select a different Allotment Table (see Instruments Library on page 439 for more information).

514

Part V: Menu Reference

2.

Use the numericals in the eighth note column to decrease the number of spaces allotted to all versions of eighth notes. In this example, decrease the normal eighth note spacing to 3.0; the dotted eighth note spacing to 3.4; and the triplet eighth note spacing to 2.8.

3.

Use the numericals in the thirty second note column to increase the number of spaces allotted to all versions of thirty second notes. In this example, decrease the normal thirty-second note spacing to 2.0; the dotted thirty-second note spacing to 2.5; and the triplet thirty-second note spacing to 2.2.

4.

Click the Save button. Overture saves the changed Allotment Table.

Youve now changed the Allotment Table to minimize the spacing differences between eighth, sixteenth, and thirty-second notes. When you justify a measure, Overture spaces notes using the Beat Chart derived from the new Allotment Table.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

515

Score Menu

Articulations
This command displays the Articulation Playback settings for the active score.

You can open the Articulation dialog box for individual articulations by double-clicking on them.

About the Articulation Dialog Box

Use the Articulation dialog box to define how articulations affect playback. When you choose this Dialog from the Score Menu, all settings are saved with the score. Any new articulations you enter will use these for its playback data.

Track Option
Use this popup menu to choose which tracks articulations you wish to edit.

Articulation Option
Use this section to choose which articulation you wish to edit. Normal - Use this to select the set of standard articulations Jazz - Use this to select the set of jazz articulations.

516

Part V: Menu Reference

Playback Options
Use the Playback Options portion to affect note data and playback timing.
Change start and stop times settings

Change velocity value settings Pause score settings (Fermatas) Tremolo repetitions

You can use the attack and duration settings to create rolled chords. Use the velocity settings to create dynamic changes. Use the pause setting for Fermats. Use the tremolo settings for creating measures and un-measured tremolos.

Send Options
Use the Send Options portion of the Articulation dialog box to send controller data, program changes, and key switches, to the output device, or even change to another voice within the track.

Switch to a another voice Send Key Switch Send Program Change Send Controller Data

You can tell Overture to use the playback charactersitics of another voice within the Tracks Window. This is useful for sample libraries that do not use keyswitches. You can send key switch data to MIDI or VST devices to switch instruments or modes. You can send key program changes to MIDI or VST devices to switch instruments or modes. You can send controller data to changes MIDI settings or access effects in MIDI or VST devices or VST instruments.

The possibilities are limitless with theses commands

Chapter 37: Score Menu

517

Score Menu

Engraver

This command displays the Engraver dialog box just as Options>Preferences>Engraver does. Choose this command to edit default layout spacing, element spacing, and line thickness in the score. See Engraver Preferences on page 644.

Note:
The settings in this dialog only affect the current score. The settings in the Options>Preferences>Engraver dialog are used for defaults in new scores.

518

Part V: Menu Reference

Font Map
Choose this command to map one music font to another. You can substitute individual symbols or the entire set of symbols in the font. The command displays the Music Font Map dialog box.

offsets adjustment box

mapping box

You can move the Music Font Map dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar. The following section describes the elements of the Music Font Map dialog box and how they work together. You can use the mapping feature two ways: To replace every symbol in one set with the corresponding symbol in another. To align substituted symbols properly with the rest of your work.

To replace chosen symbols in your score with symbols from another music font: 1. Choose Score>Font Map. Overture displays the Music Font Map dialog box.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

519

Score Menu

2.

In the original symbol set, double-click a symbol you want to replace. If you hold the Control[Command] key down when you double click, the font will default to Overture Aloisen Music Font. Overture displays the Font Symbol dialog box with the corresponding symbol highlighted.
Font Name pop-up menu Symbol set

3.

If you want the replacement symbol to be other than the highlighted one, select the one you want. It highlights.

4.

Click OK. Overture closes the Font Symbol dialog box and displays the replacement symbol in the box above the symbol to be replaced.

5.

Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as you need. You can use a variety of replacement fonts, if you want, and you are not limited to symbols whose numbers match exactly.

6.

When you are finished, click OK in the Music Font Map dialog box. Overture closes the box and displays your score with all substitutions as you specified them.

520

Part V: Menu Reference

Placing Mapped Font Symbols

The Music Font Map dialog box has a placement feature to help you get precise spacing for substituted symbols. To place a mapped font symbol precisely: 1. Choose Score>Font Map. Overture displays the Music Font Map dialog box. 2. In the new symbol set, click a symbol you want to place precisely. Overture highlights the symbol and puts an enlarged copy of it into the adjustment box. A gray copy of the replaced symbol lets you place the new symbol as you want it with respect to the old symbol. 3. Adjust placement either by pressing and dragging the symbol in the adjustment box or by changing the numbers in the Offset boxes. Changes you make in either place affect both, so you can use both methods freely until you have placed the symbol as you want.

Clearing Replacement Symbols

To cause your score to revert to its last saved symbol set: 1. Choose Score>Font Map. Overture displays the Music Font Map dialog box. 2. Click Clear All.

3.

Click OK. Your score reverts to its previous symbol set.

Saving Font Mappings

You save your font mappings as a library. To do so, in the Music Font Map dialog box, click Save. If you are saving this font mapping for the first time, Overture displays a normal Save As dialog box. Choose a name and click OK. Overture saves to the libraries folder unless you specify otherwise. Overture saves your font map automatically when you save your score. If you haven't saved it previously, Overture requests a name as above.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

521

Score Menu

The font mappings disappear. This command has no Undo, so use it with care.

Loading Font Maps

Once you have created and saved a font map, you can reload it from the libraries folder. To do so, in the Music Font Map dialog box, click Load. Overture displays a browser. Locate the font map you want. Click Open. Overture loads the font map library you specify.

Title Page
Choose this command to specify all the text for your score. You can put a title, instructions, composer, copyright notice, headers, and footers on your score. When you choose Score>Title Page, Overture displays the Title Page Text dialog box.

Other tabs (see subsequent sections) Title tab

Lines for title

Font choices for each line of the title

Text offsets

Check Box to display text on all pages

You can move the Title page Text dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

The Title Page Text Dialog Box

The Title Page Text dialog box has a tab for each of the kinds of text you can put on. Title. Use this tab to specify title text. Instructions. Use this tab to specify instructions. Composer. Use this tab to give the composers name. Copyright. Use this tab to copyright your work. Header. Use this tab if you want headers on your pages. Footer. Use this tab if you want footers on your pages.

All the tabs make use of the standard Font dialog box, where you can choose the font, style, and size for each line of each kind of text you put on your score.

522

Part V: Menu Reference

The Title Tab

The Title tab provides you with four lines for title text, which appears at the top center of the title page. You can specify font characteristics and a vertical and horizontal offset for the title.

The Instructions Tab

The Instructions tab also provides four lines where you can give whatever instructions you want (including tempo markings like vivace, for example. Instructions appear above and to the left of the first system, lined up with the left margin of the pages systems (ignoring the first system, which you may have placed differently). You can specify font characteristics and a vertical and horizontal offset for the instructions.

The Composer Tab

The Composer tab provides you with four lines for composer information, which appears at the top right of the title page, right justified to the right margin of the pages systems. You can specify font characteristics and a vertical and horizontal offset for the composer information.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

523

Score Menu

The Copyright Tab

The Copyright tab provides you with four lines for copyright information, which appears at the center bottom of the title page. You can specify font characteristics and a vertical and horizontal offset for the copyright information. To put in a copyright symbol : On the PC be sure the Num Lock key is on, then hold down Alt while typing 0169. On the Mac type option g. To put in a registered sign : On the PC be sure the Num Lock key is on, then hold down Alt while typing 0174. On the Mac type option r.

The Header and Footer Tabs

These tabs supply a line for each header or footer. Click the radio button for Header 1/2 or Footer 1/2 to put in and display the information for that header or footer. Header 1 appears above the title, at the left margin. Header 2 appears above the title, at the right margin. Footers appear below the music at the left and right margin. You can line each one up left, center, or right. Further, you can specify that they reverse positions. You might want that feature if your score is going to

524

Part V: Menu Reference

be bound so that two pages appear side by side, as they do in a book. This lets you display headers and footers symmetrically. Use the Starting Page field to specify that headers or footers start, not on the first page, but on some other page, usually the second. This is conventional in books, for example. Use the Page Offset field, then, to specify how many pages to add or subtract to make pagination as you want it. You can specify font characteristics for each header and footer. Use the codes as header or footer text to specify automatic page headers or footers. Overture supplies the correct text in the header or footer you specify.

Time Code

Where to display time code on score Choose the font to display time code Display using this format

Offset start time by this amount

This command displays the Time Code dialog box. Choose this command to show the SMPTE Time Code for each measure on the display.

Chapter 37: Score Menu

525

Score Menu

526

Part V: Menu Reference

38

Measures Menu

Use the Measures menu commands to perform measure-related tasks like inserting and deleting measures; wrapping measures; setting key, meter and tempo; and justifying symbols in a measure. Most of these commands are not available until you actually activate a measure. To activate a measure, click any blank area in the measure. The following sections discuss each Measures menu command in detail.

Measures Menu

Insert
Choose this command to insert one or more blank measures into the score. When you choose the Insert command, Overture opens the Insert Measure dialog box.

You can move the Insert Measure dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

Using the Insert Measure Dialog Box

To insert one or more blank measures into your score: 1. Decide where you want to insert the blank measures, then click in the measure that either immediately precedes or follows that location.

Click to make this the active measure

2.

Choose Measures>Insert. Overture opens the Insert Measure dialog box.

3.

Use the numerical to enter the number of blank measures you wish to insert. In this example we choose to insert one measure.

4.

Click either the Before current measure or After current measure radio buttons. If you select Before current measure, Overture places the requested number of blank measures immediately before the active measure (the measure that contains the insertion point). If you select After current measure, Overture places the requested number of blank measures immediately after the active measure.

528

Part V: Menu Reference

5.

Click the OK button. Overture inserts the requested number of blank measures in the requested position. The inserted measures retain the tempo, meter, and key signature of the measure immediately preceding them.

In this example, we insert the measure before the activated measure. It retains the characteristics of the preceding measure.

Delete
Choose this command to delete one or more contiguous measures beginning with the active measure. The active measure is the measure that contains the insertion point. When you choose the Delete command, Overture opens the Delete Measure dialog box.

You can move the Delete Measure dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

Using the Delete Measure Dialog Box

To delete one or more contiguous measures from your score: 1. Click in the first measure you wish to delete.

Click to make this the active measure

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

529

Measures Menu

2.

Choose Measures>Delete. Overture opens the Insert Measure dialog box.

3.

Use the numerical to enter the number of measures you wish to delete. In this example, we choose to delete one measure.

4.

Click the OK button. Overture deletes the requested number of measures beginning with the active measure.

Increase Measures on System

Choose this command to increase the number of measures on the active system. The active system is the system that contains the insertion point. Choosing Measures>Increase Measures on System moves a measure from the left of the following system to the right of the active system, thereby increasing the number of measures in the active system. Overture does not change the default number of measures for any remaining systems, so measures continue to wrap throughout the score (that is, the left measure in each system moves to the right of the preceding system).

If the final system in the score contains more than one measure, Overture simply decreases the number of measures in that final system. If the final system in the score contains only one measure, Overture moves it to the right of the previous system and deletes the final system from your score. Overture wraps all slurs, ties, beams, etc. as required.

530

Part V: Menu Reference

For example, assume that your score contains nine measures arranged into three systems as shown in the following figure, and that you want to change it so that the top system contains four measures.

1.

Using the Arrow Cursor, click any blank spot in the top system to make it the active system.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

531

Measures Menu

2.

Choose Measures>Increase Measures on System. All measures after the active system wrap to the left. Compare the figure below with the one above.

Decrease Measures on System

Choose this command to decrease the number of measures on the active system. The active system is the one that contains the insertion point. Choosing Measures>Decrease Measures on System moves a measure from the right of the active system to the left of the following system, thereby decreasing the number of measures in the active system. Overture does not change the default number of measures for any remaining systems, so measures continue to wrap throughout the score (that is, the right measure in each system moves to the left of the following system).

If the final system in the score contains fewer measures than the default Measures per System value (as set in the Layout Page dialog box), Overture simply increases the number of measures in that final system. If the final system in the score contains the same number of measures as are specified in the Layout Page dialog box, Overture adds a new system containing a single measure.

532

Part V: Menu Reference

Overture wraps all slurs, ties, beams, etc. as required. For example, assume that your score contains eight measures arranged into three systems, and that you want to change it so that the top system contains only two measures.

1.

Using the Arrow Cursor, click any blank spot in the top system to make it the active system.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

533

Measures Menu

2.

Choose Measures>Decrease Measures on System. All measures after the active measure wrap to the right. Compare the figure below with the one above.

Split System
Choose this command to break a system at the current measure.

Before Split System Command

After Split System Command

534

Part V: Menu Reference

Set Key Signature

Choose this command to specify a key signature for the active measure (and all measures up to the next key change). The active measure is the one that contains the insertion point. When you choose Measures>Set Key Signature, Overture opens the Set Key Signature dialog box.

Region Area

All Staves Option Key Setting

Transpose Options Previous Key Cancellation Selection Area System Break Warning Option

You can move the Set Key Signature dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Set Key Signature Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Set Key Signature dialog box. We describe these in the following sections.

Region Options
Use the Region Options portion of the Set Key Signature dialog box to define the measure range covered by the new key signature. Press the End of Score button to set the through field to the last measure.
Starting Measure Ending measure End of Score button

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

535

Measures Menu

Key Settings
Use this scroll bar to set the measures key signature. Scroll up to add more sharps to the key; scroll down to add more flats to the key. You can also use the scroll up and down arrows to change the key signature in the Set Key Signature dialog box: The up arrow moves towards fewer flats and more sharps. The down arrow moves towards fewer sharps and more flats.

All Staves Option

Check this option to apply the key change to all staves in the system. If you dont check this option, Overture applies the key change to only the selected staffother staves remain in their original keys.

Transpose Options
Check the Transpose option if you want Overture to transpose any music affected by the new key signature automatically.

Original measure

Same measure after inserting a key change and transposing up the existing music

536

Part V: Menu Reference

If you dont check the Transpose option, Overture keeps the pitch of the music the same and re-spells the notes as required by the new key signature.

Original measure

Same measure after inserting a key change without transposing the existing music

If you check the Transpose option, use the Up and Down radio buttons to tell Overture whether to transpose notes up or down in pitch. If you transpose a staff that contains chord names, Overture automatically transposes them, as well.

Previous Key Cancellation Selection

Use this set of radio buttons to tell Overture how you want it to display key cancellations. If you click the None button, Overture changes keys without showing any cancellations from the previous key.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

537

Measures Menu

If you click the All button, Overture changes keys and shows all cancellations from the previous key.

If you click the Only Changed button, Overture changes keys and shows only those cancellations that are different from the previous key.

538

Part V: Menu Reference

If you select either the All or Only Changed options, you can decide whether or not you want the cancellation placed before or after the barline.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

539

Measures Menu

System Break Warning Option

Check this option if you want Overture to provide a courtesy key change warning automatically at the end of the previous system if the key change occurs at a system break.

Just Courtesy at End of Bar

Check this option if you want Overture to provide a courtesy key signature at the end of the bar. This does not affect any note transposition.

Color
Click on the color box to choose the color for this key signature.

Using the Set Key Signature Command

To insert a key signature into an Overture score: 1. 2. Using the Arrow Cursor, click in a measure to make it the active measure. Choose Measures>Set Key Signature. Overture opens the Set Key Signature dialog box. 3. Define the desired key signature, then click the OK button. Overture applies the key signature to the active measure and all remaining measures up to the next key signature change.

540

Part V: Menu Reference

Set Time Signature

Choose this command to specify a meter for the active measure and all measures up to the next meter change. The active measure is the one that contains the insertion point. When you choose Measures>Set Time Signature, Overture opens the Set Time Signature dialog box.

Main Meter Options

Quick Meter Select Buttons

Composite Meter Options

Beam Pattern Options

Alternate Font and Hollywood Lines

You can move the Set Time Signature dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Set Time Signature Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Set Time Signature dialog box. These are described in the following sections:

Region Options
Use the Region Options portion of the Set Time Signature dialog box to define the measure range covered by the new time signature. Press the End of Score button to set the through field to the last measure.
Starting Measure Ending measure End of Score button

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

541

Measures Menu

Quick Meter Select Buttons

Click one of these buttons to set the measure quickly to one of these common meters.

When you click a Meter Select button, Overture automatically selects a default number of pulses and a beaming pattern.

Main Meter Options

Use the Main Meter options to: set a time signature for the measure determine how Overture displays the time signature select the number of pulses in the measure.

Numerator numerical Pulses numerical

Show option Parentheses option Denominator numerical

Check the Show option if you want Overture to show the inserted time signature. Generally, you want Overture to show the time signature unless youve created a composite meter and are showing it instead of the main meter. Check the Parentheses option if you want Overture to place the time signature in parentheses. Use the time signatures Numerator numerical to set the number of beats per measure. Use the time signatures Denominator numerical to set the note value that receives one beat. Use the Pulses numerical to set the number of pulses in a meter. The pulses numerical determines how many pulses (beats) Overtures beat chart displays (see Using Beat Charts on page 104). It also affects the number of clicks the metronome plays and the beaming pattern used by the measure.

542

Part V: Menu Reference

Pulses are different from beats because pulses dictate the feel of a measure. For example, you can play a 6/8 measure as though it were three groups of eighth note pairs. The three groups make the measure feel as if it has three pulses.

Beat Chart Pulses

You can play that same 6/8 measure as though it were two groups of three eighth notes. The two groups make the measure feel as if it has two pulses.

Beat Chart Pulses

Obviously, pulses are closely related to the measures beaming pattern (as discussed in Beam Pattern Options on page 544).

Composite Meter Options

Use composite meters to subdivide the measures main meter into separate, smaller metrical groups.

Show option Parentheses option Composite Numerator numericals Composite Denominator numericals

Check the Parentheses option if you want Overture to place the composite time signature in parentheses. Use parentheses if youre also going to show the main time signature.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

543

Measures Menu

Check the Show option if you want Overture to show the specified composite time signature. Often, youll want to hide the main time signature when showing a composite time signature. Do this by unchecking the Main Meter Show option.

Overture lets you create composite meters of up to three groups. Use the Composite Numerator and Composite Denominator numericals to define each of the composite groupings. For example, if you create a 4/4 score, but want each measure performed in an unorthodox manner (such as 3/8 + 2/8 + 3/8), you can create a composite meter.

You need a special beaming pattern to convey the rhythmic feel of the composite meter. We discuss beaming patterns in the following section.

Beam Pattern Options

Beams create a visual representation of a measures meter and its internal rhythmic divisions. Use the Set Time Signature dialog boxs Beam Pattern options to define how you want Overture to beam notes.

Primary Beam Group numericals

Secondaries option

Use the four Primary beam group numericals to set the pattern in which notes are beamed. For example, in a 4/4 measure, a pattern of 4+4 automatically beams together the first four eighth notes, then the last four eighth notes.

544

Part V: Menu Reference

As another example, in a 4/4 measure, a pattern of 3+2+3 automatically beams together the first three eighth notes, then the middle two, then the last three eighth notes.

You dont have to enter every element of a steady beaming pattern. For example, to enter a beaming pattern of 2+2+2+2, you only have to enter the first 2.

Secondary beams are the additional beams used to indicate 16th notes, 32nd notes, and so on.

Secondary Beam

Primary Beam

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

545

Measures Menu

Check the Secondaries option if you want secondary beams to break at a specified number of notes, thus giving a more accurate picture of the internal rhythm of a measure.

Below, the measure on the left shows a string of sixteenth notes with unbroken secondary beams. The measure on the right shows the same string of sixteenth notes with the Secondaries option checked and set for 2the sixteenth note beams break into two-note groups.

No break in secondaries

Break in secondaries

The Show Before System Break Option

Check this option if you want Overture to provide a courtesy meter change warning automatically at the end of the previous system if the meter change occurs at a system break. The figure below illustrates the difference between enabling and disabling this option. When the option is disabled (top example), the top system gives no warning of the impending change in meter. In the bottom example, it does.

546

Part V: Menu Reference

The Is Pickup Option

Check this option if you want Overture to recognize the active measure as a pickup measure.

Important:
Unlike other elements in the Set Time Signature dialog box, the Is Pickup option applies only to the active measure. This way you can define one measure as a pickup measure without defining the following measure as standard. When you define a measure as a pickup measure, the following things occur: Overture right-justifies the notes in the measure. When Overture plays a pickup measure, it plays the measure exactly as written. For example, if you created a pickup measure in 4/4 time that had only two quarter notes, Overture would play the two quarter notes, then play the next measure immediately without waiting two additional beats.

The score above does not contain a pickup measure. It plays back as shown below.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

547

Measures Menu

The score shown above contains a pickup measure. It plays back as shown below.

Overture ignores pickup measures when numbering measures in a score. To learn about measure numbers, see Set Measure Numbers on page 559. Overture ignores pickup measures when searching for incorrect rhythms. To learn how to search an Overture score for incorrect rhythms, see Incorrect Rhythms on page 617.

Note:
Rebarring scores destroys pickup measures. To learn about rebarring a score, see Rebar on page 564.

The Alternate Font Option and Button

Check this option to enable the display of the score's meters in a different font, size, or style. Use the Alternate Font button to to open a Font dialog box where the changes can be made. To change the default Alternate Meter Font for new scores, use the Meters font button in the Fonts tab of the Preferences dialog. See Fonts Preferences on page 647.

The Draw Hollywood Lines Option and Settings Button

Check this option to enable the display of vertical lines that replace multiple meters in the conductor's score. This is often seen in film scoring. The example below demonstrates Hollywood lines along with larger meter display from the Alternate Font option.

The Settings button opens the Hollywood Lines dialog box which provides options for choosing which staves the lines should pass through, line thickness, location of endpoints, and vertical placement of upper and lower meter characters.

548

Part V: Menu Reference

The line thickness can be change directly on the score by shift-dragging the bottom of the line horizontally. The lines X and Y offset can be changed by dragging the lines bottom endpoint. Each characters offset can be changed by dragging the character vertically. If you hold down the Ctrl[Command] key while dragging on the score, the changes will be applied to all meters in the score.

Using the Set Time Signature Command

To insert a meter change into an Overture score: 1. 2. Using the Arrow Cursor, click within a measure to make it the active measure. Choose Measures>Set Time Signature. Overture opens the Set Time Signature dialog box.

Overture applies the new meter to the active measure and all remaining measures up to the next meter change.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

549

Measures Menu

3.

Use the dialog box (discussed earlier) to define the meter and its beaming options, then click the OK button.

Set Tempo
Choose this command to specify a tempo for the active measure and all measures up to the next tempo change. The active measure is the one that contains the insertion point. When you choose Measures>Set Tempo, Overture opens the Set Tempo dialog box.

Region Options

Playback Options Show Options

Text Font Button Metronome Font Button

You can also open the Set Tempo dialog box by double-clicking on a tempo marking. You can move the Set Tempo dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Set Tempo Dialog Box

Use the Set Tempo dialog box to define the number of beats per minute for your new tempo. the note value of the beat.

You can also use the dialog box to apply the tempo to MIDI playback and to show the tempo in your score, either as a metronome value or as a text description. There are numerous elements in the Set Tempo dialog box. These are described in the following sections.

550

Part V: Menu Reference

Region Options
Use the Region Options portion of the Set Tempo dialog box to define the measure range covered by the tempo. Press the End of Score button to set the through field to the last measure.
Starting Measure Ending measure End of Score button

Playback Options
Use the Playback Options portion of the Set Tempo dialog box to define a tempo.
Beat Value Select Buttons Beats Per Minute Numerical

Use the Beats Per Minute numerical to enter the number of beats you want in a minute. Click one of the Beat Value Select buttons to define the value of a beat. For example, 100 quarter-note beats per minute is twice the tempo of 100 eighth-note beats per minute.

Show Options
Use the Show Options portion of the Set Tempo dialog box to determine if you want Overture to display the tempo and, if so, how you want it displayed.

Show Option Show Text Option Show Metronome Option Number Style Option Note Duration Option Tempo Text Field Parentheses Option

Check the Show Metronome option if you want to display the tempo in your score. Check the desired option for displaying the number as a decimal or whole number. Check the Parentheses option if you checked Metronome and you want to display the metronome marking in parentheses.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

551

Measures Menu

Check the numerical radio button if you checked Metronome and you want to display the tempo as an actual number of beats per minute. Check the note options radio button if you checked Metronome and you want to change the time signature but keep the pulse constant and represent it by a different note duration. For example, if the meter changes from 2/4 to 6/8, you can represent the change as quarter note=dotted quarter.

Check the Show Text option if you checked Show and you want Overture to display the tempo as userspecified text. If you selected the Show Text option, use the Tempo Text Field to enter the text you want displayed in your score.

552

Part V: Menu Reference

The following figure illustrates some differences between the Show Metronome and Show Text options.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

553

Measures Menu

You can show metronome and text values simultaneously. This is particularly convenient if you want to show tempo markings made up of both text and metronome values. For example, assume you configure the Set Tempo dialog box like this.

You can drag either type of tempo marking independently of the other. In the figure below, the metronome marking was dragged to the right to make space for it in the Text area.

Drag Metronome marking into space left in Text marking

Font Buttons
There are two font buttons: Text Font button: Use this button to open a dialog box in which you select the font that Overture uses to display the desired Tempo Text in the score. Metronome Font button: Use this button to open a dialog box in which you select the font that Overture uses to display metronome (beats per minute) markings in the score.

For a detailed discussion of the Select Font dialog box, see Font Button on page 563.

554

Part V: Menu Reference

Using the Set Tempo Command

To set a tempo change into an Overture score: 1. 2. Using the Arrow Cursor, click within a measure to make it the active measure. Choose Measures>Set Tempo. Overture opens the Set Tempo dialog box. 3. Enter a tempo and select viewing options, then click the OK button. Overture applies the tempo to the active measure and all remaining measures up to the next tempo change.

Editing Tempo
To reposition any tempo mark in the Score window: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the tempo mark you wish to move. The cursor changes to a Drag Cursor. 2. Drag the tempo mark to the desired position. Moving tempo marks affects where the tempo change begins.

To copy a tempo mark in the Score window: 1. Move the Arrow Cursor over the tempo mark you wish to move. The cursor changes to a Drag Cursor. 2. Control[Option]-drag to move a copy of the tempo mark to a new place. Shift-Control[Option]-drag to copy a tempo mark and constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged.

To open the Set Tempo dialog box and change an existing tempo: 1. Click in the desired measure and choose Measures>Set Tempo. Alternatively, if the tempo appears in the score, you can double-click the tempo mark to open the Set Tempo dialog box.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

555

Measures Menu

Set Codas, Segnos, etc.

Choose this command to attach repeat and jumper text to a measure. When you choose Measures>Set Codas, Segnos, etc., Overture opens the Set Codas, Segnos, etc. dialog box.

Repeat Text Repeat Type

You can move the Set Codas, Segnos, etc. dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Set Codas, Segnos, etc. Dialog Box

There are two areas in the Set Codas, Segnos, etc. dialog box: Repeat Type. Use this area to select among the most commonly used repeats. Repeat Text. Use this area to modify the text used by one of the selected Repeat Types.

We describe each of these areas in the following sections.

Repeat Type
Overture offers eight default repeat notation options.

When you select one of these options, Overture enters default text into the Text area (described in Text Editing on page 558). The following list describes each Type option:

556

Part V: Menu Reference

. Use this notation in conjunction with either the D.S. al Coda or D.S. al Fine options. Overture places this symbol at the beginning of the active measure. When the performer sees a D.S. symbol in a score, he or she knows to jump to the measure containing this symbol. This symbol is called a Segno becaused it is used with the Dal Segno (abbreviated D.S.) To Coda . Use this notation in conjunction with either the D.S. al Coda or D.C. al Coda option. Overture places this symbol at the end of the active measure. When the performer sees this symbol, he or she knows to jump immediately to the Coda section. Coda. Use this notation in conjunction with the To Coda symbol. Overture places the Coda symbol at the beginning of the active measure. When the performer sees a To Coda symbol in the score, he or she knows to jump to the beginning of the measure containing the Coda symbol. Fine. Use this notation in conjunction with either the D.C. al Fine or D.S. al Fine options. Overture places the Fine symbol at the end of the active measure. The Fine indicates that this measure is the final measure in the score. D.C. al Coda. Use this notation to indicate that, when the performer finishes the measure, he or she should jump back to the top of the piece and play to the To Coda sign; at which point, he or she needs to jump to the Coda section (indicated by the Coda notation).

D.C. al Fine. Use this notation to indicate that, when the performer finishes the measure, he or she is to jump back to the top of the piece and play to the Fine sign.

D.S. al Coda. Use this notation to indicate that, when the performer finishes the measure, he or she should jump back to the measure containing the segno, then play through to the To Coda sign; at which point he or she should jump to the Coda section (indicated by the Coda notation).

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

557

Measures Menu

D.S. al Fine. Use this notation to indicate that, when the performer finishes the measure, he or she should jump back to the top of the measure containing the segno, then play to the Fine sign.

MIDI Note:
If the Options>Play Style>Repeats option is checked, Overture recognizes and plays all default repeat markings discussed above. You must enter all the necessary repeat markings in all the required measures, just as you would for live performers.

Text Editing
When you select one of the eight default Type notations, Overture automatically fills the Text area with default text. This is the text that appears above the top staff of the active measure when you click the dialog boxs OK button.

Overture attaches any text from this area to the active measure. Additionally, Overture allows you to enter either a Segno symbol or a Coda symbol by typing #1 or #2, respectively. For example:

Text box says D.S. #1 al Coda #2

Text box says D.S. al Coda

Click the Font button to open the Font dialog box. Use the Font dialog box to select the font used to display repeat text. For more information about the Font dialog box, see Font Buttons on page 554.

558

Part V: Menu Reference

Set Measure Numbers

Choose this command to specify a measure numbering and display format beginning with the active measure in the current staff and continuing to the next numbering change. The active measure is the one that contains the insertion point. When you choose the Set Measure Numbers command, Overture produces the Set Measure Numbers dialog box.

Starting Measure Numerical Color Button Interval Options Font Button

Text Options

Position Setting Character Options

You can move the Set Measure Numbers dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

559

Measures Menu

About the Set Measure Numbers Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Set Measure Numbers dialog box. We describe these in the following sections.

Starting Measure Numerical

Use the Starting Measure numerical to enter the measure number of the active measure. This is useful if, for example, the current Overture score is a continuation of a different score and does not start with measure 1.

Note:
Overture doesnt include pickup measures in the measure numbering sequence. For more information about pickup measures, see The Is Pickup Option on page 547.

Position Setting
Use the Position Setting to position measure numbers. Overture places all measure numbers in the same relative position in the score (later, you can drag individual measure numbers to change their positions). Use the two gray lines for reference. Drag the small number 1 to show Overture where you want it to place all measure numbers.

Drag to show Overture where to position all measure numbers

560

Part V: Menu Reference

Overture allows enclosures around measure numbers. Select the Enclosure option in the Set Measure Number dialog box to enable the enclosure option.

Enclosure option encloses measure numbers

Interval Options
Use this set of radio buttons to tell Overture how frequently you want measure numbers to appear throughout your score.

If you click the Page button, Overture places measure numbers over the first measure at the top of the first system on each page. If you click the System button, Overture places measure numbers over the first measure at the top of each system.

If you click the None button, Overture puts no measure numbers into a score. Select this option to stop displaying measure numbers (or to hide them for a while).

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

561

Measures Menu

If you click the n Measures button, Overture places measure numbers at the interval you specify. Use the corresponding numerical to specify the desired interval between measure numbers.

Text Options
Use the Text Options portion of the Set Measure Numbers dialog box to place measure numbers and to enter an optional prefix.

Use the Prefix numerical to enter up to two characters to use as a prefix for the active measure. Select one of the Justify options to tell Overture whether you want to place measure numbers to the Left, Center or Right of the Position Setting.

If this is the Position setting... ...these are its three placement options.

Center

Left

Right

Character Options
Use this portion of the Set Measure Numbers dialog box if you want Overture to number measures with letters rather than numbers.

Check the Starts with option if you want Overture to indicate measures with letters rather than numbers. Use the text entry field to type the letter you want applied to the active measure. If you click the AA, BB, CC button, Overture follows measure Z with measure AA, then measure BB, etc.

562

Part V: Menu Reference

If you click the AA, AB, AC button, Overture follows measure Z with measure AA, then measure AB, etc.

Font Button
Click this button to open the Font dialog box. Use the dialog box to select the font that Overture uses to display measure numbers.

Font List

Font Size Field

Font Size List

Font Style List Font Preview Area

There are numerous elements in the Font dialog box: Font List. Click here to select a font from the list. Font Style List. Click here to select the font style from the list. Font Size List. Click here to select a font size from the list. Font Size Field. Use this numerical to enter a font size not included in the Font Size Pop-Up Menu. Font Preview Area.View your font selections in this area.

Using the Set Measure Numbers Command

1. 2.

Using the Arrow Cursor, click a measure to make it the active measure. Choose Measures>Set Measure Numbers. Overture opens the Set Measure Numbers dialog box.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

563

Measures Menu

To create a measure numbering format:

3.

Specify a measure numbering format, then click the OK button. Overture numbers measures as requested, beginning with the active measure and continuing until it sees a measure requesting a different numbering format.

Rebar
Choose this command to rebar the score beginning with the active measure and continuing to the end of the score. Use the Rebar command to assure that your score contains the correct number of beats in every measure. This command is particularly useful if: you inserted or deleted a note or rest changed meters after entering notes

When you choose the Rebar command, Overture analyzes the active measure and, if necessary, moves the barline so that the measure contains the correct number of beats as defined by its meter. It then analyzes each of the following measures until the end of the score. Any leftover beats are, therefore, confined to the final measure in the score. If, for example, the first measure has too few notes or rests, Overture moves the necessary number of beats from the beginning of the second measure to the end of the first measure. On the other hand, if the first measure has too many notes or rests, Overture moves the necessary number of beats from the end of the first measure to the beginning of the second measure. Overture always divides any notes or rests as required. For instance, if a measure is short an eighth note, and the first note in the next measure is a quarter note, Overture splits the quarter note into two tied eighth notes; the first eighth note appears at the end of the first measure, and the second eighth note appears at the beginning of the second measure.

Note:
The Rebar command does not affect MIDI playback, but the Graphic window updates to show the new position of bar lines.

564

Part V: Menu Reference

Multi Measure Rest

Choose this command to group a specified number of empty measures into a single measure with multimeasure rest notation. When you choose the Multi Measure Rest command, Overture opens the Set Multi-Measure Rest dialog box.

You can move the Set Multi-Measure Rest dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar. There are numerous elements in the Set Multi-Measure Rest dialog box: Number. Select where you want the number to be displayed. Style. Select the style of the multi-measure rest. End Cap. Select the type of end cap for the solid line. Combine Numerical. Use this numerical to enter the number of measures you wish to group into a multi measure rest. Fill Numerical. Use this numerical to enter the percentage of the measures width you wish the solid line to fill. Font Button. Click this button to open the Font dialog box. Use the dialog box to select the font that Overture uses to display multi-measure rest numbers.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

565

Measures Menu

Using the Multi-Measure Rest Command

To create a multi-measure rest: 1. Using the Arrow Cursor, click the first measure you wish to group into a multi measure rest.

Click to activate measure

2.

Choose Measures>Multi Measure Rest. Overture open the Set Multi-measure Rest dialog box.

3.

In the dialog box, enter the number of measures you want to group into a multimeasure rest (including the active measure). In the example below, you want the multi-measure rest to be four bars long (the current measure plus the three measures following it).

4.

Click the OK button. Overture creates a multi-measure rest of the specified length.

To expand a multi-measure rest: 1. Click the multi-measure rest you wish to expand.

566

Part V: Menu Reference

2.

Choose Measures>Multi Measure Rest. Overture open the Set Multi-measure Rest dialog box.

3.

In the dialog box, enter the number 1 then click the OK button. Overture expands the multi-measure rest to show all measures in the score.

To display the range of measures in a multi-measure rest, check Show Range. To display the number of measures in a multi-measure rest below rather than above the staff, check Below Staff. To switch from a normal to a jazz style of rest, click the Jazz radio button. To change the style of end caps on the rest, click the radio button for Thin, Thick, or None. To adjust the length of the rest, drag an end cap horizontally.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

567

Measures Menu

Fill in Rests
When you choose this command, Overture fills in any missing beats in the active measure with rests. The active measure is the one that contains the insertion point. For example, assume you had the music example shown in the following figure, and that you wanted to fill in the rest of the measure with rests.

To do so: 1. 2. Click in the measure to make it the active measure. Choose Measures>Fill in Rests. Overture fills in the measure with the necessary rests.

This is also a quick way to insert rests into any blank measures.

Justify
When you choose this command, Overture calculates a new Beat Chart based on the note values contained in the measure(s) and on the spacings assigned to them by the current Allotment Table. Justifying a measure causes the notes within it to change their relative spacings by calculating a new Beat Chart (based on the current Allotment Table). This greatly improves legibility, though some collision of note heads may still occur depending on the settings in the Allotment Table.

568

Part V: Menu Reference

To justify notes in a measure: 1. Find the measure(s) you wish to justify. The example below contains auto-positioned notes (that is, they align with the existing Beat Charts) that have not yet been justified.
Beat Chart Beats

2.

Activate the measure you wish to justify by clicking a blank space within it. If you wish to justify many measures simultaneously, simply Ctrl[Command] double click in each measure you wish to select or shift double click to select a range of measures all selected measures are affected by the Justify command.

3.

Choose Measure>Justify. Overture calculates new Beat Charts based on the note values and the spacing assigned to them by the current Allotment Table.

Beat Chart Beats

Compare the two Beat Charts above. Notice the modified spacing of the beats and the consequent change in note spacing. To protect a measure from the Measures>Justify command, see Locked Measures on page 108. If you need to brush up on your knowledge of Beat Charts, see Using Beat Charts on page 104. For a detailed discussion about Allotment Tables, see Allotment Table on page 410.

Important:
Overture can automatically space notes using either Options>Auto>Justify, Measures>Justify, or Score>Recalc Layout. All three of these commands affect note spacing differently. To learn the differences between them, see Automatic Justify on page 107.

Chapter 38: Measures Menu

569

Measures Menu

570

Part V: Menu Reference

Use the Notes menu commands to perform many common Overture tasks like modifying notes, transposing, beaming, grouping, and converting between traditional notation and raw MIDI data. You must select notes to activate most of the notes commands. The following sections discuss each command in detail.

Notes Menu

39

Notes Menu

Transpose
Choose this command to transpose a selection of notes. When you choose the Transpose command, Overture opens the Transpose dialog box.

You can move the Transpose dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

Note:
The Transpose command does not transpose staves that notate tablature or percussive tracks.

About the Transpose Dialog Box

The left half of the dialog box has two radio buttons to select the type of transposition: Chromatic. Transposes selected notes up/down the selected interval without respect to the current key signature. Diatonic. Transposes selected notes up/down the selected interval based on the current key signature.

The right half of the dialog box has two radio buttons to select transposition direction. Up. Transpose the selected notes up in pitch. Down. Transpose the selected notes down in pitch.

572

Part V: Menu Reference

The contents of the Interval pop-up menu change to reflect the Type setting. Although the new dialog box below has the Type set to Chromatic, we show both the Chromatic and Diatonic Interval pop-up menus.

Interval menu for Diatonic transposition

Interval menu for Chromatic transposition

For example:

If and and

A and C are the selected notes, the key signature is F major, the Direction is Up,

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

573

Notes Menu

and then

the selected diatonic Interval is Third, The resulting transposition raises both the A and C two scale steps up in F major but different absolute intervals. Overture transposes the A a minor third to C and the C a major third to E.

Using the Transpose Command

To transpose a selection of notes in your score: 1. Select the notes you wish to transpose. We discuss note selection techniques in Selecting Notation Symbols on page 89. 2. Choose Notes>Transpose. The Transpose dialog box appears. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click the radio button next to the type of transposition you desire. Click the radio button next to the direction you want to transpose. Choose the interval by which you want to transpose the selection. Click the OK button. Overture transposes your selected notes. If you perform a chromatic transposition, Overture automatically spells all notes and accidentals correctly with respect to the key signature.

574

Part V: Menu Reference

Modify
Notes Menu
575
Choose this command to alter various MIDI playback attributes of the selected notes. When you choose the Notes>Modify command, Overture produces the Modify Notes dialog box.

Operation

Note property

Value setting

You can move the Modify Notes dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

Note:
This command affects only the MIDI playback of notes, not their appearance in the score.

About the Modify Notes Dialog Box

The Modify Notes dialog box contains three parameters: the Operation pop-up menu the Note Property pop-up menu the Value Setting

We explain each of these parameters in the following three sections. The Modify Notes dialog box always reads like a sentence. For instance, the dialog box shown above reads Set duration to 240 units.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

Note Property Pop-Up Menu

Use the Note Property pop-up menu to select which note property you want to modify. Click the current note property and select a new one from the pop-up menu.

The following note properties are available in the Modify Notes dialog box: Duration. Selecting this causes the Modify Notes command to change the durations of selected notes an amount determined by the Operation pop-up menu and the Value setting. Key Velocity. Selecting this causes the Modify Notes command to change the key velocities of selected notes an amount determined by the Operation pop-up menu and the Value setting. Release Velocity. Selecting this causes the Modify Notes command to change the release velocities of selected notes an amount determined by the Operation pop-up menu and the Value setting.

Operation Pop-Up Menu

Use the Operation pop-up menu to select how you want to modify a note property. Click the current operation and select a new operation from the pop-up menu.

The following operations are available in the Modify Notes dialog box: Set. Select this operation to set the note property of all selected notes to the exact value indicated in the Value Setting. For example, if the note property is Key Velocity and the Value Setting is 64, then selecting Set changes all selected note velocities to 64.

576

Part V: Menu Reference

Scale. Select this operation to multiply the note property of all selected notes by the percentage shown in the Value setting. The Value setting ranges from 0%-999% when you select this operation. Velocities are always limited to a range of 1 to 127.

Add Amount. Select this operation to add or subtract the Value setting from the note property of the selected notes. The Value setting ranges from -127 to 127 when you select this operation. For example, if the note property is Key Velocity and the Value setting is +10, then selecting Add Amount increases the velocity of all selected notes by a value of 10. To set whether you want to add or subtract the indicated amount, click to toggle + and -.

Max Limit. Select this operation to restrict the note property of all selected notes to the maximum limit indicated in the Value setting. Overture lowers any note properties with values above the specified limit to the limit and leaves unchanged any note properties with values below the specified limit. For example, if the note property is Key Velocity and the Value setting is 100, then selecting Max Limit limits the maximum velocity of any selected note to a value of 100. Overture sets any notes with original velocities greater than 100 to a value of 100, and leaves unchanged notes with original velocities less than 100.

Min Limit. Select this operation to restrict the note property of all selected notes to the minimum limit indicated in the Value setting. Overture raises any note properties with values below the specified limit to the limit and leaves unchanged any note properties with values above the specified limit. For example, if the note property is Key Velocity and the Value Setting is 50, then selecting Min Limit limits the minimum velocity of any selected note to a value of 50. Overture sets any notes with original velocities less than 50 to a value of 50 and leaves unchanged any notes with original velocities greater than 50.

Legato. This operation works only when you set the note property to Duration. Select this operation to set the duration of each selected note so that it extends a certain percentage of the way to the next note. Use the Value setting to set the percentage. For example, if the note property is Duration and the Value setting is 50%, selecting Legato changes all selected note durations to half their natural values. Quarter notes have the duration of eighth notes (240 units), eighth notes have the duration of sixteenth notes (120 units), and so on.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

577

Notes Menu

For example, if the note property is Duration and the Value setting is 50%, then selecting Scale changes all selected note durations to half their current value.

Value Setting
Use the Value setting in the Modify Notes dialog box to define how much the selected operation acts upon the note property.

The Value setting changes depending on which operation and which note property youve selected. See Operation Pop-Up Menu on page 576 for more information about how various operations and note properties affect the Value setting.

Using the Modify Command

To modify the MIDI playback of selected notes in your score: 1. Select the notes you wish to modify. We discuss note selection techniques in Selecting Notation Symbols on page 89. 2. Choose Notes>Modify Notes. The Modify Notes dialog box appears. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the desired note property from the Note Property pop-up menu. Select the desired operation from the Operation pop-up menu. Use the Value setting numerical to set the desired value for the selected operation. Click the OK button. Overture modifies the MIDI note data of the selected notes.

Humanize
Choose this command to humanize selected notes, that is, to alter their start times, durations and velocities to give a human playback feel. When you choose the Humanize command, Overture produces the Humanize dialog box.

578

Part V: Menu Reference

Using the Humanize Command

To humanize selected notes: 1. 2. 3. Using the Arrow cursor, click the first note in the passage to select it (highlighting it). Shift-click the final note in the passage to select it (highlighting all the notes between). Choose Notes>Humanize. The Humanize dialog box appears. 4. 5. Set the maximun amount to adjust each parameter. Click the OK button. Overture humanizes the selected notes in your score.

This command affects the velocities, start and end times of notes only, not the notated note value. To change note value, see Transcribe on page 606.

Quantize
Choose this command to quantize selected notes, that is, to round off their start times and durations to even beats so they can display reasonably on a staff or play back with precision, rather than with irregularities, the way humans play them. When you choose the Quantize command, Overture produces the Quantize dialog box.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

579

Notes Menu

About the Quantize Dialog Box

Resolution
In this section of the Quantize dialog box specify the granularity of the quantization. You can use any value from a half note down to a thirty-second note triplet. Select a resolution that matches the smallest note in the region you are quantizing. If you are quantizing a run of sixteenth notes, use a sixteenth note as the resolution.

Change
In this section of the Quantize dialog box, choose to move the start times of notes, their durations, or both.

Options
In this section specify how, exactly, you want the selected notes quantized, in several dimensions. Strength. The human ear is tuned to the slight imperfections we hear from most musicians. If you quantize a song so that all notes are perfectly in position, it may end up sounding mechanical or rigid. To avoid this, Overture lets you adjust the strength of the adjustment. A strength of 100 percent indicates that all notes are moved so that they are in perfect time, while a strength of 50 percent means that all notes are moved half-way towards the desired position. This lets you tighten up the timing as much as you want, without going too far. Swing. Many songs do not have notes positioned perfectly evenly. For example, songs with a swing feel, though they may be written all using eighth notes, are often played more like eighth note triplets, with the first note extended and the second one shortened. The swing option lets you distort the timing so each pair of notes is spaced unevenly, giving the quantized material a swing feel. A swing value of 50 percent (the default) means that the timing is even. A value of 66 percent means that the time between the first and second evenly spaced notes is twice as long as the time between the second and third. The figure below illustrates the effect of the swing setting on the timing.

Swing = 50%

Swing = 66%

Swing = 33%

Window. When you quantize some portion of a song, notes that are very far from the specified timing should probably not be moved at all. The window, or sensitivity setting, lets you choose how close to the resolution a note must be for quantize to move it.

580

Part V: Menu Reference

A window of 100 percent includes all notes, and guarantees that all notes will shift to lie exactly on the resolution timing. The window extends half the resolution distance before and after the quantization point. A window of 50 percent extends only a quarter of the way toward the adjacent quantization points.

Using the Quantize Command

To quantize selected notes: 1. 2. 3. Using the Arrow cursor, click the first note in the passage to select it (highlighting it). Shift-click the final note in the passage to select it (highlighting all the notes between). Choose Notes>Quantize. The Quantize dialog box appears. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click the radio button next to the resolution note size you need. Click one or both check boxes to specify whether you want to quantize start times, note durations, or both. Specify percentages for the options Strength, Swing, and Window, and ticks for the Offset option. Click the OK button. Overture quantizes the selected notes in your score.

This command affects start and end times of notes only, not the notated note value. To change note value, see Transcribe on page 606.

Redo Pitches
Select this command to replace notes with pitches played from a MIDI keyboard. The selected note will be replaced with the pitches played on a MIDI keyboard and the notes duration will be preserved. The next note will then be selected and will be replaced with any notes from the MIDI keyboard, and so on. When you are done, select this command to disable Redo Pitches.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

581

Notes Menu

Offset. Normally, the resolution grid is aligned evenly with the start of measures and beats. As an option, you can shift the grid earlier or later by any number of clock ticks. If the resolution is a quarter note, and youve set the offset to +3 ticks, then a note that is originally near the beat would be moved three ticks beyond the beat boundary.

Add Interval
Choose this command to add an interval to the selected notes. Any interval from a second to a ninth can be added above or below the selected note(s).

Delete
Choose the Delete command to produce a submenu of delete options.

From the Delete submenu, choose the type of note-related symbol you want deleted from the selected notes. Each delete option is discussed in the following sections.

Beams
Choose this command to remove the beams from all selected notes. For example: 1. Select some beamed notes.

2.

Choose Notes>Delete>Beams. Overture deletes all beams attached to any of the selected notes.

Articulations
Choose this command to remove all articulations and ornaments from the selected notes. For example: 1. Select some notes with attached articulations and ornaments.

582

Part V: Menu Reference

2.

Choose Notes>Delete>Articulations. Overture deletes all articulations and ornaments attached to the selected notes.

Duplicate Notes
Choose this command to remove duplicate notes from all selected notes. For example: 1. Select some duplicate notes.

2.

Choose Notes>Delete>Duplicate Notes. Overture deletes all selected notes that have the same pitch and start times.

Beam
Choose the Beam command to produce a submenu of beaming options.

To beam notes: 1. 2. In the Score window, select the notes you want beamed. Choose a beaming option from the Beam submenu. Overture beams the selected notes according to one of the options. We discuss beaming options below.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

583

Notes Menu

Note:
You can beam notes that are on different staves and you can also beam across barlines. See Beaming Examples on page 585 for more information.

Based on Meter
Choose this command to beam the selected notes and group them based on the meter of the measure(s). Define beam groupings in the Set Time Signature dialog box (accessed by choosing Measures>Set Time Signature). See Set Time Signature on page 541 for more information about the Set Time Signature dialog box.

Manually
Choose this command or press Control[Command]-shift-b to beam all selected notes as a single group regardless of the meter of the measure(s). This command beams over any selected rests and across barlines if requested. See Cross-Bar Beaming on page 586 for more information. This command overrides previous beam commands, including the Options>Auto Beam toggle.

Break in Middle
Choose this command to break the beam in the middle. Only the first and last notes will show with a partial beam on each side. This is used to create glissandos in harp notation.

Normal Beam

Beam broken in middle

Hide Tuplet Number

Choose this command to hide the tuplet number that automatically appears above or below beams that contain a tuplet group.

Tremolo Beams
Choose one of the tremolo beam commands to place a tremolo beam across the grouped notes. Tremolo beams connect only two notes. Tremolo 8ths. Choose this command to create an eighth note tremolo beam. Tremolo 16ths. Choose this command to create a sixteenth note tremolo beam. Tremolo 32nds. Choose this command to create a thirty-second note tremolo beam. Tremolo 64ths. Choose this command to create a sixty-fourth note tremolo beam.

584

Part V: Menu Reference

By default, Overture makes primary beams span the distance between notes less than a quarter note; it indents secondary beams.

Primary Beam

Secondary Beam

If you create a tremolo beam between quarter notes or larger, Overture automatically indents the primary beam. To change the indentation of a secondary beam, drag it with the Arrow Cursor. To create an indentation for the primary beam, Control[Command]-drag it with the Arrow Cursor.

Beaming Examples
The following are specific examples of some common beaming techniques.

Cross-Staff Beaming
This example shows how to beam across staves: 1. Enter notes onto a single staff.

2.

Select those notes you want displayed on a different staff.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

585

Notes Menu

3.

Choose Notes>Display on Prev Staff.

If you wanted to beam to a lower staff, you would choose Notes>Display on Next Staff. Notes that are part of a cross-staff beam can be up to two staves above or below the current staff.

MIDI Note:
The Display on Prev Staff and Display on Next Staff commands do not actually move MIDI data from one track to another; they only change which staff displays the notes.

Cross-Bar Beaming
This example shows how to beam across bars: 1. Enter notes into your score.

2.

Select the notes you wish to beam.

3.

Choose Notes>Beam>Over Rests & Barlines.

Beams that cross barlines wrap to the next system if necessary. Also, Overture can notate simultaneous cross-bar and cross-staff beams. Simply combine the two techniques.

586

Part V: Menu Reference

Feathered Beams
Create feathered beams by Control[Command]-dragging the end of a beam.

1. move the cursor over the end of a beam

2. hold down the Control[Command] key and drag the beam to create a feathered beam

Creating Groups of Beamed Notes in Tuplets

When creating a tuplet out of existing notes like 16th notes, you now have more control over how those notes will display their secondary beams (the 16th or smaller beams). By breaking the secondary beams in different places, you can imply a rhythmic or metric grouping within these notes. For example, when creating a tuplet from six 16th notes you want to be played in the space of one quarter note, you can either tell Overture to group them as one sextuplet, or as two triplets. Either way, the notes will share a primary beam, as expected. To create a sextuplet from six 16th notes, do either of the following: Select the notes, choose Notes>Group>Tuplet, and enter 6 over 4 Select the notes using the Tuplet tool, and enter 6 over 4

To create two groups of triplet 16th notes displayed under one "3" bracket, do either of the following: Select the notes, choose Notes>Group>Tuplet, and enter 3 over 2 Select the notes using the Tuplet tool, and enter 3 over 2

To create two groups of triplet 16th notes displayed with one primary beam but two "3" symbols, one above each group, perform one of the two steps above, and then do the following: Select the Eraser, and click on the bracket surrounding all six notes (this only removes the bracket, and does not change the notes from triplets to regular notes) Select the notes, and use the Notes>Beam>Based on Meter command

Controlling Secondary Beaming Groups in Tuplets

Overture allows you to change the beam grouping of smaller notes, like 16th notes, after you change those notes into tuplets. For example, this allows you to select the beam on six 16th notes, and break the secondary beam into 2 groups of 3, or 1 group of 6. To change the grouping of a group of six 16th notes in a tuplet, do any of the following: Create a tuplet from 16th notes grouped as 6 over 4 Select the beam using the Selection (arrow) tool; be sure to click the beam rather than the bracket or slur (if any)

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

587

Notes Menu

Type the 1 key to beam all the notes as one group of 6 notes Type the 2 key to beam the notes in two groups of 3 notes

Group
Choose the Group command to produce a submenu of grouping options.

Overture groups the selected notes according to one of the options in the Group submenu.

Tie
Choose this command to tie together any notes of the same pitch within the selected group. To create a tie in your score: 1. 2. Control[Command]-click each note you want to tie together. Choose Notes>Group>Tie. Overture ties the selected notes together.

If you draw a rectangle around a contiguous group of notes, then choose the Tie command, Overture ties together any notes of the same pitch within the selected group. You can select a single note and attach a tie mark to itthis lets you create a note thats tied to a different place in the score (such as an ending, coda, etc.).

588

Part V: Menu Reference

Using the Tie command is the same as selecting the Tie tool from the Groups palette and grouping notes in the Score window (see Chapter 12, Groups Button).

MIDI playback recognizes tie markings. For instance, if you tie two quarter notes together, then your MIDI module plays the tie as though it were a half note.

Slur
Choose this command to create a slur across all notes in the selected group. To create a slur in your score: 1. 2. Select the notes you want slurred. Choose Notes>Group>Slur. Overture creates a slur between the noteseven if theyre on different systems.

If you wrap measures containing slurs (as discussed in Increase Measures on System on page 530 and Decrease Measures on System on page 532), Overture keeps all slurs over all notes even if you wrap a measure onto another system (as shown below).

This slur...

...automatically wraps when you change Overtures measure layout

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

589

Notes Menu

MIDI Note:

Using the Slur command is the same as selecting the Slur tool from the Groups palette and grouping notes in the Score window (see Chapter 12, Groups Button).

Ottava
Choose this command to insert an ottava mark to indicate that the selected notes should be played an octave higher or lower than written. To place an ottava mark in your score: 1. 2. 3. Using the Arrow Cursor, click the first note in the passage to select it (highlighting it). Shift-click the final note in the passage to select it (highlighting all the notes between). Choose Notes>Group>Ottava. The Insert Ottava dialog box appears. 4. 5. 6. Click the radio button next to the type of ottava sign you need. Use the check boxes in the right half of the dialog box to determine how you would like the ottava sign to appear. Click the OK button. Overture inserts the ottava into your score.

You can remove an ottava mark by clicking it with the Eraser cursor. MIDI playback recognizes the removal of ottavas and shifts playback pitch accordingly. See Ottava Dialog Box on page 145 for a detailed description of Ottava options.

590

Part V: Menu Reference

Tuplet
Choose this command to group the selected notes into tuplets. When you choose the Tuplet command, Overture produces the Tuplets dialog box.

Tuplet Value

Tuplet Style

Tuplet Options

About the Tuplets Dialog Box

The Tuplets dialog box contains three separate areas: Tuplet Value. Set the tuplet value using the top two fields; the first field sets the number of notes and the second field sets the duration of the tuplet. For example, to group three notes into a triplet that would play in the time of two eighth notes, you would set the Tuplet value to 3/2 (three notes in the time of two). Tuplet Style. Click one of the illustrated styles to notate your tuplet in that style. Tuplet Options. There are two check boxes for two separate options. Check the Show 2nd Number check box if you want the second number (the in the time of number) to appear in the score. Check the Change playback durations check box if you want to change the actual MIDI playback times of the notes you grouped into a tuplet.

Note:
Overture remembers the most recent parameters set in the Tuplets dialog box and opens with these settings the next time you choose the command.

Using the Tuplet Command

To create tuplets with the Tuplet command: 1. Select those notes you want grouped into a tuplet.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

591

Notes Menu

2.

Choose Notes>Group>Tuplet. Overture produces the Tuplets dialog box.

3. 4. 5. 6.

Enter the desired tuplet value. Click the desired tuplet style. Check the desired tuplet options. Click the OK button. Overture groups the selected notes into a tuplet of the specified value using the notation and playback options selected in the Tuplets dialog box.

Glissando ~
Choose this command to connect the selected notes with a wavy glissando. Generally, glissandos connect two neighboring notes (the highest and lowest in the glissando). If you select more than two notes, Overture creates a glissando between the first and last notes in the selection. You can modify the angle and length of any glissando by clicking and dragging either end. You can modify the vertical or horizontal position of any glissando by clicking and dragging its middle.

Glissando Choose this command to connect the selected notes with a straight line glissando. Generally, glissandos connect two neighboring notes (the highest and lowest in the glissando). If you select more than two notes, Overture creates a glissando between the first and last notes in the selection. You can modify the angle and length of any glissando by clicking and dragging either end. You can modify the vertical or horizontal position of any glissando by clicking and dragging its middle.

592

Part V: Menu Reference

The Edit Glissando Dialog Box

Double-click a Glissando in the Score Window to open the Edit Glissando dialog box.

Set the Appearance fields to the desired setting. Use the Display Text Check Box to display text along the Glissando. Set the type of playback to Diatonic, Chromatic, White Keys, or Last Harp Setting. For Last Harp Setting, the notes will be determined by the previous Harp Pedal setting found in the score. Select the Play option to use the Playback setting during playback.

Flip
Choose the Flip command to produce a submenu of flip options.

Overture changes the selected notes according to the command you choose in the Flip submenu.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

593

Notes Menu

Direction
Choose this command to flip the direction of most any selected symbol. If, for instance, you select a slur and choose Notes>Flip>Direction, Overture inverts the slur as shown below.

Original Slur

Slur after choosing Notes>Flip>Direction

Note:
Notes>Flip>Direction does not flip articulations or ornaments to the other side of the note. If you wish to move one of these symbols, drag it with the Arrow Cursor or use the Notes>Flip>Articulations command.

Enharmonic
Choose this command to change the spelling of a note to its enharmonic. For example, if you select an F#, then apply the Enharmonic command, Overture changes the note to a Gb.

Sharps to Flats
Choose this command to flip a note from its sharped version to its flatted version. For example, if you select a G#, this command changes it to an Ab.

Flats to Sharps
Choose this command to flip a note from its flatted version to its sharped version. For example, if you select Bb, this command changes it to an A#.

Articulations
Choose this command to move all articulations to the opposite side of the note.

594

Part V: Menu Reference

Stem
Choose the Stem command to produce a submenu of stemming options.

Overture stems the selected notes according to one of the options in the Stem submenu.

Stem Up
Choose this command to make the stems of all selected notes point up.

Step Down
Choose this command to make the stems of all selected notes point down.

Hide Stem
Choose this command to hide the stems of all selected notes. This is useful when you want to create a tablature staff that shows only frets and strings, but no stems. Tablature staves are normally used in conjunction with a standard notation staff.

Show Stem
Choose this command to show the stems of any selected notes.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

595

Notes Menu

Set Stem Height

Choose this command to set the stem height to your own specifications. Choosing this item opens the Stem Height dialog box. Set the numerical field to your stem height or to the default height indicated in parenthesis.

Display on Prev Staff

Choose this command to display the selected notes on the staff above their current one.

1. Select the note you want displayed on the previous staff.

2. Choose Notes>Display on Prev Staff and Overture moves the selected note to the next higher staff (displaying it in the proper key).

596

Part V: Menu Reference

Use this command for cross-staff beaming. See Cross-Staff Beaming on page 585 for more information.

The Display on Prev Staff command does not actually move MIDI data from one track to anotherit only changes which staff displays the notes. If you wish to move MIDI data to the previous track, use the Move to Prev Track command (discussed in Move to Prev Track on page 598).

Display on Next Staff

Choose this command to display the selected notes on the staff below their current one.

1. Select the note you want displayed on the next staff.

2. Choose Notes>Display on Next Staff and Overture moves the selected note to the next lower staff (displaying it in the proper key).

Use this command for cross-staff beaming. See Cross-Staff Beaming on page 585 for more information.

MIDI Note:
The Display on Next Staff command does not actually move MIDI data from one track to anotherit only changes which staff displays the notes. If you wish to move MIDI data to the next track, use the Move to Next Track command (discussed in Move to Next Track on page 599).

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

597

Notes Menu

MIDI Note:

Move to Prev Track

Choose this command to move the MIDI data thats notated by the selected notes to the track notated immediately above.

1. Select the note you want to move to the previous track.

2. Choose Notes>Move to Prev Track. Overture moves the selected note(s) to the previous track.

When you choose this command, Overture actually moves the selected notes to the previous track, converts them to raw MIDI data, then transcribes them again. This may cause some formatting like beam adjustments, to be lost. Use this command to correct split-point transcription errors, for example, when Overture notates a note played by the right hand as belonging to the left hand.

Note:
The Move to Prev Track command actually moves MIDI data from one track to another. If you wish only to notate the selected notes on the previous staff (as for cross-staff beaming), use the Display on Prev Staff command (discussed in Display on Prev Staff on page 596).

598

Part V: Menu Reference

Move to Next Track

Notes Menu
599
Choose this command to move the MIDI data thats notated by the selected notes to the track notated immediately below.

1. Select the note you want to move to the next track.

2. Choose Notes>Move to Next Track. Overture moves the selected note(s) to the next track.

When you choose this command, Overture actually moves the selected notes to the next track, converts them to raw MIDI data, then transcribes them again. This may cause some formatting like beam adjustments, to be lost. Use this command to correct split-point transcription errors, for example, when Overture notates a note played by the left hand as belonging to the right hand.

Note:
The Move to Next Track command actually moves MIDI data from one track to another. If you wish only to notate the selected notes on the next staff (as for cross-staff beaming), use the Display on Next Staff command (discussed in Display on Next Staff on page 597).

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

Notate Notes As
Choose the Notate Notes As command to produce a submenu of choices.

Each choice alters the way notes are displayed in a score. This command is particularly useful for altering the appearance of scores that youve entered either by MIDI recording or by importing MIDI files. The following sections detail each of the notation choices.

Notate Notes as Arpeggio

Choose this command to notate the selected notes as an arpeggiated chord. The following example illustrates how and why to use the Notate Notes as Arpeggio command. Assume, when you recorded a song, that you played a measure containing an arpeggiated C major chord. But, when you transcribed the song, the chord came out like this:

Youd like to notate these notes properly.

To change the score so that it notates an arpeggiated chord: 1. Select the four thirty-second notes and the tied eighth note. These are the notes you want displayed as an arpeggiated chord.

600

Part V: Menu Reference

2.

Choose Notes>Notate Notes As>Arpeggio. Overture groups the selected notes as an arpeggiated chord and sets the duration of the chord to the total duration of all the individual notes.

MIDI Note:
This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data.

Notate Notes As Reduced Rests

Choose this command to notate the selected note/rest combinations as staccato notes. The following example illustrates how and why to use the Notate Notes As Reduced Rests command. Assume, when you recorded a song, that you played a short staccato passage. But, when you transcribed the song, the passage came out like this:

Youd like to notate these notes properly.

To change the score so that it notates properly: 1. 2. Select the series of notes and rests you want to re-notate. Choose Notes>Notate Notes As>Reduced Rests. Notice that each note/rest combination is now notated as a single staccato note with a duration equal to the old note/rest combination.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

601

Notes Menu

You can add the staccato markings of your choice using the symbols on the Articulations palette. See Articulations Palette Tools on page 161.

MIDI Note:
This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data.

Notate Notes as Swing Eighths

Choose this command to notate a selected pattern of dotted eighth and sixteenth notes as straight eighth notes. The following example illustrates how and why to use the Notate Notes as Swing Eighths command. Assume, when you recorded a song, that you played it using a swing feel. As a result, when you transcribed the song, eighth note passages came out like this:

To change the score so that it notates the eighth notes correctly: 1. 2. Select the series of dotted eighth and sixteenth notes you want to re-notate as swing eighth notes. Choose Notes>Notate Notes as>Swing Eighths. Overture notates the selected notes as straight eighth notes. If you wish, you can add an instruction to your score to play the selected passage in swing time.

602

Part V: Menu Reference

MIDI Note:

Notate Notes as Trill

Choose this command to notate the selected notes as a single trilled note. The following example illustrates how and why to use the Notate Notes as Trill command. Assume, when you recorded a song, that you trilled a note. As a result, when you transcribed the song, the trill came out like this:

Youd like to notate these notes as a trill.

To change the score so that it notates the trill correctly: 1. 2. Select all the notes of the trill. Choose Notes>Notate Notes as>Trill. Overture notates the selected notes as a single trilled note.

MIDI Note:
This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

603

Notes Menu

This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data, nor does it affect playback unless you select Play Style>As Written or Play Style>In Swing. See Play Style on page 633 for more information about Play Styles.

Notate Notes as Triplet

Choose this command to notate the selected notes as a triplet. The following example illustrates how and why to use the Notate Notes as Triplet command. Assume, when you recorded a song, that you played a triplet. But, when you transcribed the song, Overture did not notate the triplet correctly (for example, it notated it as an eighth note and two sixteenth notes.

Youd like to notate these notes as a triplet.

To change the score so that it notates the triplet correctly: 1. 2. Select all the notes that comprise the tuplet. Choose Notes>Notate Notes as>Triplet. Overture notates the selected notes as a triplet.

MIDI Note:
This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data, nor does it affect playback unless you select Play Style>As Written. See Play Style on page 633 for more information about Play Styles.

Notate Notes as Turn

Choose this command to notate the selected notes as a turn. The following example illustrates how and why to use the Notate Notes as Turn command.

604

Part V: Menu Reference

Assume, when you recorded a song, that you turned a note. As a result, when you transcribed the song, it came out like this:

Youd like to notate these notes as a turn.

To change the score so that it notates the turn correctly: 1. 2. Select all the notes that comprise the turn. Choose Notes>Notate Notes as>Turn. Overture notates the selected notes as a single turned note.

MIDI Note:
This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data.

Notate Notes as Cue Notes

Choose this command to notate the selected notes as a cue note. The selected notes instantly become smaller cue notes. Cue notes do not play back.

Notate Notes as Grace Notes

Choose this command to notate the selected notes as a grace note. The selected notes instantly become smaller notes.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

605

Notes Menu

Notes/Notate Notes as/Single Note

Choose this command to convert two tied notes to a single note.

Notes/Notate Notes as/Two Tied Notes

Choose this command to convert a single note to two tied notes.

Transcribe
Choose this command to convert the selected raw MIDI data from the Graphic Window or a recording session into standard music notation. Choose this command also to convert existing notation to a different appearance after changing the quantization value. Raw data appears in the Score window as long rectangles. Their vertical position indicates their pitch, and their length indicates their duration.

To convert raw MIDI data into standard music notation: 1. Select the desired section of raw notes.

606

Part V: Menu Reference

2.

Choose Notes>Transcribe. Overture converts the raw MIDI data into standard music notation.

This process of converting raw MIDI data into standard music notation happens automatically if you check the Auto Transcribe option in the Record Options dialog box. (Open this by choosing Options>Record Options.) While auto transcription may be suitable for simple scores, there are a couple of reasons you may opt to transcribe raw MIDI data into standard notation manually: You want to assign different notes to different voices manually. If you select raw MIDI notes individually in the Score window, assign them to a voice, then manually transcribe them (using the Notes>Transcribe command), you can fine-tune any complicated voicings in your score. You want to apply different transcription quantization values to different passages. You can select raw MIDI notes individually in the Score window, select a transcription quantize amount for just that passage, then manually transcribe the MIDI data into standard music notation using the Notes>Transcribe command. This eliminates any transcription quantization errors that may occur from applying a common transcription quantization amount to an entire score. For a detailed example of this process, see Transcription Quantization and Manual Transcription on page 260. For more information about auto transcription, see Record Options on page 634.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

607

Notes Menu

Notes to Raw
Choose this command to convert the selected standard notation into raw MIDI data. There are two reasons for converting standard notation back into raw MIDI data: It lets you reassign notes to different voices. If you dont like the way Overture voiced a certain passage, you can select it, choose Notes>Notes to Raw, then selectively transcribe various notes back into standard notation one voice at a time (using the Notes>Transcribe command). It lets you apply different transcription quantization values to selected passages. If Overture transcribes a particular passage incorrectly, select it, choose Notes>Notes to Raw, set a new transcription quantize amount, then transcribe the raw MIDI data back into standard music notation using the Notes>Transcribe command. It is easier, however, to use the Notes>Transcribe command directly on the incorrect passage. For a detailed example of this process, see Fixing Transcription Quantization Mistakes on page 262. Raw MIDI data appears in the Score window as long rectangles; their vertical position indicates their pitch, and their length indicates their duration.

608

Part V: Menu Reference

Notes to Tablature
Notes Menu
609
Choose Notes>Notes to Tablature to transcribe selected notes to a tablature staff automatically. There can be as many as eight lines in the tablature staff. If you insert the tablature staff below a bass clef, it automatically contains four lines to accommodate bass tablature. If you insert the tablature staff below a treble clef, it automatically contains six lines to accommodate guitar tablature. You can override the number of lines by configuring the clef in the staff display in the Setup Track dialog box.

Click the rectangles to enable or disable staff lines. In general, use four for bass and six for guitar.

Notes to Tablature is enabled only when there is a tablature staff directly beneath the staff containing selected notes. Create a tablature staff by: using the Setup Track dialog box to select the tablature clef. This converts the current staff to a tablature staff. Or inserting a new staff with the Staff tools tablature option.

Tablature Staff option

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

Note:
Overture manually displays tablature staves at 125% scale to increase the legibility of the small tab notes.You can change this in the Setup Track dialog box.

The Tablature Settings Dialog Box

Choosing Notes>Notes to Tablature opens the Tablature Settings dialog box.

The Tablature Setting dialog box has several elements: Tuning Parameters. You can assign a pitch to each of the tablature staff lines. You usually assign the strings to standard guitar or bass tunings if you insert the tablature staff below a treble or bass clef, respectively. If there are more than six lines in the tablature staff, however, the Tuning section displays a maximum of eight strings. You can set each strings tuning field to any valid MIDI note (C2 to G8), using the mouse or typing the note and octave (i.e. B3). Fret Position parameters. Assign the Fret Position by selecting the Floating or Fixed options. Both options attempt to create tablature in the lowest possible fret position: Floating. Overture analyzes each measure in the selection and attempts to create tablature that stays within the number set in the Finger Span field for each measure. Fixed. Overture attempts to create tablature at the fret position entered in the numerical field. If that fails, Overture attempts to stay within the number set in the Finger Span field.

Assign the fret position relative to a capo position by setting the Capo on Fret numerical field to a number between 1 and 31. For example, if you set the Capo on Fret field to 4, and the tablature number for a note is 5, the actual fret number is 9: 5 frets above the capo position. Set this field to 0 if youre not referencing a capo position.

610

Part V: Menu Reference

Glissandos, Slurs, and Ties option. Selecting Glissandos, Slurs, and Ties shows these markings on the tablature staff.
Slur

Tie

Note:
Since tab notes have durations derived from their source notes in the staff above, deleting the second of two tied notes creates problems if you justify that measure. If you dont want to see the second note, make it invisible

Editing the Tablature Staff

You can edit Tablature notes as follows: Drag a tablature marking to a new string. Overture automatically constrains which strings can accommodate a tablature marking. The tablature marking adopts the appropriate fret number to designate the correct pitch using the specified string tuning. Ctrl[Command]-drag a number to change the fret it references. Be careful when using this feature because Overture doesnt prevent you from referencing the wrong note. Copy, paste, and delete tablature entries. Show the duration of the tablature note by selecting a note and choosing Notes>Stem>Show Stem.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

611

Notes Menu

Set Guitar Frame Capo...

Choose this command to set the capo position for Chords and Guitar Frames.

Before Set Guitar Frame Capo

After Set Guitar Frame Capo (On 3rd Fret and showing original suffix above frame)

Set to Voice
Choose the Set to Voice command to produce a submenu of Voice selections.

612

Part V: Menu Reference

Overture sets the voice to the one you select in the Set to Voice submenu. We describe Overture voices in Voice on page 7.

Choose the Set Playback Voice command to produce a submenu of Playback Voice selections. Choosing a playback voice tells Overture to play these notes using the settings set in the Tracks Window for this voice. This is useful for instruments that switch to different playing styles within a passage. For example lets say we have a violin passage where the first four notes are played legato and the next four notes are played stacatto. 1. 2. 3. In the Tracks Window set this Tracks voice one set to a legato violin instrument and voice two to a stacatto violin by specifying different channels (and program changes if needed). Enter all eight notes in voice one. Select the second four notes and choose Set Playback Voice>Voice 2.

Overture will play the first four notes using the legato violin intrument and the play the second four notes using the stacatto violin instrument.

Chapter 39: Notes Menu

613

Notes Menu

Set Playback Voice

614

Part V: Menu Reference

40

Options Menu
Options Menu

Use the Options menu to set such Overture operating, editing, and display options as auto beaming and positioning, metronome values, recording choices, and mode selection. The following sections discuss each option and command in detail.

Show
Press and hold the mouse on the Show command to produce a submenu of show options.

For the most part, the Show submenu contains various visual editing aids. The following sections discuss each submenu item in detail.

Beat Chart
Select this option to show the beat chart for the active measure (the one containing the insertion point). Beat charts appear above the top staff in a system and illustrate graphically the location of each beat. You can change the spacing of notes by clicking and dragging the little square beat handles to new locations. See Score>Using Beat Charts on page 104 for more information. If you select this option when the active measure already shows a beat chart, Overture hides the chart. You can activate and de-activate beat charts for the current staff by holding down the shift key either when selecting Options>Show>Beat Charts or when using the keyboard equivalent Alt[Command] /).

616

Part V: Menu Reference

Handles
Select this option to show each barline and staff handle. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When the option is checked, Overture displays handles. When the option is not checked, Overture does not display handles.

Margin
Select this option to show the page margin. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When the option is checked, Overture displays page margins. When the option is not checked, Overture does not display page margins. To set page margins, use the Page Layout dialog box as discussed in Score>About the Layout Page Dialog Box on page 471.

Choose this command to display horizontal and vertical rulers on the score. Use them to align staves, text, and other symbols precisely. Click in the top left corner of the rulers to switch between inches and centimeters.

Grid
Choose this command to display a grid on the score. This is useful for aligning symbols.

Symbols in Color
Choose this command to display symbols using their assigned color.

Invisibles
Select this option to show any currently invisible music symbols. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When you check the option, Overtures Score window shows (in grey) any invisible symbols. When the option is unchecked, Overture hides all invisible notation.

Incorrect Rhythms
When you choose this command, Overture searches your score (beginning with the active measure) for measures containing either too many beats or not enough beats. If Overture finds an incorrect rhythm, it beeps and places the insertion point in the offending measure. You may then either correct the measure, or activate the next measure and continue searching through your score for other incorrect rhythms.

Range Errors
When you choose this command, Overture searches your score (beginning with the active measure) for any pitches outside specified instrument ranges. If Overture finds a range error, it beeps and places the insertion point in the offending measure. You may then either correct the error, or activate the next measure and continue searching your score for other range errors.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

617

Options Menu

Ruler

Overture gets its instrument range information from the Setup Track dialog box. For more information about selecting Instruments and setting their ranges, see Score>Normal Tracks on page 495.

When you choose Show>Options>Range Errors, Overture beeps and positions the insertion point in Measure #2, because it contains a D5, which is outside the specified Instrument range specified in the Setup Track dialog box.

Tracks Transposed
When you select this option, Overture displays any transposing tracks (as set in the Setup Track dialog box) in their transposed keys. Assume, for example, that you created the conductors score shown below, and that the top staff notates a transposing instrument (in this case, an A Trumpet).

618

Part V: Menu Reference

If you select the Options>Show>Tracks Transposed option, Overture shows the trumpet track transposed into the proper notation key for the trumpet player.

When you select this option, Overture displays the assigned voice names along with the track name to the left of each system.

Filled Measure Rests

Choosing this option tells Overture to put a whole measure rest in every empty measure.

System Separations
When you select this option, Overture puts a double-slash mark between one system and the next at the left side of the score. It doesnt put a mark between systems if there is only one system displayed. If you select the command again, Overture will place another separation mark on the right side of the score. If

Chapter 40: Options Menu

619

Options Menu

Tracks Voice Names

you select this option a third time, Overture removes the separation marks from the score.

Chord Positions
When you select this option, Overture displays Chord position indicators in the Score window. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When you check the option, Overtures Score window shows a small triangle to the left of the chord names that appear above a score. When the option is unchecked, Overture hides the Chord position indicators.

Chord Position Indicators show vertical position of chord names on a staff.

Drag a position indicator to adjust the vertical position of an entire line (or lines) of chords. Alt[Option]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to every remaining system on that page.

620

Part V: Menu Reference

Control[Command]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to remaining system in the score. Shift-click the indicator to reset all chord positions to the baseline position. The shift-click also works with the Alt[Option] and Control[Command] keystrokes. For more information, see Score>Moving Chord Names Globally on page 359.

Note:
Overture cannot display Chord position indicators and Lyric position indicators at the same time.

Lyric Positions
When you choose this option, Overture displays Lyric position indicators in the Score window. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When you check the option, Overtures Score window shows a small triangle to the left of each verse in the Score window. When you uncheck the option, Overture hides the Lyric position indicators.

Lyric position indicators show each verse assigned to a staff.

Drag a position indicator to adjust the vertical position of the entire verse. Alt[Option]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to every remaining system on that page. Control[Command]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to remaining system in the score.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

621

Options Menu

Shift-click the indicator to reset all lyric positions to the baseline position. The shift-click also works with the Alt[Option] and Control[Command] keystrokes. For more information, see Score>Moving Entire Lyric Lines on page 371.

Note:
Overture cannot display Lyric position indicators and Chord position indicators at the same time.

Slash Note Positions

Checking this option displays slash note position indicators as small triangles to the left of each staff. Drag a position indicator to adjust the vertical position of slash notes on a staff. Alt[Option]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to every remaining system on that page. Control[Command]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to remaining system in the score. Shift-click the indicator to reset all slash note positions to the baseline position. The shift-click also works with the Alt[Option] and Control[Command] keystrokes. The position of slash notes on a staff is independent of played pitch (or pitches, if you have entered a chord). You can transpose slash symbols, affecting the played pitch, without changing their position on a staff.

Dynamic Positions
Checking this option displays baseline position indicators for dynamics as small triangles to the left of each staff. Drag a position indicator to adjust the vertical position of dynamics on a staff. When you insert a dynamic, its baseline will be at this position. Alt[Option]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to every remaining system on that page. Control[Command]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to remaining system in the score.

622

Part V: Menu Reference

Shift-click the indicator to reset all dynamic positions to the baseline position. The shift-click also works with the Alt[Option] and Control[Command] keystrokes.

Time Code Positions

Checking this option displays Time Code position indicators as small triangles to the left of each staff. Drag a position indicator to adjust the vertical position of where Time Code is displayed on a staff. Alt[Option]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to every remaining system on that page. Control[Command]-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to remaining system in the score. Shift-click the indicator to reset all Time Code positions to the baseline position. The shift-click also works with the Alt[Option] and Control[Command] keystrokes.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

623

Options Menu

Auto
Beam
Select this option to beam all notes automatically upon transcription. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When you check the option, Overture automatically beams notes as theyre transcribed, using the beaming pattern for the current measure (as set in the Set Meter dialog box and discussed in Score>Set Time Signature on page 541). When you uncheck the option, Overture does not beam notes upon transcription.

Correct
Select this option if you wish Overture to warn you when you have entered too many notes in a measure or notes that are out of the instruments playable range. The range can be set in the Setup Track dialog.

Justify
When you select this option, Overture automatically spaces any new notes that you enter. When you check the option, Overture spaces notes according to the measures existing Beat Chart, changes the width of the measure if needed, and respaces the measures along the current system. When you uncheck the option, Overture displays notes exactly where you enter them. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. For example, the top example below shows some notes entered with the Auto Justify option disabled (unchecked) and the bottom example shows notes entered with the Auto Position option enabled (checked).

Auto Position Disabled

Auto Position Enabled

624

Part V: Menu Reference

Notes in the bottom example align with the beat chart and give a visual representation of the rhythm of the piece. Notes in the top example provide no visual clue of the musics rhythm, since they appeared wherever you clicked in the score.

MIDI Note:
Overture automatically positions any notes entered by MIDI input or by importing MIDI files regardless of the status of this option.

If you need to brush up on your knowledge of beat charts, see Score>Using Beat Charts on page 104. Youll find a detailed discussion about allotment tables in Score>Allotment Table on page 410.

Note:
Overture can automatically space notes using either Options>Auto Justify, Measures>Justify, or Score>Recalc Layout. All three of these commands affect note spacing differently. To learn the differences between them, see Score>Automatic Justify on page 107.

Rests
Select this option to enable Overtures automatic fill in rests feature. As you enter notes, Overture will fill in the remaining rests to fill the empty time in the measure. You can replace a rest with a note by clicking a note at the same horizontal position as the rests.

Transcribe
Select this option to enable Overtures automatic transcription feature. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When you check Auto Transcribe, Overture automatically transcribes any recorded MIDI data into standard music notation. When you uncheck the option, Overture displays realtime MIDI recordings as raw MIDI data, which you can selectively and manually transcribe using the Notes>Transcribe command. This menu option duplicates the Auto Transcribe checkbox in the Record Options dialog box. For more information about auto transcription, see Score>Using the Auto Transcribe Option on page 636.

Wrap Measures
Select this option when you want Overture to wrap measures to the next system or page when entering new data. Overture will wrap the measure to the previous system when deleteing data if necessay.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

625

Options Menu

Keyboard Thru
Select this option to enable Overtures Keyboard Thru feature. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When you check Keyboard Thru, Overture passes any received MIDI data through to the selected Thru Instrument. Overture watches for MIDI input from any device that you select as an Input Device (as discussed in Score>MIDI Devices on page 637) and passes the MIDI data out to the device that you select as a Thru Device (from the Thru Device button in the Transport window, as discussed in Score>Thru Device Button on page 271).

What is Keyboard Thru and Why is it Useful?

The most common setup for a MIDI computer system uses a single MIDI keyboard connected to a computer by a MIDI interface.

MIDI In Computer MIDI Interface MIDI Keyboard Out In Out

When you play the keyboard, its internal hardware produces sound. MIDI information travels from the keyboards MIDI OUT. This path allows communication from the keyboard to the computer. When MIDI information goes from the computer through the MIDI interface into the keyboards MIDI IN, the synthesizer produces sound. This path allows communication from the computer to the keyboard. This simple arrangement, allowing both the musician and the computer to play the keyboard, is not possible for MIDI instruments that dont produce their own onboard sound, like wind, guitar, drum pad, and keyboard controllers.

626

Part V: Menu Reference

If you connect such a controller to a sound module, and the sound module through the MIDI interface to the computer, then the undesirable condition illustrated below occurs. No connection is possible for the computer to the sound module.

Sound Module MIDI Thru MIDI In MIDI Out MIDI Controller

??? MIDI MIDI In Out MIDI Interface

When the controller plays, MIDI information goes to the sound modules MIDI IN causing the module to create sound. The sound module also routes MIDI information received at its MIDI IN back out its MIDI Thru to the MIDI interface and computer. This path allows communication from the MIDI controller to the computer. The computer can not, however, play MIDI information back to the sound module because the modules MIDI IN connection is already in use by the MIDI controller.

The Solution: Keyboard Thru

This problem is solved when you select Options>Keyboard Thru. The figure below illustrates the correct configuration of devices.

Sound Module MIDI In

MIDI Controller MIDI Thru MIDI Out

Computer

MIDI MIDI Out In MIDI Interface

The controller connects directly to the computer through the MIDI interface. MIDI information travels to the computer but creates no sound yet. Overture receives the incoming MIDI information but routes it immediately back to the sound modules MIDI IN through the MIDI interface. The controller plays the sound module through the software despite the lack of a direct connection between them. During

Chapter 40: Options Menu

627

Options Menu

Computer

playback, Overture sends MIDI information through the MIDI interface to the sound modules MIDI IN, causing it to produce sound.

Expert Tip:
The preceding discussion intentionally omits more complicated MIDI interfaces and configurations to illustrate the concept of Keyboard Thru simply.

The Keyboard Thru command lets you to play a master MIDI keyboard, assign a patch, and hear the output from any sound module in your studio. For example, assume you have a K2000 keyboard with local control turned off and you want to play it into Overture while you hear the notes sound on a Proteus/2 set to MIDI channel #1 with a sound. To do so. 1. Select Options>Keyboard Thru to check it. Do not select the option if it is already checkedthat would disable it. 2. Move the mouse over the Thru Instrument button in the Transport window.

3.

Press and hold the mouse to open a pop-up menu of MIDI devices. Overture displays the MIDI devices defined by your current setup.

628

Part V: Menu Reference

4.

Release the mouse over the Proteus/2-1 device.

Overture selects the Proteus/2, MIDI channel #1 as your Thru Instrument and displays its name in the Thru Device button. For more information about the Thru Device button, see Score>Thru Device Button on page 271. 5. Select Options>MIDI Devices. Overture opens the Select MIDI Devices box. 6. Make sure the K2000 is enabled as an Input Device. For more information about enabling input devices, see Score>MIDI Devices on page 637. 7. Play your K2000. You hear the sound assigned to the Proteus/2, channel #1 since youve now told Overture to send MIDI data from your K2000 to the Proteus/2.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

629

Options Menu

Hold Timing
Select this option to hold note timings constant in situations where they would otherwise alter. The figure below displays normal note deletion. The bottom measure shows that Overture inserts the rest in the place of the deleted note rather than moving the last two notes earlier.

When this note is deleted... ...the quarter notes occurring after the deleted note dont move.

If you delete the rest with Options>Hold Timing selected, the timing of the third and fourth notes will remain the same, even though the rest has been removed. Use the Hold Timing command to add notes to a measure without affecting the timing of pre-existing notes and to maintain the timing of the measure during the editing process.

Note:
The results are unpredictable when transcribing measures that have too many notes.

See Score>Eraser Button on page 119 for a description of Overtures behavior when you dont use the Hold Timing command.

Metronome
Choose the Metronome command to produce a submenu of metronome options.

630

Part V: Menu Reference

You can toggle each of the first three options on (checked) or off (un-checked). The fourth option opens the Metronome dialog box.

Click in Record
Select this option if you want Overtures metronome to click while you record into Overture. You may toggle this option on and off by repeatedly choosing it. When the option is checked, Overtures metronome plays during recording. When the option is not checked, Overtures metronome does not play during recording.

Click in Play

Click in Count Off Only

Select this option if you want Overtures metronome to click only during a count off, but not during recording. You may toggle this option on and off by choosing it repeatedly.

Metronome Sound
Choose this command to specify the sound used by Overtures metronome. When you choose the Metronome Sound command, Overture produces the Metronome dialog box.

Device Selection

Channel Selection

Beat Areas Duration Numerical

Test Button

Velocity Numerical Note Selection

Chapter 40: Options Menu

631

Options Menu

Select this option if you want Overtures metronome to click whenever Overture plays. You may toggle this option on and off by choosing it repeatedly. When you check the option, Overtures metronome plays during playback. When you uncheck the option, Overtures metronome does not play during playback.

Overtures metronome click uses the MIDI device and note parameters you specify in the Metronome submenu.

About the Metronome Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Metronome dialog box. These are described, below: Beat Areas. You can set different MIDI note values for different beats. Specifically, you can set a MIDI note value for the Accented beat (the first beat in a measure), and a different MIDI note value for the Unaccented beat (the remaining beats in a measure). Device Selection. Use this pop-up menu to choose which MIDI device (as defined by your current setup) to use for the metronome sound. Channel Selection. Use this pop-up menu to choose which MIDI device channel to use for the metronome sound. Note Selection. Use this numerical to choose a MIDI note for both accented and unaccented beats. You can also enter a value by clicking the down-pointing triangle and choosing a note from the popup menu, or by playing the desired note on a MIDI controller. Velocity Numerical. Use this numerical to set the MIDI velocity value for both accented and unaccented beats. You can also enter a value by playing a note with the desired velocity on a MIDI controller. Duration Numerical. Use this numerical to set the MIDI duration for both accented and unaccented beats. Test Button. Click this button to hear a preview of your Metronome sound settings. The tempo and meter of the test metronome are unrelated to the tempo and meter in your score. This button provides only a preview of the metronomes sound.

Using the Metronome Sound Command

To set Overtures metronome sound: 1. Choose Options>Metronome>Metronome Sound. Overture produces the Metronome dialog box. 2. 3. Configure the dialog box to your specifications. To test the metronome sound, click the Test button. Overture accents the first metronome click in a measure. The note duration affects the test metronomes tempo. The test metronome always allows enough time between notes for you to hear the entire selected duration. 4. When youre satisfied with your metronome sound, click the OK button.

632

Part V: Menu Reference

Play Style
Choose the Play Style command to produce a submenu of MIDI playback options.

As Recorded
Select this option if you want Overture to play back your score exactly as recorded. When you select As Recorded, Overture plays back any timing nuances exactly as you recorded them. It also faithfully plays any changes you may have made to MIDI data either in the Modify Notes dialog box (as discussed in Score>Modify on page 575), or in the Graphic window.

In Swing
Select this option if you want Overture to play back your score in swing time. Overture uses a 63% swing value when you choose this play style. This means the first half of the beat plays for 63% of the time occupied by the beat, while the second half plays for only 37% of the beat. For example, if you select the In Swing option and a measure starts with two eighth notes, the first eighth note will play longer than the second eighth note.

Music written like this...

...plays like this when Options>Play Styles>In Swing is checked.

As Written
Select this option if you want Overture to play back your score exactly as written. When you select As Written, Overture ignores any timing nuances you may have recorded or edited. Basically Overture plays the start of each note at the exact time as shown on the score.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

633

Options Menu

Active play styles have a check mark to the left of their names. The following sections describe each play style in detail.

Repeats
Select this option if you want Overture to play back any and all repeats in your score. When you select Repeats, Overture plays all repeats it sees in your score, including standard repeat barlines, endings, and jumps (like D.S. al Coda, or D.C. al Fine). If you do not select this option, Overtures MIDI playback ignores all repeats in a score.

Record Options
Choose this command to specify various recording options. When you choose Record Options, Overture produces the Record Options dialog box.

About the Record Options Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Record Options dialog box, as follows. Split Point is checkbox and value field. Check this option if you want Overture to automatically split incoming MIDI data into two tracks and notate it on a grand staff. Use the note value field to define the split point. For more information, see Score>Using the Split Point Option on page 635. Auto Transcribe checkbox. Check this option if you want Overture to automatically transcribe incoming MIDI data into standard notation. When this box is un-checked, Overture displays raw MIDI data in the score window. This checkbox duplicates the Options>Auto>Transcribe option. For more information, see Score>Using the Auto Transcribe Option on page 636. One voice per staff checkbox. You can enable this option only if the Auto Transcribe option is checked. Check this option if you want Overture to interpret incoming MIDI data as a single voice

634

Part V: Menu Reference

per staff. Un-check this option if you want Overture to interpret incoming MIDI data as multiple voices per staff. For more information, see Score>Using the One Voice Per Staff Option on page 636. Tuplets. Use this check box to determine if tuplets are to be recorded. Staccato/Tenuto. Use these checkboxes if you want Overture to automatically place a staccato/ tenuto articulation on notes that are rounded to the nearest quantize value and the duration meets the set percentage values. Record Filters. Use the radio buttons and checkboxes to determine which types of MIDI data you want Overture to record and which types you want it to ignore.

The Record Options dialog box lets you specify how you want Overture to interpret and assign the MIDI data it records. To define the recording options: 1. Choose Options>Record Options. Overture displays the Record Options dialog box. 2. Decide whether you want to check the Split point is, Auto Transcribe, Tuplets, Staccato/Tenuto on notes, and One voice per staff options. Each of these options is described in detail, below. 3. Select the desired Record filters. The Record filters are discussed in Score>Using the Record Filters on page 637. 4. Click the OK button. Whenever you perform real-time recording, Overture interprets the incoming MIDI data using the attributes of the Record Options dialog box.

Using the Split Point Option

Check the Split point is checkbox if you want Overture to split incoming MIDI data between two tracks automatically. Use the corresponding numerical to define the MIDI note value of the split point (C4=middle C). This option is particularly useful for correctly notating two-handed piano parts on a grand staff. To use this option, your score must contain two adjacent staves; the top staff with a treble clef and the bottom staff with a bass clef. Overture always assigns the MIDI note value in the split point numerical to the treble staff. When you record, you can activate a measure in either the treble staff or the bass staff; Overture correctly divides the notes between the two staves.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

635

Options Menu

Using the Record Options Dialog Box

Using the Auto Transcribe Option

Check the Auto Transcribe checkbox if you want Overture to transcribe any recorded MIDI data automatically. Uncheck the box if you want Overture to display recorded MIDI data as raw data in the Score window. If you select the Auto Transcribe option, you also have the choice of transcribing the recorded MIDI data as single or multiple voices (see Using the One Voice Per Staff Option below). Generally, automatic transcription is useful for most simple recordings. You may find it beneficial to turn off auto transcription if youre recording rather complicated tracks with multiple voices. When auto transcription is off, Overture displays the recorded data as raw MIDI data in the Score window. You can edit and selectively transcribe sections of raw MIDI data as discussed in Score>Transcribe on page 606. Overture notates all auto transcribed data in the Score window using the transcription quantization value shown in the Tool Bar. For more information about setting a transcription quantization value, see Chapter 27, Transcription Quantize Amount Button.

Using the One Voice Per Staff Option

You can enable this option only if you check the Auto Transcribe option first. Check One voice per staff whenever you record a track that requires only a single voice per staff. This keeps Overture from interpreting any sloppy playing as multiple voices. If you want to record a track with multiple voices, then leave the option unchecked. Look at the following example to see the effect of this option. Assume, for example, that you physically play and record the passage below. If you dont check One voice per staff, then Overture transcribes the music exactly as shown below.

Voice 1

Voice 2

If, however, you play the passage, but you check One voice per staff, Overture transcribes your input as a single voice and notates it as shown below.

Using the Tuplets Option

You can enable this option only if you check the Auto Transcribe option first. Check Tuplets to allow notes to transcribe to the nearest tuplet based on the current transcription quantize amount. See

636

Part V: Menu Reference

Score>Setting a Transcription Quantize Amount on page 259

Using the Stacatto/Tenuto On Notes Option

You can enable this option only if you check the Auto Transcribe option first. Check Using the Stacatto/Tenuto On Notes Option to automatically add stacatto/tenuto marks to transcribed notes whose durations are below/above to given ranges. You can adjust the ranges by changing the percentage numericals

Using the Record Filters

Use the three radio buttons to tell Overture whether you want to record all events, only the events selected in this dialog box, or all events except those not selected in this dialog box.

Unless you choose All, you need to check the selected event types at the bottom of the dialog box. In the example shown, Overture records all MIDI data except Poly Aftertouch, Old DX7 Aftertouch, and Portamento Pedal.

MIDI Devices
When you start Overture for the first time, it checks your computer to find all the MIDI input and output devices you have installed (such as sound cards and MIDI interfaces). However, sometimes you need to tell Overture exactly which devices you want it to use. If youre not getting sound from your sound card or MIDI keyboard, or if you just want to change the MIDI devices that you are using, follow the steps in this section.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

637

Options Menu

Use this command to open the MIDI Devices dialog box in which you select the MIDI In and MIDI Out devices for Overture. Each item in the list is a MIDI In or MIDI Out port.

Device selected for MIDI input

Device selected for MIDI output

Click to test your output devices

Click here to change the order of MIDI devices

Input Ports. The left window shows devices on MIDI Input Ports. Make sure that all devices in this window are highlighted. If a device isnt highlighted, click on it once to select it for MIDI Input. Output Ports. The right window shows devices on MIDI Output Ports. Overture numbers its MIDI Output Ports by the order of the devices in this window. The device on top is on Port 1, the one below it is on Port 2, and so on. Highlight each device in the Output Ports window and click Move Selected Devices to Top to change its order. Then highlight all the devices that appear in the window to select them for output.

MIDI Thru Enabled. Check this box if you want the input from your inoput device to be sent to the output device of the current track.

638

Part V: Menu Reference

Instruments (PC)
Use this command to assign a MIDI instrument definition to each available MIDI port and channel. The assignments you make determine the MIDI bank names, patch names, note names, and controller names for Overture. For a detailed description of this command, see Chapter 43, Instrument Assignments and Definitions (PC).

Chapter 40: Options Menu

639

Options Menu

Preferences
Choose this command to select, set or view numerous Overture preferences. When you choose Options>Preferences, Overture opens the Preferences dialog box.

The top of the Preferences dialog box displays tabs for each of the Preference types. This menu contains different types of preferences: General Engraver Fonts Libraries Playback Dynamics Colors

When you select one of the Preference tabs, the dialog box displays the selected type. The following sections describe each preference and option in detail.

640

Part V: Menu Reference

General Preferences
To view the general preferences, select General from the Preference tabs.

Use the check boxes to enable (check) or disable (uncheck) various general options. The following sections discuss these options.

Default Document Folder

Use this option to set the default location where your scores are stored. When you choose Open or Save from the File menu, this file location will be set as the default in the dialog. If this is left blank, the last location is used.

Drag Notes Chromatically

Use this option to determine whether Overture changes notes chromatically or diatonically when you drag them in the Score window. Checked. When you drag a note vertically in the Score window, its pitch changes chromatically (according to the twelve-tone scale). Unchecked. When you drag a note vertically in the Score window, its pitch changes diatonically (according to the key of the measure).

For more information, see Score>Editing Notes on page 97.

Remap Unknown Devices

Use this option to tell Overture whether or not to remap unknown MIDI devices to a device contained in your current setup.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

641

Options Menu

Checked. Overture automatically remaps any unknown devices to the device specified in the corresponding pop-up menu. For example, if someone gives you an Overture file that references devices that arent in your current setup, Overture automatically remaps each of those devices to the device shown in the pop-up menu. Overture plays all remapped tracks using the selected device and MIDI channel. If you wish, you can open the Tracks window and reassign each remapped device to a new device. Unchecked. Overture does not remap unknown devices. For example, if someone gives you an Overture file that references devices that arent in your current setup, Overture will not remap the devices and any tracks using these devices will not play correctly. If you wish, you can open the Tracks window and assign a device to each unassigned track.

Skip Tied Notes in Lyrics

Use this option to specify that lyrics should treat tied notes as a single entity by placing only one word under the first of the tied notes.

Add Double Bar at Key Change

Use this option to insert double bar lines automatically before key changes.

Advance Cursor When Entering Notes

Use this option if you want the mouse cursor to automatically move to the next note position after entering a note with the mouse.

AttachNote Palette Accidentals

Use this option if you want the note cursor to have an accidental attached when you choose an accidental from the Notes palette. Use this to enter a note with an accidental with one click. If you do not choose this option, the cursor will become an accidental and youll have to click on the note to add the accidental.

Use Control[Command] click to Select Entire Measure

Use this option if you want to select entire measures by clicking on them.

Show Raw Data as Note Heads

Use this option if you want to display raw data in the Score Window as note heads instead of horizontal bars.

642

Part V: Menu Reference

Transparent Tablature Numbers

Use this option if you want the staff lines to show through tablature numbers.

Dont Draw Rehearsal Mark Enclosures

Use this option if you want the rehearsal marks to be drawn without its surround box.

Show All Names in Controller and Key Switch Popup Menus

Use this option if you want all names to be shown in the popup menus when choosing controllers and key switches. If this option is unchecked only the appropriate names will be shown for the current track and voice.

Backup Score Every [1] Minutes

Middle C is
Use this option to establish how Overture names middle C. C3. Overture displays Middle C (MIDI note #60) as C3a convention adopted by Yamaha and some other manufacturers. C4. Overture displays Middle C (MIDI note #60) as C4the standard MIDI convention. C5. Overture displays Middle C (MIDI note #60) as C5a convention adopted by some other manufacturers..

Note Names
Use this option to specify a convention for displaying note names throughout the score: Standard. Uses the normal display technique with respect to note names. Overture identifies pitches by the note name and octave (C#3). B = H. Overture identifies pitch B as H and the pitch Bb as B. It identifies other pitches normally. This convention is prevalent in Germany and other parts of Europe. Solfege. Overture identifies pitches based on the Do, Re, Mi, Fa, So, La, Ti, Do convention for the C major scale. The pitch description includes the octave number and Overture identifies chromatic pitches as sharp or flat from the C major scale intervals. For example, F#4 is identified as Fa#4.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

643

Options Menu

Use this option if you want to backup your score at a set interval. You score will be saved in the Auto Save folder within the Overture folder.

Engraver Preferences
To view the engraver preferences, select Engraver from the Preference tabs. Overture places a copy of these settings in each new score it creates. A copy of the settings is saved with the score. To edit the engraver settings for individual scores choose Score>Engraver on page 518

Spacing numericals Page Layout numericals

The Engraver dialog box displays three sets of options: Layout Spacing Element Spacing Line Thickness

Layout Spacing
When you create a new Overture file, the Spacing numericals (as shown in the figure) define the default spacing between staves, systems, and groups. Spaces are measured as a number of ledger lines. For example, if you ask for 5 spaces between staves, Overture will space staves exactly 5 ledger lines apart. Also, when you choose Score>Respace Staves on page 512, Overture respaces staves on the current page according to these numericals (for more information, see Score>Respacing Staves on page 84). There are three spacing numericals: spaces between staves. Use this numerical to set the default spacing (in ledger lines) between each staff. spaces between systems. Use this numerical to set the default spacing (in ledger lines) between each system

644

Part V: Menu Reference

spaces between groups. Use this numerical to set the default spacing (in ledger lines) between an instrument group and the other staves in a system

Chapter 40: Options Menu

645

Options Menu

In addition to the three spacing numericals, the engraver preferences include two page layout numericals. When you create a new Overture file, these numericals define the default number of measures in a system and the default number of systems per page.

Element Spacing
The Element Spacing numericals define default spacing for bar lines, clefs, key signatures, time signatures and accidentals. A space is the distance between two ledger lines. There are eight Element Spacing numericals: Bar line to clef. Use this to set the default spacing (in quarter spaces) between the initial bar line in the score and the clef sign. Bar line to character. Use this to set the default spacing (in quarter spaces) between each bar line in the score and the first character in the following measure. Clef to note. Use this to set the default spacing (in quarter spaces) between the clef sign and any note immediately following. Clef to other. Use this to set the default spacing (in quarter spaces) between the clef sign and any other symbol immediately following. Key to other. Use this to set the default spacing (in quarter spaces) between the key signature and any symbol immediately following. Meter to other. Use this to set the default spacing (in quarter spaces) between the time signature and any symbol immediately following. Space at End of Bar. Use this to set the default spacing (in quarter spaces) between the the last note/ rest and the barline immediately following. Accidental to Note. Use this to set the default spacing (in quarter spaces) between and accidental and the note immediately following.

Line Thickness
The Line Thickness numericals define default thickness in quarters of a point (where a point is approximately 1/72 of an inch) for bar lines, beams, staff lines, stems, ties, slurs, and the distance between beams. There are seven Line Thickness numericals: Bar lines. Use this to set the default thickness (in units of 1/288 of an inch) of all the bar lines. Beam lines. Use this to set the default thickness (in units of 1/288 of an inch) of all the beams.

646

Part V: Menu Reference

Staff lines. Use this to set the default thickness (in units of 1/288 of an inch) of all the staff lines. Stem lines. Use this to set the default thickness (in units of 1/288 of an inch) of all the note stems. Beam gap. Use this to set the default distance (in units of 1/288 of an inch) between note beams in all notes with multiple beams. Slur Thickness. Use this to set the default thickness (in units of 1/288 of an inch) at the middle of the slur. Tie Thickness. Use this to set the default distance (in units of 1/288 of an inch) at the middle of the tie.

Fonts Preferences

When you create a new Overture document, it automatically uses the default fonts specified in this dialog box. There are numerous types of text elements, each of which can have its own default font. Specifically, you can assign default fonts to: Bar numbers Endings Tempo Tablature

Chapter 40: Options Menu

647

Options Menu

To view the font preferences, select Fonts from the Preference tabs.

Track Names Meter Font. Activate this by checking the Alternate Font option in the Set Tempo dialog box. See Score>The Alternate Font Option and Button on page 548. Measure (Bar) Text Page Text Rehearsal Marks System Text Lyrics Multi-measure rest. See page 565 to learn how to combine multiple measures of rests into a single multi-bar rest.

About the Font Dialog Box

To change the default font assigned to one of the previous elements: 1. Click the Select button next to the element. Overture opens a Font dialog box.

Font Menu

Font Size Field

Font Size List

Font Style Options

Font Preview Area

2. 3.

Use the dialog box to select the desired default font, size, and style. Click the OK button. The next time you create a new Overture score, the specified element uses this font as the default.

648

Part V: Menu Reference

There are numerous elements in the Font dialog box: Font Pop-Up Menu. Select a new font from the pop-up menu. Font Size Pop-Up Menu or List. Select a new size from the pop-up menu. Font Size Field. Type a font size not included in the Font Size Pop-Up Menu or List. Font Style Options. Check those style options you want applied to the font. Font Preview Area. View the effects of your font selections in this area.

Libraries Preferences
To view the library preferences, select Libraries from the Preference tabs.

When Overture launches, it automatically loads the Allotment Table, Chord Symbol Library, Drum Map, Expressions Library, Instruments Library, and Guitar Frames Library specified in this dialog box.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

649

Options Menu

To select a new default Library, press and hold the mouse on the corresponding Library name and select a new Library from the pop-up menu.

Note:
The pop-up menu shows only those Libraries stored in the Libraries folder. That folder must be in the same folder as the Overture application.

Use the Auto Save Changed Libraries checkbox to tell Overture whether or not to save automatically any changes you may have made to any of the library types. You can either choose to check or to uncheck this option: Checked. If you change any of the five library types without saving them to disk and you quit Overture, all changes are saved automatically without any warnings or dialog boxes. Unchecked. If you change any of the five library types without saving them to disk and you quit Overture, the libraries will not be saved.

650

Part V: Menu Reference

Playback Preferences
To view the playback preferences, select Playback from the Preference tabs.

Use the check boxes to enable (check) or disabled (uncheck) various playback options. These playback options are discussed in the following sections.

MIDI Through Follows Tracks

Use this option to determine whether or not Overture will automatically change the Thru Instrument when you select different staves in the Score window. You can choose to either check or uncheck this option: Checked. Whenever you click in a staff, Overture automatically changes the Thru Instrument to match the Device selected in the Tracks window. Unchecked. Overture does not automatically change the Thru Instrument when you click in different stavesit stays set to the Instrument last selected from the Thru Instrument pop-up menu.

Play Notes While Inserting/Dragging

Use this option to determine whether or not Overture sends MIDI data when inserting or dragging notes. You can choose to either check or uncheck this option: Checked. When you insert a note or drag it in a score, Overture sends MIDI data to the tracks output devicethis gives you audible feedback of the notes pitch. Unchecked. Overture does not play a note when you insert it or drag it in the Score window, therefore you receive no audible feedback of the notes pitch.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

651

Options Menu

Play Entire Chord While Dragging Notes

Use this option to tell Overture whether or not to play all the notes in a chord or just the note the cursor is on while dragging a chord. You can choose to either check or uncheck this option: Checked. When you drag a chord, Overture sends the MIDI data for all notes in the chord to the tracks output device. Unchecked. When you drag a chord, Overture sends the MIDI data for just the note the cursor is pointing to.

Send Sync On
Use this option to specify the device that Overture sends MIDI Start, MIDI Clock, MIDI Continue, and MIDI Stop, during playback.

Use Audio Engine

Use this option if you plan on using VST Instruments. Youll need to restart Overture after enabling this setting. Be sure to use the VST>Set Folder... menu command to tell Overture where your VST instruments are stored on your hard drive.

Dynamics Preferences
Use the sixteen numericals to specify playback levels for dynamic markings. Each numerical specifies a MIDI volume level. For more information about Dynamics, see Chapter 20, Dynamics Button.

MIDI Volume Numericals

Use in Playback Option

Dynamic Markings (pppp-sfp)

Use these numericals to set their default values for volume.

652

Part V: Menu Reference

Use Controller Number

Use this option to set the default controller number for volume. When entering dynamics and hairpins this number will be used as the controller for volume.

Colors Preferences
Use the radio buttons and popup menus to set default colors for various items in the score.

MIDI Volume Numericals

Use in Playback Option

Save Window Positions

Choose this command to save the palette and and support window positions. The next time you open Overture, the palette and support windows will be opened to the saved state.

Chapter 40: Options Menu

653

Options Menu

654

Part V: Menu Reference

41

VST Menu
Options Menu

Use the VST menu commands to load and display VST instruments. The following sections discuss each option and command in detail.

Audio Preferences...
Choose this command to set the audio driver, sample rate, and buffer size for audio playback.

About the Audio Preferences Dialog Box

There are several elements in the Audio Preferences dialog box. These are described, below:

Sample Rate. Use this pop-up menu to choose the sample rate. The sample rate determines the quality of your sound and recordings. A higher sample rate produces higher quality sound but requires more disk space and CPU usage. You may have to experiment to find the setting that works best with your setup. The options are: 44.100 khz - The standard sample rate used on most audio CDs. 48.000 khz - A common sample rate, sometimes used on DAT recorders. 96.000 khz - A very high sample rate used for professional audio recordings. Note: Not all sound cards support all these sample rates.

Buffer Size. Use this pop-up menu to choose the buffer size. The buffer size also determines the quality of your sound and recordings. A lower number gives better sound but requires more CPU usage. Audio Driver. Use this pop-up menu to choose which Audio driver to use for your sound card. If your audio sound card has a dedicated ASIO driver, you should use this driver and not the Multimedia or DirectX(PC only) drivers . 16 Bit and 24 Bit. Set the bit depth for recorded wave files.

Instrument Rack
Select this option to open the VST window. This window allows you to load VST instruments and effects and adjust the output volume.

About the Instrument Rack

There are numerous elements in the Instrument Rack window. These are described below: Open and Save Buttons. Use the Save button to save the state of all the instruments and effects in the rack to a file. Use Open button to load the rack with contents of a saved file.

656

Part V: Menu Reference

Status Areas. These areas show the current CPU usage, and disk and file size when recording. Mute. Click on the Mute cell to disable/enable playback for a VST instrument. Instrument Popup. Use this pop-up menu to choose a VST instrument to load into the rack or to remove an existing instrument. Instrument Preset. Use this pop-up menu to choose the preset to be used by the VST instrument. This is only available if the instrument has presets. Pre Gain Slider. Use this slider to set the gain(volume) to be sent into the effects rack. Note: The output from all instruments is sent to this slider Effects Popup. Use this pop-up menu to choose a VST effect to load into the rack or to remove an existing effect. Effects Preset. Use this pop-up menu to choose the preset to be used by the VST effect. This is only available if the effect has presets. Master Gain Slider. Use this slider to set the gain(volume) to be sent from the output of the effects rack to the audio card. Note: The output from all effects is sent to this slider.

Record to File...
Select this option to set the filename for recording and to start the record process. Recording starts when you press the Space bar or Play button on the Transport. Recording stops when you press the Space bar again or the Stop button on the Transport.

Set Folder...
Select this option to tell Overture where to locate VST plugins. If you change this folder, you will have to exit Overture and load it again. Overture looks in this folder to determine which plugins to use.

Chapter 41: VST Menu

657

Options Menu

658

Part V: Menu Reference

42

Windows Menu

Use the Windows menu commands to open (or make active) any Overture window, and to control the display format of the Score window. A check mark to the left of their names indicates open windows. The following sections discuss each command in detail.

Tool Bar
Choose this command to produce a submenu of Toolbar windows.

Windows Menu

Main Tool Bar

Checking this command displays all of Overtures notation and other tools. To learn more about the Main Tool Bar, see Chapter 8, Part III The Tool Bar

Standard Tool Bar

Checking this command displays the standard Windows tool bar, giving you easy access to the following commands: New, Open, Save, Cut, Copy, Paste, Print.

Transport
Choose this command to open the Transport window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Transport window. The Transport window (as discussed in Chapter 28, Transport Window) contains buttons to control MIDI recording and playback and a pop-up menu to select the MIDI Thru Instrument.

Status Bar
Choose this command to display or hide the Status Bar, the bar at the bottom of the Overture window. See Status Bar: Page View and Track Controls on page 70.

Tracks
Choose this command to open the Tracks window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Tracks window. The Tracks window (as discussed in Chapter 29, Tracks List Window) defines the characteristics of all the tracks in your score.

Graphic
Choose this command to open the Graphic window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Graphic window. The Graphic window (as discussed in Chapter 30, Graphic Window (PC)) graphically displays the MIDI data in a selected track using piano roll and strip chart displays. You can use this window to edit any MIDI data in any track. Overture applies any changes you make in the Graphic window to the Score window and the reverse.

Chords
Choose this command to open the Chords window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Chords window. Use the Chords window (as discussed in Chapter 32, Chords Window) to enter chord names into a score.

660

Part V: Menu Reference

Lyrics
Choose this command to open the Lyrics window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Lyrics window. Use the Lyrics window (as discussed in Chapter 33, Lyrics Window) to type or modify lyrics and assign them to specific notes.

Step Input
Choose this command to open the Step Input window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Step Input window. Use the Step Input window to enter a score by recording MIDI data one step at a time. You can enter notes, chords, or rhythmic slashes in the Step Input window. The Step Input window is particularly convenient if your playing technique is rather poor, or if you want to quickly enter lead sheet chords and guitar rhythms. For more information about the Step Input window, see Chapter 34, Step Input Window.

Chapter 42: Windows Menu

661

Windows Menu

Window/Cascade (PC)
Choose this command to line up all the open scores so their titles are visible and each upper left corner is to the right and below the one behind it.

662

Part V: Menu Reference

Window/Tile Horizontally (PC)

Choose this command to line up all the open scores so each is the full width of the window and all are spaced evenly the length of the window.

Chapter 42: Windows Menu

663

Windows Menu

Window/Tile Vertically (PC)

Choose this command to line up all the open scores so each is the full length of the window and all are spaced evenly the width of the window.

Window/Arrange Icons (PC)

Choose this command to line up icons of scores.

Open Score Windows

The Windows menu displays the names of all open Score windows at the bottom of the menu. Select a Score to make it the active window. The active window always has a check to the left of its name.

664

Part V: Menu Reference

Part VI MIDI Facilities

43

Instrument Assignments and

Definitions (PC)
Assigning Instruments
Use the Options>Instruments command to assign a MIDI instrument definition to each available MIDI port and channel. The assignments you make determine the MIDI bank names, patch names, note names, and controller names that you see. Suppose that you have a Roland GS-compatible synthesizer attached to MIDI port 1. By assigning all sixteen channels of MIDI port 1 to the Roland GS instrument definition, you ensure that the bank, patch, note, and controller name lists you see displayed in Overture are the ones that match your synthesizer. Often, you want to assign a different instrument to channel 10, which is usually used for percussion. For example, you might assign the Roland GS instrument definition to channels 1 through 9 and 11 through 16, but you would most likely want to assign the Roland GS Drumsets instrument definition to channel 10. If you have several MIDI ports, with a different instrument attached to each one, you would normally assign a different instrument to each MIDI port. For convenience, you can assign a block of channels to one instrument and then change the assignment of one or more of those channels without changing the others. For example, you can highlight all 16 channels of the first MIDI port and assign them to the Roland GS instrument definition. Then, you can highlight channel 10 of the first MIDI port and assign it to the Roland GS Drumset instrument definition. Channels 1 through 9 and 11 through 16 on the first MIDI port will stay assigned to Roland GS. You might also want to split channels to different instruments if you have several instruments attached to a single MIDI port. For example, you might have a Roland synth receiving on MIDI channels 1 through 9, a Roland drum machine receiving on channel 10, and a basic GM-compatible synth receiving on channels 11 through 16. In this case, youd use three different instrument definitions for your one and only MIDI port.

Instruments

To Assign Instruments to MIDI Ports and Channels

1. Choose Options>Instruments to display the Assign Instruments dialog box.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Select one or more MIDI ports and channels from the Port/Channel list (use Shiftclick and control-click to select multiple ports and channels). Choose the instrument to which the selected ports and channels should be assigned from the Uses Instrument list. A black line connects the two lists. To save these changes permanently, check the Save Changes for Next Session box. Click OK when you are done. From now on, Overture uses the bank, patch, controller, and note names from the assigned instrument.

To Clear Instrument Assignments

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Options>Instruments to display the Assign Instruments dialog box. Select the MIDI ports and channels whose assignments you want to remove from the Port/Channel list. Choose <default> from the Uses Instrument list. A black line connects the two lists. Click OK when you are done. From now on, Overture uses the default bank, patch, controller, and note names.

668

Part VI: MIDI Facilities

Importing Instrument Definitions

A few common instrument definitions are already set up for you and ready to use. Overture also includes several hundred additional instrument definitions that you can import. These instrument definitions are stored in files, organized largely by manufacturer. For example, all the instrument definitions for Roland gear are stored in the Roland.ins file; all the instrument definitions for Yamaha gear are stored in the Yamaha.ins file. The file Misc.ins contains miscellaneous instrument definitions. If you dont see a file for the manufacturer of your instrument, look in this file to see if it contains the instrument you are looking for. When you import an instrument definition, Overture adds it to the master instrument definition file Master.ins. The contents of this file determines the list of instruments that appear in the Assign Instruments dialog box.

To Import Instrument Definitions

1. 2. 3. Choose Options>Instruments to display the Assign Instruments dialog box. Click Define to display the Define Instruments and Names dialog box. Click Import to display the Import Instrument Definitions dialog box.

4. 5. 6.

Choose the file that contains instrument definitions for your manufacturer, and click Open. Overture displays a list of all the instrument definitions in the file. Choose one or more instruments from the list, and click OK. Click Close to close the Define Instruments and Names dialog box.

Chapter 43: Instrument Assignments and Definitions (PC)

669

Instruments

The instrument definitions you import appear in the Uses Instrument list in the Assign Instruments dialog box.

Creating Instrument Definitions

Overture lets you create and edit instrument definitions. To create an instrument definition, you must answer these types of questions: What are the names of the patches in each bank? Which note names should be used for each patch? What are the names of the MIDI Controllers for this instrument? Which RPN and NRPNs are available on the instrument? Which Bank Select method does the instrument use?

To collect this information, you need the MIDI documentation for your instrument. You define instruments in the Define Instruments and Names dialog box.

The Instruments tree

The Names tree

The Define Instruments and Names dialog box contains two trees: The Instruments tree lists all defined instruments and their characteristics The Names tree shows all the resources you use to define an instrument

670

Part VI: MIDI Facilities

You expand or collapse the folders and lists in each tree by clicking on the + or key shown to the left of each item. You can also right-click an item and choose Expand or Collapse from the menu, or doubleclick an item to expand or collapse it. To define an instrument, you drag resources from the Names tree to the appropriate branches on the Instruments tree. Each resource is color-codedfor example, you can only drag a Names list to an Instrument tree branch of the same color. Heres a general outline of the steps you must follow: Create a new instrument Create any new name lists that are required for the instrument Drag name lists and other resources to each instrument Save the instrument definition

There are six components to an instrument definition: Method for bank selection Patch names, such as Piano and Bass Note names, which are most frequently used to name drum notes, such as kick or snare Controller names, like volume and pan Names for Registered Parameter Numbers (RPNs) Names for Non-Registered Parameter Numbers (NRPNs)

The instrument definitions organize all names (patches, notes, controllers, RPNs, and NRPNs) into lists. You may be able to define a new instrument using existing name lists. For example, two models of synthesizers made by a particular manufacturer may have identical patch name lists but use different NRPNs. In this case, you can use the same patch lists for both instruments, but you need to use a different NRPN list (or perhaps create a new NRPN list) for the second synth. If you want your changes to be remembered the next time you run , check the Save Changes For Next Session option in the Assign Instruments dialog box before clicking OK. Otherwise, to make only temporary changes, remove the check from that option.

To Create a New Instrument

1. 2. Right-click the word Instruments at the top of the Instrument tree, and choose Add Instrument from the menu. Type a name for the new instrument and press Enter. The new instrument gets default settings for all of its characteristics

Chapter 43: Instrument Assignments and Definitions (PC)

671

Instruments

To Rename an Instrument
1. 2. Right-click an Instrument name and choose Edit from the menu. Type the new name and press Enter.

To Delete an Instrument
1. 2. Right-click an Instrument name and choose Delete from the menu. Confirm that you want to delete the instrument.

To Save an Instrument Definition.

1. 2. Click Close to close the Define Instruments and Names dialog box. Click OK. Overture saves the instrument definition in the MASTER.INS file

Creating Lists
You can create and edit the various lists that make up each instrument definition. Patch name, note name, and controller name lists can contain up to 128 entries, numbered 0 through 127. RPN and NRPN name lists can contain up to 16,384 entries, numbered 0 through 16,383.

To Manage Name Lists

1. To create, edit, or work with name lists, follow the directions in the table:
To do this Create a new name list Do this Highlight a name list and press the Ins (Insert) key; highlight the folder and press Shift-Insert; or right-click any folder or name list and choose Add Names List from the menu. Then enter the name of the list.

672

Part VI: MIDI Facilities

Delete a name list

Highlight the names list and press the Delete key; or right-click the name list and choose Delete from the menu. A warning appears if the list is used by any instrument definition. If you delete the list anyway, the instrument definition changes automatically. Highlight a name and press the Insert key, or right-click a name and choose Add Name from the menu. Then enter the name. Highlight the name of a list and press ShiftInsert, or right-click the name of a list and choose Add Name from the menu. Then enter the name. Highlight the Names List or Name, and press Delete. You can also right-click, then choose Delete. Highlight the name or name list and press F2, or right-click and choose Edit from the menu. Then enter the new name.

Add the next item in a name list

Add a name anywhere in a list

Delete names from a list

Edit a name in a list

Copying Name Lists

You can easily create new lists that are similar to other lists. For example, suppose you want to create a new patch name list called NewList that is almost identical to the General MIDI patch list, but with one or two small changes. Heres how you proceed: Create a new patch name list called NewList. Drag the new list branch onto the General MIDI branch. Overture asks if you want to base NewList on the General MIDI list.

Add new patch names to NewList. These names override those in the list on which NewList is based.

If you change your mind about NewList and want to make it a stand-alone, separate list, drag it to the Patch Names root folder.

Chapter 43: Instrument Assignments and Definitions (PC)

673

Instruments

Click OK. Overture lists NewList under the General MIDI branch. Any patch names that exist in the General MIDI list apply to NewList, too.

Assigning the Bank Select Method

Your synthesizer uses one of four bank select methods to switch back and forth between banks of sounds. To find the method used for your instrument, check the instruments users guide or the manufacturers web site. The four methods are as follows:
Method Normal Used for Instruments that respond to Controller 0 or Controller 32 bank select messages Instruments that only respond to Controller 0 bank select messages Instruments that only respond to Controller 32 bank select messages Instruments that let you change banks by sending patch changes between 100 and 127

Controller 0 only Controller 32 only Patch 100..127

The bank select method you choose affects the bank numbers that you assign to each patch list, as described in the following section. Heres how you compute the bank numbers:
Bank select method Normal To compute the bank number Take the value of Controller 0, multiply it by 128, and add the value of Controller 32 to derive the bank number. A synthesizer manufacturer may refer to Controller 0 as the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and to Controller 32 as the LSB (Least Significant Byte). The value of Controller 0 is the bank number. The value of Controller 32 is the bank number. Take the patch number and subtract 100 to derive the bank number.

Controller 0 only Controller 32 only Patch 100..127

Here is an example of the Normal bank select method. According to the documentation for the Roland JV-1080 synthesizer, the PR-A Bank has a Controller 0 value of 81 and a Controller 32 value of 0. You compute the bank number that you enter in the instrument definition as follows: (81 x 128) + 0 = 10,368.

To Change the Bank Select Method

1. 2. Highlight and expand the instrument in the Instrument tree. Expand the Bank Select Method branch in the Names tree.

674

Part VI: MIDI Facilities

3.

Drag the desired bank select method from the Names tree to the Instrument tree.

Assigning Patch Names

A MIDI instrument can have up to 16,384 banks of 128 patches each. Patches can have names, like Piano for patch number 0, Bass for patch number 1, and so on. Normally, each bank contains a different set of patches, so each bank needs a separate patch name list. Most synthesizers start with a patch number of 0. You can assign a patch name list to each bank. You can also assign a default patch name list to the instrument, which is used for all banks for which you havent assigned a specific list. The previous section describes how to compute the bank numbers to which each patch name list is assigned. You can also assign each bank a special Drum flag, which indicates that all patches in that bank contain drum sounds. If you set this flag, the Graphic window displays drum notes as diamonds, and the Score will use percussion notation.

To See the Assignment of Patch Name Lists to Banks

1. 2. Expand the instrument definition by clicking the + sign next to the instrument name. Expand the Patch Names for Banks folder by clicking the + sign. The list expands to show the bank numbers and the patch name list that is assigned to each bank.
Instrument name The * indicates that this patch list is the default

There are three defined banks This is the name of a patch name list

To Add a Bank or Change the Patch Names for a Bank

1. 2. Drag a patch name list from the Names tree to the Patch Names for Banks folder. Enter a bank number, or enter 1 to indicate that this list of patch names should be used as the default. Overture displays the updated banks and patch name lists. If necessary, Overture adds a new bank to the instrument definition.

Chapter 43: Instrument Assignments and Definitions (PC)

675

Instruments

To Remove a Bank or Patch Name List

1. 2. Highlight the bank and patch names list in the Instrument tree. Press the Del key, or right-click on the bank name and choose Delete from the menu.

To Set or Clear the Drum Flag

1. Right-click on the bank in the Instrument tree, and choose Drums from the menu.

Assigning Note Names

Each patch may have a list of up to 128 names for notes. Usually, note names are labels for percussion instruments. For example, the pitch C3 may really be Kick Drum, and D3 may be Snare. Because a drum machine may provide different drum kits for each patch, Overture lets you specify a different list of note names for each patch. The Graphic window shows you these note names. You can assign a note name list to each patch. You can also assign a default note name list to the instrument, which is used for all patches for which you havent assigned a specific note name list. You can assign each patch a special Drum flag, which indicates that this patch contains drum sounds. If you set this flag, the Graphic window displays drum notes as diamonds, and the Score uses percussion notation. Overture provides several standard note name lists:
Note name list 0..127 Diatonic General MIDI Drums Contents The numbers 0 through 127 The default MIDI note names (like C4, E5, and so on) The default instrument names for the General MIDI drum patch

676

Part VI: MIDI Facilities

To See the Assignment of Note Name Lists to Patches

1. 2. 3. Expand the instrument definition by clicking the + sign next to the instrument name. Expand the Patch Names for Banks folder by clicking the + sign. Continue expanding the tree by clicking the + sign, until the tree is fully expanded.
Instrument name

Bank The * indicates that this note name list is the default This is the name of a note name list

Note name lists are defined for three different patches

To Change the Note Names for a Patch

1. 2. Drag a note name list from the Names tree onto the Note Names for Patches folder. Enter a patch number, or enter 1 to indicate that Overture should use this list of note names as the default. Overture displays the updated patch and note name lists. If necessary, Overture adds a new patch to the instrument definition.

To Remove a Note Name List

1. 2. Highlight the patch in the Instrument tree. Press the Delete key, or right-click the note name list and choose Delete from the menu.

Chapter 43: Instrument Assignments and Definitions (PC)

677

Instruments

To Set or Clear the Drum Flag

Right-click on the patch in the Instrument tree, and choose Drums from the menu.

Assigning Controller Names

Overture lets each instrument have its own list of controller names. There is always exactly one list per instrument.

To See the Controller Name List

Expand the instrument definition by clicking the + sign next to the instrument name.

Instrument name

Controller name list

To Change the Controller Name List

1. 2. In the Names tree, expand the branch containing the Controller name list. Drag the desired name list from the Names tree onto the corresponding branch of the Instrument tree. Overuture displays the updated Controller name list.

678

Part VI: MIDI Facilities

A
Accidental extending to end of measure 128 Accidentals cautionary 133 mouse entry 130 step-entering 389 tools 128 Aftertouch data display 296 to 299 Allotment Table dialog box 410 Allotment Tables auto saving changes 650 editing 411, 514 how used by Overture 411 opening 410 overview 108 selecting default 649 Alto Staff tool 234 Arpeggio inserting 167 notating transcribed notes 600 tool 163 Arrow Cursor 119, 124, 125 Articulations articulating multiple notes 164 deleting 166 deleting w/Delete command 582 inserting 163 Jazz 194 smart editing 164 Articulations button 159 Articulations palette 160 articulating multiple notes 164 basic techniques 163 tool overview 161 As Recorded command 633

As Written command 633 Audio preferences 655 Augmentation dots tools 128 Auto Beam command 624 Auto Correct command 624 Auto Justify command 624 Auto Measures command 625 Auto Rests command 625 Auto Save Changed Libraries option 650 Auto Save Libraries effect on Instruments library 441 Auto Transcribe checkbox 636 Auto Transcribe command 625

B
Banks assigning 674 to 675 assigning patch names to 675 to 676 Bar numerical 71 Bar Text copying 210 editing 210 inserting 209, 216, 217 repositioning 209 using 208, 216 Bar Text tool 208 Bar width changing 106 Baritone Clef tool modern 230 Barline Close Repeat tool 244 deleting 255 Dotted 244 Double Barline tool 244

Index

Index

Fine tool 244 hiding 256 invisible 256 Open Repeat tool 244 Standard Barline tool 244 using dotted barlines 246 Barlines button 243 Barlines palette 243 basic techniques 245 tool overview 244 Barre Settings dialog box 184 Based on Meter command 584 Bass Clef tool 230 8va Bossa 230 Bass on Bottom 345 Bass Staff tool 233 Beam command 583 Beams automatic beaming 624 Based on Meter command 584 Break in Middle command 584 changing angle 101 Controlling Secondary Beaming Groups in Tuplets 587 Creating Groups of Beamed Notes in Tuplets 587 Cross-Bar 586 Cross-Staff 585 deleting w/Delete command 582, 583 editing 101 feathered 587 Hide Tuplet Number 584 Over Rests & Barlines command 584 Primary patterns 544 removing 102 Secondary patterns 545 setting patterns 544 Tremolo commands 584 Beat Charts and the Justify command 568 hiding 105 showing 104, 616 Booklet 458 Bow marks deleting 166 inserting 163 tools 161 Brace tool 234 Bracket tool 234

C
Cautionary accidentals 133 C-Clef moving 232 tool 230 Channel assigning instruments to 667 to 678 Chord Names definition 344 editing Suffix library 420 entering w/Mac keyboard 349 entering w/mouse 346 step-entering w/Mac keyboard 353, 355 step-entering w/MIDI keyboard 398 Chord Positions command 359, 620 Chord Symbol library 413, 436 auto saving changes 650 contents 414, 436 creating chord names w/added bass 422 selecting default 649 uses 413, 436 Chord Symbol Library dialog box 413, 436 miniature keyboard 417 Scrolling library 417 Show Axis checkbox 416 Suffix Elements 415, 437, 439 Chords copying by option-dragging 99 definition 344 entering chord names w/Mac keyboard 349 entering chord names w/mouse 346 MIDI recognition 400 step entering 389 step-entering chord names w/Mac keyboard 353, 355 step-entering chord names w/MIDI keyboard 398 Chords window 343 Bass buttons 345, 356 Chord Name display 346 key equivalents 349, 358 Root buttons 345, 356 Suffix list 345 Chromatic dragging of notes 97 Clear command 463 Clefs 8va Bossa Clef tool 230 Bass Clef tool 230 insertion rules 230 Modern Baritone Clef tool 230 Modern Piccolo Clef tool 230 Modern Treble Clef tool 230

680

Moveable C-Clef tool 230 moving a C-Clef 232 Neutral Clef tools 230 scaling with Scale tool 124 Treble Clef tool 230 Clefs button 229 Clefs palette 229 basic techniques 231 tool overview 230 Close command 407 Coda 557 Composite meters 543 Controllers 295 to 300 adding series of 299 assigning, to instruments 678 data display 299 deleting 300 inserting values 299 pane 296 to 300 Copy command 462 Copy notes by option-dragging 98 Count Off 273 Crescendo 200 creating 200 editing 201, 203 tool 196 Cross-Bar beam 586 Crosshair cursor 109 cross-platform compatible 409 Cross-Staff Barline tool 234 Cross-Staff beam 585 Cursor Arrow 119, 124, 125 Crosshair 109 Drag 109 Eraser 119 Hand 77 I-Beam 109 locating in Graphic window 304 locating with BarBeatUnit display 304 pitch in Graphic window 305 quantizing in Graphic window 306 Scale 121 types in Score window 109 Cursor Position display BarBeatUnit meanings 304 Cut command 462

D
D.C. al Coda 557

D.C. al Fine 557 D.S. al Coda 557 D.S. al Fine 558 Decrease Systems command 481 Decrescendo 200 creating 200 editing 201, 203 tool 196 DefaultFile 89 Delete command 489, 529, 582 Delete Measure dialog box 529 Delete Page command 470 Delete Page dialog box 470 Delete Track 489 Diatonic dragging of notes 97 Direction command 594 Display on Next Staff command 597 Display on Prev Staff command 596 Documentation conventions 4 reference manual 3 Dotted Barline tool 244 Dotted barlines using 246 Drag cursor 109 Drag Notes Chromatically option 641 Draw Hollywood Lines 548 Drawing MIDI controller data 339 Drum Map auto saving changes 650 creating 429 editing 429 Instruments library 444 note names 431 notehead assignments 430 opening 426 selecting default 649 staff position assignments 430 Drum Map dialog box 426 Head column 427 Name column 428 Pitch column 427 Position column 428 Drum tracks 497 Drums Button 187 Drums Palette 188 articulation 191 rudiment 190 tool overview 188 Duplicate Previous option 378 Duplicate Previous to End option 378

Index

681

Index

Dynamics default volume controller 653 Edit Dynamic dialog box 203, 204, 205, 593 editing position 198 inserting 196 MIDI playback 199 scaling with Scale tool 124 tools 196 Dynamics button 195 Dynamics palette 195 crescendo 200 decrescendo 200 tool overview 196

E
Edit Dynamic dialog box 203, 204, 205, 593 Edit Expression dialog box 221 Appearance section 221 Playback section 222 Edit Library command 409 Edit menu Clear command 463 Copy command 462 Cut command 462 Make Invisible command 466 Make Visible command 466, 467 Merge command 463 Paste command 462 Paste Special command 463 Select All command 465 Undo command 462 Editing adding to MIDI data value (Graphic window) 336 adding to MIDI data value (Modify Notes dialog) 577 Allotment Tables 411, 514 bar text 209 barlines 245 beams 101 Beat Charts 104 C-clefs 232 chord names 420 Chord Symbol Library 420 clefs 231 Drum Maps 429 dynamic positions 198 glissandos 141, 146 hairpins (crescendos) 201, 203 hearing notes when dragging 651 limiting MIDI data value (Graphic window) 337

limiting MIDI data value (Modify Notes dialog) 577 MIDI data in Modify Notes dialog 575 MIDI note duration in Graphic window 314 MIDI note pitch in Graphic window 314 MIDI playback duration (Graphic window) 338 MIDI playback duration (Modify Notes dialog) 576 notes (pitch or position) 97 page text 214 rehearsal marks 213 rests 102 scaling MIDI data (Graphic window) 335 scaling MIDI data (Modify Notes dialog) 577 slurs 139 staves 234 stems 99 symbols (general) 97 system text 211 tempo 555 thinning MIDI data 338 ties 138 tremolo beams 585 trills 152 tuplets 142 velocity (Modify Notes dialog) 576 Encore 448 Endings Final Endings tool 244 First Endings tool 244 Set Ending dialog box 250 using the Ending tools 249 Engraver preferences 644 Enharmonic command 594 Entering Guitar Frames with the Mouse 356 Entering notes. See Notes (entering) Eraser cursor 119 Events selecting controller 298 Export command 453 Expressions Edit Expression dialog box 221 palette 220 Expressions button 219 Expressions palette 219 Extract Parts by voice 454 naming 456 Extract Parts command 453 Extract Parts dialog box 454 Split field 454

682

F
Feathered beam 587 Fermata deleting 166 inserting 163 tools 163 File menu Close command 407 Edit Library command 409 Export command 453 Extract Parts command 453 Load Library command 448 New command 406 Open command 407 Page Setup command 457 Print command 458 Quit command 459 Revert command 409 Save As command 408 Save command 408 Files instrument definitions 669 Fill in Rests command 568 Fine ending playback at 557 tool 244 Fingerings deleting 149 entering w/Fingering tools 148 tools 148 Fit in Window zoom level 73 Flip command 593 Flip Direction command 594 Flip Enharmonic command 594 Font Chord Suffix elements 416 Chord Symbol accidentals 418 Chord Symbol roots 418 codas, segnos, etc. 558 endings 250 Measure numbers 563 preferences 647 selecting default fonts 647 Tempo markings 554 Track names 492 Font menu 217 Force Accidentals to Flats option 378 Force Accidentals to Sharps option 377 Force Stems Down option 377 Force Stems Up option 377 Fret

tools 176

G
General preferences 641 Glissando commands 592 Glissandos creating w/Glissando tool 137 editing 141, 146 straight tool 136 wavy tool 136 Gospel notation tools 172 Grace note entering 133 tool 128 Graphic 289 Graphic window 301 Cursor Position display 304 I-Beam tool 313 inserting notes 321 Marquee tool 313 MIDI Instrument button 312 Mute button 312 Pencil tool 321 Piano Roll (MAC) 303 Piano Roll (PC) 290 Solo button 312 viewing cursor pitch 305 viewing different tracks 302 Zoom to Fit button 310 Graphics button 225 Graphics palette 225 Group Glissando - command 592 Glissando ~ command 592 Slur command 589 Tie command 588 Group command 588 Groups button 135 Groups palette 135 basic techniques 137 Harp Pedal Setting dialog box 144 Harp pedal symbol 136 mixed duration tuplets 143 nested tuplets 142 tool overview 135 tuplets 142 Guitar 345 Tablature 609 Guitar button 181 Guitar Frames 355 Guitar palette

Index

683

Index

barre at fret number marking 184 Barre Settings dialog box 184 String bend 182

H
Hairpin creating 200 default volume controller 653 editing 201, 203 playback 205 tools 196 Hand cursor 77 Handles 617 Harmonics deleting 166 inserting 163 tools 161 Harp Pedal Settings dialog box 144 Harp pedal symbol 136 Hide Stem command 595 Hide/Show Staves command 485 Hold Timing 119 Hollywood Lines 548 Horizontal Pages view option 76

I
I-Beam cursor 109 Import File dialog box 449, 457 Importing abbreviations for track names 451 clef 452 Encore and MusicTime Files 452 markers 451 MIDI files 448, 452 Optimize Staves 451 percussive clef 450, 452 Remap Unknown Devices 451 templates 450 in real-time 273 In Swing command 633 Incorrect Rhythms command 617 Increase System command 478 Insert command 488, 528 Insert Measure dialog box 488, 528 Insert Ottava dialog box 145 Insert Page command 470 Insert Page dialog box 470 Insert Track 488 Insert window 321

Duration parameters 323 Size parameters 322 Velocity numerical 325 Instrument assigning type to Track 492 finding range errors 617 naming 495 range setting 495 selecting for tracks (Graphic window) 312 selecting for tracks (Tracks window) 283 setting MIDI Thru Instrument 271 showing name in score 491 transposing 503 Instrument definitions creating 670 to 678 files 669 importing 669 name lists 672 to 673 saving 672 Instruments assigning, to ports 667 to 678 bank assignments 674 to 675 defining 670 to 678 deleting 672 patch names for 675 to 676 Instruments library 440 abbreviation 443 Clear instruments 443 Delete instrument 443 Device 445 Drum Map 444 editing 441 General MIDI equivalent 444 GM Instruments 440 High field 445 Insert instrument 443 Low field 445 name 443 Orchestral Instruments 440 Patch 445 re-arranging instruments 445 Resolving device conflicts 447 Saving and naming 442 Transpose 445 Voices field 445 Invisible noteheads 172 Invisible symbols 466

J
Jazz Articulations palette 194 Justify locking measures 108

684

Justify command 568

K
Key signature cancelling previous keys 537 setting 535 Keyboard controllers 295 Keyboard Thru command 626

L
Layout Page command 471 Layout Page dialog box 471 Library Allotment Table 410 auto saving changes 650 Chord Symbols 413, 436 Drum Map 426 loading 448 selecting default libraries 649 Library preferences 649 Load Library command 448 Loading VST instruments 655 Locking Measures 108 Lyric Positions command 371, 621 Lyrics adding more lyrics to a score 366 adding verses 369 changing fonts 370 creating the first lyric 364 flowing from middle of measure 369 melisma 368 moving 370 multi-note syllables 368 multi-syllable words 367 multi-words on a single note 363, 368 Lyrics window Button bar 363 Lyric Editing area 364 Lyric List 362, 363 Measure column 363 Name column 363, 364 using 364 Verse column 363 Voice column 363

M
Make Invisible command 466

Make Visible command 466, 467 Manual conventions 4 reference manual 3 Manual Duplex Printing 458 Marcato deleting 166 inserting 163 tools 161 Margin setting 473 showing 617 Markers 451 Measure activating first in track 72 activating last in track 72 automatic width adjustment 513 decreasing number in system 532, 534 default number per System 471, 646 deleting 489, 529 filling with rests 568 increasing number in system 530 inserting 488, 528 justifying 568 key signature 535 meter 541 multi-measure rests 565 numbering 559 rebarring 564 tempo 550 Measure numbers 559 enclosures 561 measure interval 561 positioning 560 Set Measure Number dialog box 561 text of 562 Measures Locking 108 Measures menu Delete command 489, 529 Fill in Rests command 568 Insert command 488, 528 Justify command 568 Multi Measure Rest command 565 Rebar command 564 Set Key command 535 Set Meter command 541 Set Numbers command 559 Set Repeats command 556 Set Tempo command 550 Wrap Left command 530 Wrap Right command 532, 534 Melisma 368

Index

685

Index

Menu Edit 461 File 405 Font 217 Measures 527 Notes 571 Options 615 overview 11 Score 469 Size 217 Style 217 Windows 659 Menus Options 119 Merge command 463 Meter beam patterns 544 composite meters 543 finding incorrect rhythms 617 setting 541 setting number of pulses 542 showing before system breaks 546 Metric measurement units 473 Metronome command 630 Click in Countoff Only 631 Click in Play 631 Click in Record 631 Metronome Sound 631 Metronome Sound dialog box 631 Middle C Middle C is C4 option 643 naming 643 MIDI adding to data value (Graphic window) 336 adding to data value (Modify Notes dialog) 577 chord recognition 400 controller data display 329 creating Legato playback (Graphic window) 338 creating Legato playback (Modify Notes dialog) 577 display/edit non-note data 326 drawing controller data 339 key aftertouch 296 limiting data value (Graphic window) 337 limiting data value (Modify Notes dialog) 577 modifying notes 575 muting a track (Graphic window) 312 muting a track (Tracks window) 286 note velocities 296 Piano Roll display (MAC) 303 Piano Roll display (PC) 290

pitch wheel 296 pitch-bend 296 Play buttons 268 randomizing MIDI values 340 Record button 268 recording in real-time 273 remapping unknown devices 641 scaling data (Graphic window) 335 scaling data (Modify Notes dialog) 577 selecting notes w/I-Beam tool 318 selecting notes w/Marquee tool 316 selecting playback device for tracks (Graphic window) 312 selecting playback device for tracks (Tracks window) 283 soloing a track (Graphic window) 312 soloing a track (Tracks window) 286 step entering notes 391 Stop button 268 tempo 516, 517, 535, 541, 551 thinning data 338 Thru Instrument 271 thruing 626 transcription of MIDI data 606 transposition defaults 285 volume level defaults 285 MIDI file importing 448, 452 MIDI Through Follows Tracks option 651 Mixed Duration Tuplets 143 Modify Notes command 575 Modify Notes dialog box 575 Mordents creating 148 deleting 149 insertion tutorial 156 playback 157 Set Mordent/Turn dialog box 157 tools 148 Move to Next Track command 599 Move to Prev Track command 598 Multi Measure Rest command 565 Multi Measure Rest dialog box 565 Multi-Bar Rests checkbox 455 Music adding character to 295 MusicTime 448

N
Nested Tuplets 142 Neutral Clef tools 230

686

New command 406 New Score dialog 406 Next page button 71 Normal 458 Notate Notes As command 600 Arpeggio 600 Staccato 601 Swing Eights 602 Trill 603 Triplet 604 Turn 604, 605 Note names 643 drum mode 294 of patches 676 to 678 Note velocity displaying 296 Noteheads changing types 173 invisible 172 percussive 172 picture music 172 rhythmic 172 rhythmic slash 172 slashes 172 standard 172 Noteheads button 171 Noteheads palette 171 basic techniques 173 tool overview 172 Notes adjusting spacing 103 and Allotment Tables 108 auto positioning 107 changing properties of 293 changing value 98, 134 chromatic vs. diatonic dragging 641 converting to raw MIDI data 608 copying by option-dragging 98 deleting 119 displaying on other staves 596, 597 dragging to change spacing 104 drum mode 294 duplicating 98 editing 292 editing (pitch or position) 97 entering 129 to 133, 384 to 394 erasing 294 hearing while editing 651 Hold Timing 119 inserting in Graphic window 321 justifying 107 Mac keyboard & mouse entry w/palette 131

mouse entry w/palette 129 moving 293 moving chromatically 97 moving diatonically 97 moving to other tracks 598, 599 nudging to change pitch 98 nudging to change spacing 104 recalculating layout 108 removing 98 scaling with Scale tool 123 selecting 291 selecting and editing 290 to 294 spacing and bar width 106 spacing automatically 107, 624 spacing with Beat Charts 104 step entering w/Mac keyboard 384 step entering w/MIDI keyboard 391 timing 119 tools 128 transcribing automatically 625, 636 with attached articulations 164 Notes button 127 Notes Menu Notes to Tablature 609 Stem Height 596 Tablature Settings dialog box 610 Notes menu Beam command 583 Delete command 582 Display on Next Staff command 597 Display on Prev Staff command 596 Flip command 593 Group command 588 Modify Notes command 575 Move to Next Track command 599 Move to Prev Track command 598 Notate Notes As command 600 Notes to Raw command 608 Raw to Notes command 606 Set to Voice command 612, 613 Stem command 595 Transpose command 572 Notes palette 127 keyboard equivalents 131 tool overview 128 Notes to Raw command 608 Notes to Tablature 609 Numerical definition 9 editing 9

Index

687

Index

O
Octaves shifting in step-entry 388 Opaque text 217 Open command 407 Optimize Staves when importing 451 Options Menu Hold Timing 119 Options menu Auto Beam command 624 Auto Correct command 624 Auto Justify command 624 Auto Rests command 625 Auto Transcribe command 625 Auto Wrap Measures command 625 Instruments command 639 Keyboard Thru command 626 Metronome command 630 Play Style command 633 Preferences command 640, 653 Record Options command 634 Show Chord Positions 359 Show command 616 Show Lyric Positions 371 Ornaments deleting 149 deleting w/Delete command 582 inserting 148 ornamenting multiple notes 149 Ornaments button 147 Ornaments palette 147 basic techniques 148 tool overview 148 Over Rests & Barlines command 584

P
Page deleting 470 dimensioning 472 inserting 470 layout 471 turning 71 turning to first 72 turning to last 72 Page Dimensions command 472 Page Dimensions dialog box 473 Use Tiles checkbox 474 Page numerical 71 Page Setup command 457

Page Text copying 215 editing 215 inserting 214 repositioning 214 using 214 Page Text tool 208 Page View options Horizontal Pages 76 Single Page 75 Vertical Pages 76 Palette buttons overview 114 pop-up menus 115 Palettes Articulations 160 Barlines 243 Clefs 229 definition 9 Dynamics 195 Expressions 219, 220 Graphics 225 Groups 135 horizontal vs. vertical 116 Jazz Articulations 194 Noteheads 171 Notes 127 Ornaments 147 Staves 233 Tablature 175 tearing off 116 Text 207 Part extracted clef setting 496 extracted pitch setting 496 extracting 453 Parts extracting by voice 454 Paste command 462 Paste Special command 463 Paste vs. Paste Special 463 Patch assigning note names to 676 to 678 names 675 to 676 Pause inserting 169 tools 162 Pedal mark deleting 166 inserting 163 tools 162 Percent zoom level 73

688

Percussion drum mode 294 noteheads 172 Percussive Staff tool 234 Percussive tracks 497 Piano Roll (MAC) editing notes in 313 to 325 overview 303 Piano Roll (PC) editing notes in 290 to 295 overview 290 Piano Staff tool 234 Piano/Melody Staff tool 234 Piccolo Clef tool modern 230 Pickups 547 Picture music tools 172 Pitch selecting 291 Pitch wheel 296 Play button 268 Play Entire Chord While Dragging option 652 Play from Beginning button 268 Play Notes While Inserting/Dragging option 651 Play Style command 633 As Recorded 633 As Written 633 in Swing 633 Repeats 634 Playback disable symbol playback 466 enable symbol playback 466, 467 Playback preferences 651 Plus deleting 166 inserting 163 tool 161 Ports assigning instruments to 668 Preferences engraver 644 font 647 general 641 library 649 playback 651 types 640 Preferences command 640, 653 Preferences dialog box 640, 653 Previous page button 71 Primary beams 544 Print

2-Up 458 order of tiled pages 477 page dimensioning 472 page layout 471 Print command 458 Pulses 542 Punch points 269 manually setting 270 setting by playing 271 using the cursor 270 Punch Recording 269 Historical origins 269 setting Punch points 269

Q
Quantize cursor movements in Graphic window 306 transcription 259 transcription of imported seq files 450 Quantize Cursor On/Off button 307 Quantize Cursor Value button 307 Quit command 459

R
Range Errors command 617 Raw to Notes command 606 Real time recording 273 Rebar command 564 Recalc Layout command 513 Record button 268 Record filters 637 Record Options command 634 Recording 273 by "drawing" notes in Graphic window 321 by entering notes with a mouse 129 by entering notes with the mouse & Mac keyboard 131 Count Off 273 Punch recording 269 step recording 375 Recording audio 656 Redraw Page command 514 Rehearsal Mark tool 208 Rehearsal Marks editing 213 inserting 212 repositioning 213 using 212 Remap Unknow Devices option 641

Index

689

Index

Remap Unknown Devices 444, 451, 511 Repeat Double Measure Repeat tool 244 Single Measure Repeat tool 244 tools 244 using open & close repeats 247 using Sngl & Dbl Repeats 246 Repeats command 634 Respace Staves command 84, 512 Respace Staves dialog box 512 All remaining pages 512 Avoid collisions 512 Fill to bottom of page 512 Rests editing 102 filling measure with 568 mouse entry 130 multi-measure 565 nudging 103 removing 103 step entering w/Mac keyboard 387 step entering w/MIDI keyboard 391 tools 128 Revert command 409 Rhythm noteheads 172 Roland gear 669 RPNs (Registered Parameter Numbers) data display 299

S
Save As command 408 Save command 408 Scale cursor 121 Score menu Decrease Systems command 481 Delete Page command 470 Hide/Show Staves command 485 Increase System command 478 Insert Page command 470 Layout Page command 471 Page Dimensions command 472 Recalc Layout command 513 Redraw Page command 514 Respace Staves command 512 Setup Track command 490 Score window Bar numerical 71 cursors 109 overview 69 Page numerical 71 page view controls 70

redrawing 514 scrolling 77 selecting between 664 turning pages 71 Zoom Level pop-up menu 72 Scrub tool 294 locating bad note with 291 Secondary beams 545 Segno 557 Select All command 465 Selecting all MIDI data (including non-note) in a time range 320 all symbols in discontiguous measures 94 all symbols in measure 93 all symbols in staff 94 contiguous symbols 92 discontiguous symbols 91 MIDI notes w/I-Beam tool 318 MIDI notes w/Marquee tool 316 notation symbols 89 notes in a pitch range (Graphic window) 315 notes in a time range (Graphic window) 319 notes of the same pitch (Graphic window) 315 symbols in entire track 95 symbols on different staves 95 voice 96 Set Ending dialog box 250 Set Key command 535 Set Key dialog box arrow keys 536 Set Measure Number dialog box 561 Set Meter command 541 Set Mordent/Turn dialog box 157 Set Numbers command 559 Set Repeats command 556 Set Tempo command 550 Set Tempo dialog box 516, 550 Set to Voice command 612, 613 Set Trill dialog box 155 Setting the VST Folder 657 Setup Track command 490 Setup Track dialog box 490 C3 Offset numerical 496 Instrument options 492 naming tracks 491 opening from Tracks window 288 option key to set attributes 511 Show Abbreviation 443 Show Name 443 Staff options 500 Starting Clef menu 496

690

Transposed Clef pop-up 496 Sforzando deleting 166 inserting 163 tools 161 Show Axis checkbox 416 Show Chord Positions command 359 Show command 616 Beat Chart 616 Chord Positions 359, 620 Handles 617 Incorrect Rhythms 617 Invisibles 617 Lyric Positions 371, 621 Margin 617 Range Errors 617 Tracks Transposed 618, 619 Show Lyric Positions command 371 Show Stem command 595 Single Page view option 75 Size menu 217 Slash open & closed 172 rhythmic 172 step entering 395 step entering rhythmic slash 397 Slur command 589 Slur tools 135 Slurs creating w/Slur tool 137 editing 139 flipping 140 Space between staves numerical 644 Space between systems numerical 644, 645 Staccatissimo deleting 166 inserting 163 tool 161 Staccato deleting 166 inserting 163 notating transcribed notes 601 tool 161 Staff adding to a score 234 Alto Staff tool 234 arranging 78 Bass Staff tool 233 Brace tool 234 Bracket tool 234 choosing what to show 500 Cross-Staff Barline tool 234

default spacing 644 definition 6 grouping 238 hiding 485 indenting 87 moving horizontally 86 moving vertically 78 Percussive Staff tool 234 Piano Staff tool 234 Piano/Melody Staff tool 234 placing side-by-side 88 removing from a score 238 respacing 84, 512 scaling throughout score 500 scaling with Scale tool 122 setting number of lines 500 showing 485 space between staves 644 space between systems 644, 645 System tool 234 Tablature Staff tool 234 Tenor Staff tool 233 Treble Staff tool 233 Stationery pads 407 Staves button 233 Staves palette 233 basic techniques 234 tool overview 233 Stem command 595 Stem Down command 595 Stem Height dialog box 596 Stem Up command 595 Stems assigning direction to voices 282 changing direction 100, 595 changing length 99 editing 99 hiding 100, 595 setting height 596 showing 100, 595 Step Entering Accidentals 389 Chord Names w/Mac keyboard 353, 355 Chord Names w/MIDI keyboard 398 Chords 389 notes & rests w/Mac keyboard 384 notes & rests w/MIDI keyboard 391 rhythmic slashes 397 slashes 395 stepping through a score 390 Tied Notes 389 Step Input Duration Constant 382

Index

691

Index

Constant Gap 382 Percent 383 Step Input options Duplicate Previous 378 Duplicate Previous to End 378 Force Accidentals to Flats 378 Force Accidentals to Sharps 377 Force Stems Down 377 Force Stems Up 377 Tie Previous Two Notes 378 Step Input Velocity As Played 384 Constant 384 Step Input window 375 Counter 378 Duration area 381 Input Select button 376 key equivalents 391 Note Size 379 Note Size key equivalents 380 Options menu 377 Pitch Indicator 379 Tuplet checkbox 380 Type area 376 Velocity area 383 Stop button 268 Strip Chart Add Amount tool 336 density setting 334 drawing data 332 drawing shapes 339 Flat line drawing tool 340 Freehand drawing tool 339 hiding/showing 330 I-Beam tool 331 Legato tool 338 Maximum Limit tool 337 Minimum Limit tool 337 opening 326 overview 326 Parabola drawing tool 339 Pencil tool 332 Randomize tool 340 Scale tool 335 selecting controller data 329 selecting data 331 selecting data to view 328 Straight line drawing tool 339 Thin tool 338 variable tool 335 Strip Chart Pencil Tool 334 Style menu 217 Suffix button 356

Swing Time notating transcribed notes 602 playing in swing time 633 Symbol definition 6 duplicating 98 editing 97 selecting 89 selecting all in discontiguous measures 94 selecting all in measure 93 selecting all in staff 94 selecting contiguous 92 selecting discontiguous 91 selecting entire track 95 selecting on different staves 95 System arranging 78 default number on page 471, 646 definition 8 putting fewer on a page 481 putting more on a page 478 System Text copying 211 editing 212 inserting 211 repositioning 211 using 210 System Text tool 208 System tool 234

T
Tablature dialog box 610 notating 176 tools 176 tracks 499 Tablature button 175 Tablature palette 175 basic techniques 176 tool overview 176 Tablature Settings dialog box 610 Capo on Fret 610 Fret Position 610 Glissandos, Slurs, Ties option 611 Tuning 610 Tablature Staff tool 234 Technical support 12 Templates 407 Tempo display options 155, 157, 517, 551 editing 555

692

MIDI playback 516, 517, 535, 541, 551 setting 550 Tenor Staff tool 233 Tenuto deleting 166 inserting 163 tool 161 Text Bar Text tool 208 opaque 217 Page Text tool 208 Rehearsal Mark tool 208 System Text tool 208 transparent 217 using bar text 208, 216 using page text 214 using rehearsal marks 212 using system text 210 Text button 207 Text Only check box 356 Text palette 207 tool overview 208 The 289, 290 Thru Instrument 271 Tie auto-ties over barlines 390 creating w/Tie tool 137 editing 138 flipping 139 step-entering 389 tools 136 Tie command 588 Tie Previous Two Notes option 378 To 290 To Coda 557 Tool 8va Bossa Clef 230 accidentals 128 Alto Staff 234 Arpeggio 163 augmentation dots 128 Bass Clef 230 Bass Staff 233 Bow marks 161 Brace 234 Bracket 234 Close Repeat 244 Cross-Staff Barline 234 definition 8 Dotted Barline 244 Double Barline 244 Double Measure Repeat 244

dynamics 196 Eraser 119 Fermata 163 Final Endings 244 Fine 244 fingerings 148 First Endings 244 frets 176 Grace Note 128 Hairpins 196 Harmonics 161 invisible notehead 172 Marcato 161 Modern Baritone Clef 230 Modern Piccolo Clef 230 Modern Treble Clef 230 mordents 148 Moveable C-Clef 230 Neutral Clefs 230 notes 128 Open Repeat 244 Pause 162 Pedal mark 162 percussive notehead 172 Percussive Staff 234 Piano Staff 234 Piano/Melody Staff 234 picture noteheads 172 Plus 161 rests 128 rhythm noteheads 172 rhythmic slash head 172 Scale 121 Sforzando 161 Single Measure Repeat 244 Slash noteheads 172 Slur 135 Staccatissimo 161 Staccato 161 Standard Barline 244 Standard Notehead 172 Straight glissando 136 System 234 Tablature 176 Tablature Staff 234 Tenor Staff 233 Tenuto 161 Text 208 Tie 136 Treble Clef 230 Treble Staff 233 Tremolo 161 trills 148 Tuplet (new) 136

Index

693

Index

Tuplet (reapply) 136 tuplets 128 Turn 148 Wavy glissando 136 Tool Bar Arrow cursor button 119, 124, 125 Articulations button 159 Barlines button 243 Clefs button 229 Dynamics button 195 Eraser button 119 Expressions button 219 Expressions palette 220 Graphics button 225 Groups button 135 Guitar button 181 Jazz Articulations palette 194 Noteheads button 171 Notes button 127 Ornaments button 147 overview 113 palette button overview 114 pop-up menus 115 Scale button 121 Staves button 233 Tablature button 175 Text button 207 Transcription Quantize Amount button 259 Tracks abbreviated names 491 abbreviation 443 definition 7 displaying MIDI data in Piano Roll 290 displaying MIDI data in Piano Roll (MAC) 303 drum 497 MIDI playback devices (Graphic window) 312 MIDI playback devices (Tracks window) 283 MIDI volume defaults 285 moving notes between 598, 599 muting (Graphic window) 312 muting (Tracks window) 286 name 443 naming 491 percussive 497 rearranging 286 selecting all notes 95 setting number of voices 281 setup dialog box 490 showing name in score 491 showing transposed tracks 618, 619 soloing (Graphic window) 312 soloing (Tracks window) 286

Tablature 499 transposing 285 viewing in Graphic window 302 Tracks window 279 Device column 283 Mute column 286 overview 280 rearranging tracks 286 Solo column 286 Stem column 282 Transpose column 285 Voices column 280 Volume column 285 Transcription correcting for swing time notation errors 602 fixing quantize mistakes 262 notating arpeggios 600 notating staccato notes 601 notating trills 603 notating triplets 604 notating turns 604, 605 quantizing 259 Transcription Quantize Amount button 259 Transparent text 217 Transport controls 267 Transport window 267 Transpose command 572 Transpose dialog box 572 Transposing in Graphic window 314 to match new key signature 536 with Transpose command 572 Treble Clef tool 230 modern 230 Treble Staff tool 233 Tremolo beams 584 inserting bowed tremolos 167 modifying beams 585 tools 161 Trills adding a trill section 150 adding accidentals 153 adding mark to score 150 deleting 149 editing 152 making invisible 466 notating transcribed notes 603 playback 155 Set Trill dialog box 155 tools 148 Tuning button 356

694

Tuplets complex 142 correcting transcription errors 604 creating with Tuplet tool 137 editing 142 hiding number over beam 584 in Step Input 380 mixed duration 143 tool (new) 136 tool (reapply) 136 tools 128 Tuplets dialog box 591 Turn creating 148 deleting 149 making invisible 466 notating transcribed notes 604, 605 playback 157 Set Mordent/Turn dialog box 157 tool 148

W
Window Chords 343 Graphic 301 Insert 321 overview of types 9 Score 69 Step Input 375 Tool Bar 113 Tracks 279 Transport 267 Windows menu active Score windows 664 Arrange Icons command 664 Cascade command 662 Chords command 660 Graphic command 660 Lyrics command 661 Open Score windows 664 Step Input command 661 Tile Horizontally command 663 Tile Vertically command 664 Tool Bar command 659 Tracks command 660 Transport command 660 Wrap Left command 530 Wrap Right command 532, 534

U
Undo command 462 Use 659 Use Tiles checkbox 474

V
Velocity data display 296 Verse creating additional verses 369 Vertical Pages view option 76 Voice active 96 assigning in tracks 280 definition 7 inactive 96 making invisible 465, 466 pop-up menu 96 selecting 96, 612, 613 setting number per track 281 setting stem direction 282 Volume Controller Number 653 VST Menu 655 Audio Preferences 655 Instrument Rack 655 Record to File 656 Set Folder 657

X
X% Zoom Level 73

Y
Yamaha gear 669

Z
Zoom In button 308 Zoom In command 73 Zoom Level 100% 73 Fit in Window 73 Percentage 73 X% 73 Zoom In 73 Zoom Out 73 Zoom Level pop-up menu 72 Zoom Out button 309 Zoom Out command 73 Zooming

Index

695

Index

in Graphic window 308 in Score window 72 selected area in Score window 73 to fit in Graphic window 310

Index

696

Index

GENIESOFT, INC. LICENSE AGREEMENT

YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ ALL OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT. INSTALLING AND USING THE PRODUCT INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THEM, YOU SHOULD PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. In consideration of payment of the license fee, GenieSoft Inc., ("GenieSoft" or the "Licensor") grants to you, the Licensee, a nonexclusive license to have one person use the enclosed GenieSoft software product (the "Product") on one personal computer at a time. If you want to use the Product on more than one personal computer at a time, or if you want to network the Product, you must obtain separate licenses from GenieSoft by calling (843) 832-2365. This license does not grant you any right to any enhancement or update to the Product. Enhancements and updates, if available, may be obtained by you at GenieSofts then current standard pricing, terms and conditions. 2. OWNERSHIP OF THE PRODUCT. Portions of the Product incorporate certain material proprietary to third parties. GenieSoft and licensors of GenieSoft own and will retain all title, copyright, trademark and other proprietary rights in and to the Product. This License is NOT a sale of the Product or any copy of it. You, the Licensee, obtain only such rights as are provided in this Agreement. You understand and agree as follows: 2.1. You may NOT make any copies of all or any part of the Product except for archival copies of the computer software components of the Product as permitted by law, 2.2. You may NOT reverse compile, reverse assemble, reverse engineer, modify, incorporate in whole or in part in any other product or create derivative works based on all or any part of the Product. 2.3. You may NOT remove any copyright, trademark, proprietary rights, disclaimer or warning notice included on or embedded in any part of the Product. 2.4. You may NOT transfer the Product unless you permanently transfer the entire Product (including all components and archival copies, if any), and the person to whom the Product is transferred is informed of and agrees to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. 2.5 You may not use the documentation for any purpose other than to support your use of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. 2.6 You may not perform engineering analyses of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, including performance analyses, or benchmark analyses, without the written permission of GenieSoft. 3. CONTENT RESTRICTIONS. Unless specified elsewhere in your product package, the following restrictions apply to all digitally recorded sounds, MIDI or GenieSoft-format song files or rhythm patterns, and printed or digitally reproduced sheet music contained in the product package (the content): All content is protected by copyright and owned by GenieSoft or other parties that have licensed these works to GenieSoft. Any duplication, adaptation, or arrangement of the content without written consent of the owner is an infringement of U.S. or foreign copyright law and subject to the penalties and liabilities provided therein. You may not synchronize the content with any videotape or film, or print the content in the form of standard music notation, without the express written permission of the copyright owner. The content may not be used for broadcast or transmission of any kind. You may not resell or redistribute the content as is (i.e., stand alone) in any way, including for use in sampling or sample playback units, or in any sound library product, or in any radio or television broadcast, soundtrack, film or other commercial product in any media, whether the works remain in their original form or are reformatted, mixed, filtered, re-synthesized or otherwise edited. 4. LICENSEE'S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR SELECTION AND USE OF THE PRODUCT. GenieSoft hopes the Product will be useful to your business or personal endeavors. HOWEVER, GENEISOFT DOES NOT WARRANT THE OPERATION OF THE PRODUCT OR THE ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THE PRODUCT. You, and not GenieSoft, are responsible for all uses of the Product. 5. WARRANTY. 5.1. Limited Warranty. Subject to the other provisions in Articles 4 and 5 of this Agreement, GenieSoft warrants to you, the original licensee, that the media on which the Product is recorded will be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use for a period of thirty (30) days from purchase, and that the Product will perform substantially in accordance with the user guide for a period of thirty (30) days from purchase. GenieSoft's sole responsibility under this warranty will be, at its option, (1) to use reasonable efforts to correct any defects that are reported to it within the foregoing warranty period or (2) to refund the full purchase price. GenieSoft does not warrant that the Product will be error free, nor that all program errors will be corrected. In addition, GenieSoft makes no warranties if the failure of the Product results from accident, abuse or misapplication. Outside the United States, these remedies are not available without proof of purchase from an authorized international source. All requests for warranty assistance shall be directed to GenieSoft at the following address: GenieSoft, Inc. P.O. Box 1803 Mt. Pleasant, SC 29465 U.S.A. 843-856-1088 5.2. Limitations on Warranties. THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH IN THIS ARTICLE 4 IS THE ONLY WARRANTY GIVEN BY GENIESOFT WITH RESPECT TO THE ENTIRE PRODUCT; GENIESOFT MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES,

EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR ARISING BY CUSTOM OR TRADE USAGE, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. GENIESOFT SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT NOR FOR ANY LIABILITY TO ANY OTHER PARTY ARISING OUT OF USE OF THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. 6. LIMITATIONS ON REMEDIES. GenieSoft's liability in contract, tort or otherwise arising in connection with the Product shall not exceed the purchase price of the Product. IN NO EVENT SHALL GENIESOFT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, TORT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS OR LOSS OF BUSINESS) ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT, EVEN IF GENIESOFT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 7. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. If you are a government agency, you acknowledge that the Product was developed at private expense and that the computer software component is provided to you subject to RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The rights of the government regarding its use, duplication, reproduction or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, and (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software -- Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19. Contractor is GenieSoft, Inc. 8. TERMINATION. This License Agreement will terminate immediately if you breach any of its terms. Upon termination, you will be required promptly to return to GenieSoft or to destroy all copies of the Product covered by this License Agreement. 9. MISCELLANEOUS. 9.1. Governing Law. The terms of this License shall be construed in accordance with the substantive laws of the United States and/or South Carolina, U.S.A. 9.2. No Waiver. The failure of either party to enforce any rights granted hereunder or to take any action against the other party in the event of any breach hereunder shall not be deemed a waiver by that party as to subsequent enforcement of rights or subsequent actions in the event of future breaches. 9.3. Litigation Expenses. If any action is brought by either party to this Agreement against the other party regarding the subject matter hereof, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover, in addition to any other relief granted, reasonable attorneys' fees and litigation expenses. 9.4. Unenforceable Terms. Should any term of this License Agreement be declared void or unenforceable by any court of competent jurisdiction, such declaration shall have no effect on the remaining terms hereof. 9.5.Certain components of this software are the property of Progressive Networks and its suppliers. You are not allowed to distribute these DLLs to others. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT IT IS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND GENIESOFT WHICH SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSALS, OR PRIOR AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, AND ANY OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN YOU AND GENIESOFT RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.